Home

Yamaha AW2400 Musical Instrument User Manual

1. I O card I O SLOT OMNI OUT jacks OJ LS W I EE a SE Effect processor INSERT I O jacks MIC LINE INPUT jacks Ss Boo BOJ EE Hie 5 oo Effect processor Microphones Synthesizer AW2400 Owner s Manual 37 Turning the power on off Turning the power on off Follow the procedure outlined below when turning the AW2400 power ON and OFF Failure to fol low this procedure can result in damage to the internal hard disk or your external monitor system E Turning the power on In a system that includes the AW2400 turn the power to each device on in the following order 1 External devices such as audio sources and effect processors connected to the input output jacks of the AW2400 2 The AW2400 itself 3 The monitor system connected to the AW2400 s out put jacks dnjas pue uoloe8uu0yg A Ab CAUTION e Before you turn on the power make sure that the power cord is securely connected to the AW2400 and to the AC outlet If the power is disconnected while the AW2400 is in use the AW2400 or it s internal hard disk may be damaged When you turn on the AW240
2. EQ Dynamics Processor Library Operation E Recalling Compressor Library Settings From this library you can recall compressor settings to the currently selected channel Of library numbers 001 128 numbers 001 036 are read only and 037 128 can be used to store your own settings Compressor library operations are performed via the DYNAMICS screen Comp Lib page 1 Use the Layer section INPUT SEL SEL and STEREO SEL keys to select the target channel 2 Press the Selected Channel section DYN key so that its indicator lights then press Selected Channel knob 1 2 3 or 4 The DYNAMICS screen will appear 3 Press the Display section F4 key or press the DYN key as many times as necessary until the Comp Lib page appears DYHAHICS IR INECC ID e heisg te Ao Del m dd LB lt 00 00 000 0010 ECG EENE COMP LIBRARY CURRENT CURVE CURRENT TYPE On COMP Ho TITLE TYPES CURWE zs A ma Eeg RI 3 J Comrander Hi 4 Comrander tS 5 5 A Or PD Come Lib Fee The Comp Lib page includes the following items Current Type The currently selected compressor type for the cur rently selected channel 2 Current Compression Response A graphic representation of the current compression response for the currently selected channel The hori zontal axis represents input level and the vertical axis represents output level 3 Meter Displays the
3. 120 0 B I No OG 101 0 EES ee Bai Hut Sons SOHG LIST SIZE BIT FS im IHPUT 1 CORD m SALE E EE CORY j SES Ae New Sona Ta OME UPTIME 3 ge eu ne OPTIMIZE a Heu Song pone os ERT cer HEO Heu Gopa Tbe Dploa Une DELETE L r About songs e Managing Your Songs NOTE e For 24 bit songs the audio data contained in the Audio folders is stored in 32 bit WAV format If your waveform editor application cannot handle 32 bit data first export the WAV file s to the Trans port folder WAV files imported or exported via the Transport folder are automatically converted to 24 bit format that can be edited using most waveform editor software e Song data is created in either the Song1 or Song2 folder You may have to check both of these folders to locate a specific song e If you initialize the AW2400 hard disk from your computer it will become unreadable by the AW2400 Always use the SONG screen Song List page to initialize the AW2400 hard disk e The song folders also contain audio data for undo and redo opera tions that is not normally used The undo redo data can be deleted by performing an Optimize operation gt p 172 4 Song List The songs stored on the internal AW2400 hard disk are displayed here 2 LOAD button Loads a specified song 3 SAVE button Saves a song 4 NEW button Creates a new song 5 COPY button Copies a son
4. Key oa Modifiers V Shift Record Repeat leo Record Toggle CC 16 11 X Opt Capture Last Take as Recording _ cmd Capture Last Take as Recording Learn by Key Label Play cC 1611 Learn by Key Position Pause MIDI Stop 0 cC1611 Control Change Play or Stop Space Rewind Top CC1611 Channel Forward Bottom CC 1611 Data 1 Fast Rewind Top Data 2 Fast Forward Bottom Rewind 1 frame ae Forward 1 frame Assignments Rewind by format value Forward by format value Shuttle Rewind Shuttle Forward Scrub Rewind Scrub Forward Scrub by MIDI Value 2 Play from Beginning Return Play from previous Bar Learn New Assignment Ne A Y Please note that all the previously specified key com mands will be initialized If you do not want to change your existing user key command settings you can manu ally make the MIDI channel and CC settings shown above Setting Pro Tools remote control You can remotely control the Pro Tools software from the AW 2400 No special setting file is required Use the fol lowing procedure to make settings 1 In the menu bar select Setup gt Peripherals 2 The Peripherals window will open Click the MIDI Controllers button In the MIDI Controllers window make the following settings In the Receive From field and the Send To field specify the MIDI device you are using Receive From Send To Your MIDI inp
5. Channel 1 feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback PITCH 2 24 to 24 semitones Channel 2 pitch shift FINE 2 50 to 50 cents Channel 2 pitch shift fine FB G 1 99 to 99 LEVEL 2 100 to 100 Channel 2 level plus values for normal phase minus values for reverse phase PAN 2 L63 to R63 Channel 2 pan DELAY 2 0 0 1000 0 ms Channel 2 delay time Channel 2 feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback MODE 1 10 Pitch shift precision FB G 2 99 to 99 E ROTARY One input two output rotary speaker simulator Parameter Description ROTATE STOP START Rotation stop start SPEED SLOW FAST Rotation speed see SLOW and FAST parameters SLOW 0 05 10 00 Hz SLOW rotation speed FAST 0 05 10 00 Hz FAST rotation speed DRIVE 0 100 Overdrive level ACCEL 0 10 Acceleration at speed changes LOW 0 100 Low frequency filter HIGH 0 100 High frequency filter 2s O Q Q Q lt AW2400 Owner s Manual 249 Effects Parameters E RING MOD Two input two output ring modulator Range Description Modulation source oscillator or input signal Parameter SOURCE OSC FREQ FM FREQ FM DEPTH OSC SELF 0 0 5000 0 Hz 0 05 40 00 Hz 0 100 Oscillator frequency Oscillator frequency modulation speed Oscillator frequency mod
6. 7 To stop playback press the STOP W key or press the foot switch The UNDO REDO key in the data entry control section will light e If no track has been enabled for recording the foot switch will alternate between Play and Stop operations 8 To listen to the newly recorded content locate to a point just before the punch in point and press the PLAY B key Overdubbing Ch Q If you are satisfied with the newly recorded content save the song For details on sav ing gt p 57 If you decide to re do the recording press the UNDO REDO key to cancel the recording and repeat steps 3 7 The following diagram shows the manual punch in out procedure OhRWON play record ma EN epe N e sat w za Set AW2400 Owner s Manual 69 Punch in out Auto punch in out Auto punch in out is a function that performs the punch in and punch out operations automatically In order to use this function you must first specify the punch in location the In point and the punch out location the Out point Call the RECORD screen Direct page and make sure that your instrument mic is assigned to the track on which you want to punch in 2 Locate to the point at which you want to punch in 3 Hold down the Locate section SET key and press the IN key The current location will be registered as the In point 4 Locate to the point at which you want to punch out Bui
7. Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms EXPAND Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms COMPAND S Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Width dB Release ms Compander COMPAND H H Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Width dB Release ms A Dr Tom EXPAND Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms Compander S COMPAND S Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Width dB Release ms A Dr Over Top COMPAND S Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Width dB Release ms Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms E B Finger Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms COMPAND H Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Width dB Release ms Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms Syn Bass Threshold dB
8. The setting will alternate on off each time you press the ON key MIDI data transmitted MIDI data SW 7F transmitted SW 00 off rem off 4 4 4 e UNLATCH The ON key will be engaged only while held and will turn off when released MIDI data MIDI data transmitted SW 7F transmitted SW 00 t f off 4 off PO hdl gt LEARN button When this button is on the MIDI message received from an external device will be assigned to the currently selected fader or ON key This is a convenient way to assign MIDI messages quickly ES e If two or more MIDI messages are received while the LEARN but ton is on the last received MIDI message will be entered in the MIDI message field e If a system exclusive message longer than sixteen bytes is received the first sixteen bytes will be displayed NOTE e The ON key and fader LEARN buttons cannot be engaged simul taneously 5 MIDI message This area displays the MIDI message that is assigned to the currently selected fader or ON key in hexadecimal form You can move the cursor to each number box and use the DATA JOG dial to edit the value of each byte two digi tal hexadecimal number You can select the following val ues es 00 FF hexadecimal TE Corresponds to the actual value of the MIDI message that is transmitted e END Indicates the end of the MIDI message When you operate a fader or ON key the MIDI mess
9. Display The backlit display screen provides easy visual access to all functions and parameters 2 Stereo Meters These 12 segment levels meters show the final output sig nals levels on the stereo bus 3 METER key Calls the METER screen which includes the channel bus and other level meters 4 Contrast Adjusts the brightness of the display 5 Access indicator This indicator indicates the access status of the internal hard disk When the hard disk is being read or written this indicator will light Ab CAUTION e Never turn off the power of the AW2400 when the access indi cator is lit Doing so will not only damage the data on the internal hard disk but may also damage the hard disk itself When you want to turn off the power of the AW2400 you must perform the shutdown procedure gt p 38 AW2400 Owner s Manual OlOlO STEREO SHIFT 5 6 F1 F4 keys These keys operate the tabs shown at the bottom of the display screen They can access other pages in a group of functions or in Some cases execute specific functions 7 SHIFT key Shifts the function of the tabs at the bottom of the dis play to show additional functions when applicable Shift functions can be executed by pressing the appropriate functions key F1 to F4 while holding the SHIFT key E Mixer section Parts of the AW2400 and what they do 1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 7
10. puter MIDI OUT AW2400 THRU connector me MIDI IN MIDI Remote re Ol a MIDI Remote is a function that lets you use the z5 EEN re MMC wm oun AW 2400 as a physical controller for an external device You can assign the desired MIDI messages to the top Br panel faders and ON keys and use them to remotely MTC MMC control a MIDI device or computer program USB cable device e Example using the AW2400 as a physical control e g computer ler for a MIDI sound module N mm ER 2 1 El El o MTC MMC YAMAHA Control changes System exclusive messages etc AW2400 lt gt CS MIDI OUT THRU MIDI IN connector Automate scene changes and mix parame or ters When you recall a scene on the AW2400 or operate its mix parameters the corresponding messages program change or control change can be transmitted to an exter nal device If you record these messages on a MIDI sequencer that is synchronized to the AW2400 the scene recall operations or mix parameter operations can be precisely reproduced at any time Ci External MIDI USB cable device e g computer LAN EEE ED 2 1 IG IG o YAMAHA IEEE1394 cable AW2400 Owner s Manual 193 Basic MIDI Settings 194 Basic MIDI Settings The MIDI screen Setting 1 page lets you specify the connector port to be used for MIDI message transmission and re
11. OUT 1 4 TRS phone plug To the INSERT I O lt a jack of the AW2400 4 STEREO OUT jacks These are TRS phone type balanced output jacks that out put the signals of the stereo bus Nominal output level is 4 dBu 5 MONITOR OUT jacks These are TRS phone type balanced output jacks that out put the monitor signals of the stereo bus or the solo bus Nominal output level is 4 dBu 6 OMNI OUT jacks 1 4 The unbalanced phone jacks output the signals specified in the PATCH screen Output page Nominal output level is 0 dBu 7 PHONES jack This is a 1 4 TRS phone output jack for connecting your headphones for monitoring This jack always outputs the same signal as the MONITOR OUT jacks AW2400 Owner s Manual 1 4 TRS h l _ Phone plug Tip OUT To the input jack of the gt external processor Sleeve ground 1 4 TRS phone plug Tip IN p To the output jack of the external processor Sleeve ground POWER switch Switches the power ON and OFF e When switching the power of the AW2400 ON or OFF always fol low the Turning the power on off procedures described on page 38 AC IN connector Connect the supplied power cord to this connector Ab CAUTION e Use only the supplied power cord for this unit The use of an inappropriate replacement may be a fire and electrical shock hazard Ground Screw For maximum safety the ground screw should be properl
12. E Editing a tempo map event When you create a new song the following tempo map event will be input at the beginning of the tempo map the first beat of the first measure e Time signature 4 4 e Tempo 120 0 Here s how to edit the values of this tempo map event Call the EDIT screen Tempo Map page by either pressing the Work Navigate section EDIT key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F2 key after pressing the EDIT key In this page you can input or edit tempo map events for the current song EDIT Bee Hut Sona I 17 8 MPUTA 00 02 13 385 aan CEMO MAP REECH l o Hen 8 ee HEEE 6 Tempo Mar pork Adi 2 e The Start point of the song corresponds to the starting location of the tempo map e The data tempo map events recorded in the tempo map will continue to apply until the e If you modify the tempo map after recording on an audio track the measure beat counter display values will be affected For this reason if you want to use MIDI clock to synchro nize with an external MIDI device or if you want to control the song in measure units you should create the tempo map before you record If you modify the tempo map after a track has already been recorded a popup window will ask you for confirmation This page contains the following items List This area lists the tempo map events that have been entered for the current song The line enclosed by a d
13. AW2400 Owner s Manual 81 Convenient functions for mixdown bounce suo1esado OCOHUTIOO pue UMOPXIIN o 82 Convenient functions for mixdown bounce Here we will explain some functions that you will find convenient when performing mixdown or bounce operations Fader Group assignments Fader Grouping is a function that links the fader opera tions of multiple channels For example if you ve recorded multiple track channels of drums or chorus you can assign these drum channels or chorus channels to the same fader group so that moving any one of the faders in the group will adjust all of the levels together Call the MONITOR screen Fader Grp page by either pressing the Quick Navigate sec tion MONITOR key as many times as nec essary or by pressing the F2 key after pressing the MONITOR key This page contains the following items 128 87 Go Initial m 1011 11 EARHART ese_New_sona Track2t 00 00 00 000 FADER GROUP D Ae ak AE be ben ek a un un Ae an AEN E eh a ae un ven vue Ob Ob ere Fader Grr ENABLE field Use these buttons to switch fader groups A D on off The A D buttons will be highlighted to indicate fader groups that are turned on You will also use this field to select the fader group that you want to operate 2 INPUT field 3 TRACK field These areas indicate the fader group to which each input channel 1 16 and track channel 1 24 is assig
14. FB G R 99 to 99 Right channel feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback L gt R FBG 99 to 99 Left to right channel feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback R gt L FBG 99 to 99 Right to left channel feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF E CHORUS 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Two input two output chorus effect Parameter FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Low pass filter cutoff frequency Description Modulation speed AM DEPTH 00 100 Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 00 100 Pitch modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency EQG 12 0 to 12 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQQ 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G E FLANGE 12 0 to 12 0 dB Two input two output flange effect Parameter FREQ 0 0
15. REPEAT RTZ F J E ta STOP PLAY REC 1 IN key In point 2 OUT key Out point 3 A key 0c ee A point 4 B key oio B point 5 LOCATE key 1 9 Quick Locator points RTZ ja key Relative Zero point NOTE P e The In point and Out point will be updated automatically when you perform a record operation e If you want to change the Start point or End point use the EDIT screen Mark Adj page These points cannot be set directly via the panel controls Using the locator 3 To move to a registered locate point press the corresponding key while the song is stopped or playing The song will move to that location Registered locate points are displayed in the TRACK screen Track View page as shown below REMAIN aie GIEL METRO SI 96dB E Cp b ige Wj ew Leeoooooood Locator icons The characters numbers shown on the display corre spond to the locate types are as follows Displayed Character KI Locate Type In point Out point A point B point Quick Locator points Start point End point Relative Zero point e Locate point settings are stored on the hard disk as part of the song e Locate points can be adjusted as desired gt p 91 Locate points other than the Start point and End point may also be erased gt p 93 AW2400 Owner s Manual C O E Be ab Q O
16. YAMAHA AV eQC PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION Owner s Manual o Ge oC Gp ay ap ap E 2 se Sr E i E 9 FF fF FF Ff SF Ben zl en wl ben zt ke s E 99 09 Fl i SS EEEE ESEESE EE d J oe i g R FCC INFORMATION U S A 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT This product when installed as indicated in the instruc tions contained in this manual meets FCC requirements Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority granted by the FCC to use the prod uct IMPORTANT When connecting this product to acces sories and or another product use only high quality shielded cables Cable s supplied with this product MUST be used Follow all installation instructions Failure to fol low instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA NOTE This product has been tested and found to com ply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations Part 15 for Class B digital devices Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices This equipment generates uses radio frequen cies and if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual may cause inter ference harmful to the operation of other electronic This applies only to products
17. 8 Move the cursor to the READ CD INFO but ton and press the ENTER key The display will indicate Read CD Info and infor mation will be read from the CD inserted in the CD RW drive Depending on the import source data the screen will change as follows NOTE P e If the CD DAT DIGITAL REC button is set to DISABLE in the UTILITY screen Preference page the display will indicate CD Import Prohibited and you won t be able to import from the CD If this occurs refer to steps 1 3 and check your settings once again AW2400 Owner s Manual Track operations and editing e ni 143 Importing audio data WAV files Guipa pue suoneiado yoe s 144 When using IMPORT CD AUDIO COMMAND LIMPORT CO AUDIO Haiza aup AE 4 Track list This shows each track of the audio CD inserted in the CD RW drive in units of minutes seconds frames 1 75 second Move the cursor to the list and use the DATA JOG dial or the INC DEC keys to specify the number of the audio track you want to import Operations in the track list are linked with the From CD TRACK field 2 From CD TRACK Specifies the audio track number 01 99 of the import source CD 3 From Start Specifies the beginning of the data that will be imported in minutes seconds frames 1 75 second 4 From End Specifies the end of the data that will be imported in minutes seconds frames 1 75 second e The
18. This page contains the following items TRACK Dua 2 Neu Lora ata Scene INPUT len DD DD 101 11 ECT ea STEREO TRACE erate iets n G4 STTR MODE ON OFF button This switches playback of the stereo track on off 2 INPUT CH MIX MUTE button This selects whether the signals of the input channels will be monitored MIX or will not be monitored MUTE while the stereo track is playing 3 Track View This area graphically indicates whether the stereo track contains data and indicates the marker locations 4 Virtual tracks Here you can select the virtual track that is assigned to the stereo track The currently selected virtual track is indi cated by a symbol Of the other virtual tracks those that have been recorded are indicated by O and those that have not been recorded are indicated by 5 Level meter This indicates the output level of the stereo track The fader level is numerically indicated at the left of the meter and the hold level is numerically indicated at the right 6 PRE EQ button Pre EQ levels levels prior to the EQ stage are displayed when this button is on 7 PRE FADER button Pre fader levels levels prior to the faders are displayed when this button is on POST FADER button Post fader levels levels after the faders are displayed when this button is on 9 PEAK HOLD button This button switches the level meter peak hold function on off Recordi
19. 4 Measure beat Shows the position of each quick locator point in mea sure beat units Move the cursor to the quick locator point numbers and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to scroll through the list so that the dotted frame encloses the quick locator point number that you want to edit Move the cursor to the value that you want to edit and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to edit the value AW2400 Owner s Manual Adjusting the position of a marker Call the EDIT screen Mark Adj page by either pressing the Work Navigate section EDIT key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F3 key after pressing the EDIT key 2 If you want to adjust the position of a marker move the cursor to the MARKER button in the Quick Locator Marker field When the MARKER button is on the Quick Locator Marker field will list the markers that have been regis tered LOCATOR MARKER position eae DELETE 4 91 Gi Goad bei D I D Ae op op D I 38 ABS A LOCATOR B3 op op ii1 220 ABE 03 HARKER DA GA 60 14 341 STEEN d List Lists the markers that have been registered The line that is enclosed by a dotted frame is selected for edit ing 2 Markers These are the marker numbers 1 99 3 Position Shows the position of each marker using the counter display format 4 Measure beat Shows the position of each marker in measure beat units 3 Move the cursor to the m
20. COMMAND DELETE Start End ERASE 1 2 38 1 J b pelete an m Parameter ist Parameter Explanation 1 24 A single audio track L Parameter list 18223824 A pair of adjacent odd numbered The parameters are the same as for the ERASE command even numbered audio tracks ST The stereo track Tracks 1 24 VTR 1 8 Virtual track number INSERT 3 Start Specify a point Beginning of the edited region Inserts blank space into the specified region Data follow ing the location of the Start parameter will be moved backward to make room 4 End Specify a point End of the edited region 1 V TR can be selected only if TR 1 24 1 amp 2 238 amp 24 or ST COMMAND IHSERT Guipa pue suoneiado yoe s Start INSERT SCH Size E Parameter list The parameters are the same as for the ERASE command However instead of 4 End use 4 Size to specify the region that will be inserted 138 AW2400 Owner s Manual COPY Copies the specified region of data to the specified loca tion of the specified track NOTE P e If you set From TR to ALL INS the copy destination track will be moved backward by the size of the copied region Note that this may cause the bar lines specified by the tempo map to change their location relative to the audio data e If you set From TR to other than ALL INS the copy destination track will be o
21. e Fader operation for each channel e EQ operation for each channel e ON key operation for each channel e AUX and effect send operation for each channel e Pan operation for each channel e Scene and library recall operations When recording to Automix you can break complex oper Up to 16 Automix sequences can be recorded in a dedi ations down and record them channel by channel or cated library and recalled whenever needed The current parameter by parameter in several takes and even punch Automix data as well as the Library contents are saved in out so you can record just a specified region of a song independently with each AW2400 song Furthermore the recorded Automix data can be displayed in a list and edited for precise control Automix Operation Automix operation is carried out from the AUTOMIX screen Automix page To call this page press the SCENE AUTOMIX USB sec a MODE field tion AUTOMIX key as many times as necessary or Turns Automix on or off as well as switching between the press the F1 key after pressing the AUTOMIX key record and playback modes This page contains the following items e ENABLE DISABLE button RE Enables or disables Automix e STOP button Stops Automix recording or playback does not affect recorder operation AUTOMIX 22tHew Sorns ___ _Ju tze 8 We BER e pp 00 pp pp izal ae Appears inverted when Automix is stopped e PLAY button While the recorder
22. og aNyYgr Lv 134371 NO g l LYASNI S13 1uaen L ue Wala boas GaN INO HALAW MENET uononpay ules yoegheld dO AAG My dd el au 0812S JO Us e WEN I LAO LOAYIG HO MOVHL o gt 5 S INO d punog HWH LW INC YORI OBIS GaN MO uoyonp y ugaddoogJyd ule Ca Dees HOLINOW Ir It OH LpdNI 130840938 143SNI IHASNI EES Ge IL MOVHLL O_O YOLVTIISO NO 13441 Li Q Ge gavosvo snq E NIOFYILS WLIDIC div ATaVNa J o L im NO 480d 109 89 uoneinByuod 02848 7 43040934 od uomeuuoc fe pT hosa 7 NOT 20 LUYASNI 01 Yalow HIN ul du punog UI 4921 0819 S HOCH v2 k LNANI vz YAqdHOOSu GNAS LYASNI 19413S t LLO3443 lt Med H3L4Y 8 WSEIWK KREE 17 NHNLIY 10343 3zavosvo sna BEIEN NI OFYSLS TUE 1 YUT 0919 S 10 419S Y N ous oU LNO LOSUIG L oo uoy EEN z O H LNdNI 5 B NI OF43LS TvLIDIG 94 4 LOTS Lois Lots HWH LIN 94 Deia mo uononpoy IJL 193443 ured yh XNY oU UI LANI e als Ee SE S ATNO Z 4 CERN PET em ee i ou uge aNvar 4 Wad ae JL 4 13431 NO A ao k o p LYASNI IHASNI uaan Mi a S me YALA UJN IND ETET O10S Nvd HL uoHonpay ules Ss 9 TE y9g g Udb L iNo i Havers 9b E LAANI on NANI INITAN m gt OW Oo DOOD A8t n 1S 22 mm att HALAW ee 5 7 OO Fa NN b2 HOLWd LAANI 4A pr DA poor e Dr po Appendix 284 AW2400 Owner s Manual MEMO AW2
23. 5 6 7 8 GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN lt u ly E Es N a N a N a ee E O E d d 4 LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC 3 INPUT SEL keys 1 8 These keys select the mixer input channel that you will operate Introducing the AW2400 H 3 TRACK key This key accesses the TRACK screen where you can check whether each track contains data and switch the virtual tracks that will be used for recording and playback 4 EDIT key This key accesses the EDIT screen where you can copy or erase tracks 5 MIDI key Accesses the MIDI screen where you can set up MIDI synchronization scene change and other settings 6 UTILITY key Press this key to access the UTILITY screen with settings for the unit s test tone oscillator digital inputs and out puts and other utility parameters 7 PATCH key Accesses the PATCH screen where you can patch output signals as required DIO key The DIO key accesses the DIO screen which includes the clock source and I O card settings a RECORD key This key accesses the RECORD screen where you can quickly assign the signal to be recorded to the input of each track and make settings for recording 2 MONITOR key The MONITOR screen accessed by this key includes set tings for fader grouping the solo function and more AW2400 Owner s Manual 21 OO ZMV 9y Bulonpouju Parts of the AW2400 and what they do E Display section YAMAHA SHIFT F1 J i O
24. AA Locator Position field Shows the various locate points Quick Locator points not included 2 Quick Locator Marker field Shows the Quick Locator or Marker points 3 LOCATOR button 4 MARKER button C O E Be ab Q O OO O O gt Benn O Q v a FE These buttons determine whether the Quick Locator or Locate points Marker points appear in the Quick Locator Marker field Shows the type of locate point and its abbreviation 5 DELETE button Marker display only 2 Position Deletes the currently selected marker Shows the position of each locate point in time code or the current counter display format 3 Measure beat Shows the position of each locate point as measures beats This value is calculated based on the tempo and time signature of the tempo map gt p 175 The format in which the position is displayed will depend on the locate point The following table shows the display format for each locate point Locate point Position Measure Beat REL ZERO Time code START Time code Measure beat Time code Measure beat Counter display format Measure beat Counter display format Measure beat Counter display format Measure beat Counter display format Measure beat E A8 e If a locate point has not been registered will appear in the numerical field AW2400 Owner s Manual 91 Adjusting the position of a locate point or ma
25. Data Data Data Data Data 4 SOURCE list Displays the scenes in their current order The scene to be moved is selected from this list 2 DESTINATION list The move destination for the source scene selected from the SOURCE list is selected here 3 EXECUTE button Executes the scene move operation 2 Move the cursor to the SOURCE list and use the DATA JOG dial to select the scene to be moved e In addition to the DATA JOG dial the INC DEC keys can be used to make selections 3 Move the cursor to the DESTINATION list and use the DATA JOG dial to select the destination The destination will be indicated by the INSERT POINT indication in this list 4 Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the ENTER key The selected scene will be moved and the SOURCE and DESTINATION lists will be updated to reflect the results of the operation e Pressing the F1 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the EXECUTE button Scene Memory NI AW2400 Owner s Manual f 163 Aowa uge Va 164 AW2400 Owner s Manual Chanter 18 Song management This chapter explains how to perform song management operations such as copying deleting backing up and restoring songs About songs E Song Organization On the AW2400 your recorded compositions are man aged in units called songs When you save a song on the hard disk
26. EFFECT EFFECT1 Screen EFFECT2 Screen EFFECTS Screen EFFECT4 Screen PAN EQ PAN EQ Screen PAN EQ Screen PAN EQ Screen PAN EQ Screen NOTE lj e The display will not change if the SELECTED CHANNEL knob is simply rotated To switch screens the knobs must be pressed e Other gate functions can be accessed via the DYNAMICS screen but only pages and parameters related to compressor operation can be accessed via the SELECTED CHANNEL knobs 5 Move the cursor in the screen to the desired parameter and use the DATA JOG dial or the ENTER key to oper ate the parameter AW2400 Owner s Manual Introducing the AW2400 H 35 Geh Introducing the AW2400 36 AW2400 Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Connection and Setup This chapter will describe the AW2400 setup process from connection to instruments and other external equipment up to getting sound from a monitor system Connection and Setup The following connection diagram shows a typical AW2400 setup Connect your microphones instruments and other external gear as shown in the diagram DAW system Monitor system Audio interface DIGITAL STEREO USB connector MONITOR OUT jacks IN OUT connectors 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000 000000O00 OON Ge ee ee ee PHONES jack CH CH g DIE BD BOoo Esc E Kc i DO000 Headphones
27. EQG 12 0 to 12 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQQ 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain 1 6 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz E DYNA PHASER Two input two output dynamically controlled phaser Parameter SOURCE INPUT MIDI Description Control source input signal or MIDI Note On velocity SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity DIR UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY i Decay speed OFFSET 0 100 Lowest phase shifted frequency offset FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback STAGE 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Number of phase shift stages LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain 1 6 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz AW2400 Owner s Manual es O Q Q Q lt 251 Effects Parameters E REV CHORUS One input two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay bef
28. The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for recall Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key A popup window confirming the recall operation will appear CONF RAAT LOH Recall 2 from the CHANNEL Library e Pressing the F1 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the RECALL button 4 To actually recall the selected setting move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key ES e Parameters that do not exist in the target channel will De ignored e INSERT EFF settings as shown in the CH VIEW screen View page are not included in the channel libraries and will not change e When the target channel is a stereo channel or a channel pair all parameters except phase and pan will be set to the same values phase and pan will not change e When data cannot be recalled to the selected channel the Recall Channel Data Conflict error message will appear AW2400 Owner s Manual e Read only library settings those marked with an fH icon cannot be erased Call the CH VIEW screen Library page by either pressing the VIEW key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F2 key after pressing the VIEW key Use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select the library setting to be erased The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected to be erased Move the cursor to the CLEAR button a
29. e Ifyou want to adjust the fader value for only a specific channel that is assigned to a fader group operate its fader while hold ing down the SEL key or INPUT SEL key for that channel e The fader group assignments are available even when Trigger Track mode is engaged e The fader group assignments in the Fader Grp page can be copied to the Mute Grp page by holding down the Display section SHIFT key and pressing the F4 key Mute Group assignments Mute Grouping is a function that links the ON key oper ations of multiple channels This lets you mute multiple instruments by pressing a single ON key or press a sin gle key to alternate the on off status of multiple track channels Call the MONITOR screen Mute Grp page by either pressing the Quick Navigate sec tion MONITOR key as many times as nec essary or by pressing the F3 key after pressing the MONITOR key This page contains the following items MONITOR TRACK 21 O0 00 0 EE o Initial D i S S e d E 00 00 UI 000 11 11 CARHECE MUTE GROUP 1234 56178 FIO te I9IHI5IE G eee ee ee 1234 56178 SIO 2 I9IuIBIR 11181920 2222324 ENABLE field Use these buttons to switch mute groups E H on off or to select the mute group that you want to operate The E H buttons will be highlighted to indicate mute groups that are turned on 2 INPUT field 3 TRACK field These areas indicate the mute group to which each input ch
30. DEC keys to adjust send lev els to AUX bus 1 4 or effect bus 1 4 over a range of from to 10dB You can also move the cursor to one of these knobs and press the ENTER key to turn the corre sponding send off Further if you move the cursor to the signal path above the knob and press the ENTER key you can switch between pre fader PRE and post fader POST send These functions are linked to the AUX and EFFECT screens gt p 111 115 NOTE e Signals cannot be sent to the effect buses from an effect return channel AW2400 Owner s Manual Channel Operation M NO 107 Channel Library Operation uoneiado jouueyD We 108 Channel Library Operation The mix parameters for individual channels can be saved to and recalled from dedicated libraries as required This is particularly handy when you want to use the settings made for one channel in one or more other channels as well Library numbers 0 1 contain read only data for channel ini tialization while numbers 2 64 can be used save and recall your own data The following param eters can be saved to the channel library e Channel on off e Channel attenuator e EQ on off e EQ parameter settings e Dynamics processor on off e Dynamics processor parameter settings NOTE e Fader position e AUX bus 1 4 pre fader post fader setting e AUX bus 1 4 send level e Effect bus 1 4 pre fader post fader setting e Effect bus 1 4 send level
31. LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency REV BAL 0 100 Reverb and symphonic reverb balance 0 all symphonic reverb 100 all reverb FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform AW2400 Owner s Manual 2 O K Q OQ lt 253 Effects Parameters gt Kei Kei D Q x 254 E REV gt PAN One input two output reverb and autopan effects in parallel Parameter REV TIME 0 3 99 0s Range Description Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency REV BAL 0 100 Reverb and panned reverb balance 0 all panned reverb 100 all reverb FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth DIR 4 Panning direction WAVE Sine Tri Square L lt gt R L gt R L lt R Turn L Turn R E DELAY ER One input two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel Parameter DELAY L Range Description 0 0 100
32. Male Vocal 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 0 dB 5 0 dB 2 5 dB 4 0 dB 170 Hz 236 Hz 2 65 kHz 6 70 kHz 0 11 10 5 6 Piano 1 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 6 0 dB 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 4 0 dB 95 Hz 950 Hz 3 15 kHz 7 50 kHz 8 0 9 Female Vo 1 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 1 0 dB 1 0 dB 1 5 dB 2 0 dB 118 Hz 400 Hz 2 65 kHz 6 00 kHz 0 18 0 45 0 56 0 14 Piano 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 3 5 dB 8 5 dB 1 5 dB 3 0 dB 224 Hz 600 Hz 3 15 kHz 5 30 kHz 5 6 AW2400 Owner s Manual 10 0 7 Female Vo 2 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 7 0 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 2 5 dB 112 Hz 335 Hz 2 00 kHz 6 70 kHz 0 16 0 2 Chorus amp Harmo Parameter PEAKING L MID PEAKING H MID PEAKING PEAKING 2 0 dB 1 0 dB 1 5 dB 3 0 dB 90 Hz 850 Hz 2 12 kHz 4 50 kHz 2 8 2 0 7 7 Total EQ 1 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 0 5 dB 0 0 dB 3 0 dB 6 5 dB 95 Hz 950 Hz 2 12 kHz 16 0 kHz 7 22 5 6 Total EQ 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 0 dB 1 5 dB 2 0 dB 6 0 dB 95 Hz 750 Hz 1 80 kHz 18 0 kHz 7 2
33. Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms AW2400 Owner s Manual 2s O Q E Q lt 243 Compressor Parameter list gt Kei Kei D Q x 244 Pianot Parameter Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms Sampling SN Parameter Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms Piano2 Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms Hip Comp COMPAND S Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Width dB Release ms E Guitar Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms Solo Vocal1 Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms A Guitar Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms Solo Vocal2 Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms Strings1 Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms Chorus Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms Strings2 Threshold dB Ratio 1
34. Th MT e m m D QUICK NAVIGATE RECORD MONITOR DATA JOG Quick Navigate section Mixer section P 23 Layer section P 26 Transport section P 21 P 27 Display section P 22 Locate Number section P 25 Locate section P 27 20 AW2400 Owner s Manual E Analog Input section 1 2 3 4 GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN KE Vly N a a N a N a E G E E 4 4 4 4 LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC of zi a GAIN knobs 1 8 These adjust the sensitivity of the rear panel MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 to input signals 2 PEAK Indicators These indicators will light red if the peak signal level after the GAIN knob reaches or exceeds 3 dB below clipping To set the optimum record level set the GAIN knob so that the indicator flashes only briefly on the highest peaks that will be encountered during the recording E Work Navigate section WORK NAVIGATE SONG CD TRACK o EDIT o MIDI UTILITY PATCH DIO o II o 4 SONG key This key accesses the SONG screen where you can save or load songs and perform the shut down procedure 2 CD key This key accesses the CD screen where you can write or play an audio CD and backup or restore data E Quick Navigate section QUICK NAVIGATE RECORD g MONITOR T Parts of the AW2400 and what they do
35. Track recording K H 5 a H jacks Input Stereo channels output channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16 7 18 19 20 1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 7 15 8 16 BUS 1 BUS 2 AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 Mixer section Track 2 Recorder section AW2400 Owner s Manual 49 Direct recording and Mixed recording E Mixed recording With this method you can send multiple input channels to Bus 1 or Bus 2 and assign the mixed signal to one through four tracks Mixed recording requires fewer tracks but you will need to decide on the final volume pan and tone of each instrument at the time of recording you will not be able to adjust these parameters independently after record ing H MIC LINE INPUT jacks Bulpsooe1 YORI Ov Stereo Input output channels channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 STEREO 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 7 15 8 16 BUS 1 BUS 2 AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 Cows US Track 3 Tacks r Recorder section Mixer section NOTE e The way in which you assign the input signals to tracks will depend on the method you choose 50 f AW2400 Owner s Manual Assigning input signals to tracks Direct recording This section describes the patching procedure to assign instruments and or microphones connected to MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 to independent tracks for direct record ing e See page 99 for more details on pa
36. Ued Wes 152 4 Move the cursor to the GATE ON OFF but ton and press the ENTER key to turn the gate on e Pressing the F1 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the GATE ON OFF but ton D Use the STEREO LINK button to turn gate linking for paired channels on or off and the KEYIN SOURCE field to select a trigger source as required e Pressing the F2 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the STEREO LINK button 6 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to edit and use either the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to set the parameter as required e You can save your current gate settings in the library as described in EQ Dynamics Processor Library Operation on page 154 Using the Compressors Compression can be used to prevent signals from exceed ing a preset level in order to avoid distortion and to smooth out the levels of certain instruments or tracks The AW 2400 provides compression on the following tracks e Input e Track e Stereo Output e Bus Master e AUX Send Master e Effect Send Master Compression can be controlled either via the knobs in the DYNAMICS screen or the physical controllers in the Selected Channel section AW2400 Owner s Manual E Compressor Control via the DYNAMICS screen Applying and controlling compression via the dedicated dynamics screen 1 Use the Layer section INPUT SEL SEL
37. e Pan effect parameter and the INSERT EFF settings displayed in the CH VIEW screen View page are not saved to the channel library Calling the Channel Library screen Channel library save and recall operations are carried out via the CH VIEW screen Library page To call this page press the Selected Channel section VIEW key as many times as necessary or press the F2 key after pressing the VIEW key This page contains the following items CH VIEH INPUT 1 Du Neu _ sons RE 1 Gcernepl a a fe S 101 01 CAHE A 00 00 00 000 4 1KH2 1ebit_ CHANNEL LIBRARY SEL CH 5 INPUT1 CURRENT CH SETTING ISS SOURCE CHANNEL IHPUT 1 f Ho Data Library AW2400 Owner s Manual Selected channel Displays the selected channel 2 EQ COMP Displays the EQ and compressor settings for the selected channel 3 Input Output meter Displays the input levels for the selected channel and adja cent odd even channel pairs When the stereo output chan nel is selected however this meter displays the L R output channel levels 4 Buttons These buttons execute the RENAME RECALL STORE and CLEAR functions 5 List A list of all the settings stored in the library The row high lighted by a dotted frame is the setting currently selected for operation An icon indicates read only library set tings 6 SOURCE CHANNEL Displays the source channel for the settings shown
38. gt p 201 4 CONTROL CHANGE field Specifies how MIDI control change messages will be transmitted and received If control change transmission and reception are enabled the corresponding control change message will be transmitted when you operate any of the AW2400 s channel mix parameters fader pan effect send etc When a control change message is received the corresponding AW2400 mix parameter will change The following items are available e ON OFF button TX Turns control change trans mission on or off e ECHO button TX Received control change messages are re transmitted echoed via the MIDI OUT THRU connector or USB con nector or digital I O card out put port e ON OFF button RX Turns control change recep tion on or off e OMNI button RX Control change messages can be received on all MIDI channels regardless of the MIDI receive channel setting Basic MIDI Settings 5 CONTROL CHANGE MODE box Selects the channels via which MIDI control change mes sages will be transmitted and received The following choices are available lt E Control change messages will be transmitted and received on MIDI channels 1 16 MIDI channels 1 16 will correspond to AW2400 track channels 1 16 er E Control change messages will be transmitted and received only on the MIDI channel that is selected in the CHANNEL field wt en This is the same as 2 in that control c
39. key will be disabled to pre vent accidental recording 6 If you want to redo the recording press the UNDO REDO key The UNDO REDO key will go out and you will return to the state prior to recording Repeat steps 2 5 7 f you are satisfied with the recorded con tent save the song For details on saving refer to Saving the current song Please be aware that the recorded content will be lost if you turn off the AW2400 power before saving the song Saving the current song Track recording E This section explains how to save the current song to the hard disk If you accidentally turn off the AW2400 power without saving the song all recordings or operations that you performed since last saving the song will be lost You should make a habit of saving the song at appropriate breaks in your work 1 Call the SONG screen Song List page by 3 To save the song move the cursor to the either pressing the Work Navigate section SONG key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the SONG key YES button and press the ENTER key If you move the cursor to the NO button instead of the YES button and press the ENTER key the Save operation will be cancelled SAVE button NOTE e The song save operation always saves the current song ai Heu Sons RE regardless of the song that is selected in the list SONG INPUTI A 00 00 00 000 TNT SIZE BIT FSi e You cannot save a song that is
40. 00 7E 7F all call Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Command mcc sub id 00000011 03 Deferred play MCS EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 5 13 1 4 MMC FAST FORWARD lt Transmission gt This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when the FF key is pressed and the Cue mode is engaged lt Reception gt If the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave the transport will begin fast forward when this message is received with a matching device number or a device number of 7F STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive Device ID Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Command mcc sub id 00000110 04 Fast Forward MCS EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 5 13 1 5 MMC REWIND lt Transmission gt This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when the REWIND key is pressed and the Review mode is engaged lt Reception gt If the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave the transport will begin rewind when this message is received with a matching device number or a device number of 7F STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive Device ID Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Command mcc sub id 00000101 05 Rewind MCS EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 5 13 1 6 MMC RECORD STROBE lt Reception gt This message is received i
41. AW2400 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is sus pected This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA FCC DoC IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord WARNING THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code GREEN AND YELLOW EARTH BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or colored GREEN or GREEN and YELLOW The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED e This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Kemble Music U K Ltd AW2400 Owner s Manual 3 wires CAUTION
42. CMP RAT 1 1 to 20 1 Compressor ratio CMP ATK 0 120 ms Compressor attack CMP REL 4 Compressor release time CMP KNEE 0 5 Compressor knee LOOKUP 0 0 100 0 ms Lookup delay CMP BYP OFF ON Compressor bypass L M XOVR 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low mid crossover frequency MH XOVR 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Mid high crossover frequency SLOPE 6 to 12 dB Filter slope CEILING 6 0 to 0 0 dB OFF Specifies the maximum output level EXP THRE 54 0 to 24 0 dB Expander threshold EXP RAT 1 1 to 0 1 Expander ratio EXP REL Expander release time EXP BYP OFF ON Expander bypass LIM THRE 12 0 to 0 0 dB Limiter threshold LIM ATK 0 120 ms Limiter attack LIM REL i Limiter release time LIM BYP OFF ON Limiter bypass LIM KNEE 0 5 Limiter knee SOLO LOW OFF ON If this is on only the low frequency band will be output SOLO MID OFF ON If this is on only the mid frequency band will be output SOLO HIGH OFF ON If this is on only the high frequency band will be output 1 6 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz GE O Q Q Q lt AW2400 Owner s Manual 257 Troubleshooting E xlpueddy Troubleshooting Power does not turn on operation not possible E Power does not turn on e Is
43. Cancel Co gt 4 Enter the password for the Administrator s account If you have not set the password click OK The Welcome to the YAMAHA USBMIDI Driver Installer window is displayed Te install YAMAHA USBMIDI Driver Welcome to the YAMAHA USBMIDI Driver Installer Introduction Welcome to the Mac OS X Installation Program You will be select Destinator guided through the steps necessary to install this software nstallation Type nstalliinc Fini U Te T Continue Appendix AW2400 Owner s Manual 267 E xlpueddy About the CD ROM included with the AW2400 Restoring the internal hard disk to the factory set condition In order to restore the internal hard disk to the factory set condition you will need to perform the following two pro cedures Initialize the internal hard disk 2 Load the demo song W initializing the internal hard disk Initialize the internal hard disk gt p 212 When you initialize the internal hard disk the system set tings will return to their factory set state NOTE 8 e Executing this operation will erase all data from the internal hard disk and the data cannot be recovered We recommend you to cuting this operation E Loading the demo song You can load the demo song from the included CD ROM to restore the AW2400 to its factory set condition 1 Insert the included CD ROM into the CD RW drive of the AW2400 2 Call t
44. DST2 OVD1 OVD2 CRUNCH Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdrive DRIVE 0 100 Distortion drive MASTER 0 100 Master volume TONE 10 to 10 Tone control N GATE 0 20 Noise reduction DELAY 0 0 2725 0 ms Delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth DLY BAL 0 100 Distortion and delay balance 0 all distortion 100 all delayed distortion E MULTI FILTER Two input two output 3 band multi filter 24 dB octave Parameter Range Description gt Kei O D Q x 256 TYPE 1 HPF LPF BPF Filter 1 type high pass low pass band pass TYPE 2 HPF LPF BPF Filter 2 type high pass low pass band pass TYPE 3 HPF LPF BPF Filter 3 type high pass low pass band pass FREQ 1 28 0 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 1 frequency FREQ 2 28 0 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 2 frequency FREQ 3 28 0 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 3 frequency LEVEL 1 0 100 Filter 1 level LEVEL 2 0 100 Filter 2 level LEVEL 3 0 100 Filter 3 level RESO 1 0 20 Filter 1 resonance RESO 2 0 20 Filter 2 resonance RESO 3 0 20 AW2400 Own
45. E External effect inserted pre EQ input channel When SLOT1 16 is selected an external effect processor can be inserted into the channel via the selected I O card channel In this case the signal flow is as follows INSERT EFF SLOT1 External effect processor Input channel 1 Output channel 1 I O card 120 AW2400 Owners Manual WE internal effect inserted pre EQ input channel 6 To select the insert point move the cursor to the _ symbol below INSERT EFF on the display and press the ENTER key Press ENTER repeatedly to sequentially select the pre EQ gt post EQ pre fader gt post fader insert points When an effect and compressor are both inserted at the same point you can move the cursor directly to the insert point and press the ENTER key to swap the positions of the effect and compressor TALI ZE 7 Call the EFFECT screen FX Edit page or FX Lib page to adjust the internal effect mix balance the balance between the effect and direct signals 8 Use the MIX BALANCE field knob to bal ance the effect and direct sound as required A setting of 0 produces only the direct sound while a setting of 100 produces only the effect sound e Refer to Editing Effects on page 121 for details on the EFFECT screen FX Edit page Editing Effects Editing Effects The AW2400 internal effect parameters can be edited to create precisely the effect your music requires 3
46. EQQ 10 0 0 10 Parametric equalizer bandwidth N GATE 1 STK M1 STK M2 THRASH MIDBST CMB PG CMB VR CMB DX CMB TW MINI FLAT 0 20 AW2400 Owner s Manual Noise reduction E DYNA FILTER Two input two output dynamically controlled filter Parameter SOURCE INPUT MIDI Effects Parameters Description Control source input signal or MIDI Note On velocity SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity DIR UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY a Filter frequency change decay speed TYPE LPF HPF BPF Filter type OFFSET 0 100 Filter frequency offset RESO 0 20 Filter resonance LEVEL 0 100 Output Level 1 6 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz E DYNA FLANGE Two input two output dynamically controlled flanger Parameter SOURCE INPUT MIDI Description Control source input signal or MIDI Note On velocity SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity DIR UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY i Decay speed OFFSET 0 100 Delay time offset FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency
47. Eq LIBRARY CURRENT CURUE iek CURRENT TPE CEE 16 E Bass 2 II Gun Boss 1 13 Gun Boss 2 EH CURVE I4 Piano 2 15 E G Clean 16 E G Crunch 1 AW2400 Owner s Manual The EQ Lib page includes the following items a Current Response Curve A graphic representation of the current EQ curve for the currently selected channel 2 Output Meter Displays the signal level after the EQ stage 3 EQ Curve A graphic representation of the EQ curve of the cur rently selected EQ setting in the library list 4 List A list of all the settings stored m the library The row highlighted by a dotted frame is the setting currently selected for operation An icon indicates read only library settings e When a TYPE II EQ library preset is recalled to a channel that only allows TYPE I EQ the input channels effect return channels and AUX channels the EQ preset will be recalled as TYPE I EQ 5 Buttons These buttons execute the RENAME RECALL STORE and CLEAR functions Detailed description of their operation begins on page 156 W Recalling Gate Library settings From this library you can recall gate settings to the cur rently selected input channel Of library numbers 001 128 numbers 001 004 are read only and 005 128 can be used to store your own settings Gate library operations are performed via the DYNAM ICS screen Gate Lib page 1 Use the Layer section INPUT SEL and
48. F2 key F3 key F4 key e You can access the pages in sequence by repeatedly press ing the key referred to in step 1 above Basic operation of the AW2400 Switching a button on off Here s how to switch a button in the screen on off 1 Use the CURSOR keys to move the cursor to the desired button in the screen PRE En J kK d 2 Press the ENTER key The button will be switched on off If you move the cursor to a button that executes a specific function and then press the ENTER key that function will be executed PRE E Editing a value in the display Here s how to edit the value of a knob or parameter shown in the display 1 Use the CURSOR keys to CH re move the cursor to the G Lei desired knob or parameter value 2 Turn the DATA JOG dial or CH rop press the INC DEC keys to L edit the value Using Additional Function Buttons When an E mark appears in the lower left corner of the display the tabs shown along the bottom of the display can be switched to provide additional functions Press the SHIFT key when any screen with an E mark in the lower left corner is showing The additional function buttons will appear in place of the tabs along the bottom of the display while the SHIFT key is held Additional Function Buttons 2 While holding the SHIFT key press the F1 F4 button to execute the correspond ing function AW2400 Owner s Manual I
49. RCL Gatepage 162 Sort page vccicecsiesctecenseecasacesssuies 163 SEL KEYS neige rebereiseggeergoeek eede 23 Selected Channel knobs 24 Selected Channel section 24 33 Send and Return 115 117 Geouencer 202 ei RE 27 89 SHIFT key ccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeees 22 31 Shut GOWN E 38 SHUTDOWN button senescence 38 O ae 29 Sa e E PEEN E PE AEO E EE 84 DOLO KEV risen 23 SONG key 21 SONG screen Backup page causecdeunactccdsrsanintt 177 Restore page cccceeeeeeeeeees 178 Setting page 174 Song List page 167 EE 165 AW 2816 cissicscsssssvrssnssascotacawancen 177 Backing up 177 Bit OGD U cscceeecanvensececactedciacndeses 165 COPYING ieee en een neta eee 171 Rare DE Fei Editing settings 00 174 Editing the song name 169 Folder Organization 166 Importing data 173 Bet tele 170 New SOng nonnnnannnannnnn0nnnni 47 168 leie E le eee eee 172 POLS CHOW VE 172 Hestormg 178 GAVINO EE 57 170 Tempo map 175 S nd CID E 43 SOUND CUIPkey 27 SOUND CLIP screen 44 SOUND CLIP TIME EEN 47 Specifications ceeeeeeeeeeees 277 Start End points cccccseeeeeeees 88 STEREO fader siecccrecseccsseneccecrcadas 23 STEREO ON KeY vscsssdesaneonscrociernas 23 STEREO OUT jacks 28 STEREO SEL KEY scssccseccconeces scence 23 Stereo track 130 STOP key 27 STORE CONFIRMATION ROM ceiro 211 Switching a button on off 31 SYNC A
50. RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The above warning is located on the rear of the unit Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third pr
51. TRACK 3 CHANNEL TRACK 4 CHANNEL TRACK 4 CHANNEL TRACK 5 CHANNEL TRACK 5 CHANNEL CHANNEL TRACK 6 TRACK 7 CHANNEL TRACK 6 CHANNEL TRACK 7 CO N M O1 HR O M oO CHANNEL TRACK 8 CHANNEL TRACK 8 CHANNEL TRACK 9 CHANNEL TRACK 9 CHANNEL TRACK 10 CHANNEL TRACK 10 CHANNEL TRACK 11 CHANNEL TRACK 11 CHANNEL TRACK 12 CHANNEL TRACK 12 CHANNEL TRACK 13 CHANNEL TRACK 13 CHANNEL TRACK 14 CHANNEL TRACK 14 CHANNEL TRACK 15 CHANNEL TRACK 15 CHANNEL TRACK 16 CHANNEL TRACK 16 CHANNEL TRACK 17 CHANNEL TRACK 17 CHANNEL TRACK 18 CHANNEL TRACK 18 CHANNEL TRACK 19 CHANNEL TRACK 19 CHANNEL TRACK 20 CHANNEL TRACK 20 CHANNEL RETURN 1 CHANNEL TRACK 21 CHANNEL RETURN 2 CHANNEL TRACK 22 MASTER STEREO OUT CHANNEL TRACK 23 MASTER MASTER AUX 1 CHANNEL TRACK 24 CHANNEL RETURN 1L MASTER CHANNEL RETURN 1R MASTER CHANNEL RETURN 2L MASTER CHANNEL RETURN 2R BALANCE STEREO OUT MASTER MASTER MASTER NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN MASTER NO ASSIGN MASTER NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN
52. The A point and B point can be set to any point in a song either via the panel keys or on screen editing Quick Locator points Locate Number section LOCATE keys 1 9 can be assigned to specific locations within a song and then you can move directly to the assigned locations simply by pressing the corresponding LOCATE keys Start end points These locate points normally correspond to the beginning and end of the song When you create a new song the Start point will initially be set to absolute time 00 00 00 000 When you record the end of the song will automatically be set as the End point If you record past the previously set End point the End point will automati cally be adjusted to the new song end point If you select SECOND or TIME CODE as the counter dis play format the Start point will be the origin zero point of the time and time code that are displayed This means that if you change the Start point the display will change accordingly depending on the counter display for mat AW2400 Owner s Manual Start point 00 00 00 00 00 Counter display format ABS 00 00 00 00 00 SECOND 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 TIME CODE 00 00 00 00 00 100 00 05 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 o0000 O0O000 C Start point 00 00 05 00 00 Counter display format ABS 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 00 00 SECOND 00 00 05 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0
53. The song will move to that location Assigned markers will appear as numbers 1 99 in the TRACK screen Track View page REMAIN e 1 H a 19 oo METRO a1 0 9dg 23 8 a HUTE View d LE UO TAs Stereo DS Trigger ee Marker icon e When creating an audio CD you can use markers to divide the stereo track into individual tracks that will be written to the audio CD gt p 214 Adjusting the position of a locate point or marker Adjusting the position of a locate point or marker Here s how you can adjust the position of a previously registered locate point or marker These operations are performed via the EDIT screen Mark Adj page To call this page press the Work Navigate section EDIT key as many times as necessary or press the F3 key after Adjusting the position of pressing the EDIT key a locate point EDI H Heu Sons p rie a Lat o_O Ho OB PUTI Ten DH DD DD miii cosa Call the EDIT screen Mark Adj page by UE either pressing the Work Navigate section REL ZERO Amapa ags e aan EDIT key as many times as necessary or c cater mele by pressing the F3 key after pressing the EDIT key 2 The Locator Position field is used to edit the various locate points not including the ER ECETE Bi GaGa Ge ey Ga Quick Locator points The positions for each locator are displayed in the Locator Position field Dirr Lin O iii A Mork Adi POST LON
54. Use this key to operate an on screen button or to execute a specific function DATA JOG dial Use this dial to change the value of a parameter If the JOG ON key is on this dial operates the Nudge function LOCATE keys These keys allow you to move directly to preset locate points These keys are also used for character and number entry 2 NUM LOCK key This key allows you to specify a destination locate point in measures beats AW2400 Owner s Manual Introducing the AW2400 H 25 Parts of the AW2400 and what they do OOPEMV 84 Dupont 26 E Layer section TRACK lt 41 12 13 24 amp CC OQ IN 1 8 key IN 9 16 key MASTER key TRACK 1 12 key TRACK 13 24 key Select the mixing layer to be operated by the SEL 1 12 REMOTE CJ keys the ON 1 12 keys and faders 1 12 The mixing layers that can be controlled when each of these keys are engaged are as follows IN 1 8 IN 1 8 key Input channels 1 8 Effect Return channels 1 4 IN 9 16 IN 9 16 key Input channels 9 16 Effect Return channels 1 4 AW2400 Owner s Manual MASTER MASTER key Bus Master 1 2 AUX Send Master 1 4 TRACK 1 12 key ZL JE Track channels 1 12 TRACK 13 24 key L J SEL ON 15 3 15 Track channels 13 24 SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL ON ON O
55. WE Using the LOCATE Keys To Enter Characters amp Numbers The LOCATE keys in the LOCATE NUMBER section can be used to enter characters and numbers in the same way as the number palette Repeatedly press the appropri ate LOCATE key 0 9 to select the required number or character The numbers and characters selected by each key are as follows LOCATE Key Number Selected Number Character Arrows indicate selection sequence CH CH gt Q R S gt p gt q gt r gt s gt U gt V gt t gt u gt v LN YoZ w x e dent gt H gt g gt h gt i vk gt j vk gt N gt O gt m gt n gt o gt B gt C gt a gt b gt c 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 O WOINIO OA KR oO rm gt gt E gt Fod e f Basic operation of the AW2400 Switching Mixing Layers Switching mixing layers affects the functions of ON keys 1 12 SEL keys 1 12 and faders 1 12 allowing efficient control in a variety of signal routing configurations Remote control of external equipment is also possi WEN a7 ble TRACK 41 12 13 24 amp REMOTE LEE The mixer section controls correspond to the various mixing layers as fol Layer Section lows LAYER Fader Section Section Key 1 7 8 STEREO Different mixing layers are selected via the keys in the LAYER section The key corresponding to the currently selected mixing layer will be lit Introducing
56. along with the AW2400 s own inputs AW2400 Cascade Connection External device AW2400 Wordclock master Wordclock slave Stereo bus Digital audio output Input channels Track channels Effect return channels Stereo output channel DIGITAL STEREO IN connector Stereo track STEREO OUT jack etc 1 Connect the digital output from the device to be cascade connected to the AW2400 DIGITAL STEREO IN connector 2 Call the DIO screen Setting page by either pressing the Work Navigate section DIO key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the DIO key 3 Move the cursor to the D ST IN button in the WORDCLOCK SOURCE field and press the ENTER key This selects the signal received at the DIGITAL STE REO IN connector as the wordclock source Wordclock and Cascade Settings e Check the Status Of the Digital Input Signal 4 Move the cursor to the STEREO BUS CAS CADE field Cascade connection settings are made in the STEREO BUS CASCADE field i DE STEREO BUS CASCADE button Enables or disables the cascade connection 2 ATT knob Adjusts the level of the signal received at the DIGI TAL STEREO IN connector STEREO BUS CASCADE D Move the cursor to the STEREO BUS CAS CADE button and press the ENTER key This connects the digital audio signal received from the external device directly to the AW2400 stereo bus 6 Use the ATT knob to
57. and other parameters for all channels to be stored in internal scene memory Up to 99 scenes can be stored for each song Stored scenes can be recalled at any time via the AW2400 panel controls or via MIDI program change commands Scene recall operations can also be recorded and played back as Automix data The main parameters stored with each scene are as follows e Fader positions for all channels and buses e Phase settings e ON key settings e Routing settings e Pan settings e Pair group settings e EQ settings e AUX send settings e Dynamics settings e Effect parameter settings e Attenuation settings Scene Memory Operation Scene store and recall operations are carried out from the SCENE screen Library page To call this page press the SCENE AUTOMIX USB sec List tion SCENE key as many times as necessary or press the This area lists the data stored in the scene memory The F1 key after pressing the SCENE key line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the data that is selected for operation Read only data is indicated by a This page contains the following items pag S lock icon 2 RENAME button Accesses the NAME EDIT popup window where you can edit the name of the scene selected in the list RECALL button Recalls the scene that is selected in the list 4 STORE button Stores the current settings into the location selected in the EE O list EE O CLEAR button LZ ol e 4 Deletes the
58. e CLOCK A symbol will appear when an appro priate wordclock signal is detected e SYNC A symbol will appear when the AW2400 is properly synchronized to the incoming wordclock signal A O symbol will appear when an appropriate word clock signal is not detected e Buttons that appear gray indicate that an appropriate digital signal is not available at the corresponding connector or slot and cannot be used 224 AW2400 Owner s Manual 4 SLOT When an I O card is installed in the rear panel slot a graphic symbol that indicates the type of card will appear here NO CARD will appear when no card is installed 5 IN OUT Indicates the number of input channels IN and output channels OUT available on an I O card installed in the rear panel slot 6 Fs Indicates the sampling frequency of the wordclock signal currently selected as the wordclock source e When using the AW2400 as wordclock slave check that the sampling frequency of the current song matches the sampling frequency shown in the Fs filed For example a song that was recorded with a sampling frequency of 44 1 kHz will play back with the wrong pitch and tempo if slaved to a 48 kHz word clock signal Unlock in the Fs field indicates that proper synchronization with the wordclock source has not been achieved In such cases check that an appropriate wordclock signal has been selected as the source Wordclock a
59. e Pressing the F4 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the RENAME button Buisse00j4 solueuAq pue OJ Ued Wes 4 Enter a name for the selected library set ting move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key refer to page 32 for details on name entry This confirms and enters the new name 156 AW2400 Owner s Manual Recalling EQ Dynamics Library settings The procedure for recalling stored library settings is as follows Access the page containing the library set tings to be recalled For details on accessing the various library pages refer to Accessing the EQ Dynamics Library screens on page 154 2 Rotate the DATA JOG dial to select the library setting to be recalled The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for recall 3 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key A popup window confirming the recall operation will appear The following illustration is an example of when the RECALL button is pressed in the PAN EQ screen EQ Lib page CONF IRHAT OH Recall 2 from the E Library e Pressing the F1 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the RECALL button 4 To actually recall the selected setting move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key e The recall confirmation popup window can be disabled if desired Refer to
60. each channel 2 DYN key Calls the DYNAMICS screen for the currently selected channel You can then press any of the SELECTED CHANNEL knobs 1 through 4 to access the corre sponding dynamics parameters E Monitor section MONITOR PHONES ks CEP N a N a E E d V MIN M AX MIN MAX E Scene Automix USB section SCENE AUTOMIX n 24 AW2400 Owner s Manual 3 AUX key Calls the AUX screen for the currently selected channel You can then press any of the SELECTED CHANNEL knobs 1 through 4 to access the corresponding AUX parameters 4 EFFECT key Calls the EFFECT screen for the currently selected chan nel You can then press any of the SELECTED CHAN NEL knobs 1 through 4 to access the corresponding EFFECT parameters 5 PAN EQ key Calls the PAN EQ screen for the currently selected chan nel After pressing the PAN EQ key you can press any of the Selected Channel knobs 1 through 4 to switch the PAN EQ screen pages 6 SELECTED CHANNEL knobs 1 4 These knobs are used to adjust the various parameters for the selected channel Press any of these knobs after press ing the DYN AUX EFFECT or PAN EQ key to call the corresponding parameter screen 7 LOW LO MID HI MID and HIGH keys These keys specify the EQ band to be adjusted by the SELECTED CHANNEL knobs when the EQ screen EQ page is showing CO MONITOR knob This knob adjusts the lev
61. move the cursor to the but 2 Call the AUTOMIX screen Automix page by ton and press the ENTER key The AUTOMIX key either pressing the AUTOMIX key as many will light green times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the AUTOMIX key 3 Press the top panel PLAY B key to start song playback 3 Make sure that the MODE field ENABLE Automix playback will begin along with song play DISABLE button is set to ENABLE back During this time the MODE field PLAY button will appear inverted 4 Move the cursor to the OVERWRITE field and engage the buttons corresponding to wr gt the parameters you want to record e If playback of a recorded Automix track is started from a point wf other than the beginning of the track the mix at that point will be recalled the parameters immediately prior to the point at e If you re record a previously recorded parameter to the same which playback was begun will be recalled This means that channel the previously recorded data for that parameter will you will hear the correct mix no matter where you start play be overwritten If the parameter to be recorded has not back already been recorded in the target track no data will be over written 4 To stop Automix playback press the top panel STOP M key 5 Set the return time as required by moving the cursor to the RETURN TIME field and using the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC Return time determines the length o
62. often be the result The normal procedure is to designate one device that will be the source of the wordclock signal for the entire system as the wordclock master or simply clock master and Se all devices that receive and synchronize to the wordclock T 00 00 8 eae master as wordclock slaves The AW2400 can be set to Ad 10k Settina E Suus E ES function either as the wordclock master or slave WORDCLOCE SOURCE Call the DIO screen Setting page by either This page includes the following items pressing the Work Navigate section DIO D WORDCLOCK SOURCE field key as many times as necessary or by Selects the wordclock source to which the AW2400 will pressing the F1 key after pressing the synchronize The condition of the received wordclock and DIO key synchronization status are also displayed here Wordclock settings are made in the WORDCLOCK VARI field SOURCE field Provides fine adjustment of the internal clock in order to control the Vari pitch function 3 STEREO BUS CASCADE field Provides settings that allow an external device connected to the DIGITAL STEREO IN connector to cascade con fe Gare eee gee nected to the AW2400 stereo bus Se ao fe WORDCLIICE SOURCE PR Digital Input Output amp Optional Card Settings CO AW2400 Owner s Manual 223 Wordclock and Cascade Settings NO Ei Sbuae DIE jeuoldo g Indjnojndy Eu dG INT button When this button is on th
63. or the F2 key to call the FX Track page The FX Input page allows adjustment of the input channel send levels while the FX Track page allows adjustment of the track channel send levels The items included in the FX Input and FX Track pages are as follows EFFECT screen FX Input page dal Heu ZOE 120 0 T Scene 11 11 ESSE aa 00 00 00 000 EFFECTI SEND IHPUT 1 SR COU Input Fert Track ZS Fel Edit Fel Lib 4 INPUT field Allows adjustment of the effect send levels for input channels 1 16 You can also select the point from which the send signal is derived via the PRE POST button below each knob e An effect that has been inserted into a channel cannot be simultaneously used with the effect e All effects can be used via the effect sends and returns in new song with the initial default set tings If an effect has been inserted in a specific channel it can be removed and freed for use with the sends and returns as described in Inserting an Effect Into a Channel on page 119 EFFECT screen FX Track page EFFECT 1 epp mm pp 3 1 Sceneal TRACK 1 z a d 00 00 00 000 101 11 ECT ee EFFECT SEND 2 D d 3 H 16 11 OOOO OOOOOOD 12 oo oo oo mo 0 OD 02 0 CD OO 02 F ST FOSTE FOST FOST FOST FOST FOST Wi FHETT POSTE FOST F 0 OD 0 0 CD FOI FOSTE FOST FOST FOST FOET Fost TRACK field Allows adjustment of the effect send levels for track chan
64. proceed as follows 1 Make sure that the power is turned off 2 Loosen the screws that hold the slot cover in place and remove the slot cover Keep the removed slot cover in a safe place Before you start E 3 Align the edges of the card with the guard rails inside the slot and insert the card into the slot Push the card all the way into the slot so that the con nector at the end of the card is correctly mated with the connector inside the slot 4 Use the screws included with the card to fasten the card in place Malfunctions or incorrect operation may occur if the card is not fastened AW2400 Owner s Manual 13 Wels nok 10 g 14 AW2400 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Introducing the AW2400 This chapter describes the features of the AW2400 the name of each part and its function and introduces terminology you need to know when using the AW2400 Features of the AW2400 The AW2400 is an audio workstation that combines a digital mixer multi effect processor hard disk recorder and CD RW drive Introducing the AW2400 ei The following diagram shows the signal flow within the AW2400 MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 Input channels 1 16 Track channels 1 24 Va Slol Effect return channels 1 4 DIGITAL Bus1 L R Bus2 L R STEREO IN AUX buses 1 4 connector Effect buses 1 4 Stereo buses L R Stereo output channel Recorder input patching x24 OMNI OUT jacks 1 4 DI
65. r i Sch O ro Stereo output channel Overdubbing Eh Signal flow when overdubbing Recorder section O mee ken pe ken mea ras D MIC LINE INPUT jacks Oxo r0 r0 ie Track channels Input channels BRN Di a gt Peng STEREO S e h 1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 BUS 1 BUS 2 Ee 1 BUS 2 AUX 1 EERIE a Mixer section AW2400 Owner s Manual 65 Assigning the input signal to a track Assigning the input signal to a track In order to overdub you must first assign the mic or instrument to a new track The basic proce Buiqqnpl8AQ Ny 66 dure is the same as when recording the first track Lower the STEREO fader to the posi tion 2 Connect your instrument or mic to a MIC LINE INPUT jack 3 Call the RECORD screen Direct page by either pressing the Work Navigate section RECORD key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the RECORD key AW2400 Owner s Manual 4 Assign the input channel to which your instrument mic is connected to a new track and adjust the level For details on this step refer to Assigning input sig nals to tracks Direct recording gt p 51 The diagram below shows an example of when input channel is assigned to track 5 RECORD engems FT SC BEE 101 01 EES TRACKS 00 00 00 000 tii DIGITAL IN F DIRECT
66. starts from 0 and indicates the current time in minutes seconds milliseconds This counter is separate from the normal song counter D Play the part to be recorded in time with the metronome e The metronome sound will not be recorded If necessary you can move the cursor to the metronome knob and turn the DATA JOG dial to adjust the volume of the metronome sound e The knobs keys of the selected channel are active even while the SOUND CLIP screen is showing If necessary you can apply EQ and dynamics processing to the signal being recorded 7 Press the STOP W key to stop recording and E symbols on the display indicate the start and end point e With the default AW2400 settings a maximum of 30 seconds can be recorded to a sound clip If you continue recording for longer than 30 seconds the last 30 seconds recorded will be retained the counter display during recording will continue to advance e You can specify up to 180 seconds as the maximum length that can be recorded in a sound clip You are free to make this setting before creating a new song but this cannot be changed once the song has been created gt p 47 Playing a sound clip Playing a sound clip 1 Press the PLAY B key to hear the 3 Stop playback move the cursor to the CLIP recorded sound clip The sound clip will play repeatedly from the start point to the end point To stop playback press the STOP W key If you record again the
67. 0 all delay 100 all reverb REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV HI 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 E DELAY gt REV One input two output delay and reverb effects in series Parameter DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Reverb density Description Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback DELAY HI 0 1 1 0 Delay high frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency DLY BAL 0 100 Delay and delayed reverb balance 0 all delayed reverb 100 all delay REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV HI 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density AW2400 Owner s Manual 2s O Q Q Q lt 255 Effects Parameters E DIST gt DELAY One input two output distortion and delay effects in series Parameter Range Description DST TYPE DST1
68. 0 ms Early reflections decay characteristics 0 dead 10 live Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Reflection diffusion left right reflection spread DENSITY ER NUM 0 100 1 19 Reflection density Number of early reflections FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High frequency feedback ratio High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency E GATE REVERB REVERSE GATE One input two output early reflections with gate and early reflections with reverse gate Parameter TYPE ROOMSIZE Range Type A Type B 0 1 20 0 Description Type of early reflection simulation Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY DIFF 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins Reflection diffusion left right reflection spread DENSITY Reflection density HI RATIO ER NUM 1 19 High frequency feedback ratio Number of early reflections FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU High pass filter cutoff frequency Low pass filter cutoff frequency AW2400 Owner s Manual 2s O Q E Q lt 245 Effects Parameters E MONO DELAY One input two output basic repeat delay Parameter Range
69. 000 dier SCENE FGM ASSIGH PGM CHANGE SCENE HO ZTITLE aS Sort Ph Assi arn List This lists the scenes of the current song The line enclosed by a dotted frame is the scene currently selected for operation 2 Program change number This indicates the program change number 001 128 Move the cursor to this number and use the DATA JOG dial to scroll the list upward or downward Connecting to External Equipment 3 Scene Move the cursor to this area and use the DATA JOG dial to select the scene that you want to assign to the corresponding program number 4 INITIALIZE button Returns the program change assignments to their ini tial state ES e In the initial state Program change numbers 1 99 correspond to scenes 1 99 program change number 100 Initial Data all scene parameters in their initial state and program change numbers 101 128 are NO ASSIGN unassigned Move the cursor to the program change number and use the DATA JOG dial to select the program change number for which you want to change the assignment e The INC DEC keys can also be used to select program change numbers Move the cursor to the scene in the list and use the DATA JOG dial to select the scene that you want to assign to the correspond ing program change number Repeat steps 2 3 to assign the desired scenes to other program change numbers ES e The PGM Assign page settings apply to all son
70. 3 99 0s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency REV FLG 0 100 Reverb and flange balance 0 all reverb 100 all flange FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform gt Kei Kei D Q x 252 AW2400 Owner s Manual E REV gt FLANGE One input two output reverb and flanger effects in series Parameter REV TIME 0 3 99 0s Effects Parameters Description Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency REV BAL 0 100 Reverb and flanged reverb balance 0 all flanged reverb 100 all reverb FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulati
71. 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 04101 3030 SWITZERLAND LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94 8008 Ziirich Switzerland Tel 01 383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20 A 1100 Wien Austria Tel 01 60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC SLOVAKIA HUNGARY SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Austria CEE Department Schleiergasse 20 A 1100 Wien Austria Tel 01 602039025 HEAD OFFICE PA13 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgefiihr ten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshandlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungslandern erh ltlich Para detalles sobre productos contacte su tienda Yamaha m s cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo POLAND Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Sp z 0 0 Oddzial w Polsce ul 17 Stycznia 56 PL 02 146 Warszawa Poland Tel 022 868 07 57 THE NETHERLANDS BELGIUM LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5 b 4133 AB Vianen The Netherlands Tel 0347 358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70 77312 Marne la Vall e Cedex 2 France Tel 01 64 61 4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S P A Combo Division Viale Italia 88 20020 Lainate Milano Italy Tel 02 935 771 SPAIN PORTUGAL Yamaha Hazen M sica S A Ctra de la Coruna km 17 200 28230 Las Rozas Madrid Spain Tel 91 639 8888 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia
72. AW2400 Insert the CD R RW media containing the backup data into the CD RW drive If the backup data occupies more than one volume of media insert the first volume 2 Call the SONG screen Restore page by either pressing the Work Navigate section SONG key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F4 key after pressing the SONG key In this page song data that you backed up to CD R RW media can be restored to the internal hard disk 3 Make sure that the cursor is located at the READ CD INFO button and press the ENTER key AW2400 Owner s Manual Information will be read from the inserted CD R RW media When the information has been read a display like the following will appear SOG Bay Neu _ sons RE e He DA INPUT 1 A 00 00 00 000 101 11 ECE ea SOHG RESTORE SIZE BIT FS amp EHO IT SYSTEM 1 6 o D Heu Sona ZETNB 16 44 1 o BE3_New_Song 463NB 16 44 1 o D d Heu Gona II IB 16 46 o D Heu Gona 1S4hB 24 44 1 o The n s_One SISMNB 16 44 1 Restore This page contains the following items List This area lists the data that has been backed up on the CD R RW media The symbols at the right of the list indicate whether an item of data has been selected or disabled O for restore NOTE e The maximum number of songs that can be displayed is 100 2 SORT box Changes the order of the songs displayed in the song list Operation is the same as for the
73. Asia Pte Ltd 03 11 A Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road Singapore 409015 Tel 747 4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co Ltd 3F 6 Sec 2 Nan Jing E Rd Taipei Taiwan 104 R O C Tel 02 2511 8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co Ltd 891 1 Siam Motors Building 15 16 floor Rama 1 road Wangmai Pathumwan Bangkok 10330 Thailand Tel 02 215 2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty Ltd Level 1 99 Queensbridge Street Southbank Victoria 3006 Australia Tel 3 9693 5111 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2313 Yamaha Corporation Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2441 YAMAHA Yamaha Web Site English only http www yamahasynth com Yamaha Manual Library http www yamaha co jp manual U R G Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division Yamaha Corporation 2005 Yamaha Corporation WE25170 507POCP15 2 02B0 Printed in Japan This document is printed on chlorine free ECF paper with soy ink
74. CD into the CD RW drive You can import data from the following types of media Audio data CD DA e Audio CD e CD Extra only the first session of CD DA e Mixed Mode CD only CD DA data of the second and later tracks WAV files e ISO9660 Level 1 format CD ROM CD R CD RW e Mixed Mode CD The directory name and file name cannot use charac ters other than uppercase alphanumeric characters and the _ underscore character 5 Call the EDIT screen Edit page by either pressing the Work Navigate section EDIT key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the EDIT key 6 Move the cursor to the editing command field use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select the desired editing command Select IMPORT CD AUDIO if the import source is an audio CD or CD Extra or select IMPORT CD WAV if the import source is a WAV file 7 Press the ENTER key to confirm the edit command The READ CD INFO button will appear in the center of the display The following illustration shows the screen when you ve selected IMPORT CD AUDIO as the edit com mand COMMANDO LINPORT CO AUDIO READ CO TREU n s ee ee ee er PCL ee er ee ee ee ee eee rey Pere ee Tere NOTE P e If you choose a song whose sample rate is 48 kHz in the IMPORT CD AUDIO command a message of Current Song is 48kHz Fs Type appears and you won t be able to load the audio data
75. Call the Effect Library Screen Effect library save and recall operations are carried out via the EFFECT screen FX Lib page 1 Press the Selected Channel section EFFECT key so that its indicator lights The EFFECT screen will appear 2 Press one of the Selected Channel section knobs 1 4 The corresponding EFFECT screen will appear e The Effect Library is common to all four internal effect proces sors So save and recall operations can be carried out from any EFFECT screen 3 Press the F4 key to access the FX Lib page All effect library operations are carried out via the FX Lib page The items in this page are as follows GAB Heu sons E o Initial D 1 00 00 00 000 101 11 Ee EFFECT 1 TRACK amp EFFECT LIBRARY METER HANES Reverb Hall USED AS IHPUT 1 2 TYPE REVERB HALL 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 rs PINS BOUT eaaa S Mix BALANCE Se Q 1208 RENAE 1 0 EFFECT TYPE RENERE HALL FECAL TI 3 11M 20UT Reverb Room STORE 1 __ 4 Reverb Stage Reverb Plate ONSE 6 Fx1 Edit 3 MET Fa neu Fal inock a Current effect information This is the same as the EFFECT screen FX Edit page gt p 121 2 RENAME button Accesses the NAME EDIT popup window where you can edit the name of the library selected in the list AW2400 Owner s Manual 3 RECALL button Recalls the library data that is selected in the list Refer to Recalling Effect Library settings
76. Effect Library settings on page 116 recall INSERT EFF on the display and press the an effect library preset that is based on the ENTER key effect you want to use A popup window allowing selection of the effect to be inserted as well as an I O card channel to and from 2 Call the CH VIEW screen View page by which the signal will be sent received will appear either pressing the Selected Channel sec tion VIEW key as many times as neces sary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the VIEW key The signal flow and mix parameters for each channel are displayed in this page E ER dr 1 ve ER dr st Fis 3 Use the Layer section keys INPUT SEL keys SEL keys or STEREO SEL key to select the channel into which the effect is to be inserted The signal flow for the selected channel will be dis played NOTE Li To insert an effect that is to be used on just one instru e The same effect number can not be selected for multiple ment connected to the AW2400 for example insert channels the required effect into the appropriate input channel e Inserted internal effects cannot be used with the effect sends and returns The example diagram shows input channel selected for effect insertion e SLOT1 16 Select one of these options to insert an external effect unit via an INSERINERE I O card If SLOT1 is selected for example Output channel 1 of el CH VIEL aheno leng TH sceneat E O card is used to
77. H key Stop Stop Stop Rewind speed 8x lt gt 16x Rewind REW lt lt key Rewind Rewind Fast forward speed Fast forward 8x lt gt 16x FF gt gt key Fast forward Fast forward RTZ a key Return to zero and play Return to zero and stop Return to zero and play or stop depending on Play Stop status prior to Return to zero and play or stop depending on Play Stop status prior to rewind fast forward Press simultaneously with PLAY b gt key to begin recording Punch In Press simultaneously with PLAY b gt key to begin recording REC key Transport Locate Operation E The REC key has no effect if no tracks are set to the record standby mode Move To a Specified Location The AW2400 allows you to move directly to any location in a song by numerically specifying the desired locate point 2 Enter the locate point in measures beats You can use either of the following two methods to enter the locate point Use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys Move the cursor to the measure or beat field and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to set as required 1 With the recorder stopped press the Locate Number section NUM LOCK key so that its indicator lights A popup window will appear into which you can enter the destination locate point HOM LOCATE Input Locate Point AW2400 Ownere Manual 87 Move T
78. I5 ENB eae oe m 3 No Connection Channel knob 1 can now be used to adjust panning for the channel currently selected via the SEL keys For z more details refer to Pan Control on page 147 NOTE S eem EE e When the outputs from multiple channels are mixed and mm recorded it may be necessary to adjust the input channel fad ers to prevent the combined signal level from getting too high e We recommend that you not use the GAIN knob to adjust the volume balance of the input channels This will degrade the S N ratio and may cause the sound to distort e To hear the input channel pan settings via the monitor system e This operation can also be carried out by moving the cursor to the track channels corresponding to the two record destina the mark of the record track and repeatedly pressing the tion tracks should be assigned as a pair ENTER key e When paired tracks gt p 58 are selected as the record desti nation the pan settings of the odd and even numbered tracks will automatically be set to left and right respectively allowing the pair to be used as a Stereo track e When a single track is selected as the record destination the pan of the corresponding track channel will automatically be set to center e To cancel all connections move the cursor to the SAFE but ton and press the ENTER key AW2400 Owner s Manual f 55 Direct recording and Mixed recording e Recording on a track Bu
79. If for example you have selected input channel 1 as your record source the top panel keys will appear as follows 1 2 3 4 5 GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN Vly Vly Vly VJ 6 GAIN GAIN Vly Vly Vly Vly i al N a bie me kb af ba Sg D e bk a i a ZA ZA ZA ZA ZA ZA ZA ZA LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC Wl OIO O OOO lit The display will appear as shown here Dm gt Senerara 5 e GC WS e You can also select an input channel by a moving the cursor to the lt gt symbol of the desired input channel and pressing the ENTER key A i234 e To select the DIGITAL STEREO IN con nector as the record source you will need to assign the DIGITAL STEREO IN con nector to an adjacent pair of odd and even numbered tracks via the DIGITAL IN field 1 2 15 16 See page 100 for details 6 Press the Layer section TRACK 1 12 key so that its indicator lights This selects the TRACK 1 12 mixing layer so you can use ON keys 1 12 SEL keys 1 12 and faders 1 12 to operate track channels 1 12 At this point faders 1 12 will move to the current level settings for track channels 1 12 7 Press the SEL key of the track channel on which you want to record The selected input channel and track will be connected internally At this time only the selected INPUT SEL key and SEL key will be flashing red The flashing SEL key indicates that the corre
80. Input signals from inputs 1 8 of an I O card installed in the slot e SLOT 9 16 Input signals from inputs 9 16 of an I O card installed in the slot 8 ve Not selected AW2400 Owner s Manual Patching and signal flow M 99 Input signal patching MOJ IEUDIS pue Huiyoled W 100 2 Input channels This area indicates the connection state of input chan nels 1 16 When you move the cursor to the sym bol and press the ENTER key the symbol will be highlighted and the corresponding input channel will be selected as a recording source 3 Tracks This area indicates the connection state of tracks 1 24 When you move the cursor to the lt gt symbol and press the ENTER key the symbol will be highlighted and the corresponding track will be selected as a recording destination You can switch a track s mute status on off by moving the cursor to the number that indicates the track number and pressing the ENTER key 4 REMAIN This indicates the remaining recordable time The remaining time will depend on the number of tracks that are enabled for recording 5 DIGITAL IN This assigns the DIGITAL STEREO IN connector to an input channel Here you can select from the follow ing items e 1 2 15 16 Assign the signal of the DIGITAL STEREO IN connector to a pair of adjacent odd numbered even num bered input channels 1 2 15 16 o en aaan The DIGITAL STEREO IN conn
81. Inthe menu bar select Options menu gt Steinberg Houston Preferences R Key Commands 4 The Generic Remote setting display will 3 The Key Commands window will open In the appear Set the MIDI Input and MIDI Out menu bar select Options Import Key put filed Commands Nd ge 4 A dialog box will appear Select the Logic MIDI Input your MIDI input device preference file Logic32 prf from the included CD ROM and click the Open button When you import the file the following settings will iwer be made Device Setup Devices EMDI Midi upa Ta AIMIDI Inputs its ES Default MIDI Ports i DirectMusic Controller 7 Windows MIDI Fader 2 Controller 2 S iO Remote Devices Fader 3 Controller 3 7 Global Commands IR Fader4 Controler 4 7 LS CH Transport Fader 5 Controller E 7 Record Repeat Time Display Fader 6 Controller 6 7 Num Record Toggle CH Video Fada Ee 7 CS Num Capture Last Take as Recording Lem Video Player Fader 8 Controller D 7 Capture Last Take as Recording amp Play h VST Audiobay a ee Fader 9 Controller 9 7 Num Er Play a Driver Fader 10 Controller 10 7 Delete Pause deeg Fader 11 Controller 11 Zi Num O Stop VST Outputs Cantal 3 Space Play or Stop i VST System Link Home Rewind a x End Forward muptremote 1 Home Fast Rewind b N End Fast Forward f Rewind 1 frame f Forward 1
82. O D Q x 248 12 0 to 12 0 dB L lt R Turn L Turn R AW2400 Owner s Manual High shelving filter gain Effects Parameters E TREMOLO Two input two output tremolo effect Parameter Description 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed 0 100 Modulation depth Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency 12 0 to 12 0 dB EQ peaking type gain 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain WHO PITCH One input two output high quality pitch shifter Available for internal effects 1 and 2 Parameter Description PITCH 12 to 12 semitones Pitch shift FINE 50 to 50 cents Pitch shift fine DELAY 0 0 1000 0 ms Delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback MODE 1 10 Pitch shift precision E DUAL PITCH Two input two output pitch shifter Parameter Description PITCH 1 24 to 24 semitones Channel 1 pitch shift FINE 1 50 to 50 cents Channel 1 pitch shift fine LEVEL 1 100 to 100 Channel 1 level plus values for normal phase minus values for reverse phase PAN 1 L63 to R63 Channel 1 pan DELAY 1 0 0 1000 0 ms Channel 1 delay time
83. OFF button Engage this button it will appear inverted to disable transmission of MIDI synchronization messages e MTC button When this button is ON MTC will be transmitted while the recorder is run ning e MIDI CLOCK Button SE When this button is ON the MIDI clock will be transmitted while the recorder is running Also appropriate START STOP CONTINUE and SONG POSI TION messages will be transmitted when the transport is operated e MIDI clock operation is based on the tempo specified in the Tempo Map refer to page 175 for Tempo Map setup details AW2400 Owner s Manual MIDI MS C 199 Connecting to External Equipment z 200 Connecting to External Equipment This section will provide some examples of how the AW2400 can be connected to and used with external MIDI devices Synchronizing the AW2400 With External MIDI Devices Using MTC AW2400 song playback and recording can be synchronized to external MIDI devices such as a com puter based sequencer application or a workstation type synthesizer with a built in sequencer Furthermore MMC can be used to allow remote control of the AW2400 trans port functions from the external MIDI device Refer to the following diagram and connect the AW2400 to your workstation synthe sizer or computer Workstation synthesizer with a built in sequencer RER MIDI lt MIDI IN MMC OUT or MTC
84. OUT MULTI CONNECTION OFF e In this example we will use direct recording in which one input channel is assigned to one track However you may also use mixed recording in which multiple input channels are sent to the Bus 1 2 and recorded on one through four tracks Setting the mix balance and pan Setting the mix balance and pan Here s how to set the volume balance and pan for the previously recorded tracks and the tracks that you now will be overdubbing 1 While you play back the song raise the track channel faders for the previously recorded tracks to an appropriate monitor ing level e For example if you ve already recorded tracks 1 4 press the Layer section TRACK 1 12 key to make it light and use the top panel faders 1 4 to control track channels 1 4 Press the SEL key for a previously recorded track and press the Selected Channel section PAN EQ key so that its indicator lights Rotate the Selected Channel knob 1 to adjust the pan Adjust the pan in the same way for the other track channels 4 Stop the recorder and while producing sound on your instrument adjust the fader of the recording destination track channel so that the monitoring level is appropriate The track channel for the recording destination track will send the input signal to the stereo bus while recording or stopped and will send the track playback signal to the stereo bus during playback This means that
85. RAYONNEMENT LASER VISIBLE ET INVISIBLE EN CAS D OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU VORSICHT KLASSE 3B SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GE FFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN ADVARSEL KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRALING VED BNING UNDG UDS ETTELSE FOR STR LING ADVARSEL KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRALING N R DEKSEL PNES UNNG EKSPONERING FOR STRALEN VARNING KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTR LNING N R DENNA DEL R PPNAD STR LEN R FARLIG VARO KURSSI 3B N KYV JA N KYM T N AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LASERS TEILYLLE L KATSO S TEESEN CAUTION CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM Handling the CD R RW media Please observe the following points when handling the disc Failure to do so may cause problems such as the recorded data being lost the drive to malfunction or the printed label to become blurred e Do not place the disc in locations of direct sunlight high temperature or high humidity e Do not touch the recording surface of the disc Hold the disc at the edges e Gently wipe dust or dirt off of the recording surface of the disc Use an air duster or cleaner to remove dust Vigorously rubbing the surface of the disc with a dry cloth may scratch the disc e If the disc surface needs cleaning wipe gently from the center to the outside of the disc with a soft damp cloth then gently wipe off remaining moistu
86. Simultaneous Play Tracks 24 bits For mixdown the number of simultaneous record tracks is two and the number of simultaneous playback tracks is 24 for 16 bit songs or 12 for 24 bit songs For example in a 16 bit song each track you place in record ready mode will decrease the number of simulta neously playable tracks by one Muting will begin with higher numbered tracks If you ve placed the maximum of sixteen tracks in record ready mode a maximum of eight tracks can be played back simultaneously If you want to return a muted track to playable condition you must first reduce the number of tracks that are in record ready mode and then defeat muting on the track you want to play back Viewing all audio tracks In the TRACK screen View page you can view all tracks to see whether they contain data and switch muting on off for each track To call this page press the Work Navigate section TRACK key as many times as necessary or press the F1 key after pressing the TRACK key AW2400 Owner s Manual This page contains the following items 120 0 L1 Sceneat u i ESCH ee Bes Heu Sons Tene len 000 TRACK 7 WTRF 2 HO REC O o aE REMAIN 13 31 da TRACK Here you can select the track to be controlled in the screen Choose from 1 24 audio tracks 1 24 or ST ste reo track The number and name of the virtual track selected
87. Song List page gt p 170 3 ALL SET button Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to select all songs in the list to be restored Press ing the F1 key whiled holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same affect as the ALL SET but ton 4 ALL CLEAR button Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to deselect all songs so that they won t be restored Pressing the F2 key whiled holding the Display sec tion SHIFT key has the same affect as the ALL CLEAR button SYSTEM button Selects the system data AW2400 settings you make in the UTILITY screen for restoring 6 RESTORE button Restores of the selected song s Pressing the F4 key whiled holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same affect as the RESTORE button Make sure the cursor is in the list area use the DATA JOG dial to select the song you want to restore then press the ENTER key The symbol at the right will change to the symbol indicating that this song data has been selected for restoring If you turn on the ALL SET button all data shown in the list will be selected in one step If you want to restore the system data move the cursor to the SYSTEM button and press the ENTER key The button will be turned on and the system data will be selected for restoring Restoring songs 6 To execute the restore operation move the cursor to the RESTORE button and press the ENTER ke
88. Te RENAME button ne 5 REHA IH ER 13 31 METRO SI 96dB E Se MAIER 3 Lo oOoOoOoOo0 OOOOOO0OO0O0O00 a m 2 Move the cursor to the TRACK field and use the DATA JOG dial or the INC DEC keys to make it read ST You can edit the name of the virtual track that is cur rently enabled for the stereo track Move the cursor to the RENAME button and press the ENTER key The NAME EDIT popup window will appear allow ing you to assign a name to the virtual track Edit the name of the virtual track move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key For details on entering a name gt p 32 The edited name will be finalized The Trigger Track Function The Trigger Track Function Operation of the Trigger Track function is described in this section About Trigger Track The Trigger Track function allows the track ON keys and faders to be used to start and stop playback of recorded tracks This is ideal for performance situations in which you want to switch phrases or patterns in real time or when you need to start background music on cue for example When the Trigger Track function is active pressing a track channel ON key begins playback of the corresponding track from the beginning of the song to the end of the data recorded on that track blank sections in the middle of the track will be played normally The track is played once Playback start Playback sto
89. a high volume Please use caution AW2400 Owner s Manual Utility functions 209 AW2400 Preferences suonouny AINN AW2400 Preferences The UTILITY screen Preference page provides a number of basic preference parameters for the AW2400 operating environment including digital input output setup copy protection and others To call this page press the Work Navigate section UTIL ITY key as many times as necessary or press the F2 key after pressing the UTILITY key 128 800 No Lili 101 01 ESAAARE Kap Heu Sons PREFERENCES DIRECT OUT EXTRACT POSITION UTILITY INPUT 1 L OUT GHT CODAT DIGITAL REC Qi DIsABLE_ AUTO SALE Kr rr STORE RECALL FREEROLL POSTROLL TIME This page contains the following items G DIGITAL OUT COPYRIGHT button Specifies whether SCMS Serial Copy Management Sys tem copy protect flags will be written into the digital sig nal that is output from the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack Protect is enabled if the button is set to ENABLE and dis abled if the button is set to DISABLE If copy protect is enabled you will be able to copy the sig nal from the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack to an MD or DAT recorder but it will not be possible to make a second generation digital copy from that data When copy protect is enabled AW2400 DIGITAL OUT COPYRIGHT ENABLE 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
90. audio data e Audio data for undo and redo operations System File AW2400_SYS BIN Stores UTILITY screen settings and information for data man agement juswebeuew Duoe Wee 166 LU AW2400 Owners Manual The following operations are possible by directly access ing the data on the internal hard disk from a computer For detailed operating procedures refer to WAV File Transfer USB Storage Mode on page 230 e Specified audio data on the internal hard disk can be directly edited from a computer using an appropriate waveform editor application The song will become unplayable if you change the sampling frequency or quantization of the audio data but you can change the length of the waveforms without problems WAV files transferred from a computer to the Transport folder can be imported to the AW2400 audio tracks as required and specified regions of audio data can be exported to the computer as WAV files which can then be imported into computer based DAW applications The entire contents of the internal hard disk or individual songs can be backed up to the computer Managing Your Songs Song management operations are accessed via the SONG screen Song List page This page also includes the shutdown functions To call this page press the SONG key in the Work Navi gate section a number of times or press the F1 key after pressing the SONG key This page contains the following items
91. become the current song NOTE e If you select NO any changes that you made to the current song since you last saved it will be lost You re the Only One Timothy Akers AW2400 Owner s Manual Listening to the demo song GE 41 Playing the demo song Playing the demo song Here s how to play back the demo song you loaded and adjust the monitor level 1 Make sure that the AW2400 s MONITOR knob PHONES knob and the volume of your monitor system are turned down 2 Press the PLAY P key RTZ REW FF el STOP ug REC The demo song will begin playing uos ow p out 0 Bulus siq Di 3 To adjust the monitor level appropriately use the AW2400 s MONITOR knob PHONES knob and the volume control of your monitor system ES e The demo song uses the Scene function to switch the settings of the mixer This means that playback will occur using the pre specified balance you do not need to operate the fad ers 4 To stop the song press the STOP W key RTZ FF oOo REW EN N PLAY REC 42 AW2400 Owners Manual Chapter 5 Recording to a sound clip The AW2400 has a Sound Clip function that lets you record and play back independently of the recorder section You can use a sound clip to quickly record and play back your performances on an audio source connected to the AW2400 This is an ideal way to capture ideas for a song or arrangement or to record a simple accompaniment f
92. button to close the Control Panel window D Insert the included CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 6 First make sure the POWER switch on the AW2400 is set to STANDBY then use a USB cable to connect the USB connector of the computer to the USB connector of the AW2400 When the AW2400 is turned on the computer automatically displays the Found New Hardware Wizard 7 If the Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software is displayed select No not this time and then click Next 8 Select Install software automatically recom mended I and then click Next The system starts the installation NOTE e Some computers may take a few minutes to show this screen About the CD ROM included with the AW2400 Q When the installation is complete the system D Click Continue displays Completing the Found New Hard The Select a Destination is displayed ware Wizard Click Finish O Install YAMAHA USBMIDI Driver NOTE Select a Destination Introduction Select a destination disk to install the YAMAHA USBMIDI e Some computers may take about a few minutes to show this Select Destination Reiver sofoware screen after the installation is complete 3 10 Restart the computer Macintosh HD 76 7GB 42 7GB Free The driver has been installed Installing this software requires 0 bytes of disk space You have selected to install this software on the disk Macin
93. cannot be used A region is a continuous segment of audio data recorded on one track Appendix AW2400 Owner s Manual 265 About the CD ROM included with the AW2400 x pu ddy About the CD ROM included with the AW2400 Special Notices The software and this owner s manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden without the written consent of the manufacturer Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software This disk is a CD ROM Do not attempt to play the disk on an audio CD player Doing so may result in irrepara ble damage to your audio CD player Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be announced separately Contents of the CD ROM The included CD ROM contains a backup file that you can use to restore the AW2400 to its factory set condition setting files that let you use the AW2400 s MIDI Remote function with various DAW software and a USB MIDI driver that is necessary to allow MIDI message transmis sion and reception via the USB connector Folder Software name Contents file name Backup file for restoring the internal hard disk to its fac tory set condition A
94. changes that were recorded NOTE P e If you set CONTROL CHANGE MODE to 1 operating track channels 1 16 will transmit control changes via the corre sponding MIDI channel 1 16 For this reason you should normally record operations only for a single channel at a time unless your sequencer is able to record multiple MIDI chan nels simultaneously AW2400 Owner s Manual 203 Using the MIDI Remote function Using the MIDI Remote function About the MIDI Remote function NEE EE i it The AW2400 provides a MIDI Remote function that lets ren en you use the top panel controls to transmit the desired Di gt MIDI messages a a B a gt By using the MIDI Remote function you can use the De AW 2400 as a physical controller for a computer program or MIDI tone generator MIDI messages can be assigned to the following controls Alternatively you can specify that a MIDI message with a Mixer section fixed value is transmitted only when you press the ON e Faders 1 12 13 16 key to turn it on indicator lit For example if you assign e ON keys 1 12 13 16 program change 1 that program change number will be transmitted each time you turn on the ON key Transport section Program change Program change e RTZ ka key e REW lt lt key number 1 number 1 e FF PP key e STOP key f transmit i transmit e PLAY gt key REC key 4 b 4 lt lt gt lt Of these MIDI messages assi
95. characteristics CD R You can write data to a new CD R disc and append addi tional data later on You cannot erase data that has already been written and rewrite the disc Once you perform a pro cess known as finalizing the disc the audio data written to the CD R can be played by a CD RW drive or by most CD players CD RW In addition to writing and appending data this type of media lets you erase all recorded data and write new data to the disc Audio data written to a CD RW can be played back by a CD RW drive or by CD players that support CD RW media AW2400 Owner s Manual ew Creating an audio CD w 213 Writing an audio CD NO SOF gd opne ue Buneay 214 Writing an audio CD There are two ways in which you can write audio data to CD R RW media Track At Once This method writes the data one CD track at a time The advantage of this method is that you can add new data to a disc that already contains data With the Track At Once method the data from the begin ning to the end of a song s stereo track 1s written to the CD as one track Even if there is a portion during the song that contains no data it will be written as silent audio Since each track is written individually an interval of approximately two seconds will be created between each track Start End Start End Song B Audio CD J Track 2 interval 2 seconds Track 1 In order for a disc
96. cur rent song the highlighted song In order to delete a protected song or the current song you must first turn off the protect setting or switch to a different song Call the Song List page by either pressing the Work Navigate section SONG key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the SONG key The SONG screen Song List page will appear The currently selected song in the Song List will be high lighted inverted 2 Move the cursor to a location outside the SORT box and use the DATA JOG dial to select the song to be deleted The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicateds the selected song to be deleted 3 Move the cursor to the DELETE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the delete operation CONF RAHAT LOH Delete Selected Sona 4 To delete the song move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The song you selected in step 2 will be deleted and you will return to step 1 If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key the delete operation will be cancelled Managing Your Songs E Copying a song Here s how to copy a song in the hard disk 1 Call the Song List page by either pressing the Work Navigate section SONG key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the SONG key The SONG screen Song List page will appear The currently selected song in
97. cursor to the dotted frame in the track list and use the DATA JOG dial or the INC DEC keys to select the song that will be written to track 1 CH alld 00 00 o00 H H lnitial D Ze m a Pur A 00 00 00 000 01 01 ESR ed a CO WRITE DISK AT ONCE HA ITE mo DATA JOG e Songs in which data has not been recorded on the virtual tracks selected for the stereo track will not be displayed A current song that was not saved after the stereo track was recorded will also not be displayed e Songs with a stereo track shorter than four seconds will not be displayed e Songs with the sampling frequency of 48 kHz will not be dis played 7 f you want the stereo track of the selected song to be divided into CD tracks at the location of each marker move the cursor to the MARKER button and press the ENTER key Markers will be enabled for that song and a flag icon will appear at the right of the list ES e Markers can be enabled disabled independently for each song e When you use markers to divide a stereo track the location of the divisions will be specified in units of 1 75 second NOTE e Note that if markers are enabled the track numbers shown in the list will not match the number of tracks written to the CD e A maximum of 99 tracks can be written to an audio CD If for example markers are enabled for the song you write to CD track 1 and this song contains 98 markers it will not be
98. dB 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 106 Hz 710 Hz 2 50 kHz 10 0 kHz 4 7 0 63 EQ Parameter list AW2400 Owner s Manual es O Q Q Q lt 239 Dynamics Parameters Dynamics Parameters Dynamics processors are generally used to correct or control signal levels However you can also use them creatively to shape the volume envelope of a sound The AW2400 features com prehensive dynamics processors for all the input channels tape returns and the bus and stereo outputs These processors allow you to compress expand compress expand compandq gate or duck the signals passing through the mixer giving you unparalleled sonic quality and flexibil ity e Out Gain sets the compressor s output signal level E Compressor ____ _ S ee Compression tends to reduce the average signal level Out Gain can be used to counter this level reduction and set an appropriate level for the next stage in the audio path e Knee sets the transition of the signal at the threshold With a hard knee the transition between uncompressed and compressed signal is immediate With the softest knee knee5 the transition starts before the signal reaches Knee hard the threshold and gradually ends above the threshold Output Level e Release determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold If the release time is too short
99. effect Bn CONTROL CHANGE Rx Tx Edit parameters Cn PROGRAM CHANGE Rx Tx Switch scene memories 4 2 SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGE Command Rx Tx function F1 MIDI TIME CODE Rx Tx F2 SONG POSITION POINTER Tx MTC transmission Song position transmission 4 3 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE Command Rx Tx function F8 TIMING CLOCK Tx MIDI Clock transmission FA START TX Start command transmission FB CONTINUE TX Continue command transmission FC STOP TX Stop command transmit FE ACTIVE SENSING Rx Check MIDI cable connections FF RESET Rx Clear running status MIDI data format 4 4 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE 4 4 1 REALTIME SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE 4 4 1 1 MMC Command Rx Tx function 01 STOP Rx Tx Transport stop 02 PLAY Rx Transport play 03 DEFERRED PLAY Rx Tx Transport play 04 FAST FORWARD Rx TX Transport fast forward 05 REWIND Rx Tx Transport rewind 06 RECORD STROBE Rx Transport punch in record 07 RECORD EXIT Rx Transport punch out OF RESET Rx Tx MMC reset 44 LOCATE Rx Tx Transport locate 5 MIDI format details 5 1 NOTE OFF 8n lt Reception gt Received when Rx CH matches Used to control Effects Pitch Fix Refer NOTE ON for details STATUS 1000nnnn 8n Note Off Message DATA Onnnnnnn nn Note No Ovvvvvvv vv Velocity ignored 5 2 NOTE ON 9n lt Reception gt Received when Rx CH matches Used to control Effects Pitch Fix Refer below for details Velocity of 0x00 is equival
100. effect channel and mastering settings Recalling a scene affects all mixer section settings while the libraries allow only specified settings to be recalled as required You can also save the settings from one channel and copy them to other channels for example Each library is saved on the hard disk as part of the song E Tempo map The tempo map records changes in tempo and time sig nature that occur during the course of a song The tempo map is saved on the hard disk as part of the song E System data Various global settings that apply to all songs are collec tively referred to as system data System data is stored on the hard disk independently of the individual songs AW2400 Owner s Manual Introducing the AW2400 H 19 Parts of the AW2400 and what they do Parts of the AW2400 and what they do This section explains the names and functions of the various items on the AW2400 s top panel rear panel and front panel Top panel O Q cC Scene Automix USB section P 24 Data entry control e section P 25 a gt z Work Navigate Analog Input section P 21 Selected Channel section P 21 section P 24 Monitor section P 24 3 4 5 6 7 8 e ei MIC LINE INPUT ST f EO OUT MONITOR OUT PIETY WORK NAVIGATE SONG cD TRACK EDIT MIDI UTILITY SELECTED CHANNEL fat D el SCENE AUTOMIX y LLL i 2 FAR Gh Ge eT i tee A A i
101. field then move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear which allows you to select the record destination track and the virtual track TRACK field V TR field Select DESTINATION Track to Fitch es TRACK 2 ULTRA HOHE SL HO REC 7 ee e Different tracks must be specified for the source and destina tion D Specify the record destination track in the TRACK field and the virtual track in the V TR field then move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key This will select the PITCH FIX display TRACK 1 TET Direct ZS NOTE P received ooi_New_sona ert 00 00 00 000 _ BOUNCE PITCH FIZY PARAMETERS PITCH FIX field e EXIT button e BYPASS button TRACK field e FROM TR e TOTR TO V TR SE Scene m d 44 1EHZ ger A EE PITCH DTRTET ECHTEN FORMANT DG nannaa nnnnnnnn pennan DZ tc Met tt 3 Bouss E H erz e The following occur when the PITCH FIX mode is engaged e No other display can be selected from the panel keys e Record track assignments are ignored e No internal effects other than Pitch fix can be accessed e The Automix function is temporarily disabled e MIDI program and control change messages cannot be Move the cursor to this but ton and press ENTER to exit from the PITCH FIX mode and return to the Bounce page To monitor the v
102. files This section explains how to load import audio data or WAV files from the CD RW drive or from the desired track of a different song Importing from the CD RW drive CD audio data CD DA or a WAV file from a CD ROM or CD R can be imported loaded into an AW2400 audio track After being imported this data can be handled in the same way as any recorded audio track Call the UTILITY screen Preference page by either pressing the Work Navigate section UTILITY key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F2 key after pressing the UTILITY key Immediately after the AW2400 is powered on it will be set to prohibit digital recording from an external source or importing from a CD Before you can import you will need to disable this prohibition in the UTILITY screen Preference page 2 Move the cursor to the CD DAT DIGITAL REC button and press the ENTER key A message will ask you to confirm that you will observe the applicable copyright laws CONF RAHAT LOH DESERWE Corfyrisht Notice Written in Uuper e Manual CANCEL 3 Carefully read Copyright Notice gt p 7 and if you accept these terms move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The button display will change from DISABLE to ENABLE and digital recording and importing from a CD will be enabled e The CD DAT DIGITAL REC button will return to the DISABLE setting each time you turn on the power 4 Insert a
103. frames referred to here are the minimum time axis units used in CD DA Do not confuse them with the frames used in MTC or SMPTE LISTEN button You can move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to repeatedly hear the currently selected region of the CD DA 6 ToTR Selects the track number into which the data will be imported If the import source is an audio CD or a ste reo WAV file you will only be able to select a pair of tracks 1 amp 2 23 amp 24 T To V TR Selects the virtual track number 1 8 into which the data will be imported To Start Specifies the starting location in counter display for mat of the import destination to which the data will be imported 9 EXECUTE button Executes the import operation AW2400 Owner s Manual When using IMPORT CD WAV weng IMPORT CD HANU FILE TOTAL t IT Hp Dr Dr Gd Dn DSDS DC DD 0 06 65 DD File list This shows the WAV files and folders directories stored on the CD Move the cursor to the list and use the DATA JOG dial or the INC DEC keys to specify the WAV file that you want to import 2 FILE This indicates the name of the WAV file or directory The displayed icons have the following meaning e baal Indicates a WAV file e J Indicates a folder in the same level You can select this icon and press the ENTER key to move down one level eee You can select this icon and press the ENTER ke
104. from 1 4 to 8 4 e It is also possible to change the tempo or time signature dur ing a song For details refer to Creating a tempo map gt p 175 Handy Recording Functions Switching virtual tracks Each audio track contains eight virtual tracks After over dubbing a solo part you can switch the virtual track for that track and record a different take while preserving the previously recorded content Call the TRACK screen Virtual TR page by either pressing the Work Navigate section TRACK key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F2 key after pressing the TRACK key Bei Heu Sons aA 00 HU TRACK INPUT 1 CO Virtual tracks Indicates the status of virtual tracks 1 8 The virtual track that is currently selected for each track is indi cated by a symbol Of the virtual tracks that are currently not selected those that have been recorded are indicated by O and those that have not yet been recorded are indicated as 2 Tracks 2 Use the cursor keys to select the virtual track number that you want to assign to the desired track 3 Press the ENTER key The symbol will be displayed at the position of the newly selected virtual track This virtual track will now be used for recording playback AW2400 Owner s Manual Track recording E 63 I o Q Q S D O O 2 3 GC 64 Handy Recording Functions Usi
105. gt When the STOP key is pressed this message is transmitted with a device number of 7F lt Reception gt If the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave the transport will stop when this message is received with a matching device number or a device number of 7F 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message 01111111 7F RealTime System Exclusive Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call STATUS ID No Device ID Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Command mcc sub id 00000001 01 Stop MCS EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 5 13 1 2 MMC PLAY lt Reception gt If the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave the transport will begin playback when this message is received with a matching device number or a device number of 7F STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No Device ID 01111111 7F RealTime System Exclusive Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Command mcc sub id 00000010 02 Play MCS EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 5 13 1 3 MMC DEFERRED PLAY lt Transmission gt This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when the PLAY key is pressed lt Reception gt If the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave the transport will begin playback when this message is received with a matching device number or a device number of 7F STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No Device ID 01111111 7F RealTime System Exclusive Oddddddd dd Destination
106. in order to monitor the input signal you must stop the recorder ES e The position of the track channel faders will not affect the recording level However if you set the faders to 0 dB the playback volume will be the same as when you recorded the tracks 5 Press the SEL key for the recording desti nation track channel and press the Selected Channel section PAN EQ key so that its indicator lights Rotate the Selected Channel knob 1 to adjust the pan In the same way as for the input channel signal you can also use EQ and dynamics compressor to process the track channel By operating the track channel you ve selected as the recording destination you can adjust the panning or tone of the monitor signal without affecting the signal that is actually recorded e For details on how to adjust the pan EQ and dynamics pro cessing refer to Pan EQ and Dynamics Processing gt p 147 AW2400 Owner s Manual Overdubbing Eh 67 Overdubbing Overdubbing Now you can overdub onto the track that you selected as the recording destination 1 Call the TRACK screen View page by either 3 While monitoring the previously recorded pressing the Work Navigate section tracks play the instrument that you want to TRACK key as many times as necessary overdub or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the TRACK key 4 To stop recording press the STOP W key The UNDO REDO key in the data entry contr
107. in the library list GENERAL appears for preset data NOTE e When data cannot be recalled to the selected channel the Recall Channel Data Conflict error message will appear Channel Library Names Here s how you can change the names of the settings in the libraries 1 Call the CH VIEW screen Library page by either pressing the VIEW key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F2 key after pressing the VIEW key 2 Use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select the library setting to be edited The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for editing 3 Move the cursor to the RENAME button and press the ENTER key The NAME EDIT popup window will appear HAHE EDIT Basic FRESS OK TO EXECUTE CANCEL e Pressing the F4 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the RENAME button 4 Enter a name for the selected library set ting move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key refer to page 32 for details on name entry This confirms and enters the new name Channel Library Operation Channel Library settings The procedure for storing library settings is as follows NOTE e New settings cannot be stored to read only library settings those marked with an J icon e If you select and store to a library number that contains previously stored data the previous data will be overwri
108. inserted will be shown eo INPUT 1 5 Level Meter Displays the effect input or output level Select input IN or output OUT via the button above the meters 6 Parameter page In this area you can edit the various effect parameters The content and range of the parameters will depend on the currently selected effect type EFFECTI EDIT METER epp Move the cursor to the effect parameter that TOPESREVERE ua JI Se EE IINOnn in 13 dial or INC DEC keys to edit the value he BALANCE E CO oe meee A Depending on the effect type this area may be used to show multiple parameter pages In this case repeatedly press the CURSOR key to access the parameter page that contains the parameter you want to edit 6 To switch effect BYPASS on off move the cursor to the BYPASS button and press the ENTER key NAME e Edited effect settings can be stored in the effect library gt Indicates the name of the currently selected effect p 123 2 TYPE Indicates the type of the currently selected effect e You cannot change the effect type via this page If you want to use a different type you will need to recall a library setting that uses the desired effect type AW2400 Owner s Manual 121 Effect Library Operations Effect Library Operations The AW2400 provides an effect library for storage and recall of effect settings Effect library oper ation is described in this section
109. is not located at beat 1 1 4 to 8 4 Specifies the time signature of the song Specifies the tempo of the song You can set the tempo in units of 0 1 over a range of 30 0 250 0 BPM 30 0 to 250 0 ES e You cannot delete the tempo map event located at the begin ning of the song or change its location If you want to change the tempo or time signature during the song you can insert a new event AW2400 Owner s Manual E Adding a tempo map event 1 Access the Tempo Map page move the cur sor to the NEW button and press the ENTER key A blank tempo map event will be created after the last step that is currently input e If you use the INSERT button instead of the NEW button a blank tempo map event will be inserted before the currently selected step However you cannot insert an event before the tempo map event at the beginning of the song i e the tempo map event that is input when you create the song Make sure that the cursor is outside the list and use the DATA JOG dial to select a tempo map event that you created When the cursor is located outside the list you can use the DATA JOG dial to scroll the contents of the list Move the cursor to the MEASURE field of the event that is selected in the list and turn the DATA JOG dial to specify the location of the event You can adjust the location of a tempo map event in units of measures or beats However you cannot mov
110. is selected for backup No Data to Restore No data is selected for restore No Data No data exists or there is no data region in the selected area No File Can t save erase or edit the title because no file is found No Media Media has not been inserted No Region No region is found No Song to Write No songs to write to the CD have been selected No Stereo Track There is no song that includes a master track longer than four seconds Not 44 1kHz 16Bit Song The song cannot be restored since it is not a 44 1 kKHz 16 bit song Number Ejected Media Insert Blank Media Make a note of the number of the medium which has been writen to then insert a blank medium Number of Media Exceeds Limit The maximum numberof media that can be handled at the same time has been exceeded Protected Can t edit the file because it is protected Read Only File Can t save erase or edit the title because the file is read only Read Only Read only library This library cannot be saved erased or title edited Recall Channel Data Conflict The selected library data cannot be poperly loaded into the specified channel Recognized AW2816 Formatted Media The media is written in AW2816 format Recognized AW4416 Formatted Media The media is written in AW4416 format Region Full The maximum allowable number of regions has been exceeded Select
111. key to select the signal of the desired input bus Ee Q O Q CL oO O Cc O OD O O D Q O LI For example if you move the cursor to the lt gt symbol for RECORD TRACK 1 and repeatedly press the ENTER key the screen will change as follows 1 Connected to BUS1 L k b b A A A A A A bb WW 2 3 4 5 CN 8I0H I8 13 I 15 I6 17 I8 19 20 AAAA FECOFD TRACK Ennem 2 Connected to BUS2 L KA E E EC o EC EE E E E EC EC EC E E EC a 3 up EIB Bug I4 15 BOB EI RECORDO TRACE cl 3 No connection LUZES 3 L HB A A GA A A A A A A G A A A G 3 123465671880 i l3 H I5 16 17 mp eae EI e HE COD TRARRE E To 1 80 AW2400 Owners Manual e You can also select a track by repeatedly pressing the SEL key of a track channel e If you move the cursor to the SAFE button and press the ENTER key all connections will be cancelled e The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as Tel mute but you can still record to muted tracks e Ifan unpaired track is selected as a recording destination the pan of the corresponding track channels will be set to the cen ter If two paired tracks are selected the pan of the corre sponding odd numbered even numbered track channels will be spread to left and right respectively 6 Raise the STEREO fader and the faders of the track channel s you selected as the bounce destin
112. key will stop playback of all tracks e Ifa channel is turned off by pressing the ON key before the Trigger Track mode is engaged operating the appropriate ON key or fader does not play back the channel Editing tracks This section explains how to edit the audio data recorded on an audio track The AW2400 provides various editing commands that let you edit the audio tracks that have been recorded Using these commands you can specify the track or region that you want to edit and delete or move data You can use special commands to import audio data or WAV files from outside the AW2400 or to export WAV files to an external device The AW2400 provides the following editing commands ERASE Erases the data of the specified region DELETE Deletes the data of the specified region Any data that fol lows the deleted region will be moved forward by the cor responding distance INSERT Inserts blank space into the specified region COPY Copies the data from the specified region to the desired location of the desired track MOVE Moves the data from the specified region to the desired location of the desired track The move source data will be erased EXCHANGE Exchanges data between the specified tracks TIME COMP Time Compression Expansion Adjusts the length of the specified region of an audio track without affecting its pitch The Trigger Track Function e Editing tracks 7 Mo
113. knob to reduce the signal level e Selected Channel knobs 2 3 and 4 also function while the PAN EQ screen EQ Att page is showing AW2400 Owner s Manual E EQ Control via the Selected Channel section Using Selected Channel section knobs 2 4 to adjust EQ Use the Layer section INPUT SEL SEL and STEREO SEL keys to select the chan nel for which EQ is to be controlled 2 Press the Selected Channel section LOW LO MID HI MID or HIGH key according to the band you want to control The selected key s indicator will light as will the PAN EQ key With the default settings the PAN EQ screen will appear automatically The display will not change if the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DIS PLAY button is set to OFF 3 Rotate Selected Channel knobs 2 4 The parameters for the channels selected in step 1 and the band selected in step 2 will change accordingly The knobs control the following parameters Selected Channel knobs 2 4 Frequency Parameters Q center frequency If the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DISPLAY button is set to OFF a popup window showing the current EQ settings will appear while Selected Channel knobs 2 4 are being operated D 1 SBKHz Dynamics Processing Dynamics Processing The AW2400 provides gate and compressor facilities for dynamics processing In this section operation of the gate and compressor will be explained indivi
114. not use this method in such cases e When the AW2400 s power is OFF e When the disc is being accessed data is being read written or erased e While in CD PLAY mode Ab CAUTION e This removal method is for use in emergencies such as when you cannot remove the disc due to a malfunction of the disc tray or a power failure Do not use this method unnecessarily since doing so will damage the CD RW drive Installing an optional card E Available optional cards By installing a separately sold mini YGDAI card in a rear panel slot you can add analog input output jacks to the AW 2400 or allow connection of external digital devices The following types of cards can be used Number of Digital Card type channels format MY4 AD MY8 AD AD card MY8 AD24 MY8 AD96 MY4 DA DA card MY8 DA96 MY8 AE MY8 AE96 MY8 AE96S MY16 AE MY8 AT MY16 AT MY8 TD MY16 TD AES EBU Digital I O card ADAT TASCAM Waves Plug in DSP card Y96K ADAT mLAN card MY16 mLAN IEEE1394 Refer to the Yamaha Pro Audio global website for the most recent information on I O cards http www yamahaproaudio com W installing an optional card Before installing a card you must check the Yamaha web site to make sure that this device is compatible http www yamahaproaudio com Installing an optional card To install an optional mini YGDAI card
115. of 14 bits data Oddddddd_ dd1 data L low 7 bits of 14 bits data 5 7 TIMING CLOCK F8 lt Transmission gt If SYNC OUT is MIDI CLOCK this message is transmitted according to the MIDI Tempo Map from when the recorder begins playing or recording until it stops STATUS 11111000 F8 Timing Clock 5 8 START FA lt Transmission gt If SYNC OUT is MIDI CLOCK this message is transmitted when the recorder begins playing or recording at a location other than the first measure STATUS 11111010 FA Start 5 9 CONTINUE FB lt Transmission gt If SYNC OUT is MIDI CLOCK this message is transmitted when the recorder begins playing or recording at a location other than the first measure STATUS 11111011 FB Continue AW2400 Owner s Manual 5 10 STOP FC lt Transmission gt If SYNC OUT is MIDI CLOCK this message is transmitted when the recorder stops STATUS 11111100 FC Stop 5 11 ACTIVE SENSING FE lt Reception gt Once this message is received subsequent failure to receive any mes sage for a period of 300 ms will cause Running Status to be cleared and MIDI communications to be initialized STATUS 11111110 FE Active Sensing 5 12 RESET FF lt Reception gt When a Reset message is received MIDI communications will be initialized by clearing Running Status etc STATUS 11111111 FF Reset 5 13 EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE FO F7 5 13 1 MMC 5 13 1 1 MMC STOP lt Transmission
116. of adjacent odd numbered even numbered audio tracks ST The stereo track Up to eight 6 Name alphanumeric characters Exchange destination virtual track CO From TR 1 amp 2 23824 name display only Track operations and editing 1 The items that you can select in 4 To TR copy destination track From V TR 1 8 Virtual track number will depend on the 1 From TR copy source track setting ar HO From TR is a single audio track 1 24 you can select only a sin From Start Specify a point Beginning of the edited region gle audio track 1 24 4 From End Specify a point End of the edited region If From TR is ST or 1 amp 2 23 amp 24 a pair of adjacent audio tracks h j Specify the length to which the you can select only 1 amp 2 23 amp 24 a pair of adjacent audio tracks TO END Specify a point selected region will be com pressed or expanded NOTE Specify the percentage by which 6 To Ratio 50 200 the selected region will be com pressed or expanded NOTE P e TO END and To Ratio are linked so that editing one field will cause the other field to change e The track names will not be exchanged e You cannot set TO END or To Ratio to a value that would cause the ratio to exceed 50 200 percent e From Start value and From End value must be at least 45 msec apart These cannot be set to a shorter interval AW2400 Owner s Manual 141 List of e
117. off or between dis connecting and connecting the USB cable 7 SLOT An optional card can be installed here G Eject switch This switch ejects the disc tray 2 Eject hole This hole allows you to open the disc tray manually 3 Access indicator This indicator will light while the CD inserted m the drive is being accessed AW2400 Owner s Manual 29 OOPZMV 24 Bulonpo uy 30 Basic operation of the AW2400 Basic operation of the AW2400 This section explains basic operation of the AW2400 Viewing the display The display of the AW2400 shows the following informa tion TRAC oe Heu Song Sor Too Ee Ver ZIL Scene Bl l Scene eh _ TRACE quich e 00 UD HU DUU miii EAKA 1 Scene 21 TRACK WIE LU Poi 1 a Screen name This is the name of the currently selected screen 2 Selected channel This indicates the mixer channel that is selected for opera tion 3 Song name The name of the currently selected song 4 Counter left side This indicates the current location within the song The current time display format can be selected via the SONG screen Setting page The choices are standard time hours minutes seconds milliseconds or timecode hours minutes seconds frames sub frames 5 Counter right side This indicates the current location within the song in mea sures beats The measures beats are calculated according to the tempo and time sign
118. on page 116 for details on recalling from the library 4 STORE button Stores the current effect settings into the location selected in the list CLEAR button Deletes the library data that is selected in the list 6 List This area lists the effect data stored in the library Library numbers 001 043 are read only and original settings can be saved to numbers 044 128 The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the data that is selected for operation An D icon indicates a read only library setup Changing Effect Library Names Here s how you can change the names of the settings in the Effect library 1 Call the FX Lib page Refer to Call the Effect Library Screen on page 122 for details 2 Move the cursor to the list and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select the library setting to be edited The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for editing 3 Move the cursor to the RENAME button and press the ENTER key The NAME EDIT popup window will appear e Pressing the F4 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the RENAME button 4 Enter a name for the selected library set ting move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key refer to page 32 for details on name entry This confirms and enters the new name Storing Effect Library settings Save the current effect setting from any one of the effect pro
119. on page 211 for details EQ Dynamics Processor Library Operation Erasing EQ Dynamics Library settings The procedure for erasing unwanted library settings is as follows NOTE e Read only library settings those marked with an D icon cannot be erased 1 Access the page containing the library set tings to be erased For details on accessing the various library pages refer to Accessing the EQ Dynamics Library screens on page 154 2 Rotate the DATA JOG dial to select the library setting to be erased The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected to be erased 3 Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and press the ENTER key A popup window confirming the clear operation will appear The following illustration is an example of when the CLEAR button is pressed in the PAN EQ screen EQ Lib page CONF IRHAT LOM Clear 41 from the E Library e Pressing the F3 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the CLEAR button 4 To actually erase the selected setting move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key AW2400 Owner s Manual Pan EQ and Dynamics Processing M On 157 el Pan EQ and Dynamics Processing ae 158 AW2400 Owner s Manual Chapter 17 Scene Memory In this section we ll cover the functions and operation of the AW2400 s scene memory About Scene Memory The AW2400 allows the mix effect
120. operation malfunctions To call this page press the Work Navigate section UTIL ITY key as many times as necessary or press the F3 key after pressing the UTILITY key O UTILITY 00 02 45 689 ea TRACK 1 00 02 49 683 FORMAT K 154 11 4 1kH2 1ecit Format NO suooun All Ren 212 AW2400 Owner s Manual e You cannot abort the Format operation once it has been started e Executing the Format operation will erase all data from the internal hard disk and the data cannot be recov ered We recommend that you backup all data on the internal hard disk to a computer before executing the e Never turn off or disconnect the power during formatting since this may damage the hard disk and cause a CLUSTER field Set the disk cluster size to either 32K or 64K If you will be using Mac OS X 10 3 for WAV file transfer operations set the cluster size to 32K Select the 64K cluster size for maximum speed if you will be using Win dows or Mac OS X 10 4 or higher When the AW2400 is shipped from the factory the cluster size is set to 64K 2 EXECUTE button Execute the disk initialization A popup window will show the progress of the initialization operation The popup window will close when initialization has been completed Chanter 22 Creating an audio CD This chapter explains how you can use the CD RW drive to create an audio CD and how to play back an audio CD Creating an aud
121. playback or recording In MIDI Clock transmission mode Song Position Pointer and Start Stop Continue commands will also be issued and during playback or recording MIDI Clock will be transmitted according to the MIDI Tempo Map 1 6 MTC transmission MTC Master If you set MIDI OUT to MTC MTC can be transmitted during play back or recording 1 7 MTC reception MTC Slave If you set MTC MODE to SLAVE the internal recorder will operate in synchronization with MTC messages received from the MIDI IN connector 1 8 Realtime control of parameters Control changes can be used to send receive internal parameters in realtime 1 9 MIDI Remote The faders ON keys and RTZ FF REW STOP PLAY REC keys can be used to control an external MIDI device In PRESET mode operating the above controllers will transmit MIDI data according to the preset settings of the AW2400 In USER mode operating the above controllers will transmit the MIDI data that you specify AW2400 Owner s Manual 2 MIDI data flow diagram MTC SLAVE USB 1 IN Oo O MTC MTC Slave USB 2 IN USB 3 IN EFF MIDI MIDI IN O o gt NOTE ON OFF Effect Control SLOT IN PGM CHG OG o gt PROGRAM CHANGE Scene Recall CTRL CHG O O CONTROL CHANGE Parameter Edit ECHO ECHO OUT MMC SLAVE O o gt MMC Transport Control LEARN Channel Message Exclusive Message MIDI REMOTE Learn THRU USB 1 OUT USB 2 OUT swe USB 3 OUT REMOTE T
122. point and end the Out point These keys can also be used as locate keys to move directly to the In point or Out point SET key Sets the in out or A B points in conjunction with the IN OUT A B and LOCATE keys Also sets the rela tive zero time point when pressed simultaneously with the RTZ kd key 7 REPEAT key This key switches the A B repeat function on off letting you repeatedly play a specified region A B keys These keys specify the points at which the Repeat function will begin point A and end point B These keys can also be used as locate keys to move directly to point A or point B 9 CANCEL key Use this key in conjunction with the IN OUT keys the A B keys or the LOCATE key to cancel a locater that you registered 3 FF PP key This key fast forwards the song location Press the key repeatedly to alternate between 8x speed and 16x speed Press the STOP Ml key or PLAY B gt key to stop fast for ward 4 STOP W key This key stops playback recording fast forward or rewind Trigger track playback will also stop PLAY M key If you press this key while the recorder is stopped play back will begin If you press this key while holding down the REC key recording will begin If you press this key during fast forward or rewind normal speed playback will begin If you press this key during recording record ing will stop and playback will resume
123. possi ble to write any more songs to that CD R RW disc Writing audio data 8 Repeat steps 5 7 to select the songs that will be written to track 2 and following ES e Pressing the F1 F3 keys while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the ADD F1 key INSERT F2 key and DELETE F3 key buttons respec tively NOTE e When you add a song to the track list the added song will always be initially selected Change this as required Q Move the cursor to the WRITE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm CONF IRHAT LO Heite ST Track to CO e Pressing the F4 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the WRITE button 10 To begin writing the disc move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key A popup window will indicate CD Writing while data is being written to the media When writing is completed the CD R RW media will be ejected and the following popup window will appear CONF IRHAT LO Heite Once More NOTE e If you enabled the write test in Basic settings for the CD RW drive gt p 215 a write test will be performed before the data is actually written An error message will appear if a problem occurs during the write test e Copy prohibit data will automatically be written to the CD 11 If you want to create another CD with identi cal contents in
124. press the OK button If you decide not to disengage the pair move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key AW2400 Owner s Manual Track recording E 59 Applying EQ To an Input Signal Bulpsoo0e1 YORI Ov 60 Applying EQ To an Input Signal The AW2400 provides versatile 4 band equalizers on every channel that can be directly operated via the Selected Channel section keys and knobs This section describes the procedure for applying EQ to input channels 1 8 1 Press the Layer section IN 1 8 key so that its indicator lights the press the SEL key for the channel to which EQ is to be applied e The INPUT SEL 1 8 keys can also be used to select an input channel for equalization Press the Selected Channel section PAN EQ key so that its indicator lights Press Selected Channel knob 1 2 3 or 4 and the PAN EQ screen will appear Press the Display section F3 key to call the EQ Att page The EQ settings are available via this page EQ ON OFF button PAHE INPUT 1 SE 128 207 aI DS Geen ogg a ee 111 011 EEE ea 00 00 00 000 Eg EDIT e Pages can also be selected by repeatedly pressing Selected Channel section knobs 1 4 AW2400 Owner s Manual 4 To turn the EQ on move the cursor to the EQ ON OFF button and press the ENTER key Press the Selected Channel section LOW LO MID HI MID or HIGH key to select the EQ band to be adjusted Use Sele
125. previous data will be overwritten The Transport section keys will have the following functions while the SOUND CLIP screen is showing Function Returns to the location at which you began recording If the CLIP button is on this returns to the Start point RTZ 4a key Rewinds the current location toward the beginning You will stop when you reach the location at which you began recording or the Start point REW lt lt key Fast forwards the current location You will stop when you reach the location at which you stopped recording or the End point FF gt gt key Stops playback recording rewind or fast STOP W key forward Starts playback Pressing this key during PLAY gt key playback does nothing If you hold down this key while stopped and press the PLAY b gt key recording will begin Pressing this key during play back does nothing REC key e You will not hear the metronome while a sound clip is playing but you can still monitor the signals of input channels 1 16 2 The playback region of a sound clip can be changed by specifying new Start and End points as described below Specifying the Start point Stop at the location that you want to specify as the Start point move the cursor to the START button and press the ENTER key The START button will be engaged and the current location will be registered as the Start point Specifying the End po
126. protected If for example you have edited the mixer settings and need to save the song you must disable the protect setting and then save the song For details on song protection refer to page 172 ES e A number of other operations are available in the SONG screen List page Refer to Managing Your Songs on page 167 for details HEH SHUTDOHH FREE 35 94 GB G G 16 44 1 d COD 16 44 1 SISMB 16 44 1 He New Sona He Heu Sona The_On y_One e In the following situations a popup window will ask whether you want to save the current song when you load an existing song from the hard disk when you create a new song or when you shut down the AW2400 e We recommend that you frequently save the song you are working on or enable the Auto Save function gt p 211 as a safeguard against accidents such as the AW2400 s power cable being accidentally disconnected 2 Move the cursor to the SAVE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm that you want to save the current song CONF RAAT LOH Save Current Sona AW2400 Owner s Manual 57 Pairing channels Bulpsoo09e1 YORI Ov 58 Pairing channels Adjacent odd and even numbered input channels 1 2 15 16 track channels 1 2 23 24 and AUX send master channels 1 2 and 3 4 can be set as pairs When channels are paired most of their parameters are linked for optimum efficiency and easy when handling s
127. recalled via this page The currently selected compressor type and its graphic response curve are shown at the top of the dis play List RECALL button DYNAMICS Seu erat te INPUT 1 a100 00 00 000 101 11 44 iehe Tent COMP LIBRARY CURRENT CURVE I CURRENT TYE COMP H CHEERS Compander 3 Come Lib E TYPES CURVE 6 Use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select the library setting to be recalled The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for recall Each setting has a name that indicates the instrument or application it is intended to be used for The com pressor types and response curves are displayed to the left of the list AW2400 Owner s Manual 61 Applying Compression to an Input Signal e Handy Recording Functions 7 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key A popup window confirming the recall operation will appear 8 To actually recall the selected setting move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The selected setting will be recalled and the compres sor type and parameters will change accordingly Repeat steps 6 8 as necessary to select various presets until you find one that best suits your application Bulpsooe1 YORI Ov Q Use Selected Channel knob 1 to change the overall effect of the compressor When the knob is operated the DYNAMICS screen Comp Edit page will ap
128. recording and go back to step 9 12 Move the cursor to the EXIT button and press ENTER A popup window will appear asking you to confirm that it s OK to exit from the PITCH FIX mode CONF RAHAT LOH Exit Pitch Fix Mode 13 To return to the Bounce page move the cur sor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The PITCH FIX mode will be exited and the Bounce display will appear Chanter 15 Track operations and editing This chapter explains how to use and edit the tracks of the recorder section About the AW2400 s tracks The AW2400 has the following types of track Audio Tracks The physical tracks used to record and play back audio data are called audio tracks or simply tracks The AW 2400 has twenty four audio tracks Stereo Track Independently from audio tracks 1 24 the AW2400 has a stereo track that records and plays a stereo audio signal The stereo track is used mainly as a dedicated mixdown track for recording the final mix Virtual Tracks Each audio track 1 24 and the stereo track consists of eight tracks Each of these eight tracks is called a virtual track For the audio tracks and the stereo track only one virtual track can be recorded or played at any time The diagram below shows the concept of virtual tracks The horizontal rows indicate audio tracks 1 24 and the vertical columns correspond to virtual tracks 1 8 The shaded areas indicate t
129. remote control To call this page press the Work Navigate section MIDI This page contains the following items key as many times as necessary or press the F2 key after MMC field EE Specifies how MMC will be transmitted received 2 MMC OFF button Engage this button it will appear inverted to disable E H 0 ani tial MMC transmission and reception iA 00 DD HU DUU DU LIUESRISSRrre MIDI SETTING z 3 MMC MASTER button meo When this button is turned on the AW2400 functions as MMC master and the appropriate MMC commands will be output via the MIDI OUT THRU connector or USB DIE JEEE io 8 connector or digital I O card output port when the trans L SLAVE JO DYN port is operated Turn this button on when you want to remotely control external equipment from the AW2400 4 MMC SLAVE button When this button is turned on the AW2400 functions as MMC slave and will respond to appropriate MMC com Setting i Setting 2 mands received via the MIDI IN connector or USB con nector or digital I O card input port Turn this button on when you want to remotely control the AW2400 from external equipment 1 en eects 198 AW2400 Owner s Manual 5 DEVICE NO box Specifies the MMC device number 1 127 that the AW 2400 will receive NOTE e The MMC device number is an identifying number used to distin guish devices that transmit and receive MMC commands When using MMC t
130. s ste reo buses Bus and Bus2 allowing mixed signals to be assigned to up to four tracks Bulpsoo0e1 YORI Ov Input channels Input select Beas Heu Sona SPOT T 00 00 00 000 M1 xEo IHFOUT E DIGITAL IH i 128 878 No Of 101 0 EEC ee Tracks 4 Check that AD1 8 appears in the input select field on the left side of the page If a different input source is selected move the cursor to the input select field and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select AD1 8 54 AW2400 Owner s Manual 5 Press the INPUT SEL key for the input channel to which your instrument micro phone is connected The currently selected INPUT SEL key will light orange and that input channel will be selected for operation KE The symbol for the correspond H4 l ing input channel will be high lighted in the screen and a line will appear indicating that this channel is connected to the bus 6 Repeatedly press the same INPUT SEL key to select the bus to which you want to send the signal from that input channel Each time you press the INPUT SEL key the screen will change as follows Bus 2 L R i AD On eee Of i 2 J te ek euen Couren nek enee 2 Bus 1 L R ag D 6 Bus 2 L ay fo Ge dE Srel ZE l Ea Em 3 Bus 1 L i ajni i A D Bus D R faves S aC EE Se E oe BUS SCH Bus 1 R ain a To D oo ee SR ER n e Input channels that
131. scene that is selected in the list CLEAR 3_ _ 5 al e PROTECT button PROTECT _ 6 Applies protection to the scene that is selected in the list E D se eer 128 9 z D d ef DD DU DD uil EAEE SCENE LIBRARY Ho TITLE Scene Memory lHitial Data D onaga AW2400 Owner s Manual 159 Scene Memory Operation Aowa 8U80S Va 160 Renaming a scene Entering a new name for a scene Call the SCENE screen Library page by either pressing the SCENE key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the SCENE key 2 Rotate the DATA JOG dial to select the scene to be renamed The dotted frame indicates the currently selected scene You can use the DATA JOG dial to scroll through the list regardless of the position of the cursor e In addition to the DATA JOG dial the INC DEC keys can be used to make selections 3 Move the cursor to the RENAME button and press the ENTER key The NAME EDIT popup window will appear HAHE EDIT Beene 01 FRESS OK TO EXECUTE CANCEL e Pressing the F4 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the RENAME button 4 Enter the new name Then move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key For details on entering a name gt p 32 The new name will be applied AW2400 Owner s Manual Recalling scene da
132. section is running and Automix recording playback is stopped pressing this button after pressing the REC button engages the Automix record standby mode Appears inverted during Automix recording and playback Automix lt O FEH Automix AW2400 Owner s Manual f 181 Automix Operation gt O 3 x 182 e REC button Turning this button on while the recorder section is stopped engages the Automix record standby mode When the recorder section is run ning it is necessary to press the PLAY button after the REC button to engage the Automix record standby mode This button is automatically disen gaged when recording is completed e AUTOREC button EE Engages the Automix record standby mode Unlike the REC but ton this button remains engaged after recording is completed and the record standby mode will remain engaged until it is manually turned off e Pressing the F1 F4 keys while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the ENABLE DISABLE F1 key STOP F2 key PLAY F3 key and REC F4 key but tons respectively 2 COMMAND field Allows creation of a new Automix recording and provides an undo function e NEW button Clears the current Automix data to make way for a new Automix record ing e UNDO button Clears the last recorded Automix data returning to the state immedi ately before the last Automix record ing pas
133. send the signal to INPUT I e 00 00 00 O00 OT the external effect processor and input channel 1 of the same card is used to return the output from the external effect processor to the channel ES e When SLOT 1 16 is selected for a stereo channel stereo out put or bus master an odd even channel pair SLOT 1 2 for example will be assigned to the stereo channels and inserted When an item other than NONE is selected an abbre viation of the insert destination will appear to the right of the colon e Effects cannot be inserted into the effect send master or The meanings of the abbreviations are as follows effect return channels Abbreviations Descriptions SEND Effect send return operation not inserted in EFF1 4 only any channel IN1 IN16 Inserted in input channel 1 16 TR1 TR24 Inserted in track channel 1 24 STEREO Inserted in stereo output channel BUS1 2 Inserted in bus master channel 1 2 AUX1 4 Inserted in AUX send master channel 1 4 AW2400 Owner s Manual f 119 Inserting an Effect Into a Channel D Use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select the desired effect and or I O card channel then press the ENTER key When EFF1 4 is selected the corresponding effect will be inserted in the signal path HI TIAL Ie 1 amp 2 PHASE GATE a Insert points The signal flow is as follows INSERT EFF EFF 1 Effect 1
134. signal level after the compressor and the amount of gain reduction 4 Compression Curve A graphic representation of the compression curve of the currently selected compressor setting in the library list 5 List A list of all the settings stored m the library The row highlighted by a dotted frame is the setting currently selected for operation An D icon indicates read only library settings AW2400 Owner s Manual Pan EQ and Dynamics Processing M On 155 EQ Dynamics Processor Library Operation Buttons These buttons execute the RENAME RECALL STORE and CLEAR functions For details on their operation refer to the following explanations Changing EQ Dynamics Library Names Here s how you can change the names of the settings in the libraries NOTE e The names of read only library settings those marked with an D icon cannot be changed 1 Access the page containing the library to be edited For details on accessing the various library pages refer to Accessing the EQ Dynamics Library screens on page 154 2 Rotate the DATA JOG dial to select the library setting to be edited The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for editing e The INC DEC keys can also be used to select library set tings 3 Move the cursor to the RENAME button and press the ENTER key The NAME EDIT popup window will appear CANCEL B G Stroke 1 PRESS OK TO EXECUTE
135. t be able to monitor channels that are not assigned to the stereo bus or channels whose ON key is turned off This setting is convenient when you want everything except for the specified channel s to be muted 4 If you selected RECORDING SOLO mode in step 3 use the SOLO MODE field to select the point from which the soloed signal will be sent Use the following two buttons of the SOLO MODE field to select the send point e PRE FADER button If this button is on the pre fader signal will be sent to the Solo bus In this case the fader and pan set tings of each channel will be ignored and the signal that is output from the MONITOR OUT jacks and the PHONES jack will be monaural AFTER PAN button If this button is on the post fader post pan signal will be sent to the Solo bus In this case the fader and pan setting of each channel will affect the signal that is sent from the MONITOR OUT jacks and the PHONES jack e If RECORDING SOLO mode is selected you can turn the SOLO MODE field s TRIM knob to adjust the signal level sent to the Solo bus Convenient functions for mixdown bounce D If you selected MIXDOWN SOLO mode in step 3 you can if desired select channels that will be excluded from Solo operations Use the buttons in the SOLO SAFE CHANNEL field to specify the channels that will be excluded from Solo operations Move the cursor to a desired button and press the ENTER key you may select more than o
136. than 24 hours File in Use Can t save erase or edit the title because the file is in use File List Full The file list is full and cannot be appended File Name Already Exists The specified file name already exists Use a different file name File Number Full No more songs can be created or restored since this would exceed the maxi mum number of files File Size Exceeds Limit The file is too large to be saved For Effect 1 or 2 Only The selected effect type is for use with Effect 1 or Effect 2 only HD Full The internal hard disk is full and can accept no more data HD Status is Out of Range The hard disk reliability status the number of past errors has exceeded the threshold Back up your data and have the hard disk replaced as soon as possi ble HDD Error A problem occurred with the internal hard disk Illegal Unsupported Media An unrecognized or unsupported medium has been inserted Invalid Parameter The parameter setting exceeds the allowable range Invalid Region AW2400 Owner s Manual An invalid region has been specified Marker Interval Under 4 sec Display message list Since the song length divided by the markers would be less than four seconds you cannot divide it with a marker Media Too Small Cannot Save The medium does not have enough space available to save the data No Data to Backup No data
137. the F1 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the SAVE button 3 To save the song move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The song will be saved and the display will revert to the Song List step 1 If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button instead of the OK button and press the ENTER key the Save operation will be can celled e The song save operation always saves the current song regardless of the song that is selected in the list e You cannot save a song that is protected If for example you have edited the mixer settings and need to save the song you must disable the protect setting and then save the song e If necessary you can change the name of the song before you save it gt p 169 e In the following situations a popup window will ask whether you want to save the current song when you load an existing song from the hard disk when you create a new song or when you shut down the AW2400 e We recommend that you frequently save the song you are working on or enable the Auto Save function gt p 211 as a safeguard against data loss due to accidents such as the AW2400 s power cable being inadvertently disconnected E Deleting a song Here s how to delete a song from the hard disk NOTE e A deleted song will be lost forever Use great caution when delet ing a song e You cannot delete a song for which protect is on or delete the
138. the FANE Team mme l sna cease aa ad S S a an ieee k Output meter e Indicates the level of the signal after it has passed SS through the EQ 6 Q knobs Specify the Q steepness at which each band HIGH a l 6 HI MID LO MID LOW will be boosted or cut The o range is 10 0 10 and higher settings will produce a aan Jr steeper curve les 7 F Frequency knobs Specify the center frequency of the boost cut over a range of 21 2 Hz 20 0 kHz G Gain knobs Specify the amount of boost cut over a range of 18 0 dB to 18 0 dB 4 To switch the EQ on move the cursor to the EQ ON OFF button and press the ENTER key 5 When working on a track channel stereo output channel or bus master channel the EQ type can be selected via the TYPE field AW2400 Owner s Manual Pan EQ and Dynamics Processing M On 149 4 band EQ Buisss00 4 SOIUEU pue OF Ued Wes 150 6 Move the cursor to the parameter that you want to edit and use the DATA JOG dial or the INC DEC keys to adjust the value e If you press the F1 FLAT key while holding the SHIFT key from the PAN EQ screen EQ Att page all G knobs for the currently selected channel will be set to 0 0dB or OFF 7 To switch the LOW band type move the cur sor to the LOW band Q knob and continue turning the DATA JOG dial toward the left or right If you continue turning the Q knob toward the right the Q knob value w
139. the STEREO fader to the 0 dB posi nation track s tion You can select up to four tracks for recording Bus1 L 11 Check that the Layer section TRACK 1 12 and Bus2 L can be assigned to odd numbered tracks while Bus R and Bus2 R can be assigned to even lected th d destinatiorit numbered tracks The SEL keys of track channels to EE EE Rechter which buses have been assigned will flash red and the appropriate monitor level record ready mode will be engaged The signal sent to the track via Bus1 Bus2 will be out put via the STEREO OUT and MONITOR OUT jacks key is lit then raise the fader of the track For example the display will change as shown when the track channel 1 SEL key is pressed repeatedly 12 To set the level and pan for input channels 1 8 press the Layer section IN 1 8 key so that its indicator lights If multiple input channels are patched to the same bus the individual level and pan settings for each input 14 Connected to Bus1 L Track recording E eee cannot be changed after recording For this reason it is E necessary to set up the individual channel levels and pan applied to Bus1 Bus2 as required before record ing To Adjust Volume Balance Set the input channel 1 8 faders as required To Adjust Pan After pressing the SEL key of the corresponding input channel press the Selected Channel section PAN EQ key so that its indicator lights Selected PAYS E 1888410 ie I3 H
140. the AW2400 H Input Channels 1 8 Effect Return Channels 1 4 IN 9 16 Input Channels 9 16 Effect Return Channels 1 4 Bus Masters MASTER No Control AUX Send Masters 1 4 Effect Send Masters 1 4 Stereo Output 1 2 TRACK 1 12 Track Channels 1 12 TRACK 13 24 Track Channels 13 24 REMOTE Channel Control Operation depends on settings Refer to page 204 for details For example if the LAYER section IN 1 8 key is engaged and the SEL 1 key is pressed input channel 1 will be selected If the LAYER section TRACK 1 12 is then engaged and the same SEL 1 key is pressed track channel 1 will be selected e The STEREO SEL key STEREO ON key and STEREO fader always control the stereo output channel These controls are not affected by layer switching Using the Selected Channel section You can use the knobs and keys of the Selected Channel section to directly operate the mix parameters EQ dynamics pan etc of the currently selected channel 1 Use the SEL keys or STEREO SEL key to select the channel that you want to operate The currently selected channel is indicated in the upper left of the NN Be Heu Sons inFuUT 1 00 00 00 00 00 screen The channels correspond to each key as follows e SEL keys 1 12 Input channels 1 16 Track channels 1 24 Effect Return channels 1 4 Currently selected channel e STEREO SEL key Stereo output c
141. the FX Lib page Refer to Call the Effect Library Screen on page 122 for details 2 Move the cursor to the list and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select the library setting to be erased The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected to be erased 3 Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and press the ENTER key A popup window confirming the clear operation will appear CONF IRHAT LOH Clear 44 from the EFFECT Library e Pressing the F3 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the CLEAR button 4 To actually erase the selected setting move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key AW2400 Owner s Manual Effects ow 123 Correcting a Vocal Track Pitch Fix Correcting a Vocal Track Pitch Fix The Pitch Fix function can be used to fix the pitch of a vocal track or create chorus parts based on a main vocal part An Auto Punch in out function is also provided which allows a specified segment of a vocal track to be processed and replaced Pitch Fix can be useful in the following situations e Correct the pitch of slightly flat or sharp vocals e Correct the pitch of a specified segment or phrase of a vocal track using the Auto Punch in out function e Create a chorus part using an external MIDI keyboard to specify the pitch of the chorus part a third above the main vocal for example e Change the key of a
142. the audio data scene memories and the data for each library are all stored together By loading a saved song you can return it to the original condition at any time You can store as many songs on the internal hard disk as its capacity allows Songs stored on hard disk are divided into a song file containing all the basic setup information for the song and WAV files containing the audio data E Song Bit Depth The AW2400 allows the bit depth of individual songs to be set to either 16 or 24 bits 24 bit songs are capable of providing higher audio quality than 16 bit songs but the following limitations on the number of simultaneous record playback tracks apply Max Simultaneous Song eee Record Tracks Max Simultaneous Play Tracks 16 bits 24 bits For mixdown the number of simultaneous record tracks is two and the number of simultaneous playback tracks is 24 for 16 bit songs or 12 for 24 bit songs Only 24 bit audio data can be used in 24 bit songs 16 bit WAV files cannot be imported from a computer or CD RW drive Audio data imported from audio CDs however will be automatically converted to 24 bit format In the same way only 16 bit audio data can be used in 16 bit songs AW2400 Owner s Manual Song management A ee 165 About songs E Song Folder Organization Song and related data stored on hard disk can be accessed from a computer connected via USB in the same way as
143. the electric plug from the outlet and have the e Be sure to connect to an appropriate outlet with a protective grounding connection Improper grounding can result in electrical shock device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel e Do not open the device or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or e Ii this device should be dropped or damaged immediately turn off the modify them in any way The device contains no user serviceable parts If power switch disconnect the electric plug from the outlet and have the it should appear to be malfunctioning discontinue use immediately and device inspected by qualitied Yamaha service personnel have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel N CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others or damage to the device or other property These precautions include but are not limited to the following Power supply Power cord e Do not place the device in an unstable position where it might SR accidentally fall over e Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the device is not to be used for extended periods of time or during electrical storms The plastic side panels do not provide a secure grip and should not be used as handles when moving or transporting the unit Carrying the unit e When removing the electric plug from the device or an outlet always by the plastic side panels can
144. times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the SONG key The SONG screen Song List page will appear The currently selected song in the Song List will be high lighted inverted 2 Move the cursor to a location outside the SORT box and use the DATA JOG dial to select the song to be optimized The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the selected song to be optimized 3 Move the cursor to the OPTIMIZE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the optimize operation CONF IRHAT ION OFtimize Selected Sona e You may select the current song to be optimized In this case a popup window will ask you whether you want to save the current song Move the cursor to the OK button if you want to save or the CANCEL button if you don t want to save and press the ENTER key 4 To execute the optimize operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The undo redo audio data of the song you selected in step 2 will be deleted and you will return to step 1 If you decide not to execute the optimize operation move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key E importing data from an existing song Here s how selected types of data such as scenes or librar ies can be imported into the current song from a song saved on the hard disk e When you execute this import operation the previous data for that item in the curren
145. to ECHO the received messages will be echoed at the transmission port 3 1 7 OTHER If this is set to ECHO the received MIDI data will be echoed at the transmission port However Program Change and Control Change will follow their own settings 3 1 8 REMOTE PORT Specify the output port when the MIDI remote function is engaged 3 1 9 THRU Set the MIDI through function 3 1 10 MMC MODE Select whether the AW2400 will be the MMC MASTER or SLAVE 3 1 11 MMC Dev Specify the ID number that will be used when transmitting or receiv ing MMC commands 3 1 12 MTC SYNC MODE Select whether the AW2400 will be the MTC MASTER or SLAVE 3 1 13 MTC SYNC AVERAGE When the AW2400 is functioning as a MTC SLAVE this setting specifies how it will follow the MTC data Set this to O if the incom ing MTC data has a highly accurate timing set this to 1 or 2 if the timing of the incoming MTC data is not as accurate such as when receiving MTC from a software sequencer 3 1 14 MTC SYNC OFFSET When the AW2400 is functioning as a MTC SLAVE this setting adds an offset to the received MTC data The received time code value shifted by this amount will correspond to the location indicated by the internal time code of the AW2400 3 1 15 SYNC OUT Turn on off the output of MTC MIDI CLOCK 4 MIDI format list 4 1 CHANNEL MESSAGE Command Rx Tx function 8n NOTE OFF Rx Control the internal effect 9n NOTE ON Rx Control the internal
146. to confirm the opera tion CONF RAAT ITOH Execute Track IMPORT 7 CANCEL 8 To execute the Import operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Importing will begin If you decide to cancel the Import operation move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key AW2400 Owner s Manual Chanter 16 Pan EQ and Dynamics Processing In this section well cover operation of the channel pan or balance equal izer and dynamics processing controls Pan Control These controls adjust the pan position or balance on stereo channels of the input effect return track and stereo output channels Pan can be adjusted either by using the knobs in the PAN EQ screen or by using the physical pan control in the Selected Channel section W Pan Control via the PAN EQ Screen PAN EQ Screen Track Page Pan operation via the dedicated display screen PAHSER 00 00 00 000 acc p pay meurt A00 00 00 000 wc TRACK Press the Seleceted Channel section PAN EQ key so that its indicator lights then press Selected Channel knob 1 to call the PAN EQ screen 2 Press the Display section F1 Input RTN page or F2 Track page key The pan operations available via each page are as fol lows PAN EQ Screen Input RTN Page D GES TRACK field PAN EQ 22 Newasons Lem are Di E IHPUT 1 00 00 00 000 IMT Pan controls for track channels 1 24 2 S
147. track editing Here are some ways in which you can use these editing 3 Change the structure of the song commands You can use the DELETE or COPY commands to delete copy entire tracks changing the structure of the song Erase unwanted regions itself Even after all parts of the song have been recorded You can use the ERASE command to erase just a specific you can use this method to adjust the length of the song region of a specific track For example this provides a for example by shortening the number of measures or convenient way to erase a few wrong notes from a perfor increasing the number of choruses mance or to eliminate noise that occurred while an instru ment was not playing 4 Create special effects You can also use editing commands to create special Change the structure of the tracks effects For example you can copy a guitar or vocal solo You can use the EXCHANGE command to exchange an part to another track and use the PITCH CHANGE com entire track with another track By using this command mand to slightly detune one of these tracks creating a you can bring tracks of widely separated track numbers chorus effect without using the internal effect processor closer to each other for easier operation during mixdown By applying the PITCH CHANGE command to a drum You can use the COPY or MOVE commands to copy track to lower the pitch you can create a unique lo fi move the specified region of a track to a different tra
148. when you last turned off the power Disconnecting the power without performing the shutdown operation will shorten the lifespan of the hard disk and CD RW drive may damage the hard disk and CD RW drive and disc and may result in loss of data e Is the internal hard disk be subjected to strong physical shock E AW2816 backup files cannot be saved e Songs with a large data size cannot be saved Try execut ing the Optimize function from the SONG screen Song List page E Song file size is unnaturally large e Even after you use recorder editing operations to erase a track or other data that sound file will remain on the disk Execute the Optimize command in the SONG screen LIST page CD operations E Can t create an audio CD es Is CD R RW media inserted e The inserted CD R may have already been finalized e Is a signal recorded on the stereo track e The stereo track must be at least four seconds long e Have you saved a song after the stereo track has been recorded e Audio CDs cannot be created using data recorded at the 48kHz sampling rate E An audio CD you created does not play back on a conventional player e An audio CD you created you not play back on a conven tional player unless the disc has been finalized E Audio recorded on CD RW media does not play back on some players e In order for audio data recorded on CD RW media to be played back the player must support CD RW Contact the manufacturer of the
149. you don t want to save the current song and press the ENTER key A popup window containing the various settings for the new song will appear HEH SONG SETTING Select the setting of Hew Sona Fs Recbit i Sound Clip Time i6 EIT 48 kHz _24 BIT The following settings can be made via this popup window wt e The sample rate of the new song can be set to either 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz o Recht The bit depth of the new song can be set to either 16 or 24 bits e Sound Clip Time The record time of the Sound Clip e If you set the sample rate to 48 kHz the song data will not be able to be written as an audio CD 4 When each parameter has been set as required move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Next a popup window will appear allowing you to specify settings that will be carried over from the cur rent song CONF IRHAT OH Select tem to Import SCENE TEMPO L BRAR You may choose one or more of the following items e SCENE Button Scene memories e TEMPO button Tempo map e LIBRARY button EQ dynamics effects and channel libraries For example if you have saved effect settings in a library for the current song and would like to use these settings for the new song as well you would turn on the LIBRARY button 5 Select the buttons of the items you want to carry over from the current song move the cursor to the OK button and pr
150. 0 0 ms Modulation waveform Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency DLY ER 0 100 Delay and early reflections balance 0 all delay 100 all early reflections TYPE S Hall L Hall Random Revers Plate Spring Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density ER NUM 1 19 AW2400 Owner s Manual Number of early reflections E DELAY gt ER One input two output delay and early reflections effects in series Parameter DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Effects Parameters Description Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedba
151. 0 power a startup screen will appear briefly and then the following screen will appear TRAC aai Heu sons J 128 8 o Ho DA SR Ui Fait o Eat Fait ee dad INPUT 1 00 00 00 000 101 11 ECE ea TRACK NIEH r E Turning the power off shut down In a system that includes the AW2400 turn the power to each device off in the following order 1 The monitor system connected to the AW2400 s out put jacks 2 The AW2400 itself 3 External devices such as audio sources and effect processors connected to the input output jacks of the AW2400 When turning the AW2400 power off be sure to perform the following shut down procedure 38 LU AW2400 Owner s Manual 1 Call the SONG screen Song List page by pressing the Work Navigate section SONG key located in the upper left of the top panel as many times as necessary a 1288 B No Dil 00 00 00 000 aS E Mo DE MMA 4 1KH2 1ebit_ SONG inFuT 7 00 00 00 000 SONG LIST SIZE BIT FS LOAD SALE EL COPY OPT IM ZE MIXER IMF DELETE SHUT OOWN FREE 35 95 GB d dP 16 44 1 SISMB 16 44 1 Ae New Sona The_On y_One SHUTDOWN button 2 Using the CURSOR keys located in the upper right of the top panel move the cur sor the blinking area in the screen to the SHUTDOWN button 3 Press the ENTER key located in the mid die right of the top panel A popup window will ask you whether you want to save the current song
152. 0ee 182 282 AW2400 Owner s Manual P Kl ln S E E E 58 E EEN E 147 PAN EQ key 24 PAN EQ screen EQ Lib page annnnnnnnnnnannnnnnn 154 EQ Att page ooonnnnannnnnnnnannnnn 149 IopuubTNoage 147 Track page cpcccinicensncasssenpeccoenns 147 Reie 21 PATCH screen 104 Patching cxiasnccsarenceacncasrssicobuiaetoeess 99 PEAK HOLD bupton 98 PEAK indicators cccsseeeeeeeeees 21 PHANTOM 48V switches 29 Beleg In Ee 28 PHONES le BE 24 Ping pong recording 74 79 PINK NOISE button aaaaaaaaaaa 209 Piten EE 124 S NN 27 alle lag e ER 228 Postroll me 70 211 POWER switch nnnnnnnneneaaannn 28 38 Preroll nme 70 210 Program change 194 201 Hunch mmout ee 69 Q Quick Locator points 88 R RATE eege 125 Rear panel cccccseeeeeesseeeeeeenees 28 Sie eee ener nen oer er cena 27 RECALL CONFIRMATION lflutel aia 211 Recall Gate 162 RECORD key 21 RECORD screen BOUNCE page s sseeseeneeeerenen 79 Direct page 51 99 Mixdown page AA 19 Mixed page 54 102 PITCH FIX esise 124 RECORDING SOLO 84 RELATIVE E 174 Relative zero pont 88 Hemote fe 268 SIS den 26 REMOTE screen 205 REPEAT key 27 93 FS SOWING BE 178 Return me 185 REW key 27 RTZ KOV ccce 27 89 SCALE eai 95 125 SCENE KY sccevscscatcenutexsadeepetencedes 24 Scene Memory ccccceeeeeeeees 159 SCENE screen Library page nnneenenenennnnnn 159 PGM Assign Dage 201
153. 126 AW2400 Owners Manual e The source track the signal before correction cannot be monitored while the PITCH FIX mode screen is showing Also note that the record destination the corrected signal can only be monitored when the recorder is set to the record mode e When Auto Punch in out is engaged you can monitor the destination channel during playback even when not recording e To check the signal before pitch correction engage the BYPASS button to temporarily disable the Pitch Fix effect 10 Adjust the DETECT RATE and PITCH parameters as required while recording the song If NOTE is selected in the CONTROL field you can use a MIDI keyboard to specify the pitches for pitch correction in real time while recording This capability can be useful when creating a harmony vocal track based on the original vocal melody e For optimum effect use the DETECT knob in addition to the RATE knob in order to set the depth of the pitch correction effect e You can create robot voice type effects by setting the RATE and DETECT knobs to high values and using a MIDI key board to trigger sudden pitch changes 11 When the end of the song is reached rewind the song and press the PLAY Is key The recorded pitch corrected track will play back with the other recorded tracks the original uncorrected track will not play back If you re not satisfied with what has been recorded press the UNDO REDO key to undo the
154. 15 BUS 1 BUS 2 AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 SEL keys 1 12 2 STEREO SEL key Selects the channel to be operated The SEL key of the currently selected channel will light 3 ON keys 1 12 4 STEREO ON key Turns the corresponding channel ON or OFF The ON key will be lit when the corresponding channel is ON and out when the channel is OFF The ON keys are also used to specify solo channels when the solo function is on e When Trigger Track mode is engaged the ON key can be used to start stop playback of the corresponding track Introducing the AW2400 H RTN 1 RTN 2 RTN 3 RTN 4 EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 EFFECT 3 EFEECT 4 5 Faders 1 12 The faders adjust recorder track playback levels input channel input levels and effect return channel input levels according to the mixing layer currently selected via the LAYER section 6 STEREO fader Adjusts the output level of the stereo bus e The STEREO SEL keys STEREO ON keys and STEREO faders always operate stereo channels These keys and faders are not affected by the LAYER section settings 7 SOLO key Turns the solo function ON or OFF AW2400 Owner s Manual 23 OO ZMV 9y Bulonpouju Parts of the AW2400 and what they do W Selected Channel section SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW key This key accesses the CH VIEW screen where you can check the level of each channel or perform on screen adjustments to the faders and other mix parameters of
155. 15 Internal hard dek 212 JOG ON key 25 94 K KE YIN SQURGC EN 151 L LAST SOLO 84 LATCH button EEN 206 Layer section eeceeeeeeee 26 33 LEARN button 207 Level meter 97 Library Automix Library eenneenaannn 190 Channel Library 000008 108 Effect Library 116 122 Bebe ceccbsiceoceasascceseesateeies 154 Index Gate Library cccceeeeeeeeeees 154 Mastering Library 000008 15 LOCATE keys 25 32 88 89 Locate points Markers 000 88 A B points egepugiegegegte Sue 88 Adjusting the position 91 92 e ln e 93 In Out points cedeneedseieeencedolsctnnate 88 Locate points ccccseeeeeeeees 88 LOCATOR button nonnnaaaaaaannn 91 MARKER button 91 EI 90 Quick Locator points 88 Relative Zero pont 88 Start End points sascssaspecancsnenvsends 88 Locate sechon 27 M Manual pounch mm out 69 MARK key onannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnn 27 90 MARK SEARCH keys 27 90 Markers ccccceseeceeceeeeseeeeseeeeeees 90 MASTER key 26 MASTER TUNING onainnnnnnaaannnn 126 Mastering Iran 75 Mastering library Iert 237 MASTERING LIBRARY POPUP WwindOow 76 METER key 22 METER screen 97 IopuUHINoage 97 Master page 98 Output page 98 Track page wivensasincerniinsicnecantenscxaxe 97 Meiers 97 Metronome osainen 44 62 MIC LINE INPUT jacks 28 VIE 193 Basic sei
156. 15 16 The signal from the DIGITAL STE REO IN connector will be assigned to adjacent odd numbered even numbered input channels 1 2 15 16 o en ann The DIGITAL STEREO IN connec tor will not be used e In order for the digital audio signal sent from an external device to the DIGITAL STEREO IN connector to be assigned to an input channel the clock of the external device and the AW2400 must be synchronized gt p 223 e The DIGITAL IN setting takes priority over the setting of the Input Select field If you assign DIGITAL IN to an input chan nel a symbol will be displayed for the two corresponding input numbers in the Input Select field This symbol indicates that DIGITAL IN is assigned ITAL IN assignment and the assignment can t be changed e If the STEREO BUS CASCADE button in the DIO screen Set ting page is set to ENABLE ST BUS will appear as the DIG 2 Input Select Here you can select the input sources that will be patched to input channels 1 8 or 9 16 You can select the following input sources es AD1 8 The input signals from the AD inputs MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 e SLOT1 8 The input signals from inputs 1 8 of the digital I O card e SLOT9 16 The input signals from inputs 9 16 of the digital I O card o e Not selected 3 Stereo bus Indicates the on off status of the channels being sent to the stereo bus The numbers within th
157. 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G E PHASER Two input two output 16 stage phaser Range Description Parameter FREQ 12 0 to 12 0 dB 0 05 40 00 Hz High shelving filter gain Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth FB GAIN OFFSET PHASE 99 to 99 0 100 0 00 354 38 degrees Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback Lowest phase shifted frequency offset Left and right modulation phase balance STAGE 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Number of phase shift stages LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB E AUTO PAN Two input two output autopanner Parameter Range Description 0 05 40 00 Hz High shelving filter gain Modulation speed 0 100 Modulation depth 4 Panning direction Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency 12 0 to 12 0 dB EQ peaking type gain 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency 1 L lt gt R L gt R gt Kei
158. 2 Use the DATA JOG dial to scroll through the list to select the store destination the store destination should be enclosed in the dotted frame 3 Move the cursor to the STORE button and press the ENTER key The NAME EDIT popup window will appear allow ing you to assign a name to the data HAHE EDIT Bong FRESS OK TO EXECUTE CANCEL SHIFT LOCK GE EIERE faq b ba FS mE PARS EA LE L EE ed ted CS e Pressing the F2 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the STORE button 4 Enter the name as required then move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key For details on entering a name gt p 32 The scene will be stored Deleting scene data Here s how you can delete unwanted scene data Call the SCENE screen Library page by either pressing the SCENE key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the SCENE key Scene Memory Operation 2 Use the DATA JOG dial to scroll through the list to select the scene to be deleted the selected scene should be enclosed in the dotted frame 3 Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear asking you to confirm the Delete operation CONF IRHAT ION Clear 2 from the SCENE Library e Pressing the F3 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the CLEAR button 4 To exec
159. 35 kHz 19 0 kHz 8 0 4 0 16 Snare Drum 2 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 1 5 dB 8 5 dB 2 5 dB 4 0 dB 180 Hz 335 Hz 2 36 kHz 4 00 kHz 10 0 7 0 1 E G Dist 1 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 5 0 dB 0 0 dB 3 5 dB 0 0 dB 355 Hz 950 Hz 3 35 kHz 12 5 kHz 9 10 Tom tom 1 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 2 0 dB 7 5 dB 2 0 dB 1 0 dB 212 Hz 670 Hz 4 50 kHz 6 30 kHz 1 4 10 1 2 0 28 E G Dist 2 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 6 0 dB 8 5 dB 4 5 dB 4 0 dB 315 Hz 1 06 kHz 4 25 kHz 12 5 kHz 10 4 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 3 0 dB 106 Hz 425 Hz 1 06 kHz 13 2 kHz 8 0 9 A G Stroke 1 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 1 0 dB 4 0 dB 106 Hz 1 00 kHz 1 90 kHz 5 30 kHz 0 9 4 5 3 9 High Hat L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 0 dB 2 5 dB 1 0 dB 0 5 dB 95 Hz 425 Hz 2 80 kHz 7 50 kHz 0 5 r A G Stroke 2 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 3 5 dB 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 300 Hz 750 Hz 2 00 kHz 3 55 kHz 9 4 5 Percussion L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 5 dB 0 0 d
160. 4 1kHz Sampling frequency 48kHz None Unknown sampling frequency UNLOCK e EMPHASIS Indicates whether emphasis is on or off for the received digital signal Parameter values Description No input signal or inappropriate input signal Emphasis ON O O n ff 2 Unknown Emphasis OFF Gy Digital Input Output amp Optional Card Settings CO AW2400 Owner s Manual 227 Check the Status Of the Digital Input Signal e Plug in Card Settings NO E sumes peg jeuogdo e INdjnoANdy jeubiq e CATEGORY Indicates the status of Category Code Bit included in the IEC958 Part 2 S PDIF Consumer format This parameter can display the following values Parameter values Description General Temporarily used Laser Optical Laser optical device Digital Digital converter and signal pro D D Conv j cessing device Magnetic tape device and magnetic disk Magnetic DER D Broadcast Digital broadcast reception Musical instrument microphone and Instrument sources that generate string signals A D converter EE without copyright information A D converter ar COTM with copyright information Solid Memory Solid memory device Experiment Experimental device Unknown Unknown device e AES EBU appears in the Category row when you are moni toring IEC958 Part 3 AES EBU Professional format signals that do not include
161. 4 and the effect signals returned to input channels 3 4 are mixed and sent to the stereo bus ololololola DEEG DOE MONITOR OUT jacks AW2400 AW2400 Owner s Manual 113 Using external effects with the AUX buses Signal Flow When Using an External Effect Processor PHONES Track 4 Effect Processor Track 2 C Tacks STEREO OUT MONITOR OUT Track 3 aT E RR oe l bei UNBAL OdB jack jacks 3 4 INPUT m Track channels AUX Bus master channel Input channels Stereo output channel 5 1 2 3 4 13 14 15 16 17 1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 BUS 1 BUS 2 AUX 1 AUX bus 1 x Number of play tracks x Number of play tracks Mixer section gt lt O Press the Selected Channel section PAN 11 Raise the STEREO fader to the 0 dB level EQ key so that its indicator lights then and while playing back the song adjust the press Selected Channel knob 1 as many input level of the external effect processor times as necessary to display the PAN EQ as well as the input levels of input channels screen Input RTN page 3 and 4 using the GAIN knobs If necessary return to step 7 and readjust the send lev 10 Set the input channel 3 and 4 pan controls els from the track channels to the AUX1 bus as fully left and right respectively required You can also adjust the AUX1 bus master This ensures full stereo effect from th
162. 400 Owner s Manual 285 MEMO 286 AW2400 Owner s Manual For details of products please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below Pour plus de d tails sur les produits veuillez vous adresser a Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd 135 Milner Avenue Scarborough Ontario MIS 3R1 Canada Tel 416 298 1311 U S A Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park Calif 90620 U S A Tel 714 522 9011 CENTRAL amp SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de M xico S A de C V Calz Javier Rojo G mez 1149 Col Guadalupe del Moral C P 09300 M xico D F M xico Tel 55 5804 0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda Av Reboucas 2636 Pinheiros CEP 05402 400 Sao Paulo SP Brasil Tel 011 3085 1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America S A Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2 B 1053 Buenos Aires Argentina Tel 1 4371 7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America S A Torre Banco General Piso 7 Urbanizaci n Marbella Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia Ciudad de Panama Panama Tel 507 269 5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha Kemble Music U K Ltd Sherbourne Drive Tilbrook Milton Keynes MK7 8BL England Tel 01908 366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstrabe 22
163. 5 40 00 Hz High shelving filter gain Description Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency EQ G 12 0 to 12 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQ Q 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain 2s O Q Q Q lt AW2400 Owner s Manual 247 Effects Parameters E SYMPHONIC Two input two output symphonic effect Range Description Parameter FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency EQG 12 0 to 12 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQ Q 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth HSH F 50 0 Hz
164. 5 00 00 00 00 05 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 TIME CODE 23 59 55 00 00 e oo0000 O O OOO r ES e When you create an audio CD the Start and End points can be used to specify the region of the stereo track that will be written to the audio CD gt p 214 e When the AW2400 transmits MTC to an external device the Start point will be the origin zero point of the time code that is gener ated The Start point will also serve as the origin measure 1 beat 1 for the measures displayed in the counter Relative zero point This locate point stores the relative zero position You will move to this location when you press the RTZ a key in the transport section Initially the relative zero point will be the same as absolute time 00 00 00 000 but you can change this if desired via the panel controls or on screen editing If you select RELATIVE as the counter display format the current location will be displayed with the Relative Zero point as 0 The procedure for registering the current location in one of the locate points and then moving to that locate point is as follows 1 Move the song to the point that you want to register as a locate point You can set locate points while the song is playing or stopped 2 Hold down the SET key and press the key for the desired locate point MARK SEARCH LAST REC SEARCH REPEAT A Empu MARK SEARCH LAST REC SEARCH
165. 6 AW2400 Owners Manual 4 Move the cursor to the List and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select the library setting to be recalled The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for recall 5 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key A popup window confirming the recall operation will appear CONF RAAT LOH Recall 2 from the EFFECT Library e Pressing the F1 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the RECALL button 6 To actually recall the selected setting move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The library setting will be recalled Applying Effects via Send and Return Anplying Effects via Send and Return The procedure for applying effects 1 4 via the effect sends and returns is described below NOTE sends and returns 1 Referring to the instructions in Recalling Effect Library settings on page 116 recall an effect library preset that is based on the effect you want to use 2 Make sure that the Selected Channel sec tion EFFECT key is engaged and its indi cator is lit 3 Make sure that the EFFECT screen selected in step 1 is showing Selected Channel knobs 1 4 correspond to EFFECT screens 1 4 Press the appropriate knob to call the desired screen 4 To adjust the send level to an effect bus start by pressing the Display section F1 key to call the FX Input page
166. 75 Vrms 273 AW2400 Owner s Manual Digital Mixing Functions Input Channels INPUT 1 16 Phase Normal Reverse Gate Compressor Attenuation Equalizer 4 Band PEQ Pan Bus Assign STEREO SOLO BUS 1 2 AUX 1 4 EFF 1 4 Track Channels TRACK 1 24 Attenuation Phase Normal Reverse Equalizer 4 Band PEQ Compressor Pan Bus Assign STEREO BUS 1 2 AUX 1 4 EFF 1 4 Internal Effect Return Channels EFFECT RETURN 1 4 stereo Equalizer 4 Band PEQ Pan Bus Assign STEREO AUX 1 4 Master Channels STEREO L R Attenuation Equalizer 4 Band PEQ Compressor Balance BUS 1 L R 2 L R Attenuation Equalizer 4 Band PEQ Compressor Balance AUX 1 4 Attenuation Equalizer 4 Band PEQ Compressor Balance EFF 1 4 Compressor E Recorder Section Overview Recording Resolution 16 bit 24 bit Sampling Frequency 44 1 kHz 48 kHz Edit Functions Song Edit OPTIMIZE DELETE COPY IMPORT Track Edit ERASE DELETE INSERT COPY MOVE EXCHANGE TIME COMP EXPAND PITCH CHANGE IMPORT CD AUDIO IMPORT CD WAV IMPORT USB WAV IMPORT TRACK EXPORT Other Functions Locate point Marker Locate RTZ A B LAST REC IN OUT Quick Locate 1 9 MARK 1 99 Punch In Out Manual Auto Pitch Fix CD RW Drive Data Backup Audio CD Burning and Playback Audio CD Import WAV File Import DW External Control MIDI IN 5 pin DIN MIDI OUT THRU 5 pin DIN FOOT SW phone USB USB 2 0
167. 8 5 6 Total EQ 3 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 1 5 dB 0 5 dB 2 0 dB 4 0 dB 67 Hz 850 Hz 1 90 kHz 15 0 kHz 0 28 0 7 Bass Drum 3 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 3 5 dB 10 0 dB 3 5 dB 0 0 dB 118 Hz 315 Hz 4 25 kHz 20 0 kHz 2 10 0 4 0 4 Snare Drum 3 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 3 5 dB 0 0 dB 224 Hz 560 Hz 4 25 kHz 4 00 kHz 4 5 2 8 0 1 Tom tom 2 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 9 0 dB 1 5 dB 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 90 Hz 212 Hz 5 30 kHz 17 0 kHz 4 5 1 2 Piano 3 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 5 dB 13 0 dB 4 5 dB 2 5 dB 100 Hz 475 Hz 2 36 kHz 10 0 kHz 8 10 9 Piano Low PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 5 5 dB 1 5 dB 6 0 dB 0 0 dB 190 Hz 400 Hz 6 70 kHz 12 5 kHz 10 6 3 2 2 Piano High PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 5 5 dB 1 5 dB 5 0 dB 3 0 dB 190 Hz 400 Hz 6 70 kHz 5 60 kHz 10 6 3 2 2 0 1 Fine EQ Cass L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 1 5 dB 0 0 dB 1 0 dB 3 0 dB 75 Hz 1 00 kHz 4 00 kHz 12 5 kHz 4 5 1 8 Narrator PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 0 dB 1 0
168. AB J A Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S 400 43 G teborg Sweden Tel 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A DK 2730 Herlev Denmark Tel 44 92 49 00 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini N ringspark 1 N 1345 ster s Norway Tel 67 16 77 70 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstrabe 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 49 4101 3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2313 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstrabe 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 04101 3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21 128 Jebel Ali Freezone P O Box 17328 Dubai U A E Tel 971 4 881 5868 ASIA THE PEOPLE S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music amp Electronics China Co Ltd 25 F United Plaza 1468 Nanjing Road West Jingan Shanghai China Tel 021 6247 2211 INDONESIA PT Yamaha Music Indonesia Distributor PT Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center Jalan Jend Gatot Subroto Kav 4 Jakarta 12930 Indonesia Tel 21 520 2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd Tong Yang Securities Bldg 16F 23 8 Yoido dong Youngdungpo ku Seoul Korea Tel 02 3770 0660 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia Sdn Bhd Lot 8 Jalan Perbandaran 47301 Kelana Jaya Petaling Jaya Selangor Malaysia Tel 3 78030900 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music
169. AW2400 Preferences on page 211 for details Storing EQ Dynamics Library settings The procedure for storing library settings is as follows NOTE e New settings cannot be stored to read only library settings those marked with an D icon e If you select and store to a library number that contains previously stored data the previous data will be overwritten 1 Access the page containing the library to which the settings are to be stored For details on accessing the various library pages refer to Accessing the EQ Dynamics Library screens on page 154 2 Rotate the DATA JOG dial to select the library number to which the settings are to be stored The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for storage 3 Move the cursor to the STORE button and press the ENTER key The NAME EDIT popup window will appear MANE EDIT Bass Drum i PRESS OK TO EXECUTE Enr le le epee le eee Pee ete ee Pose a at eet Pet ee eee fa et et e De ee ee ee ose ote a Jat ae e Pressing the F2 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the STORE button 4 As required enter a name for the selected library setting move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key refer to page 32 for details on name entry The library setting will be stored e The store NAME EDIT popup window can be disabled if desired Refer to AW2400 Preferences
170. Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms Click Erase EXPAND Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms Strings3 Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms Announcer COMPAND H Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Width dB Release ms BrassSection Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms Limiter1 COMPAND S Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Width dB Release ms Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms Limiter2 Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms SamplingPerc COMPAND S Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Width dB Release ms Total Comp Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms Sampling BD AW2400 Owner s Manual Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms Total Comp2 Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms Effects Parame
171. B 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 100 Hz 400 Hz 2 80 kHz 17 0 kHz 4 5 0 56 A G Arpeg 1 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 0 5 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 224 Hz 1 00 kHz 4 00 kHz 6 70 kHz 4 5 4 5 0 12 E Bass 1 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 7 5 dB 4 5 dB 2 5 dB 0 0 dB 35 5 Hz 112 Hz 2 00 kHz 4 00 kHz 5 4 5 A G Arpeg 2 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 0 0 dB 5 5 dB 0 0 dB 4 0 dB 180 Hz 355 Hz 4 00 kHz 4 25 kHz 7 4 5 E Bass 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 3 0 dB 0 0 dB 2 5 dB 0 5 dB 112 Hz 112 Hz 2 24 kHz 4 00 kHz 0 1 5 6 3 Brass Sec PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 2 0 dB 1 0 dB 1 5 dB 3 0 dB 90 Hz 850 Hz 2 12 kHz 4 50 kHz 2 8 2 0 7 7 Syn Bass 1 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 3 5 dB 8 5 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 85 Hz 950 Hz 4 00 kHz 12 5 kHz 0 1 8 4 5 Male Vocal 1 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 0 5 dB 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 3 5 dB 190 Hz 1 00 kHz 2 00 kHz 6 70 kHz 0 11 4 5 0 56 0 11 Syn Bass 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 5 dB 0 0 dB 1 5 dB 0 0 dB 125 Hz 180 Hz 1 12 kHz 12 5 kHz 1 6 8 2 2
172. CD Extra disc and the song is 24 bit the audio data will be automatically con verted to 24 bit format during the import operation e When you move the cursor to the LISTEN button and press the ENTER key there will be a slight time lag while the data is read from the CD before you hear it 9 Move the cursor to the track list file list and use the DATA JOG dial or the INC DEC keys to select the track or WAV file that you want to import If you re using IMPORT CD WAN and the C is located at the line enclosed by the dotted line you can press the ENTER key to move to the next lower level To move to the next higher level move the cursor to the t and press the ENTER key 10 If you re using IMPORT CD AUDIO use From Start From End to specify the region that will be imported 11 Use the To TR To V TR and To Start fields to specify the track number virtual track num ber and starting location into which the data will be imported NOTE e If the import destination contains data it will be overwritten Be careful not to overwrite important data by accident 12 When you have finished making settings move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the opera tion CONF RAHAT LOH Execute CO IMPORT 7 13 To execute the import operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Importing will begin If you move the cu
173. CD RW drive can also be used to backup restore songs to play back audio CDs and to load WAV data from a CD ROM Features of the AW2400 e AW2400 terminology E Connecting to a Computer The AW2400 can be directly connected to a computer via the built in USB interface which enables transferring audio files as well as MIDI messages This allows WAV format audio files to be copied between the AW2400 and computer for convenient management and processing in computer based applications and backup song files can be stored on the computer s memory media Introducing the AW2400 H AW2400 terminology Here s a quick overview of terminology used with the AW2400 Recorder section E racks A location where data is recorded is called a track The AW 2400 s recorder section uses the following types of track Audio tracks The physical tracks used to record and play back audio data are called audio tracks or simply tracks The AW 2400 has 24 audio tracks You can record 16 tracks simultaneously and play back 24 tracks simultaneously 16 bit songs Stereo track The AW2400 has a stereo track that is independent from audio tracks 1 24 and which records and plays a stereo audio signal The stereo track is used mainly as a dedi cated mixdown track for recording the final mix Virtual tracks Each of the 24 audio tracks and the stereo track consists of eight virtual tracks
174. CONF IRHAT LOM Save Current Sona CANCEL WES 4 Move the cursor to the YES button if you want to save the current song or to the NO button if you do not want to save it Then press the ENTER key D When the Now safe to turn off message appears turn off the POWER switch located on the rear panel e If you turn off the AW2400 power without performing the above shutdown procedure not only will any unsaved changes be lost but you also risk damaging the data on the hard disk and damaging or drastically shortening the lifespan of the hard disk itself as well as the internal CD RW drive Please use caution Adjusting the input level Adjusting the input level Here s the basic procedure for setting up an input channel to which a microphone or instrument is connected via MIC LINE INPUT jack 1 8 and adjusting the input level while monitoring the signal via the stereo bus 1 Turn down the GAIN knob for the MIC LINE INPUT jack to which your instrument mic is connected Also lower the STEREO fader to the position 2 Connect a microphone or instrument to the appropriate MIC LINE INPUT jack MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 can be used with the following sources MIC LINE INPUT XLR jacks 1 8 These are XLR type balanced input jacks Use a male XLR lt gt female XLR cable to connect your micro phone direct box or a guitar bass preamp that has a balanced output jack Balanced c
175. Category Code Bit e COPY Indicates the status of copy protection information included in the IEC958 Part2 S PDIF Consumer for mat signals Parameter values Description OK Copy allowed Prohibit Copy prohibited 2 DIGITAL STEREO IN connector status Indicates the status of the digital audio signal received at the DIGITAL STEREO IN connector 3 SLOT When an I O card is installed in the rear panel slot a graphic symbol that indicates the type of card appears here NO CARD will appear when no card is installed 4 Digital I O card status Displays the status of the digital audio signal received via a digital I O card e The status of digital signals received via a digital I O card is dis played in odd even channel pairs Plug in Card Settings Settings for plug in DSP cards installed in the rear panel slot are made via the DIO screen Plug in page To call this page press the Work Navigate section DIO key as many times as necessary or press the F3 key after pressing the DIO key fl Be Heu Sons inFuT 00 00 00 000 DL UG IN CARO 128 87 Go initial m 111 11 CARARE Software Mersini Hardware Revisions www Waves COM 228 AW2400 Owner s Manual The content of the display will depend on the plug in card installed Refer to the plug in card owner s manual for details As of July 2005 the available plug in card is Check the following Yamaha website for
176. DATA JOG dial to the left If time display is selected as the counter display for mat you can move the current location forward or backward in millisecond units If time code display is selected you can move in sub frame units Current location oa eer Nudge time ES e You can use locate points or markers to change the location or register locate points or markers while using the Nudge function e The nudge direction and time can be adjusted as required Refer to AW2400 Preferences on page 210 for details AW2400 Owner s Manual 4 To turn off the Nudge function press the JOG ON key or the transport section STOP W key The JOG ON key indicator will go out and the Nudge function will be cancelled Finding a location while viewing the waveform Finding a location while viewing the waveform The AW2400 lets you find a location while viewing the waveform of the sound recorded on a track 1 Locate to the vicinity of the point you want to find 2 Call the TRACK screen Track View page by either pressing the Work Navigate section TRACK key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the TRACK key TRACK field WAVE button TRACE a aS_Hew_ song RE e g He DP INPUT 1 a 00 00 00 000 101 11 ECE ea TRACE WIE 3 Move the cursor to the TRACK field and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select the number of the track corre sponding to wavef
177. DE field choose the way in which the signal s to be monitored will be selected when the Solo function is on You can turn on one or the other of the following but tons e LAST SOLO button If this button is on you will be monitoring only the single channel whose ON key was last pressed e MIX SOLO button If this button is on you will be monitoring all chan nels whose ON key was pressed after enabling the Solo function 84 i AW2400 Owners Manual 3 Use the SOLO MODE field to choose the operating mode for the Solo function You can turn on one or the other of the following but tons e RECORDING SOLO button If this button is on the soloed signal s will be sent via the dedicated Solo bus and output from the MONITOR OUT jacks and PHONES jack This will not affect the signals that are being output from the stereo bus or Bus 1 Bus 2 With this setting even channels that are not assigned to the stereo bus or Bus B bus 2 or channels whose ON key is off can be monitored from the MONITOR OUT jacks or PHONES jack This setting is convenient when you want to monitor only specific channels without affecting the recorded content while recording tracks or during mixdown MIXDOWN SOLO button If this button is on only the soloed signal s will be sent via the stereo bus and output from the STE REO OUT jacks MONITOR OUT jacks and PHONES jack other channels will be muted With this setting you won
178. Description DELAY 0 0 2730 0 ms Delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency E STEREO DELAY Two input two output basic stereo delay Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel delay time Left channel feedback plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback Right channel feedback plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency FB G L 99 to 99 FB G R 99 to 99 E MOD DELAY One input two output basic repeat delay with modulation Parameter Range Description DELAY 0 0 2725 0 ms Delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency L
179. Dimensions YAMAHA ja eee We Gi WW CANE COOC Do Ei Unit mm Specifications and descriptions in this owner s manual are for information purposes only Yamaha Corp reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice Since specifications equipment or options may not be the same in every locale please check with your Yamaha dealer For European models Purchaser User Information specified in EN55103 1 and EN55103 2 Inrush Current 35A Conforms to Environments E1 E2 E3 and E4 5 Appendix AW2400 Owner s Manual 279 Index A A B KEYS sesecectesacctesdecnesosnecetioxs A B points cccseseeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeees A B repeat wiscveivancensessttiasresanvaienut AC IN connector Accessing a screen page Additional Function buttons Adjusting the input level Assigning input signals to tracks Direct recording 00 Mixed recording 54 102 Audio OD E Basic settings ccccsseeees Creating cccccccceceeeseeeeeeees Disc At Once 214 218 SFA SINGS E lice F4 4 6 WE PAVING EE Track At Once nasaan 214 217 Writing methoden Audio ht de AUTO DISPLAY button AUTO PUNCH key A
180. ECTED Recording cannot be performed because you have not selected a record track RECORDER BUSY The operation cannot be executed because the recorder is operating RECORDER RUNNING NOW Since the recorder is recording or playing this operation cannot be executed REDO COMPLETED Redo re execution of the previous operation has been completed REPEAT POINTS TOO CLOSE The repeat interval is too short It cannot be set to less than one second SELECTED CH IS NONE The selected channel is not available SET OVERWRITE specify the automix parameters to be overwritten in the OVERWRITE SOUND CLIP MODE NOW Since the AW2400 is in Sound Clip mode this operation cannot be executed Since the AW2400 is in Stereo Track Playback mode this operation cannot be STEREO TRACK PLAYBACK MODE executed E Appendix AW2400 Owner s Manual 263 Display message list Be xlpueddy 264 THIS SONG IS PROTECTED This song is protected and cannot be edited or recorded TOO MANY REGIONS The maximum allowable number of regions has been exceeded TRIGGER TRACK MODE NOW Since the AW2400 is in Trigger Track mode this operation cannot be executed UNDO COMPLETED Undo cancellation of the previous operation has been executed USB STORAGE MODE NOW Since the AW2400 is in USB Storage mode this operation cannot be executed WRONG WORD CLOCK An inappropriate word clock is being received from the connected device to wh
181. EFF cecezccdscccencnee 107 119 MIX BALANCE nnnnnnnaannaannnn 121 Send and Return 115 417 USED AS sicccssatimorsecciemaenn 121 Effects Parameters 245 EES 227 ENTER KOY erise 25 Entering Text 32 e EE E E E E 60 149 EO LIDAN EE 154 EQ Parameter list 008 238 EXPAND Expander 153 241 External eitiects 113 120 External MIDI devices 200 F F1 F4 keys assesses 22 31 Fader Group sictsccasenssnetaccseeececass 82 Fader Start c0cccccccceeeeeeeeeees 134 Faders ccesecstencercnctcevacnenondeeoeieecsine 23 Features ccceeeeeccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 15 FP ROY EN T 27 FINALIZE button 220 FP IMAIIZING EN 220 FOOT SW jack EE 29 FORMANT 125 Front panel ccccsseeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 29 GAIN knobs wicsesiincsiecsitsinnncvniciietateaanet 21 CATE EE 151 242 Gate Library ccccccceeeeeeeeees 154 Gate Parameter jet 243 Ground SChEW srccidecinnccivbcdetedessnetvn 28 EE 134 H PREMIO SK E 212 IN 1 8 Key aooosnnnnnnnneooessnnnrrrnrenn 26 IN 9 16 Key ou eccccccccceeeeeeeseeeeeeees 26 IN OUT kees 27 70 89 IN OUt points eeeeeeeeeeee eee eens 88 Included CD ROM 266 INITIALIZE button 106 Initializing cc eeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 212 INPUT CH MUTE MIX button 222 INPUT SEL REVS iesaccsctstentcarereededes 21 INSERT EFP euer e 107 119 INSERT WO jacks 28 Inserting effet 115 119 Internal Effects cee 1
182. For details on insert effect operation refer to Inserting an Effect Into a Channel on page 119 e When SLOT 1 16 is selected the specified channel insert point is assigned to the corresponding channel on an optional I O card installed in the AW2400 This assignment is shown in the PATCH screen Output page OPTION I O SLOT OUT ASSIGN field e You can move the cursor to the insert point and press the ENTER key to reverse the order of the COMP and an INSERT EFF PAN BAL knob Move the cursor to this knob and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to pan the channel signal to the stereo bus or bus 1 and bus 2 for stereo input channels this functions as a balance control The effect return channel L and R signals can be adjusted individually These knobs are linked to the PAN EQ screen knobs gt p 147 BUS1 BUS2 ST Move the cursor to any of these points and press the ENTER key to turn assignment of the channel signal to the corresponding bus bus 1 bus 2 or stereo bus on or off RECTR Displays the input channel to track assignment as speci fied in the RECORD screen Direct page a Level meter The level meters display input channel track channel and effect return channel input levels as well as stereo output channel bus master channel AUX send master channel effect send master channel output levels 2 AUX EFFECT Move the cursor to the appropriate knob and use the DATA JOG dial or INC
183. For the audio tracks and the stereo track only one virtual track can be recorded or played at any time However you can switch virtual tracks to con tinue recording other takes while preserving the previ ously recorded content The diagram below shows the concept of virtual tracks The horizontal rows indicate audio tracks 1 24 and the vertical columns correspond to virtual tracks 1 8 The shaded areas indicate the virtual track that is currently selected for recording or playback ee a tracks eeu nee en nea 21 22 23 24 1 m 2 3 4 5 6 gt 7 8 Stereo track 1 e 2 S 3 Sila E 5 6 7 8 Trigger tracks The Trigger Track function allows the track ON keys and faders to be used to start and stop playback of recorded tracks When the Trigger Track function is engaged and you press a track channel ON key the cor responding track will playback one time from the begin ning of the song to the end of the recorded data AW2400 Owner s Manual 17 AW2400 terminology OOPEMV 9y Dupont 18 W Locate points markers Locations within a song that you specified in order to exe cute a function such as auto punch in out or A B repeat playback are called locate points Locate points include in out points and the A B points You can use the Locate section keys to move instantly to these points You can assign markers at desired locations within a song independently of t
184. GITAL STEREO OUT connector STEREO OUT jacks MONITOR OUT jacks PHONES jack Metronome Internal Effects CD Play CD Write Data Backup Restore WAV File Import Recorder CD R RW drive Now let s take a more detailed look at each section of the AW2400 E Mixer section Plenty of input channels with professional features The AW2400 digital mixer features 24 bit AD DA conver sion with 32 bit internal processing for uncompromised sound quality 16 input channels 24 track channels and 4 stereo effect return channels provide plenty of input capacity for most mixing situations The 8 AD input MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 chan nels 1 16 on an optional I O card installed in I O slot or the stereo DIGITAL STEREO IN connector can be selected for input The track channel 1 24 inputs are permanently assigned to tracks 1 24 and the effect return channel 1 4 inputs are permanently assigned to the outputs of internal effect pro cessors 1 4 AW2400 Owner s Manual 15 Features of the AW2400 OOPEMV 9y Dupont 16 Totally redesigned operation The AW2400 is designed to be operated directly by the musician guitarist vocalist drummer etc Input signal track assignment mixdown and bounce recording set tings tracking with effects EQ dynamics compressor set tings and much more can be easily handled with simple straightforward operation Four band EQ and dynamics pr
185. GN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EFF1 SEND INPUT 1 NO ASSIGN EFF1 SEND INPUT 2 NO ASSIGN EFF1 SEND INPUT 3 CHANNEL INPUT 1 EFF1 SEND INPUT 4 CHANNEL CHANNEL INPUT 2 INPUT 3 EFF1 SEND INPUT 5 EFF1 SEND INPUT 6 CHANNEL INPUT 4 EFF1 SEND INPUT 7 CHANNEL INPUT 5 EFF1 SEND INPUT 8 CHANNEL INPUT 6 EFF1 SEND INPUT 9 CHANNEL INPUT 7 EFF1 SEND INPUT 10 CHANNEL CHANNEL INPUT 8 INPUT 9 EFF1 SEND INPUT 11 EFF1 SEND INPUT 12 CHANNEL INPUT 10 EFF1 SEND INPUT 13 CHANNEL INPUT 11 EFF1 SEND INPUT 14 CHANNEL INPUT 12 EFF1 SEND INPUT 15 CHANNEL INPUT 13 EFF1 SEND INPUT 16 CHANNEL CHANNEL INPUT 14 INPUT 15 NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN CHANNEL INPUT 16 NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN CHANNEL RETURN 1 NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN CHANNEL RETURN 2 NO ASSIGN AW2400 Owner s Manual MASTER STEREO OUT NO ASSIGN When CONTROL CHANGE MODE 3 PARAMETER NO ASSIGN CHANNEL TRACK 1 PARAMETER CHANNEL Basic MIDI Settings TRACK 1 CHANNEL TRACK 2 CHANNEL TRACK 2 CHANNEL TRACK 3 CHANNEL
186. HEWER A FIX button When this button is turned on the sampling frequency is fixed at the sampling frequency shown to the right of the button default 2 VARI button The Vari pitch function is active when this button is turned on 3 VARI knob Adjusts the sampling frequency of the current song in a range of 5 97 to 6 00 4 Move the cursor to the VARI button and press the ENTER key This activates the Vari pitch function D Move the cursor to the VARI knob and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to set the sampling frequency as required 226 AW2400 Owner s Manual 6 To disable the Vari pitch function move the cursor to the FIX button and press the ENTER key The Vari pitch function will be turned off and the sam pling frequency will be fixed at the value shown to the right of the FIX button e When the Vari pitch function is enabled and sampling fre quency is adjusted any external devices slaved to the AW2400 wordclock signal will be affected Some slave devices may not be able to synchronize properly to the AW2400 wordclock signal when it is adjusted using the Vari pitch function Cascade connecting External Devices Digital audio signals received at the AW2400 DIGITAL STEREO IN connector can be mixed directly into the AW2400 s stereo bus cascade connection The output from a digital mixer could be cascade connected in this way to allow the mixer s inputs to be mixed to stereo
187. IBRARY button and press the ENTER key The MASTERING LIBRARY popup window will appear You can use the mastering library to quickly recall dedicated settings for the stereo output channel These settings include EQ and dynamics processor settings that are appropriate for application to the final mix Library numbers 0 13 are read only and library num ber 0 is data to initialize the stereo output channel MASTERING LIBRARY Ho WITAL AIX UE T COMP HARD ATTACK D DARKS SOFT DARK HARD s H Use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select the desired library data then move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key The mastering library settings will be recalled Play back your song while you try various settings to find the best one To exit the MASTERING LIBRARY popup window move the cursor to the EXIT button and press the ENTER key d If necessary you can press the STEREO SEL key to select the stereo output chan nel and use the Selected Channel section to make fine adjustments to the EQ and dynamics processor settings Operations are the same as for an input channel except for the fact that the EQ and dynamics processor of the stereo output channel always operate in stereo and that the dynamics processor has no gate 10 To check the level of the signal that is being output to the stereo track press the METER key then press the F3 key The METER screen Mas
188. ID GIE EE Ieffe le ffe Delen Dellen HS A ao Ele CFO op Digital recording possible Digital recording DAT or MD etc S not possible ft C O COOC O00 210 AW2400 Owner s Manual 2 CD DAT DIGITAL REC button Enables or disables digital recording from the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack and importing of digital audio data from an audio CD or WAV file inserted in the CD RW drive When this parameter is ON the following message will be displayed CONF RAAT LOH OBSERVE Corfyrisht Notice HWeitten in Owner s Manual If you agree to the conditions stipulated in the Copyright Notice gt p 7 select OK Recording and importing of digital audio data will be enabled when you select OK e The CD DAT DIGITAL REC button will always be set to the default DISABLE setting when you turn on the power 3 NUDGE PLAY MODE Selects the playback method that will be used by the Nudge function a function that lets you use the JOG ON key and DATA JOG dial to search for a location Press the ENTER key to confirm your selection es AFTER Play repeatedly for the duration specified by the NUDGE TIME starting at the cur rent location e BEFORE Play repeatedly for the duration specified by the NUDGE TIME ending at the cur rent location MODE BEFORE MODE AFTER Current location Current location 4 NUDGE TIME Specifies the dura
189. IGN PARAMETER CHANNEL INPUT 1 CHANNEL INPUT 1 CHANNEL INPUT 2 CHANNEL INPUT 2 CHANNEL INPUT 3 CHANNEL INPUT 3 CHANNEL INPUT 4 CHANNEL INPUT 4 CHANNEL INPUT 5 CHANNEL INPUT 5 CHANNEL INPUT 6 CHANNEL CHANNEL INPUT 6 INPUT 7 CHANNEL INPUT 7 CHANNEL INPUT 8 CO N O1 BR O M oO CHANNEL INPUT 8 CHANNEL INPUT 9 CHANNEL INPUT 9 CHANNEL INPUT 10 CHANNEL INPUT 10 CHANNEL INPUT 11 CHANNEL INPUT 11 CHANNEL INPUT 12 CHANNEL INPUT 12 CHANNEL INPUT 13 CHANNEL INPUT 13 CHANNEL INPUT 14 CHANNEL INPUT 14 CHANNEL INPUT 15 CHANNEL INPUT 15 CHANNEL INPUT 16 CHANNEL INPUT 16 NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN CHANNEL RETURN 1 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL RETURN 2 NO ASSIGN MASTER STEREO OUT NO ASSIGN MASTER AUX 1 CHANNEL RETURN 1L MASTER CHANNEL RETURN 1R MASTER CHANNEL RETURN 2L MASTER CHANNEL RETURN 2R MASTER BALANCE STEREO OUT z 196 MASTER NO ASSIGN MASTER MASTER NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN MASTER NO ASSIGN MASTER NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSI
190. ITOR OUT and PHONES jacks AUX buses 1 4 These buses mix the signals from the track input and effect return channels and send them to the specified out put connector Use these when you will use an external effect processor or to create a mix differing from the ste reo channel for musicians to monitor Effect buses 1 4 These buses combine the signals from the track and input channels and input them to built in effects 1 4 Bus 1 Bus 2 These buses mix track input and effect return channels and send them to the inputs of free tracks Bus 1 and bus 2 are used for bounce ping pong recording AW2400 terminology Overall The smallest unit by which the AW2400 manages a com position is called a song When you save a song on the hard disk all data necessary for reproducing that song will be saved 1 e not just the audio data but also the mixer settings and the automix settings You can return to the original state at any time by loading the saved song E Scenes and scene memories A scene is a Stored set of settings for the mixer section and effects The area of memory that holds the scenes is called scene memory and 99 scenes can be stored for each song Scene memories are saved on the hard disk as part of the song E Libraries A library is an area of memory that stores individual set tings such as for EQ or dynamics The AW2400 has sepa rate libraries for EQ dynamics
191. IX mode Use PITCH FIX to correct the pitch and other properties of a vocal track gt p 124 6 MUTE CLEAR button This button clears the mute status of all tracks However depending on the bit depth of the song and on the number of tracks that are enabled for recording there may be cases in which some tracks cannot be unmuted If so tracks will be muted consecutively starting with the last numbered track 4 Bus1 R 7 SAFE button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key all bounce source and bounce destina tion assignments will be cancelled This will also exe cute the MUTE CLEAR 6 operation e Pressing the F1 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the SAFE button In the PLAY TRACK area select a bounce source track move the cursor to the symbol for that track and press the ENTER key Each time you press the ENTER key the screen will change as follows Mixdown and bounce operations Ee 1 Off I 5 Bus2 L R I La La G 4 On a A ae i EH 2 Bus1 L R P 6 Bus2 L m On SS On Ee ETE ETE 3 Bus1 L _ 7 Bus2 R _ On i SS On Ead l EA On ER ES e If a track channel is selected as a bounce source its assign ment to the stereo bus will automatically be turned off e The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as mute but you can still record to muted tracks
192. LINK button Move the cursor to the parameter you want to edit and use either the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to set the parameter as required e You can save your current compressor settings in the library as described in EQ Dynamics Processor Library Operation on page 154 Dynamics Processing E Compressor Control via the Selected Channel section Applying and controlling compression by using knobs 1 4 in the Selected Channel section Use the Layer section INPUT SEL SEL and STEREO SEL keys to select the chan nel to which compression is to be applied 2 Press the Selected Channel section DYN key so that it s indicator lights With the default settings the DYNAMICS screen will appear automatically The display will not change if the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DIS PLAY button is set to OFF 3 Rotate Selected Channel knobs 1 4 The parameters for the channels selected in step 1 will change accordingly The knobs control the following parameters Selected Channel knobs 1 4 TOTAL Multiple parameters are changed simultaneously to vary the compression effect If the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DISPLAY button is set to OFF a popup window showing the current compression settings will appear while Selected Channel knobs 1 4 are being operated CAP TOTAL L7 IZ BO Pan EQ and Dynamics Processing M On AW2400 Owner s Manual 153 EQ Dynamics
193. Logic key commands Track assignments must be made within Logic as appropriate for your system 2 Select the CS 10 settings as the MIDI controller type For details on the CS 10 settings ask Digidesign About the CD ROM included with the AW2400 E Windows users 5 Click the Import button 6 A dialog box like the following will appear KSE Select the Cubase Nuendo remote setup file e In order to use a remote file the corresponding software must be Yamaha AW2400 Remote xml from the installed included CD ROM and click the Open but e Please be aware that the menu names and screens that appear in ton the explanation below may differ depending on the software you are using Import Generic Remote D Remote Cubase Look ir Cubase Installing the Cubase Nuendo remote ne e setup file 1 Start up Cubase Nuendo 2 Inthe menu bar select Devices menu gt Device Setup File name emote 3 The Device Setup window will appear Select Bb GeneicRlemtetm 8 Add Device gt Generic Remote Device Setup 7 Close the Device Setup window Fader and ON key operations can be used to control RATERS Cubase Nuendo audio tracks Create new projects with MIDI Machine Control Slave Tine Display more than 16 audio tracks CM Motormiz Generic Remote ILCooper 5 10 Seen Installing the Logic preference file Mackie Baby HUI Mackie Control 1 Start up Logic Mackie HUI SE 2
194. MIX BALANCE field e BYPASS button Switches effect bypass on 1 Referring to the instructions in Recalling Effect Library settings on page 116 recall an effect library preset that is based on the effect type you want to use Make sure that the Selected Channel sec tion EFFECT key is engaged and its indi cator is lit Make sure that the EFFECT screen selected in step 1 is showing Selected Channel knobs 1 4 correspond to EFFECT screens 1 4 Press the appropriate knob to call the desired screen 4 Press the Display section F3 key to access and edit the effect parameters The EFFECT screen FX Edit page will appear This page contains the following items la New SOri3 EFFECT 1 g T Scene IHFUT 1 DD HD O00 11 11 4 1kKHe 1ebit_ REU TIME IHI DN HI RATIO LO RAT IO W 3 25 36 Ams E H a D 1 4 eee DEMS TY E R OLY EF BAL 3 EISE 2 ms dag HPF LPF Thru Cy 6 rBkHZ Gi GATE LU ATTACK HOL D DECAY OFF 4ms 225ms Poms SS SAINT off e MIX BALANCE knob Sets the balance between the effect and direct sig nals 0 produces direct sound only while 100 produces effect sound only 4 USED AS Indicates how this effect is being used EFF1 EFF4 indicate that the effect is internally connected to the mixer section via send return If the effect is inserted into a specific channel the name of the chan nel into which the effect is
195. MMC USB cable or Ea Computer based MTC MMC sequencer application gt IEEE1394 cable 2 Use the Work Navigate section MIDI key to access the MIDI screen Setting 1 page Select the connector s port s to be used for MIDI message transmission and recep tion in the PORT field 3 Use the Work Navigate section MIDI key to access the MIDI screen Setting 2 page Turn on the MASTER button in the MTC field and turn on the MTC button in the SYNC OUT field This sets the AW2400 to function as MTC master 4 Turn on the SLAVE button in the MMC field This sets the AW2400 to function as MMC slave AW2400 Owner s Manual Example settings for synchronization using MTC and MMC H Initial BR Get Heu Sons j 126 mC d Se AMARRE A 00 00 00 000 MIDI SETTING 2 TRACK 1 DEVICE Ho JL D Move the cursor to the DEVICE No field and set the value to match the device num ber of the external MIDI device When using MMC you must set the AW2400 and the external MIDI device to the same MMC device num ber For details on the device numbers that your MIDI device can use refer to its owner s manual 6 Use the Work Navigate section SONG key to access the SONG screen Setting page Select a frame rate LU SELUMU J TIME CODE 2 Sona List Setting E Frame rate e When using MTC with an external device be sure to set both the AW2400 and the external device to th
196. N s The effect may have been inserted into a different channel e Are the level of effect return channel faders raised e HQ Pitch can be used only with EFFECT 1 or 2 e These do not affect the stereo track sound clip or audio CD playback E Playback pitch is wrong e VARI PITCH may be adjusted e Is the synchronized external device operating on the same sampling frequency 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz e Is the master device operating in a stable way e You may have executed the EDIT screen PITCH com mand e Is an effect such as HQ Pitch or Dual Pitch selected for a monitor channel WA small amount of noise is produced when a song is played back on a different AW2400 unit A small amount of noise may be heard at the beginnings and ends of audio regions when a song created on an AW 2400 unit with Version 1 1 firmware is played back on an AW2400 with Version 1 0 firmware Please update all AW 2400 units you are using to the latest firmware ver sion Information on the latest firmware version as well as update procedure can be found at the internet address below http www yamahasynth com E The sound and displays of some effects are different when a song is played back on a different AW2400 unit e When songs that include scenes or effect library using a Gate effect are loaded into an AW2400 with Version 1 0 firmware Gate effects may be replaced by a Reverb Hall effect and some displays may not appear as expected Please up
197. N knob clockwise to NM adjust the input sensitivity j so that the PEAK indicator lights only occasionally ES e The GAIN knobs adjust the gain sensitivity of the analog input stage In order to make recordings with the greatest dynamic range and minimum noise set the GAIN knob as high as possible without causing clipping AW2400 Owner s Manual Connection and Setup 39 Adjusting the input level dnjas pue uoljoesuu0y A 40 4 Call the METER screen Input RTN page by either pressing the Display section METER key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the METER key The input channel input levels are displayed at the top of this screen Input channel input level display Bei Heu sons S D i A 00 00 00 000 erie ST Ho DS 101 EES Ebt E DTD o az ee a DTD coco up i DTD om a a um 1234 5 6 7 8 9 181112 131415 16 ke PUT CHAN vc ken FPFECT RE T UD cl PRE E PRE FADER POST FADER PEAK HOLD D Move the cursor to the POST FADER button in the lower area of the screen and press the ENTER key When the POST FADER button is turned on the signal levels immediately following the fader are displayed on the meters Press the Layer section IN 1 8 so that it s indicator lights to switch to the IN 1 8 mix ing layer You can now use ON keys 1 8 SEL keys 1 8 and faders 1 8 to operate input channels 1 8 ES e With the initia
198. N ON ON ON ON 5 6 T 8 9 10 7 18 19 20 21 22 SEL ON 4 16 4 5 16 17 JA L H 6 REMOTE key This key accesses the REMOTE screen where you can use the front panel faders and ON keys to control an external MIDI device or sequencer software on your com puter E Locate section D MARK SEARCH LAST REC SEARCH SET CANCEL Ho D I PUNCH REPEAT ER 4 SOUND CLIP key This key accesses the SOUND CLIP screen where you can record or play sound clips MARK SEARCH Id gt keys These keys search for markers placed within the song 3 MARK key This key places a marker at the current location of the song 4 AUTO PUNCH key This key switches the audio punch in out function on off letting you automate recording E Iransport section ae a H tel I RTZ REW FF Leit led Ir wc ei e C RTZ ka key This key moves directly to the absolute zero time location or the relative zero time location Used in conjunction with the SET key this registers the current location as the relative zero time 2 REW lt lt key This key rewinds the song location Press the key repeat edly to alternate between 8x speed and 16x speed Press the STOP M key or PLAY P gt key to stop rewind Parts of the AW2400 and what they do 5 INJ OUT keys These keys specify the points at which auto punch in out recording will begin the In
199. NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EFF1 SEND TRACK 1 NO ASSIGN EFF1 SEND TRACK 2 CHANNEL TRACK 1 EFF1 SEND TRACK 3 CHANNEL CHANNEL TRACK 2 TRACK 3 EFF1 SEND TRACK 4 EFF1 SEND TRACK 5 CHANNEL TRACK 4 EFF1 SEND TRACK 6 CHANNEL TRACK 5 EFF1 SEND TRACK 7 CHANNEL TRACK 6 EFF1 SEND TRACK 8 CHANNEL TRACK 7 EFF1 SEND TRACK 9 CHANNEL CHANNEL TRACK 8 TRACK 9 EFF1 SEND TRACK 10 EFF1 SEND TRACK 11 CHANNEL TRACK 10 EFF1 SEND TRACK 12 CHANNEL TRACK 11 EFF1 SEND TRACK 13 CHANNEL TRACK 12 EFF1 SEND TRACK 14 CHANNEL TRACK 13 EFF1 SEND TRACK 15 CHANNEL CHANNEL TRACK 14 TRACK 15 EFF1 SEND TRACK 16 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL TRACK 16 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL TRACK 17 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL TRACK 18 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL TRACK 19 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL CHANNEL TRACK 20 RETURN 1 NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN CHANNEL RETURN 2 NO ASSIGN MASTER STEREO OUT NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN AW2400 Owner s Manual Q 197 Basic MIDI Settings e MIDI Synchronization Message Setup 6 OTHER field THRU box MIDI messages other than program change and control Specifies the connector port f
200. NOTE D e When the Trigger Track function is active the Transport Locate and Locate Navigate section keys with the exception of the STOP W key will not function and normal record play back operations are not available ES e The Trigger Track settings are saved individually with each song e When a song is saved with the Trigger Track function active the Trigger Track function will still be active and a message indicating that status will appear when that song is later recalled Using the Trigger Track Function The Trigger Track function can be used as described below Call the TRACK screen Trigger page by either pressing the Work Navigate section TRACK key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F4 key after pressing the TRACK key This page contains the following items B lnitial E a sees IHPUT 1 TRIGGER TRACK TRACK MODEI LO NORMAL J TRIGGER TRACK SETTING 1 2 3 4 ee ee pannaan punanun deenen punnunm Aessen pununa reen reen lepoug P lt Po Pop PAT i annas Mansana unnan ee ununao ee er eee ee Mansana unanas unanas anunn Ramai DO eee ee eT eee pannaan pannaan er ee a ee eT eee ee et et ee tT ee ee ee Masana Masana Mannan Manono Wenxeerd rss Monona ananas Munna Srnnnsd unanas Berns STRAT SEN SHEI IEA Trisser O NORMAL button For normal audio track operation this button should be turned on norma
201. O Ol on mp mn INFUT 1 leese Hl wel HU DU TRACK TIME CO PLAY MODE INPUT CH Sat E GEI LES Dr Dar 20 D pr 2 a CD PLAY MODE button Switches the CD Play function on off 2 INPUT CH MUTE MIX button Use this button to specify whether the signals from input channels 1 16 will be output together with CD playback MIX button or whether only the CD signal will be output MUTE button 3 List Displays the tracks on the audio CD that is inserted in the CD RW drive NO SOF gd opne ue Buneay 222 AW2400 Owner s Manual e The CD Play function can also be used to play mixed mode CDs tracks 2 and above 2 Insert the audio CD that you want to play into the CD RW drive 3 Move the cursor to the CD PLAY MODE but ton and press the ENTER key The CD Play function will be activated and the CD track data will be read e Pressing the F1 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the CD PLAY MODE but ton 4 To play the CD tracks press the PLAY b gt key To stop press the STOP W key During playback the audio output of the CD RW drive will be sent directly to the stereo output channel Use the STEREO fader to adjust the volume When the CD Play function is on the transport section keys have the following functions Key Operation PLAY gt key Play STOP W key Stop REW lt lt key FF gt P key Rewind Fast forward Select tracks P
202. OL CHANGE field ON OFF buttons TX and RX on This sets the AW2400 to transmit and receive control change messages Select a CONTROL CHANGE MODE 1 3 The CONTROL CHANGE MODE lets you choose one of three combinations 1 3 that specify how con trol changes will correspond to the mix parameters of the AW2400 For details on the contents of each choice refer to page 195 If you want to transmit and receive messages via sepa rate MIDI channels for each of the AW2400 s track channels choose 1 If you want all track channels to be controlled via a single MIDI channel choose 2 or 3 If you chose 2 or 3 you will also need to set the CHANNEL field to specify the MIDI channel that will be used to transmit and receive the control changes Make the appropriate settings on your sequencer so that it will follow external MIDI Clock messages Also set the sequencer to record ready mode For details on how to make these settings refer to the manual for your sequencer NOTE P e If your sequencer has a function by which MIDI messages received at its MIDI IN connector are retransmitted from its MIDI OUT connector a function called MIDI Echo or MIDI Thru be sure to turn it off If this function is turned on while you are recording the control change messages transmitted when you operate the AW2400 will be immediately returned to the AW2400 causing improper operation 7 Store the initial fader pan and mix pa
203. ONGS ccccccssseeccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeesaeeees 178 Exchanging Song Data With Other AW series Audio Workstations 180 19 Automix 181 About AUtOmMiX ececcsaccceessesaiiedcaneneccbacecesssavncebtemadtcntiches 181 Automix Operation 181 Creating a New Automix Recording 06 182 Recording the Automix Data nnnaeneeenennennani 183 Automix Playback 185 Punch In and Out of Automix seee 185 Command Editing Automix data IN a Specified REGION cccccccceeeeessseeeseseeeeeeeees 186 Editing Individual Automix Events a0annenaaaeenan 188 Automix Library Operaton 190 About the Automix Library Hagen 190 Changing Automix Names 190 Storing Automix settings KENNEN 191 Recalling Automix settings cccceesseeeeeeeeeeeees 191 Erasing Automix settings A 191 Protecting Automix Data ccccsceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 192 20 MIDI 193 What you can do using MIDD 193 Basic RTR dl e EE 194 MIDI Synchronization Message Setup ssea0000 198 Connecting to External Eoupment 200 Synchronizing the AW2400 With External MIDI Devces 200 Switching AW2400 scenes from an external MIDI device ssssnnnennene 201 Recording playing AW2400 mix operations on an external sequencer 202 Using the MIDI Remote function n se 204 About the MIDI Remote function saasaaaaeeeenenn 204 Using the MIDI Remote function presets 204 Using User defined Rem
204. OO O O S Ben O Q V a 89 Using markers uo eiado 9 e907 WOdsuel La 90 Markers are symbols that you assign to desired locations in a song so that those points can be quickly located later You can assign up to 99 markers in each song Use the MARK SEARCH l lt gt I keys to find and move to markers 1 Move to the position in the song at which you want to assign a marker You can assign markers while the song is playing or stopped 2 Press the MARK key MARK SEARCH LAST REC SEARCH SE CANCEL REPEAT CIO The display will briefly indicate MARK POINT SET This indicates that a marker has been set A new marker will be added each time you press the MARK key Markers are automatically numbered 1 99 start ing at the beginning of the song If you register a new marker between two existing markers markers follow ing the insert will be automatically renumbered Register a new marker A e Marker settings are stored on the hard disk as part of the song e Markers can be deleted gt p 93 or moved gt p 92 as desired e If you press the MARK key at a location in which a marker has already been registered the display will indicate CAN NOT SET MARK and a new marker will not be created AW2400 Owner s Manual 3 Press the I lt key to locate to the previous marker or press the gt i key to locate to the next marker
205. PF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off E DELAY LCR One input two output 3 tap delay left center right Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 2730 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY C 0 0 2730 0 ms Center channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 2730 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 2730 0 ms Feedback delay time LEVEL L 100 to 100 Left channel delay level LEVEL C 100 to 100 Center channel delay level LEVEL R 100 to 100 Right channel delay level FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency gt Kei O D Q x 246 AW2400 Owner s Manual E ECHO Effects Parameters Two input two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop Parameter DELAY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Description Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel feedback delay time FB DLY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel feedback delay time FB G L 99 to 99 Left channel feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback
206. Parameter Value Threshold dB 54 to 0 541 points Range dB 70 to 0 701 points Attack ms O to 120 121 points Hold ms 0 02 ms to 2 14 sec 216 points 6 ms to 46 1 sec 160 points Decay ms e Threshold sets the level at which the gate closes cut ting off the signal Signals above the threshold level pass through unaffected Signals at or below the threshold cause the gate to close For ducking trigger signal levels at and above the thresh old level activate ducking and the signal level is reduced to a level set by the Range parameter The trigger signal is determined using the KEYIN SOURCE parameter 242 AW2400 Owner s Manual e Range controls the level to which the gate closes It can be used to reduce the signal level rather than cut it completely At a setting of 70 dB the gate closes com pletely when the input signal falls below the threshold At a setting of 30 dB the gate only closes so far allowing an attenuated signal through At a setting of 0 dB the gate has no effect When signals are gated abruptly the sudden cutoff can sound odd For ducking a setting of 70 dB causes the signal to be virtually cutoff At a setting of 30 dB the signal is ducked by 30 dB At a setting of 0 dB the duck has no effect e Attack determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold level Slow attack times can be used to remove the initial transient edge
207. Processor Library Operation Buisse00j4 solueuAq pue PZ Ued Wes 154 EO Dynamics Processor Library Operation The AW2400 includes setup libraries that contain preset EQ gate and compressor settings that can be recalled and used in a variety of situations The libraries can also be used to store your own settings for easy recall as needed e If necessary library recall can be automated using the AW2400 s Automix record playback capabilities gt p 181 Accessing the EQ Dynamics Library screens This section describes the procedure for accessing the EQ Dynamics Library screens and recalling library presets E Recalling EQ Library settings From this library you can recall EQ settings to the cur rently selected channel Of library numbers 001 128 numbers 001 040 are read only and 041 128 can be used to store your own settings EQ library operations are performed via the PAN EQ screen EQ Lib page Use the Layer section INPUT SEL SEL and STEREO SEL keys to select the target channel 2 Press the Selected Channel section PAN EQ key so that its indicator lights then press Selected Channel knob 2 3 or 4 The PAN EQ screen will appear 3 Press the Display section F2 key or press the PAN EQ key as many times as neces sary until the EQ Lib page appears PAHSEA Ba Nu sons RE Scene DI INPUT left DD DU DD 101 11 ECT EME
208. R button Post fader levels levels after the faders are displayed when this button is on AW2400 Owner s Manual Meters lt 97 Level Meter Types 7 PEAK HOLD button ES This button switches the level meter peak hold function on off When this button is on an indicator will show the e These PRE EQ PRE FADER POST FADER settings are indepen dent from those on other pages signal peaks e The PEAK HOLD button setting affects all METER pages Dm gt e Pressing the F1 key while holding the Display section SHIFT e The Input RTN page and Track page PRE EQ PRE FADER POST key has the same effect as the PEAK HOLD button FADER button settings are linked while the Master page settings are independent e The PEAK HOLD button setting affects all METER pages e Pressing the F1 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the PEAK HOLD button E METER screen Output page F4 key Displays the output and fader levels for a digital I O card installed in the card slot the OMNI OUT 1 4 outputs and the DIGITAL STEREO OUT outputs E METER screen Master page F3 key Displays the output and fader levels for BUS1 L R BUS2 L R AUX bus 1 4 effect bus 1 4 and the stereo bus METER siima EES TRACK 11 6 00 00 01 921 OD E E E HETER Ainin cz H Initial B E WE N a a oe O TRACK 11_ 00 00 08 CH 115 11 44 1kH2 Tebit Sg ee ne eee ee ee ee ee ee
209. SEL keys to select the target channel 2 Press the Selected Channel section DYN key so that its indicator lights then press Selected Channel knob 1 2 3 or 4 The DYNAMICS screen will appear 3 Press the Display section F2 key or press the DYN key as many times as necessary until the Gate Lib page appears D DYHAHICS e o0 00 o0 000 el 5 scene a1 INPUT 1 00 00 00 000 001 01 EAL ea GATE LIBRARY CURRENT CURUE ae CURRENT TYPE ee Ok cate e a TTT 30 E TTT 45 Ho TITLE TYPE CURUE SEET Qmm a LE eld Al The Gate Lib page includes the following items Current Type The currently selected gate type for the currently selected channel 2 Current Gate Response A graphic representation of the current gate response for the currently selected channel The horizontal axis represents input level and the vertical axis represents output level 3 Meter Displays the signal level after the gate and the amount of gain reduction 4 Gate Curve A graphic representation of the gate curve of the cur rently selected gate setting in the library list 5 List A list of all the settings stored m the library The row highlighted by a dotted frame is the setting currently selected for operation An icon indicates read only library settings Buttons These buttons execute the RENAME RECALL STORE and CLEAR functions Detailed description of their operation begins on page 156
210. STEREO button will change to a MONOxz2 but ton If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button rather than the OK button and press the ENTER key the disengage pair operation will be aborted and the channels will remain paired ES e All channel pairs can be disengaged at once by pressing the F1 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key e For paired channels set the pan control to either full left or right to achieve nominal level i e the same level before and after the pan control For channels that are not paired nomi nal level is achieved with the pan control set to center the Panel Keys Use the Layer section keys to select the mix layer containing the channels you want to pair While holding the SEL key of one channel that you want to pair press the SEL key of the adjacent channel SEL PPRC o A popup window will appear asking you to confirm the pairing The popup window contains the same items as the MONITOR screen used for channel pairing e The INPUT SEL 1 8 keys can also be used to pair input channels 1 8 Move the cursor to the appropriate button in the popup window and press the ENTER key The channels specified via the SEL keys will be paired 4 To disengage pairing press the SEL key of one of the paired channels while holding the SEL key of the other channel A popup window will ask you to confirm that you want to disengage the pair To disengage the pair
211. TEREO BAL field Balance control for the stereo output channel e You can switch back and forth between the Input and Track pages while the PAN EQ screen is showing by pressing the PAN EQ key 3 Move the cursor to a knob and use the DATA JOG dial or the INC DEC keys to set the pan as required The pan value range is from L63 full left C center INPUT field R63 full right Pan controls for input channels 1 16 2 EFFECT RETURN field ES Pan controls for effect return channels 1 4 e Knobs can also be selected via the Layer section keys INPUT SEL keys SEL keys and STEREO SEL key Pan EQ and Dynamics Processing M On e You can alternately select the left and right effect return chan nels by repeatedly pressing the effect return channel SEL key e The pan C center setting can be instantly recalled by pressing the ENTER key after moving the cursor to a pan knob AW2400 Owner s Manual 147 Pan Control Buiss90014 SOIUEU pue OF Ued Wes 148 4 The panning for paired channels can be adjusted in three different ways hold the Display section SHIFT key while pressing the F1 F2 or F3 key e F1 key INDIVIDUAL 1 The pan positions of the paired T T channels can be adjusted individ C C ually e F2 key GANG 1 The pan positions of the paired sl Ke sl channels are adjusted simulta vam See Lh Lob neously in the s
212. The INPUT SEL keys always control input channels 1 8 regardless of the settings of the Layer section e If an input channel is selected as a recording source its assignment to the stereo bus will automatically be turned off and it will be connected via bus 1 or bus 2 so that it can be monitored by the track channel D In the same way select other input chan nels as recording sources 6 Move the cursor to the symbol for the desired recording destination track and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear asking you to confirm whether you want to initialize the channel parameters CONF IRHAT OH Initialize CH Parameter Select This Track 7 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key You can select up to four tracks as recording destina tions Bus 1L bus 2L can be connected to odd num bered tracks and bus 1R bus 2R can be connected to even numbered tracks The SEL key of the con nected track channels will blink red indicating that they are in record ready mode You can select the bus signal to be input by repeatedly pressing the ENTER key in the same way as for the input channels For example if you move the cursor to the lt gt symbol for track 1 and repeatedly press the ENTER key the screen will change as follows Input signal patching 1 Connected to Bus 1 L 2 3 45667880N I3 H I5 EOE eee a T CE 3 No Connection e You can also perform this
213. This is useful when you want to repeatedly play back a certain region of the song while adjusting the mix 1 Register the A point and B point at the loca tions at which you want to start and end repeat playback For details on how to set the A point and B point refer to Using the locator gt p 88 e If you set the B point earlier than the A point the B gt A region will play repeatedly 2 Press the REPEAT key while the transport is stopped The REPEAT key will light and the A B Repeat function will be engaged The song will automatically locate to the A point NOTE P e The A and B points must be at least one second apart If they are closer than one second a REPEAT POINTS TOO CLOSE message will appear when you press the REPEAT key and repeat playback will not be possible 3 Press the PLAY gt key to begin repeat playback Playback will begin from the A point When the B point is reached playback will automatically begin again from the A point ES e Playback will stop automatically when the A B region has been repeated 99 times e If you press the REPEAT key while the song is playing repeat playback between the A and B points will begin auto matically regardless of the current position 4 To stop playback press the STOP W key Playback will stop but the A B Repeat function will remain active When the A B Repeat function is on pressing the PLAY P gt key will immediately
214. US 2 1 2 3 4 13 14 15 16 2 10 3 11 4 12 BUS 2 3 11 4 12 1 9 BUS 1 Effect return z Danni gt AW2400 Owner s Manual 5 7 5 13 AUX 1 on II e e 0 Le bi e bel Q Ce O e 03 Ben 0 Gu 6 7 8 12 18 19 20 24 6 14 AUX 2 7 15 AUX 3 8 16 AUX 4 RTN 4 EFEECT 4 Mixer section Mixdown procedure Mixdown procedure In this procedure you will select the channels that you want to mix down track channels input channels and effect return channels and record them to the stereo track 1 2 Lower the STEREO fader to the posi tion Call the RECORD screen Mixdown page by either pressing the Quick Navigate section RECORD key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F4 key after pressing the RECORD key The Mixdown page is where you can perform mix down operations In this page you can select the chan nels that will be recorded via the stereo bus onto the stereo track BEB Heu Sona 00 00 00 000 Tu HI xOOHN IHFUT KUSS RECORD TRACKS DOT EEN GE rt treffe 12394 5 E 7 8 ID H l 19 14 IS IG N IB I8 20 2i gg ei ou HASTERIHG D1 THER Cer PRUTE CLEAR 3 CLEAR ei 5 FLIBRARY d BRARY or SR Direct a Mixed Bounce JA D DIGITAL IN This lets you assign an input channel to the DIGITAL STEREO IN connector Here you can choose from the following items e 1 2
215. UT which transmits MIDI messages generated within the AW2400 or MIDI THRU which re transmits messages that are received at the MIDI IN con nector FOOT SW jack An optional foot switch Yamaha FC5 can be connected here to control transport operations such as start stop or to perform punch in out operations NOTE e The appropriate operation may not occur if you use a foot switch other than the Yamaha FC5 or equivalent 5 DIGITAL STEREO IN OUT connectors This RCA pin jack allows digital audio connection to external equipment via coaxial cable The connector sup ports IEC 60958 consumer format digital audio USB connector This connector allows the unit to be directly connected to a USB equipped computer via a standard USB cable compatible with USB 2 0 When the USB Storage mode Front panel E CD RW drive IDD000000000000000000000000000 Parts of the AW2400 and what they do is selected WAV files and song files can be transferred between the AW2400 and the computer In the normal mode the USB connection can be used for MIDI control The USB interface does not directly handle audio signals NOTE P e The USB interface cannot be directly connected to external hard disks or CD R RW drives e The AW2400 can be connected to either a USB 2 0 or USB 1 1 interface but data transfer will be slower if a USB 1 1 interface is used e When connecting via USB 2 0 be sure to use a cable specifi
216. UT knob sets the reference pitch after correction The inte ger and fraction segments of the value are set separately e When the BYPASS button is engaged the signal before pitch correction is output unaffected regardless of the IN and OUT knob settings 6 Raise the STEREO fader and the fader of the source track channel to about 0dB on the scale 7 Raise the fader of the destination track channel to about OdB on the scale NOTE e The fader of the destination track the track to which the processed vocal track will be recorded has no effect on the recorded signal The source track fader determines the final balance so set it with care m D 2 Co 8 To set the scale for pitch correction select PANEL in the CONTROL field and specify the key in the FIX NOTE field For example if PANEL is selected in the CONTROL field and CHROMATIC is selected in the FIX NOTE SCALE field pitch will be corrected to the nearest note in the chromatic semitone scale You can also specify the notes to be used for pitch correction by selecting CUSTOM in the FIX NOTE SCALE field and specifying the notes via the on screen keyboard Q Press the RTZ a key to rewind the song to the beginning then press the PLAY Il key while holding the REC key Song playback will begin and the processed data will be recorded to the destination track The corrected signal can be monitored via the record destination track channel
217. VERAGE cccceeees 199 SYNC CAUTION DIGITAL ST IN button 211 SYNC CAUTION SLOT IN button eee eee 211 SYNG OUT SE 199 Synchronizing ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 200 T Tempo Map 1 75 Test tone oscillator un 209 THR e 198 Tone generator module 207 Top panel ccccceeseeeeeeseeeeeeees 20 TRACK 1 12 key 26 TRACK 13 24 key nnns 26 Track At Once aannnnnnnaannn 214 217 Track editing EE 135 Basic pDrocecdure 136 Editing commande 138 TRACK key 21 Track recording esceceeeeeeeees 47 Direct recording 49 51 99 Metronome n sssnnsnnnenseneennnnenen 62 Mixed recording 50 54 102 TRACK screen Stereo THoage 131 Trigger page ecccccseeeeeeeeeees 134 View page 128 Virtual TR page n 63 129 Transport section na0an 27 87 Trigger track ccccsssseeceseeeeeeees 133 Troubleshootmg 258 Turning the power on off 38 U UNDERRUN PROTECT button 215 UNDO LIST popup window 64 UNDO REDO key nnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 25 64 UNLATCH button 206 USB conpnechor 29 229 USB Eege 24 USB MIDI driver aaanaaannnnnnnnnnn 266 USB ecreen 231 USB Storage mode 229 230 USED AS 1 0 ceecceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 121 User defined 0ccccceeeeeeeeees 206 Utility TOA CU ONS oe egeeeegeteeeg 209 UTILITY key 21 UTILITY screen Format page ccziimcuesnscccacinccevanes 212 Oscillator page ooeoo
218. W24_000 TAR Demo song Setting file for remotely con trolling the Cubase Nuendo software from the AW2400 Cubase Nuendo remote setup file Setting file for remotely con Logic preference file trolling the Logic software from the AW2400 Remote Setting file for remotely controlling the SONAR soft ware from the AW2400 SONAR template file Windows only Driver file for exchanging Yamaha USB MIDI MIDI messages between Driver the AW2400 and a com puter via a USB cable USBdrv__ 266 AW2400 Owner s Manual Installing USB MIDI driver If you are connecting the AW2400 to your computer via a USB cable for MIDI message transmission and reception you need to install the Yamaha USB MIDI driver E System Requirements OS Windows XP Professional Home Edition SP1 or higher or Mac OS X 10 3 or higher E installing on Windows XP 1 Start your computer to launch Windows then log in as Administrator 2 Click the Start button and then click Con trol Panel If the control panel appears as Pick a category click Switch to Classic View in the upper left of the win dow All control panels and icons will be displayed 3 Go to System Hardware gt Driver signa tures gt Driver signature options select Ignore Install software without asking for confirmation and then click OK 4 Click OK to close the System Properties window and then click the Close
219. _ H recorded are indicated as e When the AW2400 is in its default state virtual track 1 is selected for every track 2 Virtual track name This indicates the name of the virtual track selected by the cursor This will indicate NO REC for tracks on which nothing has been recorded 3 Tracks Indicates the track number 1 24 Track operations and editing e ni track number that you want to assign to the desired track 3 Press the ENTER key The symbol will be displayed at the position of the newly selected virtual track This virtual track will now be used for recording playback e To switch the virtual track of the stereo track use the TRACK screen Stereo TR page AW2400 Owner s Manual f 129 Audio track operations Stereo track operations Bupa pue suoneiado yoe s 130 Editing virtual track names for an audio track Here s how to assign a name to the virtual track that is cur rently selected for an audio track Call the TRACK screen View page by either pressing the Work Navigate section TRACK key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the TRACK key TRACK 252 TRACK 1 Ea OL TRACK field HO REC Te RENAME button fRENBRE n REHA IH ER 13 31 METRO SI 96dB E Se MAIER 3 Lo oOoOoOoOo0 OOOOOOOO00O00 m 2 Move the cursor to the TRACK field and use the DATA JOG dial or
220. a Here s how to write the audio data from the stereo track of each song to a CD R RW disc in CD DA format Audio data write operations are accessed via the CD screen Write page To call this page press the Work Navigate section CD key as many times as necessary or press the F1 key after pressing the CD key This page contains the following items WI you turn on the TRACK AT ONCE button e Ce 0 Ho D 3_He a nog Ai 101 011 GSP INPUTI DUU HU UD DU CO WRITE 7 EE O Track list This is a list of the songs containing stereo tracks that will be written to the CD R RW media The line enclosed by a dotted frame is currently selected for operations If no songs have been registered this will indicate NO TRACK If audio data has already been written to the inserted CD R RW media but the media has not yet been finalized EXIST will be displayed for the already written data 2 TRACK AT ONCE button Turn this button on to create an audio CD using the Track At Once method 3 DISC AT ONCE button Turn this button on to create an audio CD using the Disc At Once method 4 ADD button Adds a song at the end of the track list 5 INSERT button Inserts a new song in front of the song currently selected in the list AW2400 Owner s Manual 6 DELETE button Deletes the selected song from the list WRITE button Executes the actual CD write oper
221. able male XLR lt female XLR Preamp or effect proces sor with balanced output MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 XLR gt e When using condenser microphones or direct boxes that require phantom power turn on the rear panel CH1 4 switch which supplies phantom power to MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 4 and or the CH5 8 switch which supplies phantom power to MIC LINE INPUT jacks 5 8 as required Electric guitar bass MIC LINE INPUT TRS phone jacks 1 8 These are TRS type balanced input jacks Use a 1 4 TRS phone lt gt female XLR cable to connect your microphone direct box or a guitar bass preamp that has a balanced output jack 1 4 TRS phone lt gt female XLR cable MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 TRS phone Electric guitar bass These connectors will also accept unbalanced output from instruments such as synthesizers or rhythm machines via standard mono 1 4 phone lt gt 1 4 phone jack cables Synthesizer rhythm machine 1 4 phone lt gt phone cable MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 TRS phone NOTE P e The XLR and TRS phone jacks for the same channel cannot be used simultaneously Connecting sources to both inputs on the same channel at the same time can result in interfer ence and a severely degraded input signal 3 While playing the connected instrument or supplying ere appropriate sound to the G lt connected microphone A D rotate the corresponding ee GAI
222. ack ward If necessary you can use the LISTEN button to play the waveform region shown in the WAVE DIS PLAY popup window and check the location by lis tening ES e The locators and markers within a song can also be used to position the pointer gt p 88 90 e The current counter location can be saved to a locater or marker gt p 88 90 7 When you have finished specifying the location move the cursor to the EXIT but ton and press the ENTER key You will return to the previous Track View page and the location that you specified in the popup window will remain the current location Register the location as a locate point or marker as required zl o 5 LI O O lt C O O t D O Ki D St O 5 96 AW2400 Owner s Manual Chanter 10 Meters This section describes how the level meters can be shown on the display screen and how they can be used to the check levels of various signals through the system Level Meter Types Four display pages accessible via the METER screen are used to access the various level meter displays Press the METER key to call the METER screen and then either press the METER key aS many times as necessary until the desired page appears or press the function key F1 F4 corresponding to the desired page The contents of the various METER displays are as fol lows E METER screen Input RTN page F1 key E METER screen Track pag
223. adjust the level of the received digital signal as required You can now mix and record the signals from the AW 2400 s own inputs along with the digital audio received at the DIGITAL STEREO IN connector to the AW2400 stereo track e In order to record the signal received at the DIGITAL STE REO IN connector the UTILITY screen Preference page CD DAT DIGITAL REC button must be set to ENABLE Check the Status Of the Digital Input Signal You can visually check the status of the signals received at the DIGITAL STEREO IN connector as well as signals received via an I O card installed in the rear panel slot in the DIO screen Sta tus page To call this page press the Work Navigate section DIO key as many times as necessary or press the F2 key after pressing the DIO key This is a display only page that does not include any editable settings RAR a EA mere DD DU 000 nu EAEAN eet DIOU STATUS EMPHAS IS CATEGORY COPY Status Eoin 2 This page contains the following items a Status Indicates the status of received digital signals The mean ings of the displays are as follows NOTE e The following status displays will appear as when a MY8 AT MY8 TD MY16 AT or MY16 TD I O card is installed es Fs Sampling Frequency Indicates the sampling frequency of the received digital signal Parameter values Description 44 1k 48k Sampling frequency 4
224. age 105 for details on the CH VIEW screen NOTE D e The parameter controlled by SELECTED CHANNEL knob 1 when the DYN key is engaged depends on the current operating status gt p 153 e If you operate SELECTED CHANNEL knob 1 immediately after recalling a setup from the compressor preset library multiple compressor parameters will be adjusted simultaneously changing the overall effect of the compressor the type of change depends on the recalled preset library setup e When individual compressor parameters for a channel have been adjusted via the DYNAMICS screen the last parameter adjusted is assigned to SELECTED CHANNEL knob 1 the last adjusted parameter is individually retained for each channel 3 Rotate SELECTED CHANNEL knobs 1 4 to adjust the cor i i responding parameters as required mall If the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DISPLAY button is set to CO OFF a popup window showing the corresponding parameter name and RG the value will appear while the knob is being operated 34 AW2400 Owner s Manual Basic operation of the AW2400 4 If you want more precise editing control over the parame ter selected in step 2 above press the corresponding SELECTED CHANNEL knob 1 4 to call up the screen containing the related parameters Selected Key Lit DYN DYNAMICS Screen DYNAMICS Screen DYNAMICS Screen DYNAMICS Screen AUX AUX1 Screen AUX2 Screen AUX3 Screen AUX4 Screen
225. age mode is engaged E The display indicates DISK BUSY during playback e The recorded data might be so fragmented that the read speed is significantly reduced It might be necessary to backup all hard disk data to your computer and then re ini tialize the hard disk If you re using the AW2400 with a Windows or Mac OS X 10 4 or higher computer access performance can be improved by setting the cluster size to 64K when initializ ing the AW2400 internal hard disk This reduces the occurrence of DISK BUSY E xlpueddy 260 AW2400 Owner s Manual MIDI operations E Can t exchange MIDI data e Are the MIDI cables or USB cables connected correctly e A MIDI cable or USB cable may be broken s Is the power turned on for the transmitting and receiving devices e Do the channel settings match for the transmitted and receiving devices e Have the appropriate settings been made in the MIDI screen Setting 1 2 pages Select the connector and port to be used MIDI connector USB connector port 1 3 or slot in the Setting 1 page e Is a scene assigned to the program change number being transmitted e If a USB connection is being used is the required USB MIDI driver properly installed on your computer E MTC messages are not transmitted e In the MIDI screen Setting 2 page has the MTC button been turned on e Is MTC MASTER turned on E The AW2400 does not synchronize to incoming MTC messages e Is the MIDI ca
226. age starting with the first byte and end ing with the byte that precedes END will be transmitted e SW ONT key only E Indicates the on off status of the ON key The byte you specify as SW will be transmit ted as 7F hexadecimal when the key is turned on or 00 hexadecimal when the key is turned off e FAD Indicates the current position of the fader If the message is assigned to a fader the byte you specify as FAD will be transmitted as a value of 00 7F hexadecimal corresponding to the fader position when you operate the fader If the message is assigned to an ON key this byte will be transmitted as a value corresponding to the current position of the fader when the ON key is turned on and will be transmitted as a value of 00 hexadecimal when the ON key is turned off Using the MIDI Remote function ES e The MIDI message assigned to a single fader or key cannot be longer than sixteen bytes e Ifa SW byte is not assigned to an ON key the MIDI message you enter will be transmitted only when you turn the key on In this case you will normally use the UNLATCH setting e When you use the LEARN button to assign a control change mes sage to a fader the END byte will automatically be entered at the end of the MIDI message e When you use the LEARN button to assign a control change mes sage to a fader the FAD byte will be automatically entered as the variable value NOTE e If you assi
227. al Recording playing AW2400 mix oper ations on an external sequencer Here s how you can synchronize the AW2400 and your external sequencer and use the sequencer to record play the fader and pan operations you perform on the AW2400 Since operating the AW2400 s mix parameters will cause a large number of control change messages to be transmit ted we will use MIDI Clock which uses less data as the synchronization signal rather than MTC 1 Connect the AW2400 and your sequencer as shown in the following diagram MIDI Clock Control MIDI OUT changes MIDI THRU y NN D Workstation synthesizer D With a built in sequencer MIDI lt MIDI IN Control OUT changes AW2400 or gt Hama USB cable Computer based sequencer application IEEE1394 cable 2 Use the Work Navigate section MIDI key to access the MIDI screen Setting 2 page Turn on the MASTER button in the MTC field and turn on the MIDI CLOCK button in the SYNC OUT field Example settings for synchronization using MIDI Clock and Start Stop Con tinue HI Du Neu Zotpz RE o Initia A TRAcK1 A 00 00 00 000 dier HIDI SETTING 2 HTE HASTER OFF ien D HIDI CLOCK SE 4 3 Use the Work Navigate section MIDI key to access the MIDI screen Setting 1 page Select the connector s port s to be used for MIDI message transmission and recep tion 4 Turn the CONTR
228. all input channel and track channel assignments will be cancelled This will also execute the MUTE CLEAR 8 operation e Pressing the F1 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the SAFE button 2 Move the cursor to the Input Select field and use the DATA JOG dial or the INC DEC keys to select the input that will be patched to each input channel For example if you want mics instruments connected to MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 to be patched to input channels 1 8 you would make settings as shown below INPUT EEUU UUU UU Ea UD DIGITAL IN Ice TTTTTTTEOHTTTEEEN Se pnnnnnnnnnnusnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 3 Move the cursor to the symbol for the record source input channel and press the ENTER key The symbol will be highlighted and the corresponding input channel will be selected as a recording source The corresponding INPUT SEL key or the SEL key of the corresponding input channel will light red and the remaining INPUT SEL keys or the SEL keys of the remaining input channels will go dark If the selected input channel is not yet assigned to a track all SEL keys for the track channels will blink red indicating that they can be selected as the record ing destination If the selected input channel has already been assigned to a track only the SEL key of the corresponding track channel will blink red For example if you selected input channel 1 as the re
229. ame direction maintaining the relative posi tions of each channel e F3 key INV GANG 1 The pan positions of the paired EITA channels are adjusted simulta LA Pap neously in opposite directions e This operation can be accessed via both the Inpu RTN and Track pages and affects both pages E Pan Control via the Selected Channel section Adjusting pan via Selected Channel section knob 1 1 Use the Layer section INPUT SEL SEL and STEREO SEL keys to select the chan nel for which pan is to be controlled Press the Selected Channel section PAN EQ key so that its indicator lights With the default settings the PAN EQ screen will appear automatically The display will not change if the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DIS PLAY button is set to OFF Rotate Selected Channel knob 1 to adjust the pan of the channel selected in step 1 If the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DISPLAY button is set to OFF a popup window showing the current pan setting will appear while knob 1 is being operated SE AW2400 Owner s Manual 4 band EQ 4 hand EQ The AW2400 provides 4 band parametric equalization LOW LO MID HI MID HIGH on the channels listed below e Input e Track e Bus Master e Effect Return e Stereo Output e AUX Send Master The LO MID and HI MID bands provide peaking EQ control while the LOW and HIGH bands can be used in shelving peaking or high pass filter LOW low pass filte
230. ameters will be recorded for the specified channel s The parameters specified for recording in step 4 are actually recorded as follows CH ON FADER Operate the channel ON key or fader AUX EFFECT SEND ON Call the AUX or EFFECT screen move the cursor to the channel for which AUX or effect send is to be turned on or off and press the ENTER key AUX EFFECT SEND Call the AUX or EFFECT screen and rotate the appro priate Selected Channel knob 1 4 Alternatively you can move the cursor to the appropriate on screen knob and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to adjust the send level NOTE e Effect parameter operations can not be recorded to Automix EQ Recall the PAN EQ screen and use the LOW LO MID HI MID or HIGH key to band to be adjusted then use Selected Channel knobs 2 4 to adjust the selected band as required Alternatively you can move the cursor to the appropriate knobs in the PAN EQ screen EQ Att page and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to adjust the EQ EQ ON OFF switching is also recorded NOTE e ATT knob operation and EQ type selections are not recorded to Automix PAN Recall the PAN EQ screen and rotate Selected Chan nel knob 1 Alternatively you can move the cursor to the on screen knobs and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to adjust the PAN NOTE D e When making an Automix recording for multiple channels only the last channel sel
231. an t be recorded to edited or deleted 1 Call the Setting page by either pressing the Work Navigate section SONG key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F2 key after pressing the SONG key The SONG screen Setting page will appear 2 Move the cursor to a location outside the SORT box and use the DATA JOG dial to select the song to be protected The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the selected song to be protected 3 Move the cursor to the PROTECT button and press the ENTER key When protection is turned on the PROTECT button will be highlighted and a lock icon will appear to the right of the song name Lock icon SOG Gab Heu Song RG a TRACKS 00 00 00 DU de UO CURRENT SONG SETTING DS Heu Soa _ 44 1kHz 16bit REMANE FROTECT 7 75MB ES e We recommend that you turn protect on for important songs e Even if protect is on you can still copy the song gt p 171 and adjust the mixer settings AW2400 Owner s Manual E Optimizing a song Optimize is an operation that deletes the undo redo audio data maintained within the song When you have finished recording and editing a song you can Optimize it to increase the amount of free space on the hard disk NOTE e The deleted undo redo audio data will be lost forever Use this operation with caution 1 Call the Song List page by either pressing the Work Navigate section SONG key as many
232. an be saved together as scenes that can be recalled when ever necessary Furthermore specialized libraries are pro vided for various parameter groups EQ effects etc that can be saved and recalled individually for each chan nel E Paired channels For effect return channels 1 4 stereo output channel and bus master channel 1 2 the parameters except for pan are always linked for adjacent pairs of channels These are called paired channels For input channels 1 16 track channels 1 24 and AUX send master channels 1 4 you can also assign adjacent odd numbered even numbered channels to function as paired channels The parameters except for pan and phase of paired channels will be linked so that adjusting one parameter will cause the same parameter of the other channel to be adjusted accordingly A signal route that mixes the signals from multiple chan nels and sends them to an output jack or recorder track input is called a bus Unlike channels which handle only a single signal a bus can combine multiple signals into one or two stereo out puts and send them to a destination The AW2400 s mixer section provides the following buses Stereo bus This bus mixes the input signals to stereo and sends them via the stereo output channel to the stereo track of the recorder or to the STEREO OUT jacks Normally the same signal output via the STEREO OUT jacks is also output via the MON
233. an edit specified Automix data within a specified region using commands Call the AUTOMIX screen Edit page by either pressing the AUTOMIX key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F2 key after pressing the AUTOMIX key AW2400 Owner s Manual This page contains the following items AUTOMNIZ CECR sz INPUT amp amp 800 00 00 000 AUTOM EDIT 111 11 CEC era PARAMETERS FADER LIBRARY L Ee SCENE EFF LIEB H A GA AUX U a la EFF oN oaa om IT COMMAND i ERASE CH rjoy nunnan geeeeees punnnnn punnnnnnna punnunnnnn punnan KETTEN JS s unanas iechd 0 Snewesseree b ixdheekd naunan Command Editing Automix data In a Specified Region a PARAMETERS field The display will change according to the selected edit The following parameters can be selected for editing command as follows e FADER CH ON PAN EQ buttons ee Faders Channel ON keys pan and EQ operations e LIBRARY CH GATE COMP EQ buttons ff en gusty ett ques Pe areas EE Channel library CH gate library aes SC SC Sg Ss e at GATE compressor library COMP ue CS and EQ library EQ recall e SCENE button Scene recall i e EFF LIB 1 4 buttons Effect 1 4 library recall e AUX ON 1 4 buttons AUX 1 4 send level and on off switching e EFF ON 1 4 buttons Effect 1 4 send level and on off switching When the ERASE command is selected 1 Th
234. an select any other channel to be displayed by using the Layer section keys to select a mixing layer and the INPUT SEL SEL and STEREO SEL keys to select individual channels The items included in the individual channel displays are as follows E input channels 1 16 CH VIEW feet eros om ET A 00 002 00 000 IHC LE CORP INSERT EFF Ty 3 E Track channels 1 24 SERIES BE EIEEC 00 000 CHANHEL NIEH O E COMP INSERT EFF es ee e Bai Heu Sons nr 00 00 00 000 Or e 4 all PRE ek AW2400 Owner s Manual Channel Operation M 3 105 Displaying the mix parameters for individual channels E Stereo output channel 1 128 8 ZEIT Ger 001 01 GER eH CH VIEW a STEREO A 00 00 00 000 AE W Bus master channels 1 2 CH VIEW 00 00 00 000 3 cenet Bus A 00 00 00 000 101 11 ECE ea CHAHHEL WIE uoesedo jouueyD UNS E AUX send master channels 1 4 CH VIEW 00 00 00 000 deg L sceneal Au A 00 00 00 000 101 11 ECE ae CHAHHEL WIE E 106 AW2400 Owner s Manual E Effect send master channels 1 4 nee T Scenes CH VIEL DOT Jeu sons A EFF SEHD 1 A 00 00 00 000 111 011 CEAMARA Or PIA TiAl Te 4 l COMP 4 INITIALIZE button Initializes all parameters for the currently displayed chan nel e Pressing t
235. and STEREO SEL keys to select the chan nel to which compression is to be applied 2 Press the Selected Channel section DYN key so that its indicator lights then press Selected Channel knob 1 2 3 or 4 The DYNAMICS screen will appear 3 Press the Display section F3 key or press the DYN key as many times as necessary until the Comp Edit page appears deizZ D 20alinitial SI 101 0 BSS aali Hem sins dd AAS 00 00 00 000 COMP EDIT PRE FADER POST FADER PARAMETER Cd THRESHOLD RATIO ATTACK D BO Ze ifl beams wes OM TO RELEASE ZDDmz Come Edit The Comp Edit page includes the following items a COMPT ON OFF button Switches the compressor on off 2 STEREO LINK button Turning this button on links compressor operation for paired channels NOTE e This item will not appear for the stereo output channel and bus master channels 3 POSITION field Specifies the position in the signal chain at which the compressor will be inserted e PRE EQ Before the channel s EQ stage except for the effect send mas ter e PRE FADER Immediately before the channel fader e POST FADER Immediately after the channel fader 4 Response curve This graph indicates the approximate response of the compressor settings The horizontal axis of the graph is the input level and the vertical axis is the output level 5 TYPE I
236. annel 1 16 and track channel 1 24 is assigned The symbol indicates channels that are assigned and the symbol indicates channels that are not assigned 2 In the ENABLE field move the cursor to the button E H of the mute group that you want to operate Convenient functions for mixdown bounce 3 Use the Layer section keys the INPUT SEL keys and the SEL keys to select the channels that you want to assign to this mute group The assignment to the mute group will alternately be switched on or off each time you press the INPUT SEL key or SEL key ES e If you want to defeat all assignments for the mute group youre currently operating hold down the Display section SHIFT key and press the F1 key e If you want to defeat all assignments in the Mute Grp page hold down the Display section SHIFT key and press the F2 key 4 Repeat steps 2 3 to make assignments for other mute groups NOTE e You can t assign a single channel to more than one mute group D To enable a mute group move the cursor to the E H buttons and press the ENTER key Buttons E H can be turned on off independently 6 Operate a channel that is assigned to a mute group The ON keys of all channels assigned to that mute group will operate simultaneously ES e If you make mute group assignments while the ON keys of the assigned channels are in a mixed state some on some off the on of
237. any times as neces sary or by pressing the F2 key after pressing the SCENE key The SCENE screen RCL Safe page will appear 4 Kap Heu Sons LSsiz ep m dd 6 00 00 00 000 ILL ERIC SR SCENE RECALL SAFE SCEHE INPUT 1 IHPDUT O DISABLED mae anana Saat HEHE EBeee Ob ALL pe heieish ame EH BUS AU EFFECT SEND STEREO HOE OBE e Oe E mm a RCL SAFE button This button switches Recall Safe between ENABLE and DISABLE Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to switch to either ENABLE or DISABLE e Pressing the F1 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the RCL SAFE button 2 MODE field The recall safe parameters can be selected from the following e ALL button This prevents all parameters in the scene from being recalled The entire scene is recall safe and no change will occur if it is inadvertently recalled e FADER button Only the fader settings will not be recalled e ON button Only the ON key settings will not be recalled e When the ALL button is turned on the FADER and ON buttons are automatically turned off NOTE e Effect return settings are not affected by Recall Safe 162 AW2400 Owner s Manual e Both the FADER and ON buttons can be on at the same time 3 EFFECT button Turn this button on to prevent re
238. are patched to Bus1 or Bus2 will be auto matically disconnected from the stereo bus and their signal will not be output via the STEREO OUT or MONITOR OUT jacks the signals being recorded can be monitored via the track channel being recorded e When an input is disconnected from Bus1 or Bus2 that input is automatically re patched to the stereo bus e You can also switch to Bus1 Bus2 by moving the cursor to the lt symbol of the desired input channel and pressing the ENTER key 7 Use the same procedure to specify other input channels as recording sources as required e To select the DIGITAL STEREO IN connector as the record source you will need to assign the DIGITAL STEREO IN connector to an adjacent pair of odd and even numbered tracks via the DIGITAL IN field 1 2 15 16 See page 102 for details Direct recording and Mixed recording 8 Press the Layer section TRACK 1 12 key so that its indicator lights E This selects the TRACK 1 12 mixing layer so you can use ON keys 1 12 SEL keys 1 12 and faders 1 e The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as fj mute but you can still record to muted tracks e Since 24 bit songs can have a maximum of 12 play tracks gt 12 to operate track channels 1 12 At this point check p 165 tracks 13 24 are muted and will not play back that all faders are set to their minimum positions Q Press the SEL key s for the record desti 10 Raise
239. arker numbers and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to scroll through the list so that the dotted frame encloses the marker number that you want to edit 4 Move the cursor to the value that you want to edit and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to edit the value Erasing a locate point or marker e Repeat playback of a specific region the A B Repeat function Erasing a locate point or marker lf necessary you can erase a registered locate point except for the Relative Zero Start and End points or marker NOTE e A locate point that has been erased cannot be recovered E Erasing a locate point To erase a locate point hold down the Locate section CANCEL key and press the corresponding locate key LIN OUT key A B key or LOCATE key 1 9 The selected locate point will be erased and the LOCATE POINT ERASED message will be displayed briefly E Erasing a marker To erase a marker locate to the marker that you want to erase and then press the MARK key while holding down the Locate section CANCEL key The correspond ing marker will be erased and the MARK POINT ERASED message of will be displayed briefly Markers can also be erased by using the DELETE button in the EDIT screen Mark Adj page Repeat playback of a specific region the A B Repeat function The AW2400 provides an A B Repeat function that repeatedly plays the region between the A point and B point
240. ata transfer cannot keep up with write speed 4 DATA WRITE SPEED This indicates the speed at which data other than CD audio e g backup data or WAV files is written to CD R RW media Normally this will indicate x8 but may be x4 if the media supports a maximum write speed of x4 This field is for display only and cannot be edited 5 DATA WRITE TYPE Selects the write method to be used when writing backup data to CD R RW media If the COMPARE button is on the original data will be compared with the backed up data or the exported WAV file after a backup or export operation to check whether any errors occurred while writing the data Refer to Backing up songs on page 177 for informa tion on backup procedures CD RW MEDIA ERASE Erases the data that was written to CD RW media For details refer to Erasing CD RW media gt p 221 SPEED field and turn the DATA JOG dial to select the write speed You can select either x8 eight times audio playback speed or x4 four times audio playback speed Nor mally you should use x8 and reduce the speed to x4 only if errors occur during writing e In addition to the DATA JOG dial the INC DEC keys can be used to make selections Use the TEST and WRITE buttons of the AUDIO WRITE TYPE field to select the write operation s The combination of buttons will determine the opera tion s that will occur as follows e Only the TEST button On NEE Only a wri
241. ation FINALIZE button only displayed for TRACK AT ONCE Finalizes the disc so that it can be played on a CD RW drive or standard audio CD player WI you turn on the DISC AT ONCE button JARITE AME M 125MB MARKER button only displayed for DISC AT ONCE For each stereo track this enables or disables the markers that have been set within that song When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the start point end point and markers within the currently selected stereo track will be enabled A flag icon will appear at the right of the list If mark ers are enabled for a stereo track a track number will be written to the CD at the location of each marker Regard less of any areas of silence the entire region from the Start point to the End point will be written Writing Track At Once Here s how to use the Track At Once method to write ste reo tracks from songs saved on the hard disk to CD R RW media Use this method if you expect to be adding tracks to the disc later or if you want an automatic two second gap between tracks 1 Make sure that the appropriate virtual track is selected for the stereo track of the song s you want to write Only the virtual track that can be played by the stereo track Oe the current track will be written to disc If the correct virtual track is not selected load the desired song use the TRACK screen Stereo TR page to switch to the cor
242. ation to the 0 dB position 7 Press the RTZ j key to rewind the song Then hold down the REC key and press the PLAY P key The song will begin playing back and will be recorded on the bounce destination track s H While you record the song raise the faders of the bounce source track channels and effect return channels to an appropriate level Adjust the pan EQ and dynamics of each channel as necessary e The bounce destination faders and pans will not affect the content that is recorded e When Auto Punch in out is engaged you can monitor the bounce source track channels during playback even when not recording Q To check the level that is being output from Bus 1 Bus 2 to the bounce destination tracks press the METER key and then the F3 key The METER screen Master page will appear Here you can check the output levels for Bus 1 and Bus 2 Bus 1 and Bus 2 output levels METER 00 00 08 4 os B Initial E TRACK 17 A 00 00 08 249 005 01 EERSTEN Wo e EI ke D TEE U ULT zc PRE FADER GEME PEAK HOLD Be Lou DIN ge Track Master S Durrut ee Bounce ping pong recording procedure 10 Move the cursor to the POST FADER but ton and press the ENTER key The post fader signal levels will be displayed If the level meter reaches the OVER position press the Layer section MASTER key to make it light the MASTER mixing layer is selected and lower fader 1 Bus 1 a
243. ature specified in the tempo map for the song The current tempo and time signature are displayed above this value 6 Scene information The number and name first eight characters of the cur rently selected scene 7 Sampling Rate Quantization Bits The sampling rate and quantization bits bit depth of the currently selected song Main screen The information displayed in this area will depend on the key knob that was last pressed The following types of object are displayed in the main screen AW2400 Owner s Manual Cursor The blinking frame within the dis play is called the cursor When an u object in the screen is enclosed by the cursor that object is selected for operation Buttons Buttons in the display are used to switch a parameter on off to select one of multiple choices or to execute a specific function A button that is currently on will be displayed in inverse form black background with white text A button that is cur rently off will be displayed in normal form black text against a white background Knob parameter display area The knob parameter display area within the display is used to edit the ene value of the corresponding parame at Sa E parameter display area 9 Tabs When a screen includes a number of pages corresponding tabs will appear along the bottom of the display The tabs are used to switch between the various pages related to the cur
244. ay wish to consult a legal expert about your planned use of this product This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others copyrights Such copyrighted materials include without lim itation all computer software styles files MIDI files WAVE data and sound recordings Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws Any violation of copyright has legal consequences DON T MAKE DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner s manual are for instructional purposes only and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument AW2400 Owner s Manual f 7 8 1 Before you start 11 WA OC UC e E 11 Remember to back up your data 11 About the built in CD RW drive 1 00 0 ccceeeseeeeeeeeeees 12 Using the CD RW dive ccccsecesssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 12 Installing an optional Card 13 2 Introducing the AW2400 15 Features of the AW2400 snsnnnnnennnnnsnnsensnnnnnsnnressnnne 15 AW2400 terminology s nnnnnennnnnennnenennnennnnnnnennnneennne 17 Recorder sechon 17 Mixer SS CHOI asecetcicdcesea c3s teeecetceoevereaedascecenss cetera 18 STA EE 19 Parts of the AW2400 and what they do 20 TOP AIAG E 20 Rear panel Eege 28 Fe OPI AS astencerc 29 Basic operation of the AW2400 aan
245. ayer that includes the channels you want to operate For example to record operations on the track channel faders engage either the Layer section TRACK 1 12 or TRACK 13 24 key ES e You can switch mixing layers even after Automix recording has been started e If you plan to record operations performed in the Selected Channel section it is a good idea to select the appropriate parameters before starting recording For example if you plan to record pan changes engage the Selected Channel section PAN EQ key before beginning 7 Press the top panel PLAY b gt key to start song playback The AUTOMIX key will light red and Automix recording will begin But at this point no channel has been selected so no data recording will actually take place H Use the INPUT SEL SEL or STEREO SEL keys to select the channel for which Automix data is to be recorded The selected key will flash orange and the correspond ing channel s parameters can be recorded to Automix ES e Multiple channels can be selected for Automix recording e If you press a key that is flashing orange during Automix recording the key will light continuously and Automix record ing for the corresponding channel will be disengaged punched out Refer to Punch In and Out of Automix on page 185 for details AW2400 Owner s Manual J 183 Automix A O Automix Operation Q Perform the required mix operations The specified mix par
246. b 16 44 g window ihe oni oe ee a o a ll The sample rate of the new song can be set to either POECETE d ae 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz o LE The bit depth of the new eee song can be set to either 16 N P EA z or D 4 bi ts e Sound Clip Time The sound clip record time 2 Move the cursor to the NEW button and can be set to between 30 press the ENTER key 180 seconds A popup window will ask you whether you want to NOTE save the current song e Songs recorded with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz cannot CONF IRMAT On be written to an audio CD Save Current Sona CANCEL WES AW2400 Owner s Manual 47 Creating a new song Bulpsooe1 YORI Ov 48 4 When each parameter has been set as required move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Next a popup window will appear allowing you to specify settings that will be carried over from the cur rent song CONF IRHAT OH Select tem to Import SCENE TEHFO L BRAR Y The following items are available e SCENE button Scene memories e TEMPO button Tempo map e LIBRARY button EQ dynamics effects and channel libraries For example if you have saved effect settings in a library for the current song and would like to use these settings for the new song as well you would turn on the LIBRARY button Select the buttons of the items you want to carry over from the current song move the cursor to t
247. backup operation move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key While the backup operation is being executed a popup window will indicate the progress of the operation When the backup has been completed you will return to step 2 If the backup data does not fit on a single volume of media a message of Number Ejected Media Insert Blank Media will appear and the media will be ejected Insert a new media volume Then move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key e You cannot execute the backup operation without selecting data e If you execute the backup operation with the AS AW2400 but ton turned on system data the settings you make in the UTILITY screen or the MIDI screen will be backed up on the media together with the selected data e If you execute the backup operation with the AS AW2816 but ton turned on data other than audio tracks will not be backed up All virtual tracks for tracks 1 16 are backup up Tracks 17 24 are not backed up Only the current track data for stereo track is backed up Only 44 1kHz 16 bit songs are supported e When you restore data that was backed up to more than one media volume you must insert the media in the order in which it was backed up Be sure to make a note of the backup sequence on the label surface of each CD R RW disc Restoring songs Here s how song data that you backed up to CD R RW media can be restored to the hard disk of the
248. ble connected to the MIDI IN connector e In the MIDI screen Setting 2 page is MTC SLAVE turned on e Is the connector and port to be used MIDI connector USB connector port 1 3 or slot selected in the MIDI screen Setting page E MTC synchronization drifts e Is a large amount of MIDI data notes etc being received together with the MTC messages e Does the frame rate match between the AW2400 and the external device e In the MIDI screen Setting 2 page OFFSET may have been set e If jumps occur in the synchronized time change the SYNC AVERAGE setting in the MIDI screen Setting 2 page and try again E MMC messages is not transmitted e Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI OUT connector s In the MIDI screen Setting 2 page is MMC MASTER turned on Does the DEVICE NO match E Can t receive MMC messages e Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI IN connector e In the MIDI screen Setting 2 page is MMC SLAVE turned on Does the DEVICE NO match E Can t use the preset remote settings e Depending on the sequencer that you want to control you may need to make settings on the sequencer For details refer to page 266 e Select the connector and port to be used MIDI connector USB connector port 1 3 or slot in the MIDI screen Set ting page Song operations E Can t save a file e Is there sufficient space on the internal hard disk to create anew song e Did you perform the correct shut down procedure
249. buses bus 1 and bus 2 to one to four tracks you specify This page contains the following items RECORD S2 tatew sons __ _yarize 6 77 scenedil INPUT 1 00 00 00 000 001 01 EERISCBIRELS SC HIE IHPUT DIGITAL IN In TRACK E dt CLEAR SAFE i ep Direct A F isdn Fee 8 G Input Select Here you can select the inputs that will be patched to input channels 1 8 or 9 16 You can choose from the same inputs as in the RECORD screen Direct page 2 Input channels This area indicates the connection status of input chan nels 1 16 3 Tracks This area indicates the connection status of tracks 1 24 You can switch track muting on off by moving the cur sor to the track number and pressing the ENTER key REMAIN This indicates the remaining recordable time 5 DIGITAL IN Here you can assign the DIGITAL STEREO IN con nector to an input channel The available choices and operations are the same as in the RECORD screen Direct page AW2400 Owner s Manual Bus 1 Bus 2 These four lines indicate the bus 1 L R and bus 2 L R signal routes This shows the recording source input channels whose signals are being sent to bus 1 bus 2 and the recording destination tracks to which the bus 1 bus 2 signal are being sent 7 MUTE CLEAR button This button clears the mute status of all tracks However depending on the bit depth of the song and on the number o
250. call recall safe of the effect settings The button will appear inverted when on 4 CHANNEL field Selects the recall safe channels The mix parameters of selected channels will not be recalled The CHANNEL field buttons correspond to the fol lowing channels e INPUT Input channels 1 16 e EFFECT RETURN Effect Return channels 1 4 es TRACK Track channels 1 24 e A LE Bus master 1 2 AUX AUX send master 1 4 e EFFECT SEND Effect send master 1 4 e SGIEREO Stereo output channel e All CHANNEL field buttons can be cleared de selected by pressing the F2 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key 2 Select the parameter s or channel s that you want to set to Recall Safe and activate the corresponding button s 3 Move the cursor to the RCL SAFE button and press the ENTER key Recall Safe has now been enabled The selected parameter s and or channel s will not be affected by scene recall operations until you change this setting e The RCL Safe page settings are shared by all songs Moving scenes Moving scenes Scene data stored in any scene number from 1 through 99 can be moved to any other scene number 1 Call the Sort page by either pressing the SCENE key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F3 key after pressing the SCENE key The SCENE screen Sort page will appear SC Kg Hem Sons JI TT Gene DI POT A 00 00 00 000 Tun Esseg SCENE SORT
251. can select this icon and press the ENTER key to move up one level 3 TOTAL Indicates the playback length in units of hours min utes seconds milliseconds of the WAV file selected for importing This field is for display only and cannot be changed 4 TYPE Indicates whether the WAV file selected for importing is monaural or stereo H The numerical value at the right indicates the bit depth of the WAV file This field is for display only and cannot be changed LISTEN ENTER UP button This display will change according to the selected file or folder in the file list e LISTEN If a WAV file is selected you can move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to repeatedly hear the currently selected WAV file e ENTER If a folder is selected you can move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to move into that folder e UP H the Et icon is selected you can move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to move up one folder ToTR Selects the track number into which the WAV file will be imported If the import source is a stereo WAV file only tracks 1 amp 2 23 amp 24 can be selected T To V TR Selects the virtual track number 1 8 into which the WAV file will be imported To Start Specifies the start location in counter display and measure beat format to which the WAV file will be imported 9 EXECUTE button Executes the import operati
252. ception to and from external MIDI devices To call this page press the Work Navigate section MIDI key as many times as necessary or press the F1 key after pressing the MIDI key Bai Heu Sons S z 4rd A 00 00 00 00 00 dun AMEE MIDI INPUT 1 3 PROGRAM Re KS GFF een CFF EG GEE Munnunnnnnunnnunnnun nn na annnnnna Setting 1 fF Setting 22 This page contains the following items PORT field Selects the connector s port s to be used for MIDI mes sage transmission and reception Press the ENTER key to confirm your selection The connectors ports that can be selected for MIDI trans mission TX and reception RX are as follows items TX Transmission RX Reception MIDI OUT THRU connector MIDI IN connector USB connector output port 1 USB connector input port 1 USB connector output port 2 USB connector input port 2 USB connector output port 3 USB connector input port 3 Digital I O card output port Digital I O card output port NOTE P e It may be necessary to install an appropriate USB MIDI driver in order to use the USB connector for MIDI communication on com puters gt p 266 e To connect to a computer using the MY16 mLAN digital I O card install the MY16 mLAN card in the digital I O slot and select SLOT The appropriate mLAN driver must be installed on the computer 2 CHANNEL field Selects the MIDI chann
253. cessors 1 4 to the effect library NOTE e New settings cannot be stored to read only library numbers those marked with an icon e If store to a library number that contains previously stored data the previous data will be overwritten Press the Selected Channel section EFFECT key so that its indicator lights 2 Press one of the Selected Channel section knobs 1 4 to access EFFECT screen for the effect processor that will be the store source 3 Call the FX Lib page Refer to Call the Effect Library Screen on page 122 for details 4 Move the cursor to the list and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select the library number to which the set tings are to be stored The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for storage 5 Move the cursor to the STORE button and press the ENTER key The NAME EDIT popup window will appear e Pressing the F2 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the STORE button 6 If necessary enter a name for the selected library setting move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key refer to page 32 for details on name entry The library setting will be stored Effect Library Operations Erasing Effect Library settings The procedure for erasing unwanted library settings is as follows NOTE e Read only library settings those marked with an L icon cannot be erased Call
254. ck effect This is convenient when you have recorded a solo part among two or more virtual tracks and want to assemble the best parts into a single track Basic procedure for track editing Here is the basic procedure for using a track editing command The procedure is essentially the same for all track editing commands a Editing command Indicates the currently selected editing command E Select the editing command 1 Call the EDIT screen Edit page by either Locator marker pressing the Work Navigate section EDIT Indicates the approximate location of the currently set key as many times as necessary or by locate points and markers This also indicates whether pressing the F1 key after pressing the recorded data exists in the current track of each track EDIT key 3 Parameters This screen displays the following information Sets various parameters track virtual track number editing region etc required in order to execute the command The type of parameters and the ranges of the settings will depend on the command that is selected 4 EXECUTE button Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to execute the editing command A see me a TRACE EDIT IHPUT 1 001 01 GPa Te Bupa pue suoneiado yoe s 2 Move the cursor to the edit command field use the DATA JOG dial or the INC DEC keys to select an editing command and press the ENTER key The displayed conten
255. ck minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency DLY BAL 0 100 Delay and early reflected delay balance 0 all early reflected delay 100 all delay TYPE S Hall L Hall Random Revers Plate Spring Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density ER NUM 1 19 E DELAY REV One input two output delay and reverb effects in parallel Parameter DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Number of early reflections Description Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback DELAY HI O 1 1 0 Delay high frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency DLY BAL 0 100 Delay and reverb balance
256. ck OFF ES e Ifthe ST TR MODE ON OFF button is ON pressing the RECORD key while the recorder is stopped will display a popup window asking you to confirm that you want to defeat stereo track playback mode If you want to do so move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Switching the virtual track of the stereo track Call the TRACK screen Stereo TR page by either pressing the Work Navigate section TRACK key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F3 key after pressing the TRACK key 2 Use the CURSOR keys to select the virtual track number that you want to assign The currently selected virtual track is indicated by a symbol Of the other virtual tracks those that have been recorded are indicated by O and those that have not yet been recorded are indicated by 3 Press the ENTER key The symbol will be displayed at the position of the newly selected virtual track This virtual track will now be used for recording playback AW2400 Owner s Manual H Editing the name of a virtual track for the stereo track ere s how to edit the name of the virtual track currently selected for the stereo track 1 Call the TRACK screen View page by either pressing the Work Navigate section TRACK key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the TRACK key TRACK 22224 TRACK 1 Ea OL TRACK field HO REC
257. cks e Fader operations will transmit Volume control changes CC 07 Volume Use this preset to control the volume of an external tone generator e When you turn an ON key off indicator out volume 0 will be transmitted e When you turn an ON key on lit green the volume value corresponding to the fader position will be trans mitted e When an ON key is on operating the fader will trans mit Volume control change messages CC 07 AW2400 Owner s Manual 205 Using the MIDI Remote function XG 1 16 XG 17 32 XG 33 48 XG 49 64 These presets let you use the AW2400 as a volume con troller for an XG tone generator Each preset will control the XG compatible tone generator s parts 1 16 17 32 33 48 and 49 64 respectively e ON key operations will switch the part on off e Fader operations will control the volume of the part e USER1 e USER2 e USER3 e USER4 These 4 presets can be set up by the user Refer to Using User defined Remote function 2 TRANSPORT field Select one of the following to specify how the transport section keys will function while using the MIDI Remote function e NORMAL button The transport keys will perform their normal functions play stop or locate etc for the current song MTC MMC MIDI Clock messages will be transmitted and received as specified in the MIDI screen Setting 2 page e LOCAL button The transport keys wil
258. cording source the top panel keys will be as follows 1 2 GAIN GAIN Vly NZ Vly 5 GAIN Vly 6 GAIN Vly Vly Ki ea Ki E a Ki Zz N ZA ZA UNE Me UNE Me pod lt P IT P A iit flash b d gt d gt Ka Ki oa a S ZA LINE MIC PEAK u 4b Ki ea a ki ZA LINE MIC PEAK u Q ay Kaka e SEL ASEL est est Bua vad e SELA PSELA SEL et et est A wove WOES ROWS Pk fN el WOKS ROKK NON e Ne N RIEA P S SA SA P S SANSA re Va Pas PSs 1 DI Hl H Pi Pi Ei Fd F 5 Cj d 1 5 6 13 17 18 Tr ack channels Layer section TRACK 1 12 key lit The indication in the screen will be as m follows 2 eeernenreernnnan A Lg d 4 5 Seene faye um gt B amp e You can also select the record source input channel by pressing an INPUT SEL key or the SEL key of an input channel e The INPUT SEL keys always control input channels 1 8 regardless of the settings of 1 i the Layer section Lal gt BE un gt 4 Move the cursor to the symbol for the recording destination track and press the ENTER key The selected input channel and track will be internally connected At this time the connected INPUT SEL key or the input channel s SEL key and the track channel s SEL key will change to blinking red The blinking track channel SEL key indicates that the cor
259. cted Channel section knobs 2 4 to adjust the EQ as required When the PAN EQ key is lit Selected Channel knobs 2 4 perform the following functions knob 2 adjusts the Q knob 3 adjusts the center frequency and knob 4 adjusts the gain of the selected band 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to set all bands as required e In addition to the ability for fine EQ control as described above the supplied EQ library contains preset EQ setups for a variety of instruments that can be recalled and used or edited as required Refer to Pan EQ and Dynamics Pro cessing on page 147 for details Applying Compression to an Input Signal Applying Compression to an Input Signal The AW2400 provides dynamics processing capability on all input and track channels compres sion on the track channels and both compression and gating on the input channels The dynam ics processor parameters are adjusted manually via the Selected Channel section in the same way as the EQ parameters A range of dynamics presets for a variety of instruments is also pro vided in the dynamics library In this section well see how to recall dynamics processor preset from the library and apply com pression to the channel 1 8 signals Press the Layer section IN 1 8 key so that its indicator lights the press the SEL key for the channel to which compression is to be applied e The INPUT SEL 1 8 keys can also be used to select an input channel for compressio
260. cursor to the MONOx2 button of a channel you want to assign as a stereo pair and press the ENTER key A pairing confirmation popup window will appear CONF IRHAT OH Make Fair CANCEL IMPUT 142 IHPUT Za RESET BOTH The popup window contains the following items e INPUT TRACK AUX OUT x gt y x odd number y even number PEE TOS Copy the settings of channel x to y and pair them e INPUT TRACK AUX OUT y gt x x odd number y even number E Copy the settings of channel y to x and pair them e RESET BOTH Initialize both channels and pair them s CANCEL Cancel pairing 3 Move the cursor to the appropriate button in the popup window and press the ENTER key The MONOx2 button will change to a STEREO but ton The following parameters are linked for paired channels Input Channels All mix parameters other than the GAIN knob and phase pan settings Track Channels All mix parameters other than the phase pan settings AUX Send Master Channels All mix parameters Pairing channels 4 To disengage a pair move the cursor to the E Channel Pairing Using corresponding STEREO button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm that you want to disengage the pair CONF AMAT LOH Break Fair IHPUT 1 2 Pair ARE YOU SURE Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key to confirm and disengage the pair The
261. cursor to the counter display format field or the measure beat field and specify the location E Execute the command When you have finished setting parameters execute the command 7 Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the opera tion CONF RAHAT OH Execute ERASE 7 8 Move the cursor to the OK button to exe cute the command or move the cursor to the CANCEL button to cancel without exe cuting Then press the ENTER key ES e Even after you press the ENTER key to execute the com mand you can press the UNDO REDO key to return to the state prior to executing the command You can use this func tion to compare the original data with the results produced by executing the command e If as a result of executing a command a track no longer con tains any recorded data the name of that track will change to NO REC AW2400 Owner s Manual Track operations and editing e ni List of editing command List of editing command This section lists all the commands that are provided in the EDIT screen and explains their parameters Erases the data in the specified region between Start and Deletes the data from the specified region of the specified End of the specified track s track s This command is similar to ERASE but differs in that the COMMAND data that follows the specified region will move forward to fill the gap
262. d BAL 4dB BAL 4dB t Stereo output channel Track channels D KS D Bn e O D 2 x O 6 7 8 d 10 11 12 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 6 14 7 15 8 16 RTN 1 RTN 2 RTN 3 RTN 4 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 EFFECT 3 EFEECT 4 Mixer section This completes the patch setup for direct recording e If you switch the RECORD display page after doing the patch setup all your patch settings will be undone and lost a confirmation popup window will appear Remember to stay on the same RECORD page until recording is finished AW2400 Owner s Manual 53 Direct recording and Mixed recording Assigning input signals to tracks Mixed recording Use the following procedure to set up the patching so you can mix and record the signals from multiple instruments mics connected to MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 to one or more tracks e Refer to page 102 for more details on patching for mixed record ing Lower the STEREO fader to the posi tion 2 Referring to Connection and Setup on page 37 connect your instruments and or microphones and set up the input levels 3 Call the RECORD screen Mixed page by either pressing the Quick Navigate section RECORD key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F2 key after pressing the RECORD key Via the RECORD screen Mixed page you can patch multiple input channels to either of the AW2400
263. d The selected key will flash orange and the correspond ing channel s parameters can be recorded to Automix Automix Operation e Command Editing Automix data In a Specified Region 10 Operate the fader as required e If no operations are performed between the punch in and punch out points all data corresponding to the selected parameter data in the selected channel will be erased This is a handy way to erase all occurrences of specified data in a specified punch in out region 11 When the required operations have been performed press the same key that you pressed in step 9 The key will go out and Automix recording will stop punch out The Automix record mode will remain active but since no channel is selected no data can actually be recorded you can press the key again to punch in again and continue recording if desired e After punching the fader move in and out the fader will return to the previously recorded level at a rate determined by the specified return time 12 When all required mix operations have been recorded press the top panel STOP W key to stop the song A popup window asking you to confirm whether you want to update the recorded Automix data will appear 13 To confirm and update the recorded data move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The recorded Automix data will be updated Command Editing Automix data In a Specified Region This section describes how you c
264. d ers 9 12 control the return levels for effects 1 4 7 To adjust the effect mix balance the bal respectively You can view and edit the various param ance between the effect and direct signals eters for each return channel by pressing SEL key 9 press the F3 key 12 and then calling the CH VIEW screen View page The EFFECT screen FX Edit page will appear 8 Use MIX BALANCE field knob to adjust the e See Displaying the mix parameters for individual channels balance between the direct and effect sig ENEE nals When applying an effect via the effect sends and returns the effect mix level is usually set to 100 effect sound only e The effect parameters can be edited as required via the FX Edit page Refer to Editing Effects on page 121 for details Q The effect send master levels can be adjusted via faders 9 12 after pressing the Layer section MASTER key When the MASTER mixing layer is selected faders 9 12 control the master send levels for effects 1 4 respectively You can view and edit the various param eters for each master send channel by pressing SEL key 9 12 and then calling the CH VIEW screen View page 118 AW2400 Owners Manual Inserting an Effect Into a Channel Inserting an Effect Into a Channel Effects can be directly inserted into the signal path of specified channels as follows 1 Referring to the instructions in Recalling 4 Move the cursor to the field to the right of
265. d erases all data from the media and thus will take longer than the SIMPLY option Move the cursor to the appropriate button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the erasure If you turn on the SIMPLY button CONF IRHAT I OH Erase CO RW Media If you turn on the PERFECTLY button CONF IRHAT I OH Erase CO AH Media Perfectly e Pressing the F1 F2 keys while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the SIMPLY F1 key and PERFECTLY F2 key buttons respectively 3 To execute the erasure move the cursor to the OK button If you decide not to erase the disc move the cursor to the CANCEL button Then press the ENTER key Erasure will begin if you selected the OK button This operation cannot be halted ew Creating an audio CD KO AW2400 Owner s Manual 221 Playing an audio CD Playing an audio CD The AW2400 CD Play function lets you play back a conventional audio CD or CD R RW media to which audio data has been written via the CD RW drive ES and CD Extra CDs 1st session only e CD R RW discs can also be played prior to finalization 1 Call the CD screen Play page by either pressing the Work Navigate section CD key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F2 key after pressing the CD key In this page you can play back an audio CD inserted in the CD RW drive Bes Hew Sons H Ho DO 44 1KH2 C
266. d in the I O slot AW2400 Preferences 2 AUTO SAVE button Enables or disables the Auto Save function When the Auto Save function is enabled the current song state will be backed up to temporary memory when one of the fol lowing occurs If the power is accidentally turned off before the unit is properly shut down the song will be restored from the backup data in temporary memory the next time the power is turned on e Recording is stopped e Track editing is ended e Import from the CD RW drive is completed e Import of a WAV file is completed 3 AUTO DISPLAY button Determines whether the display screen related to a key or knob operated in the Selected Channel section will appear automatically ON or whether the display will remain as it is and a popup window for the corresponding parameter will appear OFF CD ST TR PLAY MODE MUTE MIX button Determines whether the input channels will be output together with CD or stereo playback MIX or whether only the CD or stereo track signal will be output MUTE Utility functions E AW2400 Owner s Manual 211 Initializing the internal hard disk Initializing the internal hard disk The UTILITY screen Format page lets you initialize the internal hard disk Prior to exporting and importing WAV files to or from a Macintosh computer Mac OS X 10 3 it may be necessary to ini tialize the hard disk in order to change the hard disk cluster size NOTE Format
267. d press the ENTER key The library data will be recalled Erasing unneeded Automix data from the library NOTE e Erased Automix data cannot be recovered Use this function with caution Call the AUTOMIX screen Library page by either pressing the AUTOMIX key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F4 key after pressing the AUTOMIX key Use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select the Automix data to be erased The data highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected to be erased Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and press the ENTER key A popup window confirming the clear operation will appear e Pressing the F3 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the CLEAR button 4 To actually erase the selected data move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key AW2400 Owner s Manual Automix A O 191 Automix Library Operation 192 Protecting Automix Data Applying protection to Automix data to prevent accidental erasure 1 Call the AUTOMIX screen Library page by either pressing the AUTOMIX key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F4 key after pressing the AUTOMIX key 2 Use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select the Automix data to be pro tected The data highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for operation 3 Move the cursor to the PROTECT button and press the ENTER
268. date all AW2400 units you are using to the latest firmware version Information on the latest firmware ver sion as well as update procedure can be found at the inter net address below http www yamahasynth com 5 Appendix AW2400 Owner s Manual 259 Troubleshooting Recorder operations E When you press the PLAY key it blinks and playback does not occur e Is the AW2400 set to MTC SLAVE Access the MIDI screen Setting 2 page and check the set ting E Can t edit a recorded track e The song may be protected e Have you selected the virtual track that you recorded E Editing results are not heard in the sound e Have you selected the virtual track that you recorded e Are you using the appropriate editing command E Counter display is not 0 when you return to the beginning of the song s If the display mode is set to RELATIVE relative time the start point may be specified Go to the SONG screen Setting page and TRACK screen View page and check the settings E Display indicates DISK FULL or REGION FULL and you cannot record or edit e There is insufficient free space or too many recording regions Erase unneeded tracks and then perform the Opti mize operation to obtain more free space e If the DISK FULL message appears erase unneeded songs or WAV files located under the Transport folder The WAV files under the Transport folder can be erased from your computer when the USB Stor
269. ding Resolution 110 dB typ AD DA MIC LINE INPUT to 16 bit 24 bit STEREO OUT l ae Maximum Number of Simultaneous Recording 104 dB min AD DA MIC LINE EE to Playback Tracks STEREO OUT GAIN min 16 Recording Tracks 24 Playback Tracks 16 bit AD Converter 8 Recording Tracks 12 Playback Tracks 24 bit 24 bit Linear 128 times Oversampling Number of Tracks DA Converter 208 Tracks 24 bit Linear 128 times Oversampling 24 Tracks Stereo Tracks x 8 Virtual Internal Processing Faders 32 bit 100 mm x 13 motorized Sampling Frequency Display Internal 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 6 6 320 x 240 dot LCD with contrast control External 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 10 6 MIDI MTC Master Slave MIDI Clock Master Audio Input Section MMC Master Slave Program Change MIC LINE INPUT 8 CH XLR amp phone Control Change DIGITAL STEREO IN 2 CH coaxial stereo x 1 Mini YGDAISLOT 16 CH Memory Scene Memory EQ Library Compressor Library Audio Output Section Gate Library Effect Library Channel Library MONITOR OUT 2 CH stereo x 1 l PHONES 2 CH stereo x 1 a n STEREO OUT 2 CH stereo x 1 OMNI OUT 4 CH Dimensions W x H x D DIGITAL STEREO OUT 2 CH coaxial stereo x 1 933 x 193 x 503 mm Mini YGDAI SLOT 16 CH Net Weight 11 5 kg Audio Insert I O Section INSERT I O 2 CH Operating Temperature 5 35 C Mixer Input Section Total 48 CH MIC LINE INPUT 16 CH Optional Accessories In
270. ding track channel as required To Adjust Pan After pressing the SEL key of the corresponding channel press the Selected Channel section PAN EQ key so that its indicator lights Selected Channel knob 1 can now be used to adjust panning for the channel currently selected via the SEL keys For more details refer to Pan Control on page 147 NOTE e In the direct record mode adjusting the pan of the record source input channel has no effect 1 To check the level of a signal being applied to a record ready track press the METER key and then the F2 key This calls the METER screen Track page In this page you can monitor the levels of the signals at the inputs of track channels 1 24 sent from the input channels to the recorder tracks METER Gai Neu _ sons Wer ei Ho DIS IHPUT 1 l z 8 d 00 00 00 000 01 0 i 11 12 7 D 7 S ke TACK CHE vc 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2H Al 22 23 Za Kn TREK CHANNEL PRE FADER EEM PEAK HOLD 12 Move the cursor to the PRE EQ button and press the ENTER key The input levels of the track channels corresponding to the record ready tracks will be displayed If any of the signals reach the OVER level the input level setting will need to be reduced Refer to Connection and Setup on page 37 and readjust the input levels Direct recording and Mixed recording Monitor signal flow during recording Recorder section STEREO OUT MONITOR OUT d
271. distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT devices Compliance with FCC regulations does not guar antee that interference will not occur in all installations If this product is found to be the source of interference which can be determined by turning the unit OFF and ON please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference Utilize power outlets that are on different branch circuit breaker or fuse circuits or install AC line filter s In the case of radio or TV interference relocate reorient the antenna If the antenna lead in is 300 ohm ribbon lead change the lead in to co axial type cable lf these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results please contact the local retailer authorized to dis tribute this type of product If you can not locate the appropriate retailer please contact Yamaha Corporation of America Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangetho rpe Ave Buena Park CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products dis tributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsid iaries class B DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE Responsible Party Yamaha Corporation of America Address 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park Calif 90620 Telephone 714 522 9011 Type of Equipment Professional Audio Workstation Model Name
272. diting command Guipa pue suoneiado yoe s PITCH Pitch Change Adjusts the pitch of the specified region of an audio track without changing the length From Start From End WWAVAVANANANANANANA PITCH CHANGE From End From Start PITCH CHANGE enen E Parameter list Parameter Explanation 1 24 A single audio track A pair of adjacent odd numbered even numbered audio tracks ST The stereo track 2 From V TR 1 8 3 From Start 4 From End Q From TR 1 amp 2 23824 Virtual track number Specify a point Beginning of the edited region Specify a point End of the edited region 12 to 12 semitones Specify the amount of pitch change in semitone units NOTE Specify the amount of pitch change in one cent units 1 100th of a semitone IMPORT CD AUDIO Imports audio data CD DA from CD R RW media in the CD RW drive into an audio track of the AW2400 For details on the parameters and operation of the IMPORT CD AUDIO command refer to Importing from the CD RW drive gt p 143 IMPORT CD WAV Imports a WAV file from CD R RW media in the CD RW drive into an audio track of the AW2400 For details on the parameters and operation of the IMPORT CD WAV command refer to Importing from the CD RW drive gt p 143 50 to 50 Geh cents 142 AW2400 Owner s Manual IMPORT USB WAV Imports a WAV file co
273. dually Using the Gates The gate attenuates signals below a specified threshold level and can be used to eliminate noise in silent sections of a track Gates are only provided on input channels Use the Layer section INPUT SEL and SEL keys to select the channel to which the gate is to be applied 2 Press the Selected Channel section DYN key so that its indicator lights then press Selected Channel knob 1 2 3 or 4 The DYNAMICS screen will appear 3 Press the Display section F1 key or press the DYN key as many times as necessary until the Gate Edit page appears ny H Du Neu Jop 7128 87 alinitial Bl INPUT 1 A 00 00 00 000 au 111 011 ESCH kH2 Te bit GATE EDIT GATE OH ote Pere eee I To i Oh AC I CH ru THRESHOLD RANGE ATTACK 26 8d0B S6d0B ams DECAY HOLO 231ms Z DIS The Gate Edit Page includes the following items O GATE ON OFF button Switches the gate on off 2 STEREO LINK button Turning this button on links gate operation for paired channels NOTE e Gate operation can only be linked for adjacent odd and even numbered channels that can be paired 3 KEYIN SOURCE field Selects one of the following trigger sources for the gate e SELF button Selects the signal from the cur rently selected channel e CHANNEL button Sa Selects the signal from the channel specified in the box below the but ton CH1 CH16 Aft
274. e nannnnnnnnnna0aaaann 7 D DATA JOG dal 25 Demo song 41 RK EE 125 Digital input ena 227 Digital input output 223 DIGITAL OUT COPYRIGHT button sisisvssncsosrennu 210 DIGITAL STEREO IN OUT connectors 29 104 Bloe CC 279 DIO JE 21 DIO screen Plug in page 228 Setting page 223 Status page 227 DIRECT OUT ien degserasieg eg 100 DIRECT OUT EXTRACT POSIT TION onosnnnnnnnnnn 211 Direct recordumg 49 99 Disc At Once 214 218 Display message jet 263 PTR e 75 DNUICKRINDS ssestsssgeeusgeseged 151 242 DYN k y sostcnosasceuvaendaipigntoccecsenesuee 24 Ru e 151 Dynamics Parametere 240 DYNAMICS screen Comp Edit page ciciciccsccecczterexs 152 Comp Lib page n se 155 Gate Edit page 151 Gate Lib page 155 E SUR 21 EDIT screen Edit ele E 136 Mark Adj page 91 Tempo Map page 175 Editing a value in the display 31 Editing command siissnssssevercediwaess 138 COP E 139 RSR RE 138 Eege 138 EX CHANGE wraaieatutse teen adeicendedene 141 EXPORT sesnncdinsourerctanetwonntiocnsas 233 IMPORT CD AUDIO 143 IMPORT CDWAN 143 IMPORT TRACK 145 IMPORT USB WAN 234 SSE PAT WE 138 MOVE eeben 140 RRE 142 TIME COMP wi iccisscsnsicsetenzecsees 141 EFFECT key 24 Effect Library 006 116 122 EFFECT screen FX Edit page 121 FX Input page s s s 117 FX Lib page 122 FX Track page s es t17 FSGS eeben 115 Ed 121 Insert aaaeeeaa 115 119 INSERT
275. e F2 key Input RTN Page Displays the input and fader levels for input channels 1 16 as well as effect return channels 1 4 Bee Heu Sone 128 8 Initial Bl m drd 00 00 06 5 i 004 02 EAMAEETE 2 3 keen FFF FECT RETURH el FRE FADER POST FADER PEAK HOLDO 1 Inrut RATH F Track pa Huus ter pa Dutput Track Page Displays the input and fader levels for track channels 1 24 BEB Heu Sons 00 00 01 128 METER IC Le lnitial E TRACK 14 P 104 04 GE mera e EE 2 3 4 7 D 7 amp 9 18 11 12 DTD D E DTD E 12 TTT 13 E DTD TED z DTD l 30 DTD ee TTT 40 DTD FD I LLE TTET TELTLLLELTELLELLELLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLELLELLELLLLLELLLLLLLLELLELLLLTELLELLELLELLELCEE W pn sp SE Sp a 57 2l 58 43 51 71 70 Ve 17 18 19 Z 21 22 25 24 TRACE CHANNEL p L FRE FADER jCPOST FADER PEAK HOLD TEJ Tase ATNA Track E ster SZ Outeuk Je The following items are displayed G Input channel 1 16 input levels 2 Effect return channel 1 4 input levels 3 Track channel 1 24 input levels The level meters display the input levels for the corre sponding channels while the numbers below the level meters show the fader levels in dB 4 PRE EQ button Pre EQ levels levels prior to the EQ stage are displayed when this button is on 5 PRE FADER button Pre fader levels levels prior to the faders are displayed when this button is on 6 POST FADE
276. e 12 32 4 5 6 2 g 172 13141516 Es 0T OUT WER WER D PUTT TTT TTT TTi Tr rirr errr rrr rere L LTT L Steins EEE D E EEN EN TTA RANT ge E 2 PTT TTT rr rrr rere TTT E ETETEA TTE 2 5 PPT TTT TTT Tiree rere LTT Cretan assgnsngetesgnesggengsesegee gg eg 15 og oo og og og og oo og oo oo 30 Se EEN GEN E P E E T 30 iLIF 21 2p 2 3 3 d EE de EEN E e dicta D 4 ken DIE wl U ie EFFECT SEHD el i 5 4 keen H DUT tie D GT OUT oe oe eS oE a eR PEAK HOLD PoP PoP oP oP oP PO oP PoP p oP p oP D Ti keepne mm mm Fi PoP oP oP oP oP oP oP oP oP oP oP oP p Po W L PRE Efi jf PRE FADER PEAK HOLD Ee Inrut ATH Track 4 Haster F Qu teult 6 The following items are displayed 4 Output levels for the card installed in the slot The following items are displayed OMNI OUT 1 4 output levels 3 DIGITAL STEREO OUT output levels BUS1 L R BUS2 L R output levels The level meters display the output levels for the corre 2 AUX bus 1 4 output levels Effect bus 1 4 output level sponding channels while the numbers below the level ect DUS 1 4 OUTPUT levels meters show the fader levels in dB 4 Stereo bus output level The level meters display the output levels for the corre 2 PEAK HOLD button l sponding channels while the numbers below the level This button switches the level meter peak hold function meters show the fader levels in dB on off PRE EQ button wr Pre EQ levels levels p
277. e an event past the preceding or following event Move the cursor to the item that you want to edit and use the DATA JOG dial to adjust the value If necessary you can play back the song to check that the tempo map event works as you expect In the same way use the NEW or INSERT button to add new events and set their parameters E Deleting a tempo map event Here s how to delete an unwanted event from the tempo map However you cannot delete the event that is located at the beginning of the song 1 Access the Tempo Map page and scroll the list to select the tempo map event that you want to delete 2 Move the cursor to the DELETE button and press the ENTER key The selected event will be deleted Backing up songs Backing up songs Here s how you can back up songs from the internal hard disk to CD R RW media e To backup AW2400 data to a computer connect the AW2400 to the computer via a USB cable and copy the song folders directly from the internal AW2400 hard disk to the computer For detailed operation refer to WAV File Transfer USB Storage Mode on page 230 Insert CD R RW media into the CD RW drive 2 Call the SONG screen Backup page by either pressing the Work Navigate section SONG key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F3 key after pressing the SONG key In this page you can back up songs from the internal hard disk to CD R RW media SONG Gea He
278. e AW2400 s internal clock is selected as the wordclock source Use this setting when using the AW2400 on it s own or when using the AW2400 as the wordclock master for other devices e When the internal clock is selected the sampling frequency of the current song becomes the sampling frequency for the entire system 2 D ST IN button When this button is turned on the clock signal included in the digital audio signal received at the DIGITAL STEREO IN connector is used as the wordclock source Use this setting when you want the AW2400 to func tion as a wordclock slave that synchronizes to the sig nal received via the DIGITAL STEREO IN connector Choose this setting when for example you will be cascade connecting the digital audio from an external device to the AW2400 stereo bus or when receiving digital audio from a DAT recorder or similar digital audio source 3 1 2 15 16 buttons When one of these buttons is turned on the clock sig nal included in the corresponding digital audio signal received via the rear panel slot is used as the word clock source i e the clock signal included in one ste reo pair 1 2 3 4 15 16 Use one of these settings when using an external HDR or other digital audio source as the wordclock master to which the AW2400 will be synchronized as the wordclock slave The CLOCK and SYNC rows show the condition of the received wordclock signal and the synchronization status respectively
279. e AW2400 open the Song folder on the AW2400 1 drive and the Song folder on the AW2400 2 drive These fold ers contain folders bearing the names of the recorded songs extension AWS and those folders further con tain folders labeled Audio that contain the actual audio data To backup a complete song to the computer simply copy the folder bearing the name of the song you want to backup to the computer Refer to Song Folder Organization on page 166 for information on how the folders are organized ES e Verification and repair of the internal hard disk can be carried out from the computer From a Windows computer enter the chkdsk command at the command prompt or from a Macin tosh computer running OS X use the Disk Utility First Aid function NOTE D e For 24 bit songs the audio data contained in the Audio fold ers is stored in 32 bit WAV format If your waveform editor application cannot handle 32 bit data first export the WAV file s to the Transport folder WAV files imported or exported via the Transport folder are automatically converted to 24 bit format that can be edited using most waveform editor soft ware Do not change the names of any folders files other than those in the Transport folder Any folder file names that have been added or changed outside the Transport folder from the com puter will be automatically deleted Be especially careful not to cha
280. e Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the DELETE button AW2400 Owner s Manual Automix A O 189 Automix Library Operation gt O 3 x 190 Automix Library Operation Automix data can be stored to a specialized Automix library and recalled whenever needed Up to 16 Automix recordings can be saved for each song so you can easily create and compare multiple mixes for the same song About the Automix Library Page Automix data can be saved to and recalled from the Auto mix library via the AUTOMIX screen Library page To call this page press the SCENE AUTOMIX USB sec tion AUTOMIX key as many times as necessary or press the F4 key after pressing the AUTOMIX key This page contains the following items AUTOM epp ppm Scene INPUT 1 00 00 00 00 101 11 ECT ea AUTOM I LIBRARY Ho TITLE SIZE amp EEO PSTORE Ces Ges 6 HEE Automix List A list of all the Automix data stored in the library The Automix data enclosed in a dotted frame is the one cur rently selected for operation A lock icon indicates pro tected Automix data 2 RENAME button Accesses the NAME EDIT popup window where you can edit the name of the Automix selected in the list 3 RECALL button Recalls the Automix data that is selected in the list 4 STORE button Stores the current Automix settings into the location selected in the list CLEAR but
281. e Since 24 bit songs can have a maximum of 12 play tracks gt p 165 tracks 13 24 are muted and will not play back e To switch track muting on off move the cursor to a track chan nel number and press the ENTER key AW2400 Owner s Manual 79 Bounce ping pong recording procedure 4 If you want to add an effect return channel as a bounce source press the SEL key of that effect return channel In the same way as for PLAY TRACK in step 3 you can repeatedly press the SEL key to select the bus to which the signal is sent NOTE P e If you are using an effect via an effect bus the bounce opera tion will not include the effect sound unless you add the signal of the corresponding effect return channel to the bounce des tination bus For details refer to Applying Effects via Send and Return gt p 117 e To control the effect return channels make the Layer section IN 1 8 key or IN 9 16 key light D In the RECORD TRACK area select a bounce destination track move the cursor to the symbol for that track and press the ENTER key You can select up to four bounce destination tracks The odd numbered tracks can be connected to Bus L or Bus2 L and the even numbered tracks can be con nected to Bus R or Bus2 R The SEL key will blink red indicates that the corresponding track is selected as the bounce destination In the same way as for the PLAY TRACK you can repeatedly press the ENTER
282. e cursor to the EXIT button and press the ENTER key The popup window will close and you will return to the previous screen e Please note that if you record or edit after undoing back to a certain step the undo redo data subsequent to that step will be erased For example if you undo the previous three steps and then perform a recording or editing operation the undo redo data for the previous steps 1 and 2 will be erased If you press the UNDO REDO key while it is lit the previous operation will be undone without opening the Undo List the key indicator will go out when the UNDO operation is per formed Press the UNDO REDO key a second time to redo the undone operation Chapter 7 Overdubbing This chapter explains how you can record additional performances on other tracks while you listen to the previously recorded tracks About overdubbing Overdubbing is the process of recording additional performances on other tracks while you monitor the playback of previously recorded tracks The diagram below shows the signal flow when you play back tracks 1 4 and overdub track 5 In this example the signal that is input from MIC LINE INPUT jack 1 is routed through recorder track 5 and sent to track channel 5 This signal is then sent to the stereo bus mixed with the play back sound of track channels 1 4 and output from the STEREO OUT jacks and the MONITOR OUT jacks PHONES jack a a dd J Z
283. e disc move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key A popup window will indicate CD Writing while data is being written to the disc When writing is com pleted a popup window will ask you whether you want to finalize CONF RAAT ION Finalize This Media NOTE D e A BUFFER UNDERRUW error message will appear if a buffer underrun occurs while writing In this case either decrease the writing speed to 4x or set the UNDERRUN PROTECT button to ENABLE gt p 215 e If you enabled the write test in Basic settings for the CD RW drive gt p 215 a write test will be performed before the data is actually written An error message will appear if a problem occurs during the write test e Copy prohibit data will automatically be written into the CD that is created Q To finalize the disc move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key If you do not want to finalize the disc move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key This completes the writing process NO SE Gd opne ue Huneal 218 AW2400 Owner s Manual Writing Disc At Once Here s how to use the Disc At Once method to write stereo tracks from songs saved on the hard disk to CD R RW media Use this method if you do not want to create silence between each track of the CD or if you want to write a single song divided into multiple tracks on the CD 1 Make sure that the appropriate vi
284. e following choices Display Type of signal No assignment ST L ST R Stereo output channel L R AUX 1 4 AUX send master 1 4 EFF 1 4 Effect send master 1 4 TR 1 24 Track channel direct outputs 1 24 INS Insert send 1 INS will appear only if SLOT1 SLOT16 is selected for INSERT EFF in the CH VIEW screen View page If you attempt to change INS to a different item in the PATCH screen Output page a popup message Used As Effect Insert will appear and you won t be able to execute the change In order to change this you will first have to defeat the selection for the corresponding output channel in the CH VIEW screen View page 104 AW2400 Owner s Manual Chapter 12 Channel Operation This chapter describes procedures for displaying and operating the parame ters for individual channels as well as for saving and recalling data library settings for individual settings Displaying the mix parameters for individual channels If you access the CH VIEW screen View page you can not only see the signal flow for the selected channel but also adjust the mix parameters within the displayed signal path To call this page press the Selected Channel section VIEW key as many times as necessary or press the F1 key after pressing the VIEW key Immediately after pressing the VIEW key the signal flow of the currently selected channel will appear on the display You c
285. e same frame rate e The frame rate you specify here will affect not only synchroni zation with the external device but also the time code that is displayed in the counter etc 7 Set the external MIDI device to function as MMC master and MTC slave and set its MMC device number and MTC frame rate to the same settings as the AW2400 For details on how to make these settings refer to the owner s manual provided with the device H Play back the external MIDI device When you play back the external MIDI device the corresponding MMC commands will be sent to the AW 2400 and the AW2400 will begin running At the same time the AW2400 will transmit MTC to the external MIDI device and the external MIDI device will run in synchronization with it ES e You can synchronize using MIDI Clock and Start Stop Con tinue messages instead of using MTC and MMC For details on the settings used in this case refer to Recording playing AW2400 mix operations on an external sequencer gt p 202 Switching AW2400 scenes from an external MIDI device Here s how you can transmit program changes from an external MIDI device to switch scenes on the AW2400 E Assign scenes to program changes In the Scene Automix USB section use the SCENE key to access the SONG screen PGM Assign page This page lets you assign a scene number to each pro gram change number SCEHE Dol Neu _ Sons ee 1 Scenes i INPUT 00 00 00
286. e screen corre spond to the following channels e INPUT 1 16 Input channels 1 16 e RETURN 1 4 Effect Return channels 1 4 e TRACK 1 24 Track channels 1 24 4 Tracks This is the track channel number Move the cursor to the number and press the ENTER key to switch track muting on off 5 LIBRARY button Accesses the mastering library where you can recall EQ and dynamics settings specifically for the stereo output channel 6 DITHER ON OFF button This is an on off switch for dithering which is a pro cess that reduces the perceived quantization noise when you convert a digital audio signal to a lower bit depth 7 REC button Puts the stereo track in record ready mode SAFE button Defeats the record ready state of the stereo track This will also execute MUTE CLEAR e Pressing the F1 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the SAFE button 9 MUTE CLEAR button This clears the Mute status of all tracks However depending on the bit depth of the song there may be cases in which some tracks cannot be unmuted If so tracks will be muted consecutively starting with the last numbered track AW2400 Owner s Manual Mixdown and bounce operations Ee 75 Mixdown procedure 3 Use the Layer section keys the INPUT SEL keys and the SEL keys to select the channels that you want to send to the ste reo bus For example repeatedly pr
287. e stereo effect level by selecting the appropriate layer and fader via processor You could also pair inputs 3 and 4 for easy the Layer section MASTER key and channel SEL stereo control key or by using the CH VIEW screen View page LVL knob Sooo ta SSS 101 0 GEG ae CH VIEW Aux _ 00 00 00 000 INITIALIZE ee d COMP INSERT EFF NONE LS ATT LLL EA OM noo NOTE 12 Turn the RECORD screen Mixdown page e With this setup be sure to set all AUX send levels for input REC button on and begin the actual mix channels 3 and 4 to to prevent feedback down process 114 AW2400 Owners Manual Chapter 14 Effects In this section well cover operation of the AW2400 s internal effects About the Internal Effects The AW2400 has four independent multi effect processors built in Effect 1 4 The internal effects can be used in the following two ways W Effect Sends and Returns This method uses the mixer section s effect sends and returns To apply an effect to a channel the channel effect send controls are used to send the signal to the input of Effect 1 4 via the corresponding effect bus The output from the effect processor used is returned to the stereo bus or bus 1 bus 2 via the corresponding effect return channel Effect Return 1 4 and is mixed with the direct sound The following diagram shows the input and output signal flow for effects 1 4 Mixer section et SL s
288. e target channel can be selected from the following e IN 1 16 Input channels 1 16 es TR 1 24 Track channels 1 24 e RTN 1 4 Effect return channels 1 4 3 Channel Region e BUS 1 2 The channel and region to which the edit command will apply are specified here The display will change according to the command selected in 2 2 COMMAND Displays the currently selected edit command ae Bus master channels 1 2 e AUX 1 4 AUX send master channels 1 4 e EFF 1 4 Effect send master channels 1 4 a E Stereo output channel es ALL All channels e The channel selection will be ignored when editing library D The start point of the region to be edited is e AREE E specified in counter format 4 EXECUTE button 3 The end point of the region to be edited is The selected edit command is executed when the cur specified in counter format sor is moved to this button and the ENTER key is pressed When the COPY or MOVE command is Move the cursor to the button in the selected PARAMETERS field corresponding to the parameter to be edited and press the ENTER key Multiple parameters can be selected COMMAND NN eer Move the cursor to the COMMAND field and mn mane e e E E use the DATA JOG dial or the INC DEC keys to select a command then press the ENTER key The following commands can be selected Q Specifies the source channel for the copy or move operatio
289. e to other devices turn off the power for all e devices Before turning the power on or off for all devices set all volume levels to minimum e Be sure to connect to a properly grounded power source A ground screw is provided on the rear panel of this device for maximum safety and shock prevention If the mains outlet is not grounded be sure to connect the ground screw to a confirmed ground point before plugging the device into the mains Improper grounding can result in electrical shock XLR type connectors are wired as follows IEC60268 standard pin 1 ground pin 2 hot and pin 3 cold Insert TRS phone jacks are wired as follows sleeve ground tip send and ring return When turning on the AC power in your audio system always turn on the power amplifier LAST to avoid speaker damage When turning the power off the power amplifier should be turned off FIRST for the same reason Do not insert your fingers or hands in any gaps or openings on the device vents disc slots etc Avoid inserting or dropping foreign objects paper plastic metal etc into any gaps or openings on the device vents disc slots etc If this happens turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet Then have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel Do not use headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level since this can cause permanent hearing loss If you exper
290. ec tor will not be used The DIGITAL IN setting takes priority over other inputs selected in the Input Select area When you assign the DIGITAL IN to an input channel the corresponding input number in the Input Select area will change to a symbol This indicates that a signal has already been assigned to the corresponding input channel NOTE D e If you enable cascade connection the digital audio signal received from the DIGITAL STEREO IN connector will be ITAL IN field will indicate ST BUS and cannot be changed until you disable cascade connection DIRECT OUT Here you can select the send position from which the signal of an input channel or track channel is sent to direct output e PRE FADER The pre fader signal e POST FADER The post fader signal 7 MULTI CONNECTION ON OFF button If this button is on you can connect a set of eight input channels and eight tracks in a single operation MUTE CLEAR button This button clears the mute status of all tracks However depending on the bit depth of the song and on the number of tracks that are enabled for recording there may be cases in which some tracks cannot be unmuted If so tracks will be muted consecutively starting with the last numbered track AW2400 Owner s Manual sent directly to the stereo bus While this state exists the DIG 9 SAFE button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key
291. ecifies the position of the event 2 CH Specifies the channel to which the event will apply 3 Value Edits the value of the event type specified in the PARAM field Value Display Description Parameter Scene library type and scene library number SCENE LIB dB SEC Fader level return time ON ON OFF Channel on off status L63 full left C center PAN PECH R63 full right AUX EFF AUX EFF dB AUX effect type and send level AUX EFF AUX effect type and on off AUX EFFON ON OFF _ status EQ ON ON OFF EQ on off status EQ FREQ Hz EQ center frequency EQ Q Q EQ bandwidth EQ GAIN dB Level of the operated band Move the cursor to the appropriate item in the even list Use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to set the value as required then press the ENTER key The edited data will change immediately When you want to add a new event first move the cursor to the DUPLICATE button and press the ENTER key A copy of the currently selected event will be created at the same location You can then edit the time chan nel or value as required e Pressing the F2 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the DUPLICATE button To delete an unneeded event move the cur sor to the DELETE button and press the ENTER key The currently selected event will be deleted e Pressing the F3 key while holding th
292. ecord at an appropriate level Go to the METER screen and check the level meter move ment e Is the word clock setting correct for both the AW2400 and the external device s e An effect such as Distortion or Amp Simulate may be in use E The volume of a particular channel increases or decreases e Are the dynamics processor settings appropriate e Is the Automix function engaged E Can t store a scene e The store destination scene or song may be protected e A scene cannot be stored in scene number 00 E Can t reproduce a scene e One or more channels may be set to Recall Safe E Can save to a library e It is not possible to save to the factory preset libraries e Is the song you are trying to save protected E Meters move even though the faders are lowered e The meter display may be set to PRE FADER or PRE EQ E Moving a fader does not change the level e Have you selected the correct mixing layer via the Layer section keys e The fader may be set to PRE FADE or PRE EQ Troubleshooting E Pairing was specified but the signal is mon aural e Is the odd numbered channel panned far left and the even numbered channel panned far right E Pairing was specified but the signal phase does not match e Even when channels are paired the phase setting is not linked E Signal is delayed e An effect such as delay may be inserted E Can t use the internal effects e Effect BYPASS may be turned O
293. ected can be operated via the Selected Channel controls e During Automix recording the INPUT SEL SEL and STE REO SEL keys are used to punch the corresponding chan nels in or out The safest way to switch the selected channel during Automix recording is to move the cursor to the appro priate location in the PAN EQ EFFECT or AUX screen Scene Library Scene channel EQ gate compressor and effect set ups are recalled via the corresponding library pages 184 AW2400 Owners Manual 10 When all required mix operations have been recorded press the top panel STOP W key to stop the song The AUTOMIX key will go out the MODE field REC button will be turned off and the Automix record standby mode will be disengaged At the same time a popup window asking you to confirm whether you want to update the recorded Automix data will appear CONF IRHAT ION Uedate His e Automix recording can be stopped without stopping song playback by moving the cursor to the STOP button in the AUTOMIX screen Automix page and pressing the ENTER key or by pressing the F2 key while holding the SHIFT key e If you turn on the AUTOREC button rather than the REC but ton in step 5 the Automix record standby mode will remain engaged even when song playback is stopped This method is best when you want to make repeated passes at an Auto mix recording 11 To confirm and update the recorded data move the cursor
294. ed Channel has no Comp There is no compressor on the selected channel Selected Channel has no EQ There is no EQ on the selected channel Selected Channel has no Gate There is no gate on the selected channel Song Too Large to Export The song file is too large to be exported System Error An internal system error has occurred This Song is Protected Can t save erase or edit the title because the song is protected Too Long Data No more data can be written because the capacity of the CD has been exceeded Too Many CD Tracks No new tracks can be added because the maximum number of allowable tracks has been exceeded Track Not Recorded The track you selected does not contain any recorded data Used As Effect Insert This port is already in use as an effect insert Wave File Link Error A WAV file link error has been found Wrong Bit Depth The bit depth of the selected file is incorrect Wrong File Format The selected file is not PCM format Wrong HD Format The internal hard disk is incorrectly formatted The disk cannot be formatted from a computer Wrong Number of Channels The number of channels in the selected file is incorrect Wrong Sampling Frequency The sampling rate of the selected file is incorrect Wrong Wav Chunk Data The WAV file s chunk data is incorrect Wrong Wav File The WAV file
295. ed for USB 2 0 use e The USB MIDI driver provided on the supplied CD ROM must be properly installed to allow MIDI message transmission and recep tion Introducing the AW2400 H Caution when using the USB connector You must observe the following points when connect ing the AW2400 to your computer via the USB con nector If you fail to observe these points your computer or the AW2400 may stop operating hang up causing data to be corrupted or lost If the com puter or the AW2400 stops working turn the power off and then on again and restart the computer e Before connecting the computer via the USB con nector disable the power management mode sus pend sleep standby hibernate on your computer e Connect the USB connector to the computer before you power on the AW2400 e Execute the following before turning the power to the AW2400 on off connecting disconnecting the USB cable or turning the USB Storage mode on off e Close all application programs e If the USB Storage mode is off make sure that data is not being transmitted from and to the AW2400 e If the USB Storage mode is engaged make sure that no read or write operations are in progress e If the USB Storage mode is engaged safely remove the AW2400 from the Windows taskbar or drag the AW2400 icons from the Macintosh desktop to the trash after closing all AW2400 windows e Leave an interval of at least six seconds between powering the AW2400 on and
296. ed times e Yamaha will take no responsibility for any damages direct or consequential that may result from the use of the above CD RW drive To insert a disc into the CD RW drive press the eject switch The disc tray will open Place the disc on the tray and gently push the disc tray in e The disc tray is ejected electrically If the disc tray is not ejected when you press the eject switch turn on the power of the AW2400 and press the eject switch once again 000000000000 Eject hole Eject switch AW2400 Owner s Manual About the built in CD RW drive 1 Never touch the objective lens 2 Be careful that the objective lens does not become dusty or dirty 3 If the objective lens becomes dusty use a commer cially available blower etc to blow the dust off with clean air 4 Since the inside of the drive contains powerful mag netic circuitry do not allow any magnetic material to come near the drive In particular any metallic frag ments screws or pins that enter the drive mechanism will cause operation to fail Using the CD RW drive E Removing a CD in an emergency If you are unable to remove the disc by pressing the eject switch insert a wire of less than 2 mm diameter such as a straightened paper clip into the eject hole and push gen tly However pressing the eject switch will not eject the disc when the AW2400 is in the following states so do
297. eets the following requirements Lt E Windows XP Professional Home Edition SP1 or higher or Mac OSX 10 3 or higher USB 2 0 e A USB 1 1 interface can also be used but in that case file transfer will occur at USB 1 1 speed e To use Mac OS X 10 3 you will need to re initialize the AW2400 hard disk and set the hard disk cluster size to 32K gt p 212 2 Make sure the POWER switch on the AW2400 is set to OFF then connect the AW2400 to the computer via a USB cable 3 Turn on the AW2400 No driver installation is necessary for WAV file trans fer If it is the first time you have connected a USB cable on a Windows machine however you may see a message prompting you to install a USB MIDI driver Even if you will not send and receive MIDI messages via the USB cable install the USB MIDI driver as described on page 266 4 Call the USB screen USB page by pressing the SCENE AUTOMIX USB section USB key a ooo TET 101 11 CATAE USE INPUTI A 00 00 00 000 F F AE AE E AE F F VE E GG Lali CONNECT i CONNECT button 5 Move the cursor to the CONNECT button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you whether you want to save the current song CONF IRHAT ION Save Current Sona CANCEL WES e Before turning the USB Storage Mode on make sure that no MIDI data is being transferred via the USB connection with your computer 6 Move the cursor to YES to save the current so
298. el of the signal that is output from the MONITOR OUT jacks 2 PHONES knob This knob adjusts the level of the signal that is output from the PHONES jack 4 SCENE key This key accesses the SCENE screen where you can save or recall scene memories 2 AUTOMIX key This key accesses the AUTOMIX screen which allows control and editing of automix operations 3 USB key The USB keys calls up the USB screen with parameters related to USB operation E Data entry control section JOG ON GC UNDO REDO GC Ce VO we SC E es DATA JOG WE Locate Number section Parts of the AW2400 and what they do O7 INC key Increments increases the selected value by 1 2 DEC key Decrements decreases the selected value by 1 Cursor keys A WT lt a 1 keys These keys move the cursor the blinking frame around the screen to select a specific item 4 JOG ON key This key is an on off switch for the Nudge function which uses the DATA JOG dial When this function is on the key will light 5 UNDO REDO key This key cancels the results of a recording or track editing operation Undo or re executes a cancelled operation Redo ES e This key will light if Undo is possible e If you press and hold this key the UNDO LIST screen will appear Here you can turn the DATA JOG dial to revert to as many as the last fifteen operations gt p 64 6 ENTER key
299. el that will be used to transmit and receive MIDI messages such as program changes and con trol changes This area contains the following two items es IX Selects the transmit MIDI channel in a range of 1 16 e RX Selects the receive MIDI channel in a range of 1 16 AW2400 Owner s Manual 3 PROGRAM CHANGE field Turns program change transmission and reception on or off When program change reception is on the corre sponding scene will be recalled when a program change message is received via the AW2400 MIDI IN connector or USB connector or digital I O card input port When program change transmission is on when a scene is recalled on the AW2400 the corresponding program change message is transmitted via the MIDI OUT THRU connector or USB connector or digital I O card output port The following items are available e ON OFF button TX Turns program change trans mission on or off e ECHO button TX Received program change messages are re transmitted echoed via the MIDI OUT THRU connector or USB con nector or digital I O card out put port e ON OFF button RX Turns program change recep tion on or off e OMNI button RX Program change messages can be received on all MIDI channels regardless of the MIDI receive channel setting e In the SCENE screen PGM Assign page you can specify the scene number that will correspond to each program change num ber
300. en the PLAY key is pressed to begin play back Move the cursor to the metronome knob and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to adjust the metronome level as required 4 To change the tempo or time signature first press the STOP W key to stop the recorder Call the EDIT screen Tempo Map page by either pressing the Work Navigate section EDIT key as many times as neces sary or by pressing the F2 key after pressing the EDIT key The Tempo Map page lets you create a tempo map that specifies the tempo and time signature of the song The tempo and time signature that you specify here will be the basis for the measure beat display counter the internal metronome and the MTC MIDI Time Code transmitted and received by the AW2400 DI Be Heu Sons HPUTI DUU DU Il HH TEMPO MAF METER TEMPO EE S Ho DS 1E 1 EES a STEP MEASURE Tempo Mar E Mark Adi 4 Tempo map events These are the events recorded in the tempo map When you create a new song a tempo map event of time sig nature 4 4 and tempo 120 will be created at the beginning of the song measure 1 beat 1 Move the cursor to the TEMPO field of the event and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to set the tempo value The tempo can be set from 30 to 250 BPM If necessary move the cursor to the METER field and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to change the time signature The time signature can be set
301. en 13 16 page press the Layer section REMOTE key as many times as necessary or press the F2 key after pressing the REMOTE key Operation of the 13 16 page is the same as the 1 12 page a gt e The MIDI Remote function will automatically be on while the REMOTE screen is displayed The channel faders and ON keys will not perform their usual functions but will work as specified by the preset you have selected in the REMOTE screen This page contains the following items a MODE box Selects one of the ten presets Move the cursor to a box and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select the corresponding preset for instantaneous MIDI message assignment The AW2400 provides the following presets e Cubase e Logic Sonar e Protools These presets let you use the AW2400 as a physical con troller for various software sequencers e ON key operations will control mute on off opera tions on the sequencer software e Fader operations will control the volume of the sequencer software tracks You will need to install the appropriate setting file into your sequencer software and make the necessary settings For details refer to the About the CD ROM included with the AW2400 gt p 266 Volume Rec TR Use this preset to control the volume of an external tone generator or the record tracks of an external recorder e ON key operations will transmit MMC commands to select recording tra
302. en you press the PLAY B gt key while the AUTO PUNCH key is lit the following will occur G The PLAY P key will light and playback will begin from the pre roll point 2 When you reach the auto punch in point the REC key will begin blinking and the signal that you are monitoring from the recording destination track channel will switch from the track playback to the input signal recording source However recording will not actually occur 3 When you reach the auto punch out point the REC key will go dark and the signal that you are monitoring from the recording destination track channel will return to the track playback 4 When you reach a point that is a specific distance the post roll time after the Out point this point is called the post roll point you will return to the pre roll point and stop e If you turn the Locate section REPEAT key on before step 7 operations 1 4 of step 7 will be repeated up to fifteen times The A B Repeat function is disabled during this time If you want to stop repeating the rehearsal press the REPEAT key once again or press the STOP Mi key With the initial settings of the AW2400 the pre roll and post roll times are each set to four seconds You can adjust these values in a range of 0 20 seconds gt p 210 211 8 To perform the actual auto punch in out stop the recorder then hold down the REC key and press the PLAY P ke
303. ent to Note Off STATUS 1001nnnn 9n Note On Message DATA Onnnnnnn nn Note No Ovvvvvvv vv Velocity 1 127 On 0 Off Effect control by Note 1 Dynamic Flange Dynamic Phase Dynamic Filter When the SOURCE parameter is set to MIDI the note velocity both note on and note off is used to control the Modulation frequency width 5 3 CONTROL CHANGE Bn lt Reception gt If Control Change Rx is On control change messages will be recevied when MIDI Rx Ch matches However if MIDI Rx Ch is OMNI or Control Change Mode is 1 reception will occur regard less of MIDI channel lt Transmission gt If Control Change Tx is On control change messages will be trans mitted on the MIDI Tx Ch channel when you operate a parameter STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control Change DATA Ocececec cc Control No 0 95 102 119 Ovvvvvvv vv Control Value 0 127 The control value is converted into a parameter value according to the following equation S total number of steps in the parameter s variable range 128 S X remainder Y INT Y 1 2 Z If MIDI DATA Z lt 0 then Value 0 If MIDI DATA Z X gt MAX then Value MAX Otherwise Value INT MIDI DATA Z X es O Q Q Q lt AW2400 Owner s Manual 273 gt xe Eo D D Si x 274 MIDI data format 5 4 PROGRAM CHANGE Cn lt Reception gt If Program Change Rx is On program change messages will be received when MIDI Rx Ch match
304. er s Manual Filter 3 resonance Effects Parameters E GATE This is a 2 in 2 out gate that attenuates signals below the specified threshold level Parameter Description GATE ON ON OFF Turns the gate function on or off THRESH 54 to 0 dB Sets the threshold level at which the gate begins to affect the input signal RANGE 70 to 0 dB Sets the level when the gate is closed ATTACK 0 120 ms Sets the time it take for the gate to actually open after the threshold level is exceeded DECAY HOLD Kb Sets the time it takes for the gate to close completely after it begins closing Sets the time it takes for the gate to begin closing after the signal drops below the threshold level 1 646 0 s fs 44 1kHz 5 42 3 s fs 48kHz 2 0 02 2 13 s fs 44 1kHz 0 02 1 96 s fs 48kHz E M BAND DYNA Two input two output 3 band dynamics processor with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band Parameter Description LOW GAIN 96 0 to 12 0 dB Low band level MID GAIN 96 0 to 12 0 dB Mid band level HI GAIN 96 0 to 12 0 dB High band level PRESENCE 10 to 10 For positive values the threshold of the high band is lowered and the threshold of the low band is increased For negative values the opposite will occur When set to 0 all three bands are affected the same CMP THRE 24 0 to 0 0 dB Compressor threshold
305. er selecting a channel in the channel box press the ENTER key to confirm the selection e AUX button Selects the signal from the AUX send specified in the box below the button AUX1 AUX4 After select ing an AUX send in the box press the ENTER key to confirm the selection 4 Response curve This graph indicates the approximate response of the gate settings The horizontal axis of the graph is the input level and the vertical axis is the output level 5 TYPE Indicates the currently selected gate type The dis played indication has the following meaning ES e You cannot change the gate type via this page If you want to use a different gate type you must recall a library setting that uses the desired type For details on recalling library gate set tings refer to EQ Dynamics Processor Library Operation on page 154 6 GR Gain Reduction Indicates the amount of gain reduction produced by the gate processor over a range of 18 dB to 0 dB 7 Output meter Indicates the level of the signal after it has passed through the gate processor PARAMETER Here you can edit the parameters of the gate processor The type of parameters and their ranges will differ depending on the gate type For details on the types of parameter and their function refer to the appendix Pan EQ and Dynamics Processing M On AW2400 Owner s Manual 151 Dynamics Processing Buisse00j4 solueuAq pue OJ
306. erations This chapter explains mixdown operations in which you mix previously recorded tracks and record the result on the stereo track This chapter also explains how bouncing ping pong recording in which you combine multiple tracks into one to four tracks About mixdown and bouncing Mixdown is the process by which the signals recorded on the recorder tracks are mixed to ste reo and recorded on the internal stereo track to complete the song The contents of the stereo track can be used without further processing as material to create an audio CD The diagram below shows the signal flow during mix down The playback of each track is sent to the stereo bus passes through the stereo output channel and is recorded on the stereo track At this time you can also add the sig nals from input channels Signal flow during mixdown PHONES Recorder section Track 1 MONITOR OUT D Track 2 Track2 Effect Track Track 4 Send BAL 4dB Ss UTA Mixdown and bounce operations Ee STEREO OUT BAL 4dB EE EE H H MIC LINE jacks Effect return channels Stereo output channel Input channels Track channels 1 E 8 a 8 a SE 1 2 3 4 15 13 13 14 15 16 1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 RTN 4 1 9 2 10 3 11 BUS 1 BUS 2 AUX 4 EFEECT 4 BUS 1 BUS 2 iii ii A E ee Stereo bus Mixer section AW2400 Owner s Manual 73 About mixd
307. es However if MIDI Rx Ch is OMNI this message is received regardless of the channel A scene memory will be recalled according to the PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE settings lt Transmission gt If Program Change Tx is On a program change will be transmitted on the MIDI Tx Ch according to the PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE settings when you recall a memory If the recalled memory number has been assigned to more than one program number the lowest numbered program number will be transmitted STATUS 1100nnnn Cn Program Change DATA Onnnnnnn nn Program No 0 127 5 5 MIDI TIME CODE QUARTER FRAME F1 lt Transmission gt If SYNC OUT is set to MTC Quarter Frame messages will be transmitted according to the time code movements of the recorder when the recorder is playing or recording lt Reception gt This message is received if MTC SYNC MODE is set to SLAVE Quarter Frame messages received in realtime are internally assem bled into time code that controls the recorder STATUS 11110001 F1 Quarter Frame Message DATA Onnndddd dd nnn message type 0 7 dddd data 5 6 SONG POSITION POINTER F2 lt Transmission gt If SYNC OUT is MIDI CLOCK a song position message will be transmitted when STOP or LOCATE is performed on the recorder to indicate the song position from which the song should start at the next START or CONTINUE message STATUS 11110010 F2 Song Position Pointer DATA Oddddddd_ ddo data H high 7 bits
308. ess the ENTER key The NAME EDIT popup window will appear allow ing you to enter a name for the song MANE EDIT a Heu Gong PRESS OK TO EXECUTE CANCEL SE LES E LEE L EE LES LEE EIST EEE Gu ES ASE E E EIS E EE EE A EE t go EA LEE AE LASE 15 at E OMAE 6 Assign a name to the song for details on assigning a name gt p 32 NOTE e A new song cannot be given the same name as an existing song 7 To create the new song move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key A new song will be created and you will return to the SONG screen Song List page ES e If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button instead of the OK button and press the ENTER key you will return to the SONG screen Song List page without creating a new song e You may also edit the song name later Managing Your Songs E Editing the song name Here s how to edit the song name that is assigned when you create a new song e This setting applies only to the current song Before you perform this procedure load the song for which the name is to be edited Call the Setting page by either pressing the Work Navigate section SONG key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F2 key after pressing the SONG key The SONG screen Setting page will appear 2 To edit the song name move the cursor to the RENAME button and press the ENTER key The NAME EDIT popup window will appear allow ing
309. essing INPUT SEL key 1 or the SEL key of input channel 1 will make the screen change as follows TT l l ONE ie a g A H sg 44 ko ko ke kel kel ka ka ka ka ko Ir d4 A H L NOTE D e The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as T l mute e Since 24 bit songs can have a maximum of 12 play tracks gt p 165 tracks 13 24 are muted and will not play back e You can switch track muting on off by moving the cursor to the track channel number and pressing the ENTER key e If you re using effects via an effect bus the mixdown will not include the effect sound unless you add the corresponding effect return channel to the stereo bus For details on using effects refer to Applying Effects via Send and Return gt p 117 suo1esado OOUTIOO pue uMmopXIN o e All channels will be turned on by default However in order to obtain the best S N ratio you should turn off any channels that you are not using 4 Raise the STEREO fader to the 0 dB posi tion D While you play back the song raise the track channel faders to an appropriate level 6 Adjust the mix parameters of each channel such as EQ dynamics and pan e You can use the CH VIEW screen View page to view a list of the mix parameters EQ pan effect send etc of a desired channel gt p 105 76 AW2400 Owner s Manual 7 f you want to use the mastering library move the cursor to the L
310. events in a specific channel move the cursor to the SELECTED CH ONLY button and press the ENTER key then select the desired channel 3 Move the cursor to the PARAM field and press the ENTER key to select the type of parameter to be displayed in the event list The available parameter types are as follows Display Parameter SCENE LIB Scene library recall FADER Fader operation ON ON key operation PAN Pan operation AUX EFF AUX EFF ON AUX effect on off EQ ON EQ on off EQ FREQ EQ Q EQ bandwidth EQ GAIN EQ gain AUX effect send operation EQ center frequency 4 Use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select the type of parameter to be displayed in the list then press the ENTER key The specified events will appear in the event list D Move the cursor to the E icon to the left of the list and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to scroll through the event list and select the event to be edited The event enclosed by a dotted frame is currently selected for editing ES e The cursor can be quickly moved to the E icon by pressing the F1 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key e When the cursor is inside the event list the cursor keys can also be used to scroll up and down the event list Items that can be edited in the event list are as follows 1 1 1 1 1 zk b sc zs ss Editing Individual Automix Events TIME Sp
311. ey once again muting will be defeated and the MUTE symbol will change to 66 O Se ES e This mute function switches muting on or off for the recorder track playback This also affects the number of simultaneous playback tracks in the recorder section gt p 128 It s a good idea to mute all unused tracks e Since 24 bit songs allow a maximum of 12 playback tracks mute cannot be disengaged for tracks 13 24 e In some cases depending on the number of tracks that are in record ready mode you won t be able to un mute a track In this case decrease the number of tracks that are in record ready mode and then un mute the desired track 2 Use the cursor keys to select the virtual Audio track operations Switching the virtual track of an audio track Call the TRACK screen Virtual TR page by either pressing the Work Navigate section TRACK key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F2 key after pressing the TRACK key This page contains the following items TRACK 00 00 00 000 cc 1 5cenek TRACK 1 600 DU DUU 000 101 11 CEAAHECME VIRTUAL TRACE LU TRACE e UC er WTR 123453678 Virtual tracks Indicates the status of virtual tracks 1 8 The virtual track that is currently selected for each track is indi cated by a symbol Of the virtual tracks that are currently not selected those that have been recorded are indicated by O and those that have not yet been 66 39
312. f setting of each channel will alternate e The mute group assignments in the Mute Grp page can be copied to the Fader Grp page by holding down the Display section SHIFT key and pressing the F4 key AW2400 Owner s Manual Mixdown and bounce operations Ee 83 Convenient functions for mixdown bounce Using the Solo function Solo is a function that lets you monitor only a specific channel The AW2400 provides a versatile Solo function that lets you make Solo settings that are best for your situ ation Call the MONITOR screen Solo page by either pressing the Quick Navigate section MONITOR key as many times as neces sary or by pressing the F4 key after pressing the MONITOR key This page contains the following items 128 87 B Initial Ss 111 11 GERRI a Se6_New_sons E 00 00 00 000 SOLO SETTING SOLO MODE LAST SOLO RECORDING SOLO JS SS SS S MIXDOWM SOLO ww Bape Lo 2 iE 2 E 9 5 te re paaa en DIISBZISIS Rz III mm SR Tat Atoier Gre i Mute SC A ES 4 SEL MODE field This selects how you will select the signal s to be monitored when the Solo function is on 2 SOLO MODE field This selects the mode in which the Solo function will operate 3 SOLO SAFE CHANNEL field Here you can select channels that will be excluded from the Solo function if MIXDOWN SOLO mode is selected in the SOLO MODE field suoljesado Junoq pue UMOPXI o 2 In the SEL MO
313. f the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave and the device number matches or is 7F If the transport is stopped then recording will begin If the transport is playing then punch in will occur STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive Device ID Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Command mcc sub id 00000110 06 Record strobe EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 5 13 1 7 MMC RECORD EXIT lt Reception gt This message is received if the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave and the device number matches or is 7F If the transport is recording then punch out will occur STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive Device ID Oddddddd dd _ Destination 00 7E 7F all call Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Command mcc sub id 00000111 07 Record Exit EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive MIDI data format 5 13 1 8 MMC RESET lt Transmission gt This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when song loading is finished lt Reception gt This message is received if the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave and the device number matches or is 7F MMC related internal settings will be reset to the power on state STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive Device ID Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call Command 00000110 06 Machi
314. f time it will take for the faders to return to the previously recorded lev els after Automix recording has been punched out The RETURN TIME range is OFF 0 0 30 0 seconds Both song playback and Automix playback will stop Automix playback will stop automatically if song playback is continued past the point at which Automix recording was stopped song playback will continue Return Time OWERWA ITE D ffrdftfrchd AUS EFFECT SENDO ON Return Time Operation No return time OT setting Original data P Return time Original data Sech Zoch SE a Set ie Ae SE Automix A O Punch in Punch out Punch in Punch out AW2400 Owner s Manual 185 6 Move the cursor to the MODE field and turn the REC button on The REC button will flash This engages the Automix record standby mode and the AUTOMIX key will flash red e The AUTOREC button can be turned on rather than the REC button to engage the Automix record standby mode 7 Use the Layer section keys to select the mixing layer that includes the channels you want to operate 8 Press the top panel PLAY gt key to start song playback The AUTOMIX key will light red and Automix recording will begin But at this point no channel has been selected so no data recording will actually take place O When the punch in point is reached use the INPUT SEL SEL or STEREO SEL keys to select the channel for which Automix data is to be recorde
315. f tracks that are enabled for recording there may be cases in which some tracks cannot be unmuted If so tracks will be muted consecutively starting with the last numbered track SAFE button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key all input channel and track channel assignments will be cancelled This will also execute the MUTE CLEAR CO operation e Pressing the F1 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the SAFE button 2 Move the cursor to the Input Select area and use the DATA JOG dial or the INC DEC keys to select an input that you want to patch to an input channel 3 Move the cursor to the symbol for the desired recording source input channel and press the ENTER key The symbol will be highlighted and the corresponding input channel will be connected to bus 1 4 Press the ENTER key repeatedly at the same cursor location as in step 3 to select the send destination for the signal of that input channel Each time you press the ENTER key the screen will change as follows 4 Off AD 5 Bus 2 L R o On ON 2 ae Bus TUR i si E fw Bus al LS Ke SS EE On EE l l EA Sc Bus L 4 Se Ce Bus OR P i SC On d E On a Ee l l a DIS Bus 1 R See Ze To D dE On 1239465 ES e You can also perform steps 3 4 by repeatedly pressing the INPUT SEL key or the input channel s SEL key e
316. for the current track are shown below this field 2 MUTE button You can move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to switch muting on off for the currently selected track 3 RENAME button You can move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to access the NAME EDIT popup window where you can edit the name of the currently selected track 4 WAVE button If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the waveform of the currently selected track will be displayed For details refer to Finding a location while viewing the waveform gt p 95 REMAIN This indicates the remaining recordable time 6 Metronome button knob Here you can switch the metronome on off and adjust the volume The volume can be adjusted in a range of 96 to 12 dB For details refer to Using the Metronome gt p 62 7 MUTE indicator If a track is muted its MUTE indicator changes to 9 Track View This area shows whether tracks 1 24 contain data and indicates the marker locations Muting a specific audio track 1 Call the TRACK screen View page 2 Move the cursor to the TRACK field and use the DATA JOG dial or the INC DEC keys to select the number of the track you want to mute 3 Move the cursor to the MUTE button and press the ENTER key Muting will be switched on off If a track is muted the MUTE symbol changes to 9 When you press the ENTER k
317. frame NOTE pe Home Rewind by format value f s End Forward by format value e The content that is shown for MIDI Input and MIDI Output p ae Ge S P S E z eent gt utte Forwar a will depend on the MIDI device s you are using For details S E Sirah Rewind z refer to the owner s manual for the MIDI device s you are G SS CHa using Please note that all the previously specified key com mands will be initialized If you do not want to change your existing user key command settings you can manu ally make the MIDI channel and CC settings shown above 2s O Q Q Q lt AW2400 Owner s Manual f 269 About the CD ROM included with the AW2400 x pu ddy Installing the SONAR template file 1 Copy the SONAR template file from the included CD ROM to the folder in which SONAR is installed 2 Start up SONAR GN In the menu bar select File menu Open 4 The Open file dialog box will appear Choose Cakewalk template files as the type of file to be loaded From the list in the dialog box choose Yamaha AW2400 Remote and click the OK button D In the menu bar select Option gt MIDI Devices 6 The MIDI Ports window will open In the Input Ports field assign the MIDI device that you are using If you changed the track structure from the default settings of the template With the Yamaha AW2400 Remote template started click the CONFIG button
318. g 6 OPTIMIZE button Optimizes a song 7 MIXER IMP button Imports data from another song DELETE button Deletes a song SHUTDOWN button This function is used when turning the AW2400 power off Refer to page 38 for detailed shutdown instructions AW2400 Owner s Manual Song management A ee 167 Managing Your Songs 0 a 12 43 SOMG NAME Fa Hew Sona MW Mew Sora FREE 35 18 GB Song Name a1 Song Size 2 Song Bit Depth Sampling Frequency 3 Song Protect Status SORT box Changes the order of songs displayed in the Song List 5 The currently selected song E Creating a new song In order to begin recording on the AW2400 you must first create a new song 1 Call the Song List page by either pressing the Work Navigate section SONG key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the SONG key The SONG screen Song List page will appear The currently selected song in the Song List will be high lighted inverted 2 Move the cursor to the NEW button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you whether you want to save the current song CONF IRHAT OH Save Current Sona CANCEL VES e Pressing the F3 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the NEW button juswebeuew Duoe Wee 168 AW2400 Owner s Manual 3 Move the cursor to YES to save the current song or NO if
319. ge 142 IMPORT CD WAY visccscncecontcncecanetdbedesontiteedenetsecasees 142 IMPORT USB WAN 142 IMPORT Eegeregie 142 Eege 142 MERE pease sete cece cats naceneaceceeacccae desatenvessucentecce 142 Importing audio data WAV files ccccccceccceteeeeeeees 143 Importing from the CD RW drive 143 Importing audio data from another song 145 16 Pan EQ and Dynamics Processing 147 Pan COMMON ses zeceoeeceesutenctecedecoutetencmbanceoutineGanaseseeeces 147 ele E 149 Dynamics Processing isacissncncsnesasicenncnnncienssinasosdonsnence 151 Deier 151 Using the Compressorg 152 EQ Dynamics Processor Library Operation 154 Accessing the EQ Dynamics Library screens 154 Changing EQ Dynamics Library Names 156 Recalling EQ Dynamics Library settings 156 Storing EQ Dynamics Library seitmgs 17 Erasing EQ Dynamics Library settings 157 17 Scene Memory 159 About Scene Memory 00ccecccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 159 Scene Memory Operation 159 K iler 160 Recalling scene data 160 String Scene Gale scssi 161 Deleting scene data 161 Protecting a scene 161 Using the Recall Safe funchon 162 Viiekiilg tee 163 AW2400 Owner s Manual 9 10 18 Song management 165 EE 165 Managing hd ft e 167 Editing various settings for the song 174 Creating a tempo map 1 75 BACKING UD SONGS sccicccesiccctasivesenscseccesendsossticnesinessnacets 177 Restoring S
320. gn a MIDI message manually be sure to enter END at the end of the message e When you assign a MIDI message to a fader FAD must be entered for one of the bytes If FAD is not entered the fader will not function e If you enter the values manually it is possible that an invalid MIDI message will be entered For this reason you should use the LEARN button to assign MIDI messages whenever possible Remotely controlling a tone generator module Here s how you can use the AW2400 s MIDI Remote function to remotely control a tone generator module 1 Connect the AW2400 to your tone generator module as shown in the following diagram AW2400 Serr aa MIDI messages elelelelele eo ololololololo Tone generator MIDI OUT MIDI module 2 Use the Layer section REMOTE key to call the REMOTE screen 1 12 page or 13 16 page This enables the Remote function ES e While the REMOTE screen is displayed the functions of the faders and ON keys will be disabled the faders and keys will function as controllers that transmit MIDI messages e When the MIDI Remote function is enabled the MIDI messages are transmitted via the connector port selected in the MIDI screen Setting 1 page REMOTE OUT box Q AW2400 Owner s Manual 207 Using the MIDI Remote function 3 Select the preset you want to use in the MODE box and press the ENTER key For exam
321. gned to the faders and ON fa gt P Ke fa K e Sa a o keys can be freely reassigned You can assign the follow ing types of message o E Messages that can be assigned to faders A MIDI message whose value Control change Using the MIDI Remote function changes over a range of 0 127 can number 7 be assigned to each fader For transmit presets example if you assign control change 7 volume to a fader you Value 127 The REMOTE screen 1 12 page and 13 16 page provide PE EE EH A 14 different MIDI Remote presets ten factory presets and four user presets These presets have been created with ume of a MIDI tone generator specific devices and computer sequencer programs in mind and assign the necessary messages to the AW2400 s faders and ON keys You can use the MIDI Remote func tion immediately just by selecting a preset in this page e and connecting the appropriate external MIDI device Value 0 Sequencer programs that are supported E Messages that can be Windows Macintosh H e Cubase SX 3 0 1 e Cubase SX 3 0 1 assigned to the ON keys J y e Logic Platinum 5 5 1 e Logic Pro 7 0 1 A a SSC waose value crac ata G d Nuendo 3 0 4 a Nuendo s ee ee GE ee e Sonar 4 0 1 Producer e Protools TDM 6 7 2 example if you assign control change 64 hold to an Editor ON key and specify that the control change value alter nates between 0 and 127 pressing the ON key to turn it on indicator lit
322. gs e If you want to reset the scene assignments to the initial set ting move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button and press the ENTER key AW2400 Owner s Manual 201 Connecting to External Equipment E lransmit program changes to switch scenes 1 Connect the AW2400 and your sequencer as shown in the diagram below Workstation synthesizer with a built in sequencer C AW2400 Program changes van pm 2 1 I El o E Le g YAMAHA Computer based sequencer application IEEE1394 cable 2 Use the Work Navigate section MIDI key to access the MIDI screen Setting 1 page 3 Set the connector port and channel to be used for program change message recep tion in the RX PORT and CHANNEL fields 4 Turn the PROGRAM CHANGE RX field ON OFF button on If you want to receive program change messages on all channels regardless of the MIDI receive channel set ting also turn the OMNI RX button on This sets up the AW2400 to receive MIDI program change messages 5 Transmit a program change message from your sequencer to the AW2400 on the MIDI channel that you selected The scene assigned to that program change number will be recalled e If you insert program changes into the appropriate locations of your sequencer track scenes will be recalled automatically as the AW2400 and your sequencer run in synchronization 202 AW2400 Owner s Manu
323. h is detected allowing faster response The longer the set ting the more slowly the pitch is detected which can result in abrupt step like pitch changes e RATE knob This determines the speed of pitch change The faster the set ting the more quickly the pitch is changed so that pitch correction more accurately tracks the origi nal signal When this is set to O00 there is no pitch change Effects ow PITCH knob This determines the octave set ting of the pitch adjusted signal The range is from 2 to 2 octaves in semitone steps The integer and fraction segments of the value are set separately FORMANT knob This determines the vocal char acter timbre of the pitch adjusted signal Positive val ues result in a higher voice char acter and negative values result in a deeper voice charac ter AW2400 Owner s Manual 125 Correcting a Vocal Track Pitch Fix 5 FIX NOTE field These parameters are only available when PANEL is selected in the CONTROL field if Cee ne nee Sets the key of the graphic key board on the display e SCALE Sets the scale of the graphic keyboard on the display CHROMATIC MAJOR MINOR or CUSTOM When CUSTOM is selected the keyboard s buttons can be used to directly specify a scale for pitch correction 6 MASTER TUNING field e IN OUT knob The IN knob sets the reference pitch before correction and the O
324. hange messages are only received and transmitted via one MIDI channel but the parameter map ping differs from 2 e For details on the mix parameters that correspond to each control change message refer to the tables that follow When CONTROL CHANGE MODE 1 MIDIG 7 7 FADER 10 PAN TRACK CHANNEL 1 SSES 7 TRACK CHANNEL 9 See EFF2 SEND 93 EFF2 SEND FADER 7 FADER PAN 10 PAN TRACK CHANNEL 2 eee Ae g7 TRACK CHANNEL 10 ae cap EFF2 SEND 93 EFF2 SEND FADER 7 FADER PAN 10 PAN TRACK CHANNEL 11 TRACK CHANNEL 3 a F Sab EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND 93 EFF2 SEND FADER 7 FADER PAN 10 PAN TRACK CHANNEL 4 EFF1 SEND en TRACK CHANNEL 12 EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND 93 EFF2 SEND FADER 7 FADER PAN 10 PAN TRACK CHANNEL 5 EEN Se TRACK CHANNEL 13 aE EEN EFF2 SEND 93 EFF2 SEND FADER 7 FADER PAN 10 PAN TRACK CHANNEL 14 TRACK CHANNEL 6 SE a CKC E EFF2 SEND 93 EFF2 SEND FADER 7 FADER PAN 10 PAN TRACK CHANNEL 7 eee cee a TRACK CHANNEL 15 ETE EFF2 SEND 93 EFF2 SEND FADER 7 FADER PAN 10 PAN TRACK CHANNEL 8 Been Ene Se TRACK CHANNEL 16 EE EFF2 SEND 93 EFF2 SEND Q AW2400 Owner s Manual 195 Basic MIDI Settings When CONTROL CHANGE MODE 2 PARAMETER NO ASS
325. hannel e The channels to be selected by SEL keys 1 12 are switched via the LAYER section AW2400 Owner s Manual 33 Basic operation of the AW2400 2 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section DYN AUX EFFECT or PAN EQ key so that its indicator light according to the parameters you want to control 2 Selected Key Lit DYN OOPZMV 9y Bulonpodju Multiple compressor parame ters or the last parameter operated depending on the control status With the default settings the screen corresponding to the pressed key will appear automatically The display will not change if the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DISPLAY button is set to OFF gt p 211 The parameters that can be controlled by the SELECTED CHANNEL knobs are as follows Compressor threshold Compressor ratio Compressor gain AUX Send level from channel to AUX 1 Send level from channel to AUX 2 Send level from channel to AUX 3 Send level from channel to AUX 4 EFFECT Send level from channel to EFFECT 1 Send level from channel to EFFECT 2 Send level from channel to EFFECT 3 Send level from channel to EFFECT 4 Equalizer gain Pan PAN EQ Equalizer Q Equalizer frequency e After selecting a channel press the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW key to call the CH VIEW screen where you can edit the channel signal routing and all of the channel parameters Refer to p
326. hat has significant instability e If the accuracy of the incoming MTC becomes unstable when the AW2400 is functioning as an MTC slave and is synchronized to an external MIDI device the AW2400 will make slight adjustments in playback pitch in an attempt to maintain synchronization The SYNC AVERAGE parameter specifies the range of MTC variance that will be tolerated MIDI Synchronization Message Setup OFFSET When using the AW2400 as an MTC slave this parameter shifts the absolute time of the AW2400 forward or back ward relative to the incoming MTC The range is 24 00 00 00 00 to 24 00 00 00 00 OFFSET 00 00 00 00 00 Incoming time code 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 15 00 00 00 00 20 00 00 Time code 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 15 00 00 00 00 20 00 00 display ABS l Song A D OO OO 800000 OFFSET 00 00 05 00 00 Incoming time 99 99 10 00 00 100 00 15 00 00 code 00 00 20 00 00 Time code 100 00 15 00 00 00 00 20 00 00 00 00 25 00 00 display ABS Song 20 O OO OD Oo OO OD OFFSET 00 00 05 00 00 Incoming time 99 99 10 00 00 00 00 15 00 00 00 00 20 00 00 code i l 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 15 00 00 00 00 05 00 00 display ABS Song eege Time code e The OFFSET setting has no effect on MTC output via the MIDI OUT THRU connector or USB connector or digital I O card output port a1 SYNC OUT field Selects the type of MIDI message to be used for synchro nization e
327. he F1 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the INITIALIZE button 2 Channel Pair Indicator Indicates whether the displayed channel is part of a pair or not You can also move the cursor to this indicator and press the ENTER key to turn pairing on or off 3 PHASE button GATE button e PHASE button Switches the phase polarity of the input signal Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to switch between normal N NOR MAL and reverse R REVERSE polarity e GATE button input channels only eege Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to turn the gate for that channel on or off Refer to Using the Gates on page 151 for details 4 ATT button EQ button e ATT button Move the cursor to this knob and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to adjust the attenuation as required range 96 12dB This capability can be used to atten uate the pre EQ signal level to pre vent clipping in the EQ stage e EQ button Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to turn the EQ for that channel on or off Refer to 4 band EQ on page 149 for details 5 COMP Move the cursor to the symbol below COMP and press the ENTER key to turn the compressor for that channel on or off or select the compressor insert point Press the ENTER key repeatedly to sequentially select the following insert p
328. he right Pressing the INC key has the same effect as the INS button NOTE e To add characters to a name that has less than the maximum number of characters move the cursor to the INS button and press the ENTER key to insert _ then change the name as required AW2400 Owner s Manual 7 DEL button Deletes the character at the inverted edit position All characters following the delete are moved to the left Pressing the DEC key has the same effect as the DEL button Text palette This displays the characters numbers and symbols that can be input in the text input box To enter a new character at the inverted edit position move the cursor to the desired character in the text palette and press the ENTER key The available characters and symbols are as follows A Z a z SPC space amp lt gt 9 Number Palette Selects the number to be entered in the text entry box To enter a number at the inverted edit position move the cur sor to the desired number in the palette and press the ENTER key By repeatedly pressing the ENTER key you can sequen tially select and enter the characters displayed for each number button For example if you move the cursor to 1 in the number palette and then repeatedly press the ENTER key you will sequentially select the following number characters for entry 1 gt P gt Q gt R S gt p gt q gt r gt s gt l and then the cycle repeats
329. he AW2400 and the external MIDI device must be set to the same MMC device number e When transmitting MMC data from the AW2400 the MMC device number is always set to 128 allowing control of all MMC com patible devices MTC field Specifies how the AW2400 operates when synchronized with an external MIDI device using MTC MIDI Time Code 7 MTC MASTER button When this button is on the AW2400 functions as MTC master Turn this button on when you want external equip ment to synchronize to the AW2400 MTC SLAVE button When this button is turned on the AW2400 functions as MTC slave and will follow MTC received via the MIDI IN connector or USB connector or digital I O card input port Turn this button on when you want to synchronize two AW2400 units or synchronize the AW2400 to an external device that can only function in MTC master mode 9 SYNC AVERAGE box Select one of the following to specify how closely the AW 2400 will follow the incoming MTC data when func tioning as an MTC slave 0 siden The AW2400 will synchronize to the incoming MTC data with the highest precision If the incoming MTC has significant instability syn chronization may be interrupted or become unreliable with this setting Verio This setting provides more tolerance to MTC instability than the OFF setting L ger cia This setting allows the maximum tolerance Use this setting if the MTC master is an exter nal MIDI device t
330. he OK button and press the ENTER key The NAME EDIT popup window will appear allow ing you to enter a name for the song MANE EDIT a Heu Gong PRESS Ok TO EXECUTE SE ES EF LEE LE LES LEE EIST EEE tu ES ASE E E EIS EE EE EE A EE t OE E AE EA EE E LASE 15E at O OMAE AW2400 Owner s Manual 6 Enter a name for the song for details on name entry refer to page 32 e A new song cannot be given the same name as an existing song e The song name can also be edited later gt p 169 7 To create the new song move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key A new song will be created and you will return to the SONG screen Song List page If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button instead of the OK button and press the ENTER key you will return to the SONG screen Song List page without creating a new song Direct recording and Mixed recording Direct recording and Mixed recording Instruments and or microphones connected to the AW2400 can be recorded to tracks in one of the following two ways E Direct recording With this method only one input channel is assigned to each recorder track Although direct recording requires the same number of tracks as the number of input channels you use it has the advantage that you will be free to adjust the volume pan stereo posi tion and EQ of each individual instrument after it has been recorded v a EI S Tam oH ED
331. he SONG screen Restore page by either pressing the Work Navigate section SONG key as many times as necessary 3 Make sure that the cursor is located at the READ CD INFO button and press the ENTER key Loading from the CD ROM will begin When loading is finished the contents of the display will change as follows NN Du Neu Zopz RE o Initial DG TRAcK1 100 D0 De 118 dE SOHG RESTORE SIZE BIT FS tm ALL SET ALL CLEAR SYSTEM o Tbe Oplo pne SoOSMB 16 44 1 RESTORE Restore 4 Move the cursor to the list and press the ENTER key The symbol at the left of the list will change to 268 AW2400 Owner s Manual backup all data on the internal hard disk to a computer before exe D Move the cursor to the RESTORE button and press the ENTER key 6 A popup window will ask you for confirma tion so move the cursor to the OK button or CANCEL button and press the ENTER key While the Restore operation is being executed the state of progress will be shown in a popup window When this popup window closes the operation has been completed installing a remote file E Supported DAW software e Windows e Logic Platinum 5 5 1 1 e Cubase SX 3 0 1 e Nuendo 3 0 1 e Sonar 4 0 1 Producer Edition e Macintosh e Logic Pro 7 0 1 1 e Cubase SX 3 0 1 e Nuendo 3 0 1 e Protools TDM 6 7 2 1 Use the setting file from the included CD ROM to map the AW2400 s faders ON keys transport keys to the
332. he Start field and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys The Start End parameters are displayed at the right of the TR field Start parameter beginning of the region to be edited End parameter end of the region to be edited Basic procedure for track editing You can set the Start End parameters in terms of the counter display format the value at the left or in units of measures beats the value at the right Move the cur sor to the digit that you want to change and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to set the value NOTE e If you selected the sound clip as the object for editing the region from the start point of the sound clip to its end point will always be the object of editing If necessary you should spec ify the start point and end point of the sound clip beforehand 6 To specify the end of the region to be edited move the cursor to the desired digit of the End field and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys ES e If you move the cursor to the Start or End parameter and press the ENTER key the current counter location will be input Alternatively you can recall a locate point or marker to move to that location in the song and then press the ENTER key to input that location as the value of the Start or End parameter NOTE P e For some commands you will also need to specify a location in the editing destination track In the same way as described above move the
333. he internal setting is being received DIGITAL ST IN REC PROHIBIT Recording of digital input signals is prohibited DISK BUSY The reading speed of the internal hard disk is not fast enough or the reading speed has slowed down because the recorded data has become fragmented DISK FULL There is insufficient space on the internal hard disk Auto punch recording cannot be performed because in out points are not speci fied IN OUT POINTS REVERSE ORDER In out points are set in wrong order The auto punch in out interval is too short It cannot be set less than approxi mately 100 msec IN OUT POINTS NOT FOUND IN OUT POINTS TOO CLOSE LOCATE POINT ERASED The locate point has been erased LOCATE POINT SET The locate point has been set MARK POINT ERASED The marker has been erased MARK POINT SET The marker has been set MIDI IN DATA FRAMING ERROR Invalid MIDI data may have been received MIDI IN DATA OVERRUN Invalid MIDI data may have been received MIDI RX BUFFER FULL Receiving more MIDI data than it can handle MIDI TX BUFFER FULL Attempting to transmit more MIDI data than it can handle MTC SLAVE MODE NOW Since the AW2400 is in MTC Slave mode this operation cannot be executed NO DATA TO COPY There is no data to be copied NO MARK LEFT The allowable number of marks has been exceeded NOTHING TO UNDO Not data available for undo RECORD TRACK NOT SEL
334. he locate points so that you can find these locations quickly The AW2400 lets you set up to ninety nine markers 1 99 By using the keys Locate section you can move instantly to the previous or next marker Mixer section E Channels A signal path that processes a single signal within the mixer and sends it to various sections is called a chan nel The mixer section of the AW2400 provides the following channels Input channels 1 16 Input channels provide level control EQ and dynamics processing for signals that are input via the MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 the DIGITAL STEREO IN connec tor and or an I O card installed in the rear panel slot and send them to the recorder tracks or to the STEREO OUT jacks Track channels 1 24 These channels provide level adjustment EQ and dynam ics processing for the audio playback signals from audio tracks 1 24 of the recorder and send the signals to the ste reo track and the STEREO OUT jacks You can also per form bounce recording by sending these channels to different tracks Effect return channels 1 4 These channels send the signals returned from the internal effects to the stereo track and the STEREO OUT jacks Stereo output channel This channel provides level adjustment EQ and dynamics processing for the stereo bus signal which carries the mix of the other channels and sends it to the stereo track or to the STEREO OUT jacks The
335. he virtual track that is currently selected for recording or playback EEN tracks 23 45 6 7 8 eG he ee ee 1 e 2 3 5 4 3 5 6 7 8 Stereo track 1 M 2 Ss 3 SI g 5 6 7 8 Trigger Tracks The Trigger Track function allows the track ON keys and faders to be used to start and stop playback of recorded tracks When the Trigger Track function is active pressing a track channel ON key begins playback of the corresponding track from the beginning of the song to the end of the data recorded on that track AW2400 Owner s Manual Track operations and editing e ni 127 Audio track operations Guipa pue suoneiado yoe s 128 Audio track operations About audio tracks Audio tracks are physical recording areas used to record and play back audio data The AW 2400 lets you use 24 audio tracks In a 16 bit song you can play back up to 24 tracks simultaneously and in a 24 bit song you can play back up to 12 tracks simulta neously However the number of tracks that can actually be played back simultaneously is limited by the number of tracks that are currently in record ready mode Please note that putting more tracks in record ready mode will forc ibly mute a corresponding number of playback tracks The following table shows the number of tracks that can be simultaneously recorded played for a 16 bit or 24 bit song Max Simultaneous SE Record Tracks 16 bits Max
336. ial transient of a sound passes through unaffected e Out Gain sets the compander s output signal level e Width is used to determine the distance in decibels between the expander and the compressor With a width of 90 dB the expander is effectively switched off and the compander is simply a compressor limiter With a smaller width 30 dB and a high threshold 0 dB the compander is an expander compressor limiter e Release determines how soon the compander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold E Appendix AW2400 Owner s Manual 241 Dynamics Parameters Be xlpueddy E Gate and Ducking dB Threshold 10dB Output Level Range 70dB dB 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 Input Level dB Threshold 20dB Output Level o o Range 30dB 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 Input Level A gate or noise gate is an audio switch used to mute sig nals below a set threshold level It can be used to suppress background noise and hiss from valve tube amps effects pedals and microphones Ducking is used to automatically reduce the levels of one signal when the level of a source signal exceeds a speci fied threshold It is used for voice over applications where for example level of background music is auto matically reduced allowing an announcer to be heard clearly Gate GAT and Ducking DUK parameters
337. ich you are synchronizing Y96K COULDN T RECALL Scene memory numbers 97 or higher cannot be recalled when using a Y96K card Y96K COULDN T STORE E Popup messages Buffer Underrun Scene memory numbers 97 or higher cannot be stored when using a Y96K card A region is a continuous segment of audio data recorded on one track A buffer underrun error was encountered while writing to the CD Can t Select Current Song The current song cannot be selected for this operation CD Import Prohibited Enable DIGITAL REC Can t import from a CD because DIGITAL REC is prohibited CD or HD Access Error An error was encountered while accessing the internal hard disk or CD RW drive CD RW Drive Not Found A problem occurred with the CD RW drive Change Media Not 1st Media Wrong media order Please insert media number 1 Change Media Different Archive ID The medium contains the wrong backup file Insert the correct medium Change Media Wrong Media Order Please exchange the media The order of media volumes is incorrect Compare Error The data was not written correctly Corrupt File The file is corrupt Data Mismatch Found A data mismatch has been found in the song End of Archive File Not Found The end of the backup file cannot be located End Range Over The operation could not be executed since the end of the song would be later
338. ience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears consult a physician Do not rest your weight on the device or place heavy objects on it and avoid use excessive force on the buttons switches or connectors Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the device or data that is lost or destroyed Always turn the power off when the device is not in use The performance of components with moving contacts such as switches volume controls and connectors deteriorates over time Consult qualified Yamaha service personnel about replacing defective components 5 4 2 2 AW2400 Owner s Manual 5 6 Caution for Laser This product utilizes a laser Use of control adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in haz ardous radiation exposure Do not open covers and do not repair yourself Refer servicing to qualified personnel Laser properties of the Drive Laser Class Class 1 HHS and IEC 825 1 Wavelength for CD 784 nm for DVD 662 nm The label shown below is located on the rear of this product CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1 CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT The label shown below is located on the top of the internal CD RW drive CAUTION CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM ATTENTION CLASSE 3B
339. ill indicate L SHELF and will switch to the shelving type If you turn the Q knob toward the left the Q knob value field will change to a numerical value and will switch to the same boost cut type as the HI MID and LO MID bands If you continue turning the Q knob toward the left the Q knob value field will indicate HPF and the LOW band will function as a high pass filter If HPF is selected you can use the LOW band G knob to switch the high pass filter on off 8 To switch the HIGH band type move the cursor to the HIGH band Q knob and con tinue turning the DATA JOG dial toward the left or right If you continue turning the Q knob toward the right the Q knob value will indicate H SHELE and will switch to the shelving type If you turn the Q knob toward the left the Q knob value field will change to a numerical value and will switch to the same boost cut type as the HI MID and LO MID bands If you continue turning the Q knob toward the left the Q knob value field will indicate PET and the HIGH band will function as a low pass filter If LPF is selected you can use the HIGH band G knob to switch the low pass filter on off ES e EQ settings can also be recalled from the EQ library or your own settings can be saved for later recall See EQ Dynamics Processor Library Operation on page 154 for details e If boost in a particular band results clipping on the meters use the ATT
340. in input level above the threshold results in a 5 dB change in output level For a 5 1 ratio a 10 dB change in input level above the threshold results in a 2 dB change in out put level e Attack controls how soon the signal is compressed once the compressor has been triggered With a fast attack time the signal is compressed almost immediately With a slow attack time the initial transient of a sound passes through unaffected E xlpueddy 240 AW2400 Owner s Manual E Expander dB Output Level 3 Expansion ratio 2 1 Knee knee5 e eae GE py ces ie TE ee ee LR Threshold 10dB 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 Input Level An expander is another form of automatic level control By attenuating the signal below the threshold the expander reduces low level noise and effectively increases the dynamic range of the recorded material Expander EXP parameters Parameter Value Threshold dB 54 to 0 541 points Ratio 1 0 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 0 2 5 3 0 3 5 4 0 5 0 6 0 8 0 10 20 16 points Attack ms 0 to 120 121 points Outgain dB 0 to 18 181 points Knee hard 1 2 3 4 5 6 points Release ms 6 ms to 46 1 sec 160 points e Threshold determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander Signals above the thresh old pass through unaffected Signals at and below the threshold level are atten
341. in the StudioWare panel window A cluster will open at the right Drag the SET MIDI First Track knob to the first track number of the MIDI tracks If you use this template you will not be able to control the tracks correctly from the AW2400 unless the MIDI tracks are continuous from 1 16 If you set the value to an invalid track an unused track the panel knobs buttons or sliders may be shaded If this occurs set the value back to the correct track 270 AW2400 Owner s Manual E Macintosh users NOTE A e In order to use a remote file the corresponding software must be installed e Please be aware that the menu names and screens that appear in the explanation below may differ depending on the software you are using Installing the Cubase Nuendo remote setup file For Cubase Nuendo the procedure is the same as for the Windows version gt p 269 Installing the Logic Pro preference file 1 Start up Logic Pro 2 Inthe menu bar select Logic Pro menu gt Preferences Key Commands 3 The Key Commands window will open In the menu bar select Options Import Key Commands 4 A dialog box will appear Select the Logic preference file Logic Preferences from the included CD ROM and click the Open but ton When you import the file the following settings will be made OO Key Commands E MIDI Remote Show an Command Key MIDI Global Commands Record 0
342. ing desti nations Input signal patching NOTE P e Input channels and tracks are always connected one to one e The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as fj mute but you can still record to muted tracks e Since 24 bit songs can have a maximum of 12 play tracks gt p 165 tracks 13 24 are muted and will not play back D If you want to record multiple instruments or mics simultaneously assign other input channels to other tracks in the same way ES e To cancel a connection you established simply repeat the same operation you did when establishing the connection To change a recording destination track that you ve already connected move the cursor to the recording source and press the ENTER key then move the cursor to a different track and press the ENTER key To change a recording source input channel that you ve already connected move the cursor to the recording destina tion and press the ENTER key then move the cursor to a different input channel and press the ENTER key To cancel all connections move the cursor to the SAFE but ton and press the ENTER key If a recording source input channel and the recording destina tion track are both paired two adjacent odd numbered even numbered channels will be assigned to two adjacent odd numbered even numbered tracks 6 If you want to connect a set of eight input channels and eight tracks in a single opera tion t
343. ings for a song such as selecting the counter display format and time code format NOTE P edited 1 Call the Setting page by either pressing the Work Navigate section SONG key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F2 key after pressing the SONG key The SONG screen Setting page will appear SOG Ba Neu _ sons RE e S He DP INPUT 6 00 00 00 000 dier CURRENT SONG SETTING AAS New Gong 44 1KHz bit 16bi RENAE PROTECT Bech RELAT VE SECONDO TIHE CODE EDIEDI a 2 To change the counter display format move the cursor to the ABS RELATIVE SECOND or TIME CODE button and press the ENTER key In the Setting page use the following buttons to select the display format for the counter that is shown in the center of the top line in the display es ABS absolute time ENEE Displays the current location in hours minutes seconds millisec onds with the absolute time zero location as 0 e RELATIVE relative time D Displays the current location in hours minutes seconds millisec onds with the relative time zero location as 0 e SECOND Displays the current location in hours minutes seconds millisec onds with the Start point as 0 e TIME CODE Displays the current location in time code hours minutes sec onds frames with the Start point as 0 juswebeuew Duoe Wee 174 AW2400 Owners Manual e These settings apply only to the current song Before
344. int Stop at the location that you want to specify as the End point move the cursor to the END button and press the ENTER key The END button will be engaged and the current loca tion will be registered as the End point button and press the ENTER key The CLIP button will be engaged and the specified Start point and End point will be enabled NOTE e The START button END button and CLIP button are disabled while the sound clip is playing e The data region between the specified Start and End points can be copied to an audio track of the Recorder section by using the EDIT screen COPY command gt p 139 4 To exit the SOUND CLIP screen press the Work Navigate section except for PATCH key or Quick Navigate section keys AUTOMIX key USB key REMOTE key or SOUND CLIP key A popup window will ask you for confirmation Move the cursor to the OK button to exit the SOUND CLIP screen or to the CANCEL button to cancel then press the ENTER key You can return to the SOUND CLIP screen by press ing the SOUND CLIP key even after having exited the screen then play back the previously recorded content or record a new performance NOTE P e When you record a new sound clip the previous recorded sound clip will be erased Please be aware that the Undo function cannot be used to recover a deleted sound clip Even if you save the song immediately prior to recording a new sound clip the previous sou
345. io CD You can select one or more songs on the AW2400 hard disk and write the audio data from the stereo track of each song to a CD R RW disc in CD DA format The CD R RW media to which you write this data can be played by a CD RW drive or a conventional CD player in the same way as a Standard audio CD NOTE e Some CD players do not support CD R RW media and may not be able to play back CDs created by the AW2400 In order to create a CD you must first register one or more songs in a track list and then write the virtual track cur rently selected for the stereo track of each song the cur rent track to the CD in the order specified by the track list A maximum of 99 tracks areas on CD media to which audio data can be written individually can be written to one CD R RW disc and each track must be at least four seconds long The maximum length of audio that can be written to a single disc is approximately 74 minutes for 650 MB discs or approximately 80 minutes for 700 MB discs e The total size of audio data that can be written to a single disc is 746 MB approximately 74 minutes for 650 MB discs or 807 MB approximately 80 minutes for 700 MB discs Types of media that you can use with the CD RW drive The AW2400 CD RW drive can use two types of media CD R which lets you record and append data and CD RW which can be erased and rewritten as required These types of media have the following
346. ions do not fall precisely on the measure or beat To Track iy E Parameter list The parameters are the same as for the COPY command However you cannot select CLIP for 1 From TR Also there is no 0 COPY TIMES setting 5 Duupe pue suoneiado yor 140 AW2400 Owners Manual List of editing command EXCHANGE TIME COMP Time Compression Expansion Adjusts the length of the specified region of an audio track without changing the pitch TINE CoM Exchanges data between the specified tracks COMMAND EXCHANGE eee eee D VEER TR 1 PMaTRi TR ITU_UTRS1_1 COMMAND WTR CU Tpp1 1 HE II D HA muunna Dennnnnrd Dennnnnd Pannnnnnnn u If you set Ratio 50 Tac Ls Track From Start From End E Parameter list If you set Ratio 200 Parameter Explanation 1 24 A single audio track pon i SEN SR A pair of adjacent odd numbered even numbered audio tracks ST The stereo track C From TR 1 amp 2 23824 Exchange source virtual track 2 From V TR 1 8 ae Up to eight 3 Name alphanumeric characters l Exchange source virtual track name display only 1 24 A single audio track ToTR ee seek A pair of adjacent odd numbered even numbered audio tracks E Parameter list T Parameter Explanation Exchange destination virtual track S number To V TR 1 8 A single audio track A pair
347. itialize to a state in which EQ and DYN are not applied VITAL MIX Standard mastering effect that enhances the overall loudness creating a mix with extended low and high ranges Use on the two track mix for any type of song SOFT COMP Soft compressor that enhances the overall loudness without greatly changing the original nuances dynamics Ideal for songs in which the mid and low ranges are important HARD AT TACKY Limiter that emphasizes the attacks and produces an overall flattened feel Ideal for songs that emphasize the rhythm SOFT ATTACKY Soft compressor that enhances the overall loudness and emphasizes the attacks without greatly changing the origi nal nuances dynamics Ideal for songs in which the low and mid ranges are important and that emphasize the rhythm LO FI Limiter that produces a lo fi character DARK SOFT Soft limiter that produces the slightly flattened feel characteristic of the 60 s and 70 s Ideal for Beatles type rock of the 60 s and 70 s or more recently for a Vincent Gallo feel DARK HARD Hard limiter that produces a strongly flattened feel characteristic of the 60 s and 70 s Ideal when you want to make the song sound like 60 s or 70 s rock such as the Beatles BRIGHT Compressor that produces a boosted high range LO BOOST Compressor that produces a boosted low range HARD LIMIT Limiter that produces an extremely fla
348. key NOTE D e The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as mute but you can still record to muted tracks e Since 24 bit songs can have a maximum of 12 play tracks gt p 165 tracks 13 24 are muted and will not play back 8 If you want to record more than one instrument or microphone simultaneously assign other input channels to tracks in the same way ES e To cancel a patched connection press the INPUT SEL key so that it lights red then press the SEL key of the track that is selected as the record destination To can cel all connections move the cursor to the SAFE button and press the ENTER key H LA e M I oun HU Ze DU AU Q Raise the STEREO fader to the 0 dB posi tion At this point the track channel faders are set to 20 so no sound will be heard from the monitor system 52 AW2400 Owners Manual 10 Check that the Layer section TRACK 1 12 key is lit then raise the fader of the track selected as the record destination to an appropriate monitor level Normally when recording you don t monitor the input channel signal before it is recorded but rather via the track channel after it has passed through the recorder This lets you monitor the signal that is actually being recorded as well as adjust the volume and tone of the monitor signal without affecting the signal that is being recorded To Adjust Volume Balance Set the fader of the correspon
349. key When protection is turned on the PROTECT button will appear inverted and a lock icon will appear to the right of the Automix name AW2400 Owner s Manual Chanter 20 MIDI This section will describe the basic MIDI settings as well as the various MIDI features and capabilities provided What you can do using MIDI On the AW2400 you can use MIDI to do the following things Synchronize operation with an external e Example recording playing scene selections and device mix parameter operations on a MIDI sequencer You can synchronize an AW2400 song with playback of computer an external device such as a MIDI sequencer by Control changes exchanging synchronization messages such as MTC wm ou Program changes MIDI Time Code or MIDI Clock with the external LO e N device AW2400 Vu connector MIDI OUT lt Control changes Program changes Remote control of AW2400 transport func tions You can transmit MMC MIDI Machine Control mes sages from a MIDI sequencer or other external MIDI device to the AW2400 to remotely control the AW2400 s transport functions Conversely you can also transmit MMC from the AW2400 to an external device for remote EE edel transport control i T aen External MIDI device USB cable e g computer e Example using MTC MMC to synchronize the oper ation of the AW2400 and a MIDI sequencer com IEEE1394 cable
350. key to rewind the song and press the PLAY B key The stereo track will be played back Use the STE REO fader to adjust the monitor level 4 When you are ready to return to normal recording playback of the audio tracks switch the ST TR MODE ON OFF button off Bounce ping pong recording procedure Here s how to bounce ping pong multiple tracks down to one to four tracks 1 2 Lower the STEREO fader to the 2 posi tion Call the RECORD screen Bounce page by either pressing the Quick Navigate section RECORD key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F3 key after pressing the RECORD key In the Bounce page you can select the bounce source tracks and then record them via bus 1 or bus 2 onto one to four tracks BHE Heu _ Song SEET E BOUNCE IC Le Initial R 10101 EES IS RIDO H Ia up pi Ham u RIHI BOA wae I FITCHF Ix i MUTE CLEAR PSAE TERR a PLAY TRACK Selects the bounce source tracks 2 Bus 1 Bus 2 The four horizontal lines indicate the Bus L R and Bus L R signal route This lets you see the on off sta tus of the signals that are sent from the bounce source tracks and see the selected bounce destination track s RETURN Selects the bounce source effect return channels 4 RECORD TRACK Here you can select the bounce destination track s 5 PITCH FIX button Position the cursor at this button and press ENTER to engage the PITCH F
351. l appear and sound will not be output 258 AW2400 Owner s Manual E Input sound is not output e Is the signal from the external device being input e The connection cable from the external device may be broken e Are cables connected to both the MIC LINE INPUT XLR connector and the TRS phone connector e Is the GAIN knob set to an appropriate level e Is the input channel fader raised Is it turned on e The input channel may have been set to DIGITAL IN e When recording is the recording destination track fader which adjusts the monitor level raised If you are recording the sound of that input channel will not be heard during playback E Recorded sound is not output e Has audio data been recorded on the recorder e Is the virtual track set to the track that was recorded e A recorded region shorter than 10 msec will not be played back e Tracks 1 24 will not play back if the AW2400 is in Stereo Track Sound Clip or Audio CD playback mode E Can t play back the STEREO track e Is the ST TR MODE turned on in the TRACK screen Ste reo TR page E Metronome cannot be heard e The metronome sound is normally sent only to the MONI TOR OUT and headphones e The metronome will not sound while the recorder is stopped e In Sound Clip mode the metronome will sound only dur ing recording Can t record something is wrong with the recorded sound E Can t record e Is there sufficient free space on
352. l default settings the signals from MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 are assigned to the corresponding input channels 1 8 You can change these settings as required Refer to Direct recording and Mixed recording on page 49 for details 7 Make sure that the ON key for the channel receiving the microphone or instrument signal is engaged and its indicator is lit then raise the channel fader to the 0dB position If you play the instrument or METER TS play into the microphone you THFUT1 li should see the level meter on ict the display respond accord Dener ingly but you won t hear any poe output from your monitor sys cee tem yet because the STE REECH REO fader is still all the way 1 2 3 down AW2400 Owner s Manual e If the level meter goes into the OVER region check that the corresponding input fader is set to OB and reduce the level of the GAIN knob 8 While playing the connected instrument raise the STEREO fader to the 0 dB posi tion With the initial default settings the input channels are patched to the Eh ee AW2400 s stereo bus Signals sent to the stereo bus are output via the STEREO OUT MONITOR OUT and OMNI OUT jacks after being adjusted by the STEREO fader When the STEREO fader is raised the level of the stereo bus sig nal will be displayed on the Display section stereo meter You can now rotate the MONITOR or PHONES knob clockwise to hear sound fr
353. l play stop or locate the current song How ever MTC MMC MIDI Clock messages will not be transmitted or received e REMOTE button The transport keys will not oper ate the recorder but will only transmit the MIDI messages that have been preset for each key e These settings will also apply if you use a foot switch to operate the song transport ON field FADER field This field is used when setting up a user defined preset 206 AW2400 Owner s Manual Using User defined Remote function The REMOTE screen 1 12 page and 13 16 page let you assign your own MIDI messages to each fader and ON key To call the REMOTE screen 1 12 page or 13 16 page press the Layer section REMOTE key as many times as necessary or press the F1 key or F2 key after press ing the REMOTE key NOTE e USER1 USER4 must be selected in the MODE box in order to set up user defined assignments H Initial BR 101 011 EZ ee REMOTE 1 1 TRANSPORT J r Em LOCAL al Heu Song Se gt E a Fader ON key function name Displays the name that is assigned to the currently dis played fader or ON key 2 RENAME button Edits the name that is assigned to the fader ON key Move the cursor to the button and press the ENTER key and the NAME EDIT popup window will appear 3 LATCH UNLATCH button Selects one of the following types of operation for the ON keys e LATCH
354. l track mode 2 TRIGGER button Turn this button on to engage the Trigger Track mode trigger track mode 3 GROUP Move the cursor to this field and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to set the trigger track group for each track Groups can only be assigned when the Trigger Track mode is engaged AW2400 Owner s Manual 4 FADER START button When this button is on playback of the corresponding track or group including the track will start when the track fader is raised above the position Playback will stop at the end of the recorded data Playback can be stopped by returning the fader to the position This button can only be turned on or off when the Trigger Track mode is engaged 2 Move the cursor to the TRIGGER button and press the ENTER key to engage the Trig ger Track mode A popup window asking you to confirm that you want to exit from the normal track mode will appear Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER Key e Since a maximum of 12 tracks can be played back for 24 bit songs gt p 165 mute cannot be disengaged for tracks 13 24 and they will remain in the normal track mode 3 To set the group to which each track belongs move the cursor to the GROUP field and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys The Trigger Track mode allows each track to be assigned to one of four groups A D so that playback of entire groups of tracks can be started and stopped by
355. lable for the recorder tracks as well as the stereo track When recording parts or when doing a mix you can switch virtual tracks to record multiple takes and select the best take later The bit depth number of quantization bits of the audio data recorded on each track can individually be set to 16 or 24 bits for each song 16 bit songs allow simultaneous recording of up to 16 tracks and simultaneous playback of up to 24 tracks 24 bit songs allow simultaneous recording up to 8 tracks and simultaneous playback of up to 12 tracks gt p 165 The recording sampling frequency can also be set to either 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz the selected sampling has no effect on the number of simultaneous record or playback tracks AW2400 Owner s Manual Trigger track function The Trigger Track function allows the track ON keys and faders to be used to start and stop playback of recorded tracks This is ideal for performance situations in which you want to switch phrases or patterns in real time or when you need to start background music on cue for example Versatile editing functionality Audio data recorded on a track can be copied moved or edited using a variety of commands You can make detailed edits or even make radical changes to the struc ture of the song by using the same riff repeatedly or increasing the number of choruses Time Compression lets you compress or expand the time axis of the audio data over a
356. lect the song that will be written to track 1 CO JE Gu 1 Maas RE o Initial D TL _ m H z TR 4 1KAZz 16bit mRPuTT A 00 00 00 000 ETS LCD GUTE TRACK AT ONCE DISK AT ONCE TRACK SONG NAME I HSERT ILJB_Sw inses z9 OHE HELETE 29 6NB F IHAL ZE HA ITE pn W DATA JOG ES e Songs in which data has not been recorded on the virtual tracks selected for the stereo track will not be displayed A current song that was not saved after the stereo track was recorded will also not be displayed e Songs with a stereo track shorter than four seconds will not be displayed e Songs with the sampling frequency of 48 kHz will not be dis played 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to select the songs that will be written to track 2 and following ES e Pressing the F1 F3 keys while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the ADD F1 key INSERT F2 key and DELETE F3 key buttons respec tively NOTE e When you add a song to the track list the added song will always be initially selected Change this as required ew Creating an audio CD KO AW2400 Owner s Manual 217 Writing audio data 7 Move the cursor to the WRITE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm COMF RAAT OM Heite ST Track to CO e Pressing the F4 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the WRITE button 8 To begin writing th
357. levels via the Selected Channel section Selected Channel section knobs 1 4 can be used to directly adjust AUX send levels Use the Layer section keys INPUT SEL keys and SEL keys to select the channel for which AUX send level is to be adjusted 2 Press the Selected Channel section AUX key so that its indicator lights The AUX screen will appear 3 Rotate Selected Channel AL 1 SEHD knobs 1 4 This will adjust the AUX send vi level for the channel selected in 34 46d step 1 e If AUTO DISPLAY function is disabled the AUX screen will not appear automatically when step 2 above is performed but the AUX send levels can still be adjusted by rotating the Selected Channel knobs e If AUTO DISPLAY function is disabled a popup window will appear when a value is adjusted for easy visual confirmation regardless of the display that is showing at the time Using external effects with the AUX buses Using external effects with the AUX buses External effect processing gear connected via the OMNI OUT jacks can be used in place of the internal effects The example given in this section describes the procedure for applying an exter nal mono in stereo out reverb processor to a track channel via the AUX1 bus 1 Lower the STEREO fader to the 2 posi 5 Press the Selected Channel section AUX tion key so that its indicator lights then press Selected Channel knob 1 2 Call the PATCH screen Output page by mie AUC Ee
358. line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the selected song Move the cursor to the LOAD button in the screen and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you whether you want to save the current song CONF IRHAT OH Save Current Sona CANCEL WES e Pressing the F2 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the LOAD button Move the cursor to either YES if you want to save the current song or NO if you do not want to save the current song and press the ENTER key If you select YES the song will be loaded after the current song has been saved If you select NO the song will be loaded and any changes to the current song will be discarded AW2400 Owner s Manual The load operation can be aborted by moving the cur sor to the CANCEL button and pressing the ENTER key e If you select NO all changes you made after last saving the current song will be lost E Saving the current song Here s how to save the current song to the hard disk 1 Call the Song List page by either pressing the Work Navigate section SONG key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the SONG key The SONG screen Song List page will appear 2 Move the cursor to the SAVE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm that you want to save the current song CONF IRHAT LOH Save Current Sona e Pressing
359. locations and execute the copy the location you specified in the measure display format field will be aligned with the copy destination To Start setting eer tr ee ee eet anmann fd GRID AW2400 Owner s Manual l Track operations and editing 139 List of editing command When measure lock on MOVE Measure Lock Start End Moves the specified region of data to the specified loca eg tion of the specified track This is similar to COPY but differs in that the move source data will be deleted To Start p COPY Track en ee E S B 6 7 8 To Track EE SSS To Start 3 The possible choices for 7 To TR copy destination track will depend on your selection for CO From TR copy source track Start End HO From TR is a single audio track 1 24 you will be able to select only a single audio track 1 24 HO From TR is CLIP ST 1 amp 2 23 amp 24 a pair of adjacent audio tracks you will be able to select only ST or 1 amp 2 23 amp 24 a pair of adjacent audio tracks If From TR is ALL OVER or ALL INS you cannot select TO TR 4 Grid function 41 GRID T S When this function is on the To Start location cannot be specified in o Start q MOVE counter display format it can be specified only in measure beat From units Track WA 2 3 WE T H By using the Grid function in conjunction with the Measure Lock function you can easily copy measure beat length segments of data whose divis
360. lowing items or the INC DEC keys to select the signal that will be assigned to the DIGITAL STEREO OUT connector Press the ENTER key to finalize your selection You have the following choices PATCH Du Neu _ sons d We TI Ger SN inPuT 11 00 00 00 000 CH EERISCHI eet Displa Type of signal SS E No assignment ST L amp R Stereo output channel L amp R AUX 1 amp 2 3 amp 4 AUX send master 1 amp 2 3 amp 4 EFF 1 amp 2 3 amp 4 Effect send master 1 amp 2 3 amp 4 TR 1 amp 2 238 amp 24 Track channel direct outputs 1 amp 2 238 amp 24 e The signal of the stereo bus is always assigned to the STEREO OUT jacks OQuteut CO OMNI OUT ASSIGN field Move the cursor to fields 1 4 and use the DATA JOG dial or the INC DEC keys to select the signal that will be assigned to each OMNI OUT jack Press the ENTER key to finalize your selection You have the following choices Display Type of signal No assignment ST L ST R Stereo output channel L R MOJ IEUDIS pue Huiyoled W AUX 1 4 AUX send master 1 4 EFF 1 4 Effect send master 1 4 TR 1 24 Track channel direct outputs 1 24 2 OPTION I O SLOT OUT ASSIGN field Move the cursor to fields 1 16 and use the DATA JOG dial or the INC DEC keys to select the signal that will be assigned to each output channel of a digital I O card installed in the I O slot Press the ENTER key to finalize your selection You have th
361. lpsoo0e1 YORI Ov 56 13 To monitor the signal levels sent from Bus1 Bus2 to the record ready tracks press the METER key and then the F3 key This calls the METER screen Master page allowing visual monitoring of the output levels from Bus1 and Bus2 Bus1 and Bus2 output level Bas _ Hew Sons 212055 GL Ho OF Se dad 00 00 00 000 101 11 ECE ec d a ETETETECECEDI op OTTO op CECECETES eee op DTD op DTD op DTD op DD DIE op DTD op DTD op DTD op DTD 14 Move the cursor to the POST FADER button and press the ENTER key The post fader signal levels will be displayed If the signal levels reach OVER on the meters press the Layer section MASTER key so that it lights to select the MASTER mixing layer and use fader 1 Bus1 and fader 2 Bus2 to adjust the master levels for Bus and Bus as required e If you switch the RECORD display page after doing the patch setup all your patch settings will be undone and lost a confir mation popup window will appear Remember to stay on the same RECORD page until recording is finished Recording on a track Now that the necessary preparations have been completed let s record on a track Call the TRACK screen View page by either pressing the Work Navigate section TRACK key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the TRACK key This page can be used to confirm which tracks do and do not contain recorded data You ca
362. ls is a trademark or registered trademark of Avid Technology Inc and affiliated companies Other company names and product names in this docu ment are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners E Yamaha Website English only http www yamahasynth com E Yamaha Manual Library http www yamaha co jp manual Remember to back up your data E Storing produced data Produced data can be lost due to breakdown or mistaken operation We recommend that you store all important data on your computer CD R CD RW discs or other external storage medium E Responsibility for loss of data etc Yamaha will accept no responsibility for any damages including consequential or incidental incurred by the customer or any third party as a result of loss or impair ment of the data stored on the hard disk or CD R media regardless of whether such loss could have been or actu ally was foreseen by Yamaha Nor does Yamaha guarantee the media against any defect that may render it unusable AW2400 Owner s Manual 11 About the built in CD RW drive e Using the CD RW drive els noA asojagq 12 A built in CD RW drive is a device that lets you create or play audio CDs backup and restore data from the internal hard disk and read data from a CD ROM IMPORTANT e Even if a CD RW drive is operating normally it may fail a read or write operation approximately once in five hundr
363. mport source song AW2400 Owner s Manual Track operations and editing e ni 145 Importing audio data WAV files Guipa pue suoneiado yor 146 To TR To V TR Here you can select the track number 1 24 ST and virtual track number 1 8 of the import destination song the current song If From TR is 1 24 you cannot select ST in the To TR field If From TR is ST only ST can be selected 9 EXECUTE button Executes the import operation Move the cursor to the song list and use the DATA JOG dial or the INC DEC keys to select the song that includes the track you want to import NOTE e You cannot import from a song whose bit depth or sample rate differs from the current song Move the cursor to From TR From V TR and use the DATA JOG dial or the INC DEC keys to select the track number and virtual track number that you want to import The track number and virtual track number of the song you selected in step 4 will be assigned as the import source Move the cursor to To TR To V TR and use the DATA JOG dial or the INC DEC keys to select the track number and virtual track number of the desired import destination e If the import destination contains data it will be overwritten Be careful that you don t accidentally overwrite important data 7 When you ve finished making settings move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you
364. n 2 Press the Selected Channel section DYN key so that its indicator lights The DYNAMICS screen will appear NOTE i e If the AUTO DISPLAY function is set to OFF the DYNAMICS screen will not appear automatically when the DYN key is pressed In this case press one of the Selected Channel knobs 1 4 after pressing the DYN key so that its indicator lights For details about the AUTO DISPLAY function refer to AW2400 Preferences on page 210 3 Press the Display section F3 key or press the DYN key as many times as necessary until the Comp Edit page appears The compressor settings are available via this page COMP ON OFF button DYHAHICS Ier rtt G Tnitial INPUT 1 00 00 00 000 001 01 EERSTEN COMP EDIT POSITION CURVE PRE FADER POST FADER THRESHOLD RATIO ATTACK D BO ESO V beams RELEASE Gi OUT GAIN ox KNEE 2o8ms H HOP z Come Edit fone Libs e Pages can also be switched by repeatedly pressing a Selected Channel knob 4 Move the cursor to the COMP ON OFF but ton and press the ENTER key to turn the compressor on This activates the compressor for the corresponding input channel e If necessary the individual compressor parameters can be adjusted via this page Refer to Using the Compressors on page 152 for details Track recording E Press the Display section F4 key The DYNAMICS screen Comp Lib page will appear Compressor library presets can be
365. n s ERASE Erase all occurrences of the specified The channels that can be selected are the same as parameter s in the specified region far ERASE above e COPY Copy all occurrences of the specified 2 The start point of the source region for the copy or move operation specified in counter format parameter s in the specified region to the specified position in the specified destination channel e MOVE Move all occurrences of the specified 3 The end point of the source region for the parameter s in the specified region to copy or move operation is specified in the specified position in the specified counter format destination channel The original 4 Specifies the destination channel for the parameters will be erased copy or move operation Depending on the source channel for copy or move operation the channels that can be selected vary 5 The start point of the destination region for the copy or move operation specified in counter format AW2400 Owner s Manual f 187 Command Editing Automix data In a Specified Region e Editing Individual Automix Events 188 4 Move the cursor to the appropriate fields and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to selected the channel and or region D Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the opera tion CONF IRHAT LOH Execute ERASE 6 Move the cursor to
366. n egenen ege Eeer ee eeg 94 Finding a location while viewing the waveform 95 10 Meters 97 Level Meter Types AA 97 11 Patching and signal flow 99 Input Signal patching sssnennnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnneennnennnnne 99 Patching for Direct Hecordimg 99 Patching for Mixed Hecordimg 102 Output Signal PatChing ccccccccseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 104 12 Channel Operation 105 Displaying the mix parameters for individual channels sesesseesenenssnneensnnenernnnenenne 105 Channel Library Operation 108 Calling the Channel Library screen 108 Changing Channel Library Names 109 Storing Channel Library settmgs 109 Recalling Channel Library settings 00 110 Erasing Channel Library settings ccc000 110 13 AUX 111 About the AUX buses nannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 111 AUX Send Level Adjustment eee 111 Using external effects with the AUX buses 113 14 Effects 115 About the Internal Effects cccccsssseeeeeeesseeeeeees 115 Recalling Effect Library settings c eceeeeeeeees 116 Applying Effects via Send and Return 06 117 Inserting an Effect Into a Channel 119 Editing Effects gente dimsccececnextceinncrdedesiedestadenistexnestndensede 121 Effect Library Operations cccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 122 Call the Effect Library Screen cccccesseeeeeees 122 Changing Effect Librar
367. n also make any required metronome settings via this page refer to page 62 for metronome instructions Track view TRACK Bay Neu _ sons RE e He DA INPUT 1 A 00 00 00 000 dier TRACE UIEU T AW2400 Owner s Manual 2 Press the Transport section RTZ kq key to return to the beginning of the song 3 Hold down the Transport section REC key and press the PLAY B key to start recording Recording will begin on the track set up as the record destination In the track view within the screen the vertical line that indicates the current location will advance towards the right NOTE e Recording will not begin if no track is in the record ready mode 4 To stop recording press the STOP W key The recorded audio data will appear in bar graph form in the track view The data entry control section UNDO REDO key will light This indicates that you can press the UNDO REDO key to execute the Undo function 5 To hear the recording from the beginning press the RTZ kq key to return the counter display to zero and press the PLAY gt key Recording on a track e Saving the current song H When you finish recording press the Quick Navigate Section RECORD key once again move the cursor to the SAFE button and press the ENTER key When the confirmation popup window appears so move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The input to track assignments will be cancelled The REC
368. n and press the ENTER key If you decide not to finalize the disc move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key NOTE e The finalize operation cannot be halted once it has been started Perform this operation with care Erasing CD RW media Erasing CD RW media Here s how to erase all data that has been written to CD RW media so that the CD RW disc can be used to record new data You will need to perform this operation on a disc that has been used to store data from a computer or other equipment if you want to use that disc with the AW2400 e Since data is erased as necessary when you back up AW2400 data to CD RW media or when you write audio data to CD RW media you do not need to perform the following procedure each time you re use the disc NOTE e The erased data cannot be recovered Perform this operation with care Call the CD screen Setting page by either pressing the Work Navigate section CD key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F3 key after pressing the CD key 2 Move the cursor to the CD RW MEDIA ERASE field and press the ENTER key to select the desired erasure method The buttons select the following erasure methods e SIMPLY button Only the TOC Table Of Con tents data written to the CD RW disc will be erased This is the quickest way to erase a CD RW disc e PERFECTLY button All data written to the CD RW disc will be erased com pletely This metho
369. nd press the ENTER key A popup window confirming the clear operation will appear CONF RAAT LOH Clear 2 from the CHANNEL Library e Pressing the F3 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the CLEAR button 4 To actually erase the selected setting move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Chapter 13 AUX This chapter describes operation of the AW2400 AUX buses About the AUX buses The AW2400 has 4 auxiliary buses that can be assigned to the OMNI OUT jacks the DIGITAL STEREO OUT connectors or the outputs of an optional I O card installed in the I O slot This can be useful for sending signals to external signal processing gear or for monitoring specific signals within a mix Signals from the following channels can be sent to the AUX buses e Input channels e Track channels e Effect return channels e Refer to Output signal patching on page 104 for details on assigning the AUX bus outputs e AUX 1 2 and 3 4 can be assigned as pairs gt p 58 AUX Send Level Adjustment AUX send levels can be adjusted either by using the graphic knobs in the AUX screen or by using the Selected Channel section controls AUX 2 To adjust levels for the AUX1 bus press W Adjusting AUX send levels via elen see n the AUX screen ___ The AUX screen will appear AUX send levels can be adjusted using the graphic knobs To adjust levels for
370. nd Cascade Settings 2 Select a wordclock source via the WORDCLOCK SOURCE field 3 Move the cursor to the appropriate button and press the ENTER key The wordclock source setting will depend on how the AW2400 is being used Here are a few examples AW2400 As Wordclock Master When the AW2400 is used on its own or when it is used as the wordclock master for an external HDR DAW or similar digital audio device turn the INT button on The external device s must be set to synchronize to the master wordclock from the AW2400 DIGITAL STEREO OUT connector Wordclock DIGITAL STEREO IN connector e lh or 1 LO slot Wordclock HDR IC Wordclock slave AW2400 Digital I O card Wordclock master WORDCLOCK SOURCESINT D o0000 CC ICT Using an HDR or DAW As Wordclock Master Set the HDR or DAW to use it s internal clock in order to function as wordclock master so that the AW2400 can synchronize to the digital signal received at a digital input on an I O card Select the 1 2 15 16 button corresponding to the digital input at which the master signal is being received I O slot i a 000000 OOOO D Wordclock Digital I O card HDR Wordclock master AW2400 Wordclock slave WORDCLOCK SOURCE 1 2 15 16 Using an MD or DAT Recorder as Wordclock Master Connect the digital audio output of the MD or DAT recorder to the AW2400 DIGITAL STEREO IN connector and turn
371. nd clip will not be restored if you recall the song data e The recorded contents of the sound clip are stored individu ally for each song AW2400 Owner s Manual Recording to a sound clip 45 GD Recording to a sound clip 46 AW2400 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Track recording This chapter explains how to record the audio signal from an instrument or microphone connected to the AW2400 to the tracks of a song Creating a new song Before you can begin recording on the AW2400 you need to create a new song e When you start up the AW2400 for the first time an empty song will be loaded automatically If you use this automatically loaded song the procedure described here is not necessary Track recording EA 1 Call the SONG screen Song List page by 3 Move the cursor to YES to save the current either pressing the Work Navigate section song or NO if you don t want to save the SONG key as many times as necessary or current song and press the ENTER key by pressing the F1 key after pressing the A popup window containing the various settings for SONG key the new song will appear The currently selected song in the Song List will be highlighted inverted l NEW SONG SETTING NEW button Select the setting of New Sona Fs Hecht t Sound Clie Time SONG Wgl Heu sons RE THPUT A00 00 00 000 mtii cesses SIZE BIT FS Gan HEH The following settings can be made via this popup DD Yeu Sons d d
372. nd fader 2 Bus 2 NOTE e All of the current patch settings will be erased if you switch the RECORD screen page after making signal assignments A popup window will ask you whether you really want to erase the assignments Be careful not to switch the RECORD screen page until you ve finished recording 11 To stop bounce recording press the STOP W key 12 To hear the bounce recorded results from the beginning press the RTZ kq key to return the counter display to zero and then press the PLAY B key When playing back the bounce destination tracks be careful not to switch the RECORD screen to a page other than the Bounce page or to defeat the bounce set tings If you do so the connection from the bounce source track channels to the stereo bus will automatically be restored This will cause the bounce source and bounce destination signals to be duplicated ES e If desired you can use the UNDO REDO key to cancel the bounce recording operation gt p 64 or switch the virtual track of the bounce destination and record another take gt p 63 Mixdown and bounce operations Ee 13 When you ve finished the bounce opera tion press the Quick Navigation section RECORD key once again move the cursor to the SAFE button in the screen and press the ENTER key A popup message will ask you for confirmation Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key to defeat all bounce settings
373. ndicates the currently selected compressor type The displayed indication has the following meaning e COM Compressor e EXPAND Expander e COMP H Compander hard e COMP S Compander soft ES e You cannot change the compressor type via this page If you want to use a different type you must recall a library setting that uses the desired type For details on recalling library compression settings refer to EQ Dynamics Processor Library Operation on page 154 6 GR Gain Reduction Indicates the amount of gain reduction produced by the compressor in a range of 18 dB to O dB 7 Output meter Indicates the level of the signal after it has passed through the compressor PARAMETER Here you can edit the parameters of the compressor The type of parameters and their ranges will differ depending on the compressor type For details on the types of parameter and their function refer to the appendix Move the cursor to the COMP ON OFF but ton and press the ENTER key to turn the compressor on e Pressing the F1 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the ON OFF button Use the STEREO LINK button to turn com pressor linking for paired channels on or off and the POSITION field to select the compressor insert point as required e Pressing the F2 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the STEREO
374. ne These buttons correspond to the following chan nels e INPUT 0 000000 Input channels 1 16 e EFFECT RETURN Effect return channels 1 4 es TRACK Track channels 1 24 The channels you select here will not be muted even if you turn on the Solo function If you select effect return channels 1 4 here you ll be able to monitor with effects even when the Solo function is on 6 To activate the Solo function press the Mixer section SOLO key The SOLO key and the ON key of the selectable channels will blink 7 Use the Layer section keys and ON keys to select the channels that you want to solo The operations that are valid while Solo is activated will depend on the settings in the MONITOR screen Solo page H To defeat the Solo function press the SOLO key once again Mixdown and bounce operations Ee AW2400 Owner s Manual 85 Ee Mixdown and bounce operations 86 AW2400 Owner s Manual Chapter 9 Transport Locate Operation This chapter covers transport key operation use of the locate marker functions and a range of other playback features The Transport Section Keys The functions of the Transport section keys change according to the current state of the recorder playback stopped etc as listed in the chart below Recorder Status Playing Stopped Rewinding Fast Forwarding Recording Stop record and play Punch Out Stop PLAY gt key Play Play Play STOP
375. ne Control Command mcc sub id 00001101 OD Reset EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 5 13 1 9 MMC LOCATE TARGET lt Transmission gt This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when a locate related key such as MARK SEARCH IN OUT is pressed a FF REW operation is performed when the transport returns to the auto punch pre roll point or when repeating lt Reception gt This message is received if the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave and the device number matches The transport will locate to the time code position specified within the command data STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive Device ID Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call 00000110 06 Machine Control Command mcc sub id 01000100 44 Locate 00000110 06 byte count 00000001 01 target sub command Ohhhhhhh hh hour Standard Time Code Command Ommmmmmm mm minute Osssssss ss_ second OfTELETY ff frame Osssssss ss sub frame EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive es O Q Q Q lt AW2400 Owner s Manual 275 MIDI Implementation Chart YAMAHA Professional Audio Workstation Date 21 JUL 2004 Model AW2400 MIDI Implementation Chart Version 1 O Transmitted Recognized Remarks Function r 1e a Basic Default 1 Channel Changed 1 e hre H on 16 Default x l 3 Memorized Messages x x Altered KKK A kk A kk A kA kk xX J Sy H NO J Note X N
376. necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the AUTOMIX key 3 Move the cursor to the ENABLE DISABLE button in the MODE field and press the ENTER key The button will switch to ENABLE and Automix operation REC will be enabled ALITOREC 4 Move the cursor to the OVERWRITE field and engage the buttons corresponding to the parameters you want to record Use the OVERWRITE field buttons to select the types of data you want to record CH ON FADER AUX EFFECT SEND ON AUX EFFECT SEND EQ PAN Parameters corresponding to buttons that are not engaged will not be recorded even if they are operated during Automix recording OWERWA ITE AUX EFFECT SEND ON AUX EFFECT SENO CS e Scene and library recall operations will be recorded regard less of the OVERWRITE field button selections Automix Operation D Move the cursor to the MODE field and press the REC button The REC button will flash The Automix record standby mode is now engaged and the AUTOMIX key will flash red MODE ENABLE J AUTOMIX gt Dm P 4 ES e You can also begin recording after engaging the AUTOREC button rather than the REC button The REC button is auto matically turned off when you stop recording and the record standby mode is disengaged but the AUTOREC button remains on and the record standby mode remains engaged until it is manually turned off 6 Use the Layer section keys to select the mixing l
377. ned The symbol indicates channels that are assigned and the symbol indicates channels that are not assigned 2 In the ENABLE field move the cursor to the button A D of the fader group that you want to operate AW2400 Owner s Manual 3 Use the Layer section keys the INPUT SEL keys and the SEL keys to select the channels that you want to assign to this fader group The assignment to the fader group will alternately be switched on or off each time you press the INPUT SEL key or SEL key e If you want to defeat all assignments for the fader group you re currently operating hold down the Display section SHIFT key and press the F1 key e If you want to defeat all assignments in the Fader Grp page hold down the Display section SHIFT key and press the F2 key 4 Repeat steps 2 3 to make assignments for other fader groups NOTE e You can t assign a single channel to more than one fader group 5 To enable a fader group move the cursor to the A D buttons and press the ENTER key Buttons A D can be turned on off independently 6 Operate a channel that is assigned to a fader group The faders of all channels assigned to that fader group will move in tandem e When operating channels that are assigned to a fader group you must use only one fader If you attempt to move two or more faders simultaneously the motor faders will be stressed and possibly damaged
378. nels 1 24 You can also select the point from which the send signal is derived via the PRE POST button below each knob ES e When the EFFECT key is lit you can repeatedly press a Selected Channel knob to sequentially select the related effect pages e By pressing the F1 or F2 key while holding the Display sec tion SHIFT key you can set all channels within the display to PRE F1 or POST F2 with one operation D Move the cursor to an effect send knob and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to set the effect send level ES e By moving the cursor to an effect send knob and pressing the ENTER key the effect send for that channel can be turned off or on e Effect send levels can also be adjusted while the EFFECT key is engaged by pressing the INPUT SEL or SEL key for the target channel and using Selected Channel knobs 1 4 to adjust the send level to the corresponding effect processor AW2400 Owner s Manual v O ke LL 117 Applying Effects via Send and Return 6 Move the cursor to the PRE POST button 10 To adjust the effect return levels press the and press the ENTER key to switch the Layer section IN 1 8 or IN 9 16 key and location from which the signal will be sent use faders 9 12 to adjust the correspond from each channel to the Effect buses ing return levels Select PRE for pre fader or POST for post fader send When mixing layer IN 1 8 or IN 9 16 is selected fa
379. ng or NO if you don t want to save the current song and press the ENTER key The AW2400 USB Storage Mode will be engaged and the button will change to CANCEL Most of the AW 2400 functions are temporarily disabled while this mode is engaged WAV File Transfer USB Storage Mode 7 Display the AW2400 internal hard disk on the computer screen In the case of Windows XP The two windows will appear AW2400 1 H Windows can perform the same action each time you insert a disk or connect a device with this kind of file Music files What do vou want Windows to do CG Play a using Windows Media Player u i i W ad on z ei Take no action Always do the selected action e If the windows shown above do not appear choose to display the AW2400 1 and AW2400 2 drives from the Windows Start gt My Computer menu In the case of Mac OS X The AW2400 1 and AW2400 2 drive icons will appear on the desktop AW2400 1 AW2400 2 e If the icons are not displayed properly use the Disk Utility to temporarily un mount the appropriate volume and then mount it again AW2400 Owner s Manual 231 WAV File Transfer USB Storage Mode 8 Open the appropriate drive folder and copy the required WAV files or directly edit the WAV files using a waveform editor applica tion To access the Transport folder open the AW2400 2 drive To directly access WAV files on th
380. ng on the stereo track Here s how to send the signals from track channels input channels and effect return channels to the stereo bus and record the mixed signal onto the stereo track Call the RECORD screen Mixdown page by either pressing the Quick Navigate section RECORD key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F4 key after pressing the RECORD key When you access this page record ready status will be defeated for all audio tracks and only the stereo track will be recordable Use the Mixdown page to patch the channels that you want to record on the stereo track to the stereo bus For details on patching refer to page 75 11111 II ig 1a 4 IS th I7 IB I d Mixdown REC button Stereo track operations 2 Move the cursor to the REC button and press the ENTER key to turn the button on The panel STEREO SEL key will blink red This blinking indicates that the stereo track is in record ready mode 3 Press the RTZ ja key to rewind the song Then hold down the REC key and press the PLAY P key The song will begin playing and the playback will be recorded on the stereo track 4 When you reach the end of the song press the STOP W key To listen to the recorded result refer to Playing back the stereo track following section e If desired you can use the UNDO REDO key to cancel the recording that was made on the stereo track gt p 64 or
381. ng the F4 key whiled holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same affect as the BACKUP button Make sure that the cursor is in the list area use the DATA JOG dial to select the song you want to back up and then press the ENTER key The symbol for the selected song will change to the symbol indicating that this song has been selected for backup You can repeat this step to select multiple songs for backup If you turn on the ALL SET button you can select all data in the list in one step AW2400 Owner s Manual Song management ee 177 8 jJugwebeueW Duoe 178 Backing up songs e Restoring songs 4 To execute the backup move the cursor to the BACKUP button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the opera tion CONF RAAT OH Boackur Selected Data NOTE P e If previously recorded CD RW media is inserted in the CD RW drive a popup window will ask you if it is OK to erase the media first Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key and the media will be erased e If a CD ROM or previously recorded CD R media is inserted in the CD RW drive a popup window with a message of Change Media Please will appear and the media will be ejected Remove the media and replace it with writable media 5 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Writing to the CD R RW media will begin If you decide to cancel the
382. ng the Undo List By using the AW2400 s Undo list you can not only cancel the most recent recording or editing operation but even backtrack through your work for as many as fifteen opera tions This is convenient when for example after performing several overdubs you decide that you would rather go back to the state immediately after you had recorded the third solo Press and hold the UNDO REDO key The UNDO LIST popup window will appear O D RECORDO TR J G DELETE Tk 2 m Ul Tk 2 4 Undo list This is a list of the previous recording and editing operations From the left the list shows a step number that indicates the order in which the operations were performed the content of the operation and the track virtual track that was affected by the recording or edit ing operation The current song is now in the state of the step that is highlighted The step enclosed by a dotted frame indicates the step to which the song will be returned by the Undo func tion e If you have already cancelled recent operations using the Undo function before displaying the Undo list previous steps may not remain at all 2 Use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select a step number 3 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The current song will revert to the state of the step you selected ONDO LIST 5 RECORD H4 OELETE Az COPY A z RECORD AW2400 Owner s Manual 4 Move th
383. nge a song folder or song file name e Files larger than 4 GB cannot be copied Be sure to carry out the steps outlined in Exiting the USB Storage Mode when disconnecting the AW2400 from the computer 232 AW2400 Owner s Manual Exiting the USB Storage Mode Use the following procedure to exit from the USB Storage Mode Be sure the unmount the AW2400 hard disk from your computer after closing all AW2400 windows In the case of Windows XP Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the task bar and remove the corresponding two USB mass storage devices Safely remove USB Mass Storage Device Drivestl Hr e If an error message appears execute Safely Remove Hard ware one or two more times You should then be able to remove the device without seeing an error message In the case of Mac OSX Drag the AW2400 1 and AW2400 2 icons from the desktop to the trash 2 In the AW2400 screen move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key A popup window confirming whether the AW2400 has been safely removed from the computer will appear CONF RAT OH Device Removed op PCY 3 To return to the normal mode move the cur sor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Copying Exported WAV Files To the Computer The WAV files corresponding to the audio tracks you want to transfer to a computer must first be exported to the Transpor
384. nnnnnnannnnnnnennnnnnn 30 Viewing the display cccccsseececeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 30 ACCESSING a scCreenipoage 31 Switching a button onm oft cece eccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 31 Editing a value in the display ccccesseeeeeeeeees 31 Using Additional Function Buttons EN ENENG TOi esinen a E 32 Switching Mixing Layers cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 33 Using the Selected Channel eechon 33 d Connection and Setup 37 OTIS COM genge eege 37 Turning the power on off cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 38 Adjusting the input level cccccceceeecesesseeeeeeeeees 39 4 Listening to the demo song 41 Loading the demo song 41 Playing the demo SOng scccerientendseicasazenctontincoieceacanictes 42 d Recording to a sound clip 43 Recording a sound clip uascucsdincadinanessdsnmatoncemmacsavaentincnas 43 Playing a sound clip ccceecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeas 45 6 Track recording 47 Creating a NEW SONG ccccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeaas 47 Direct recording and Mixed recording 2 00 49 Assigning input signals to tracks Direct FECONGING sisocsvececncecievierss duatucsesetensodaxtetenss 51 Assigning input signals to tracks Mixed recording cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeees 54 AW2400 Owner s Manual Recording on a track 56 Saving the current song 57 Parning Keen 58 Applying EQ To an Input Song 60 Applying Compression to an In
385. ntroducing the AW2400 H 31 Basic operation of the AW2400 OOPEMV 9y Dupont 32 Entering text When you create a new song or save a Scene memory or library setting a popup window will appear allowing you to assign a name for the song or setting a ss Hem Song ss OK TO EXECUTE This popup window contains the following items and functions 4 Text input box This box lets you input characters numbers and symbols The character currently selected for editing 1s shown inverted white on black When you save the data for the first time the box will contain a default name The inverted highlight can be moved as required by using the DATA JOG dial 2 CANCEL button If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key you will return to the previous screen with out changing the name 3 OK button If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the scene library will be saved or the new song will be created 4 SHIFT LOCK button Switches between upper or lower case characters or the type of symbol to be entered at the current edit position in the text entry box E buttons Move the inverted edit position left or right e The inverted edit position can also be moved left or right by using the DATA JOG dial INS button Inserts an under bar space _ at the inverted edit posi tion All characters following the insert are moved to t
386. ny times as necessary or by pressing the F4 key after pressing the SONG key 3 Make sure that the cursor is located at the READ CD INFO button and press the ENTER key Information will be read from the inserted CD R RW media 4 Make sure the cursor is in the list area use the DATA JOG dial to select the song you want to restore then press the ENTER key A mark will appear for songs selected to be restored e The list will show all the songs that were backed up to CD R RW media but you can execute the restore operation only for 44 1 kHz 16 bit songs 5 Repeat step 4 to select all of the other AW series songs that you want to restore 6 Move the cursor to the RESTORE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the opera tion 7 Move the cursor to the OK button if you want to execute the restore operation and press the ENTER key The restore operation will begin While the song data is being loaded a popup window will indicate the progress Chapter 19 Automix Operation of the AW2400 Automix features is described below About Automix Automix allows operations such as fader moves and ON switch state changes to be recorded and played back in real time For example you can record complex mixdown bounce operations using Automix so that they can be precisely reproduced as many times as necessary The parameters that can be recorded by Automix are as follows
387. o PRESS OK TO EXECUTE DOS EISES Ua ek E FEE LE EN FA 7 Enter an appropriate file or folder name via the NAME EDIT popup window as required For details on how to enter a name refer to page 32 8 To execute the export operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The export operation will begin If you move the cur sor to the CANCEL button instead of the OK button and press the ENTER key the export operation will be cancelled However it is not possible to abort the export process once it has been started NOTE D e Since the AW2400 does not keep track of the date and time dummy values will be written as the file creation date and time of the WAV files e Tracks that do not contain data in the specified region will not be exported Q Switch to the USB Storage Mode gt p 230 and display the AW2400 internal hard disk on the computer screen 1 Open the AW2400 2 drive to access the Transport folder Il Copy the WAV files exported to the Trans port folder to the computer WAV files in the Transport folder can also be directly accessed from computer applications 12 When the files have been copied discon nect the AW2400 from the computer and exit the USB Storage Mode gt p 232 234 AW2400 Owner s Manual Importing Copied WAV Files From the Computer This procedure allows you to import WAV files transferred from a com
388. o a Specified Location e Using the locator uoleJedO 91e907 JOdsueL La 88 Use the LOCATE keys The locate point can also be numerically entered directly using the LOCATE keys 1 9 Move the cur sor to the measure or beat field and use the LOCATE 1 9 keys to enter the locate point numerically The key can be used to quickly move the cursor between the beat and measure fields 3 When the locate point has been specified press the ENTER key As long as the cursor is not on the CANCEL button pressing the ENTER will execute the move to the specified location If you move the cursor to the CAN CEL button and press the ENTER key no change in location will occur and the popup window will close Using the locator Locate points can be specified within a song in order to execute functions such as auto punch in out and A B repeat You can use this function to locate move the current location of the song to one of these points just by pressing a single key On the AW2400 you can use the fol lowing locate points In Out points These locate points are used to specify the region for auto punch in out gt p 70 Normally the beginning and end of the recording you last performed will be automatically set as the In point and Out point However you may change these points as desired A B points These locate points are used to specify the region for the A B Repeat function gt p 93
389. o0a0aaannn 209 Preference page 210 V VARI ese ceswos ceescnenseatesecateaeseeae 226 KSE Senier ebeg genug Sege 226 VIEW KEY EE 24 Viewing the display c0008 30 Virtual tracks ccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 63 W WAV files 0 233 234 WAVE DISPLAY popup window 95 Waveform seactsunsnctestectentveacnteeneesas 95 Wordclock 223 WORDCLOCK SOURCE 223 Index S Appendix AW2400 Owner s Manual 283 Block diagram cS a S KG GS S eS a pesa SK va Y OJY3LS tno 0341S a EI 7 o Elle 7 O3YSLS ONS LHJ9NI FG pe IL LANO L03810 7 HO MOVHL ECD py EXNV O3YSLS Lino O243LS dief v vo LAO LOAYIG e HO MOVHL Lino INNO P 2 r XN v og H3LS L SINOHd K a o swonows ip No u A Y OSHALS ino HOLINOW D soe 7 gt 71038931S EA 13437 i NO HO Ol wr oma OO O AE Keeser oU LNO 91901 070S LOAYIG HO LAdNI g mz Leng NIH L OTOS 1010S IPC IL LNdNI Y3qYOO3Y el v L L93443 613431 NO LHASNI LYASNI YALA aen mo HALA a Lav uononp y ueg lt i LXNY lt LE sna 1 aa o LG sna o 013431 NO LHASNI LYASNI om dio panos YAHLIG Y UI MOVE OAHSLS YAqdHOOsY 1 71 OSYALS Se BWeS Y og3Y3LS z ino d punog i S S NO yoeI 1 0919 S 30G4 003Y lt YJHLIA 7 u dig punog HBHLIG yoegheld dd 3 UI NOVELL OSHSLS JAHA MYH Q9 43940934 S y CG A oro o 17038431S SR
390. ocal track prior to pitch correction move the cursor to this but ton and press ENTER Indicates the track to be edited the source track This field is only for display and cannot be edited Indicates the track and vir tual track to which the pro cessed source track will be recorded the destination track This field is only for display and cannot be edited Correcting a Vocal Track Pitch Fix 3 CONTROL field Selects the method of pitch correction shift from the three listed below e SCALE E Specify the scale via received MIDI notes to adjust the pitch For example if you play a chord on aconnected MIDI keyboard the pitch is shifted by the notes included in the chord NOTE The pitch is changed according to the received MIDI note e PANEL This lets you adjust the pitch by specifying a scale from the key board on the display 4 PARAMETERS field o TYPE Set this to an appropriate value to maximize the accuracy of the pitch correction Generally this should be set to Normal but for low pitched vocals it might be preferable to use the Male set ting and for high pitched vocals try the Female setting KEEP FORMANT button RER When this button is engaged the basic character timbre of the voice will not change when the pitch is corrected LI w m m O A O o ees Determines the pitch detection speed The shorter the setting the more quickly the pitc
391. ocessors on each channel Four band full parametric EQ and dynamics processing is provided on virtually every channel You can recall the desired preset from the library and use the panel knobs and keys to quickly adjust the settings Four high quality multi effect units built in The four built in effect units deliver a wide variety of effects including ambience effects such as reverb and delay modulation type effects such as chorus and flanger and guitar type effects such as distortion and amp simula tion These effects can be used either via send return or inserted into a desired channel Automix capability Full automix production power is provided with 13 motor faders for comprehensive fader control pan control scene recall and library recall capability I O slot for expansion with optional I O cards Expanded inputs and outputs can be provided in ADAT TASCAM AES EBU and other formats Optional DSP cards can also be used to provide extra signal processing capability via the I O slot E Recorder section 16 track Simultaneous Recording amp 24 track Simultaneous Playback 16 bit songs You can record multiple instrument tracks one by one or set up multiple mics to record a drum set or a live perfor mance by an entire band A stereo track for direct mix down of all 24 tracks is also provided letting you manage the multi track audio and the two track mix as a single data package 8 virtual tracks are avai
392. of percussive sounds Too slow an attack time makes some signals sound backwards For ducking this controls how soon the signal is ducked once the duck has been triggered With a fast attack time the signal is ducked almost immediately With a slow attack time ducking fades the signal Too fast an attack time may sound abrupt e Hold sets how long the gate stays open or the ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold level e Decay controls how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired A longer decay time produces a more natural gating effect allowing the natural decay of an instrument to pass through For ducking this determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain after the hold time has expired Gate Parameter list fs 44 1 kHz Parameter Threshold dB Range dB Attack ms Hold ms Decay ms Gate Parameter list e Compressor Parameter list Parameter Threshold dB Range dB Attack ms Hold ms Decay ms Ducking DUCKING Compressor Parameter list fs 44 1 kHz Threshold dB Range dB Attack ms Hold ms Decay ms Parameter Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB Knee Release ms EXPAND Threshold dB Range dB Attack ms Hold ms Decay ms Parameter Threshold dB
393. oints Jeck j d Before the channel EQ COMP INSERT EFF i HOHE 2 j a ITT LLL FF iS E OH poo T JE 2 Before the channel fader DEE mme TNSERT EFE mme vip IZE After the channel fader wad oO INSERT CEFE NONE 2 ii a ATT Crp FF TE T 8 8 OM oon C JE LEJ Compressor off Com MERT EFF Noe To A Refer to Using the Compressors on page 152 for details e You can move the cursor to the insert point and press the ENTER key to reverse the order of the COMP and an INSERT EFF NOTE e Since no EQ is provided on the effect send master channels the compressor can be inserted either pre fader or post fader ON OFF LVL knob e ON OFF Move the cursor to this position and press the ENTER key to turn the chan nel on or off This function is linked to the channel ON keys e LVL knob Move the cursor to this knob and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to adjust the channel level This function is linked to the channel faders Displaying the mix parameters for individual channels 7 INSERT EFF This parameter is used to insert an internal effect to a specified point in the channel or to specify an insert point for insertion of an external effect If you move the cursor to the field to the right of INSERT EFF and press the ENTER key a popup window will appear allowing selection of an internal effect or I O chan nel on an optional I O card ES e
394. ol This page displays all tracks side by side making it section will light easy to see the relationship between tracks and the cur rent location within the song D To listen to the recorded performance from TRACK Tote sons 528 85 CS the beginning press the RTZ a key to 47 inFuT 1 A 00 00 00 000 00 0 Ee return the counter display to zero and press the PLAY P key LU Poi 21 3 S e If you recorded from the middle of the song you can press the s IN key to move to the location at which you began recording 6 If you are satisfied with the recorded perfor mance save the song For details on sav ing gt p 57 If you decide to re do the recording press the UNDO REDO key to cancel the recording and repeat steps 2 6 BuiqqnpI n0 Ny 2 In the transport section hold down the REC key and press the PLAY P key Recording will begin 68 LU AW2400 Owner s Manual Punch in out If you make a mistake while overdubbing you can re record just the region in which you made the mistake This process is called punch in out Punch in out can be performed either as manual punch in out in which you switch between recording and playback manually or as auto punch in out in which recording and playback will switch automatically when you reach the locations you specify beforehand Manual punch in out Here s how to perform punch in out using the keys of the tran
395. om your monitor system or headphones e If the stereo meter does not respond even though the input channel level meter is showing the presence of a signal when the STEREO fader is raised check that the input channel is patched to the stereo bus gt p 105 That completes the initial setup and level adjustment pro cedure required to begin recording on the AW2400 Levels will have to be readjusted whenever you change the microphone or instrument input connections or change the output level of an instrument level changes will often occur when you change synth patches By using the GAIN knob to raise the level as far as pos sible without allowing distortion to occur you can ensure that the input signal is converted into digital form with the highest possible quality before it is input to the mixer sec tion Chapter 4 Listening to the demo song When the AW2400 is shipped from the factory its hard disk contains a demo song This chapter explains how to load and play back the demo song Loading the demo song Here s how to load the demo song from the hard disk Press the Work Navigate section SONG key The SONG screen will appear where you can save or load songs 2 Call the Song List page by either pressing the SONG key as many times as neces sary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the SONG key In this page you can select a song on the hard disk and load or delete it Dal Neu son
396. on WAV File Transfer USB Storage Mode 7 Move the cursor to the file list and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select the WAV file that you want to import When a LJ is included in the field enclosed by the dotted frame you can press the ENTER key to move down one level To move up one level display the 1 icon and press the ENTER key e Only 16 bit or 24 bit 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz mono or stereo WAV files can be imported Also WAV files having a different bit depth or sample rate from the song cannot be imported H Use the To TR To V TR and To Start fields to specify the track number virtual track num ber and starting location into which the WAV file will be imported NOTE e Any existing data at the import destination will be overwritten Be careful not to accidentally overwrite important data O When you have finished making the required settings move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the opera tion CONF RAAT OH Execute Way IMPORT o 10 To execute the import operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The import operation will begin If you move the cur sor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key the import operation will be cancelled AW2400 Owner s Manual 235 236 AW2400 Owner s Manual Initial Data Appendix Mastering library list Description In
397. on depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback WAVE Sine Tri E REV SYMPHO One input two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel Parameter REV TIME 0 3 99 0s Modulation waveform Description Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency REV SYM 0 100 Reverb and symphonic balance 0 all reverb 100 all symphonic FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri E REV gt SYMPHO One input two output reverb and symphonic effects in series Parameter REV TIME 0 3 99 0s Modulation waveform Description Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 00 100 Reverb density HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency
398. ong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus Noo P GO MM WARNING 12 Use only with the cart stand 11 Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer tripod bracket or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to CAL avoid injury from tip over 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE 98 6500 This product contains a high intensity lamp that contains a small amount of mercury Disposal of this material may be regulated due to environmental considerations For disposal information in the United States refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site w
399. onnecting the connector to the computer i the appropriate USB MIDI driver must be properly installed on the nal AW2400 hard disk from the computer and directly edit computer gt p 266 the data in place e Either the Windows XP SP1 or Mac OS X 10 3 or higher operating system is required for computer WAV file management with the AW2400 e USB Storage mode WAV files er lt __ WAV files Direct audio data editing is also possible Computer F ew RR o o o sg A oo o D n el ooo ooo ooo bk ooo AW2400 AW2400 Owner s Manual 229 WAV File Transfer USB Storage Mode WAV File Transfer USB Storage Mode In this mode you can directly access the AW2400 hard disk from the computer to manipulate and manage the audio data WAV files The following two methods can be used E Using the Transport Folder This method uses the Transport folder on the AW2400 as the transit point for transferring files to and from the computer WAV files are first exported to the Transport folder on the AW2400 hard disk from the audio tracks The AW 2400 is then connected to the computer via a USB cable the Transport folder is accessed and opened from the computer and the WAV files are copied to the com puter hard disk Files to be moved from the computer to the AW2400 are first copied from the computer to the AW 2400 Transport folder and then impor
400. onome button Switches the metronome on off 4 Metronome knob Adjusts the volume of the metronome The value above the knob shows the current setting in dB 5 START button Specifies the current location as the start point of the sound clip the location at which playback will begin The current location is shown in minutes seconds mil liseconds to the left 6 END button Specifies the current location as the end point of the sound clip the location at which playback will end The current location is shown in minutes seconds mil liseconds to the left 7 CLIP button Turn this button on to enable the START button 6 and END button 6 settings NOTE e The Recorder section cannot be used for recording and play back while the SOUND CLIP screen is showing 44 AW2400 Owner s Manual 3 To use the metronome move the cursor to the metronome button and press the ENTER key 4 To change the tempo of the metronome move the cursor to the tempo value and turn the DATA JOG dial e The time signature of the metronome is determined by the tempo map setting that was active prior to accessing the SOUND CLIP screen Please be aware that the setting can not be edited from this screen For details on tempo map set tings gt p 62 D Hold down the Transport section REC key and press the PLAY B key The metronome will start and the counter display will advance The SOUND CLIP screen counter always
401. operation by repeatedly pressing the track channel s SEL key e EQ and dynamics setting will be set to a flat state for track channels corresponding to tracks that are selected as a record destination e When a single track is selected as the record destination the pan of the corresponding track channel will automatically be set to center When paired tracks are selected as the record destination the pan settings of the odd and even numbered tracks will automatically be set to left and right respectively e To cancel all connections move the cursor to the SAFE but ton and press the ENTER key NOTE P e The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as Tel mute but you can still record to muted tracks e Since 24 bit songs can have a maximum of 12 play tracks gt p 165 tracks 13 24 are muted and will not play back H Proceed with recording For details on recording refer to Track recording gt p 47 AW2400 Owner s Manual l Patching and signal flow 103 Output signal patching Output signal patching The PATCH screen Output page lets you select the signals that are assigned to the AW2400 s OMNI OUT jacks DIGITAL STEREO OUT connector and the output channels of an I O card installed in the I O slot To call this page press the Work Navigate section 3 D ST OUT ASSIGN field PATCH key Move the cursor to this field and use the DATA JOG dial This page contains the fol
402. opy destination starting location COPY TIMES 1 99 Number of copies o GRID 4 ON OFF indicated by highlighted GRID text when on Switch the grid function 1 V TR can be selected only if From TR 1 24 1 amp 2 238 amp 24 or ST 2 Measure lock function 6 Start Measure Lock 6 End Measure Lock Measure Lock allows a measure beat to be specified within a region to be copied so that it Pe ee Cee ee ee 08 Bese E aligns with the specified mea H sure beat in the copy destination For example in a situation in which you have an abstractor 200 0O OO m S rubato segment before the in COPY TIMES ian tempo performance begins you can Measure Lock the beginning of the in tempo segment so that it is copied to the appropriate location in the destination To use the measure lock function move the cursor to the measure display field of From Start or From End specify the measure beat location that will be the reference point for the matching and press the ENTER key A lock icon will appear beside the value that you specified and the measure lock function will be turned on for From Start or From End This can be turned on for either Start or End not both While the measure lock function is on the value of that measure dis play format setting will be fixed and cannot be modified In this state if you use the counter display format field to specify the From Start and From End
403. or THRU output of MIDI change messages are set up here messages received via the MIDI IN connector or USB e ECHO button TX Received MIDI messages connector or digital I O card input port If MIDT and other than program and control USB 1 are selected for the two THRU boxes THRU change are re transmitted output will be as follows echoed via the MIDI OUT THRU connector or USB con Messages received at the MIDI IN connector will be nector or digital I O card output THRU output via the USB output port 1 port e Messages received at the USB input port 1 will be REMOTE OUT b THRU output via the MIDI OUT THRU connector Ox Selects the connector port via which MIDI messages will MIDI messages generated by the AW2400 itself are not be transmitted when the MIDI Remote function is active transmitted via connectors ports selected for THRU out when the REMOTE screen is showing Refer to put page 204 for details on the MIDI Remote function ware EP NOTE e The same connector port cannot be specified for both boxes e The same connector port as selected in the PORT field or THRU e The same connector port as selected in the PORT field or box cannot be selected here REMOTE OUT box cannot be selected here MIDI Synchronization Message Setup The MIDI screen Setting 2 page allows selection of MIDI messages used for synchronization with external equipment MTC and MIDI clock as well as messages used for
404. or practicing a part This chapter explains how sound clips can be recorded using an instrument or microphone connected to an input jack Recording a sound clip The post fader signal of the stereo output channel can be recorded directly to a sound clip For playback the signal will be sent to the stereo output channel immediately before the stereo fader EQ and dynamics cannot be applied to sound clip playback Signal flow when using a sound clip PHONES STEREO OUT MONITOR OUT BAL 4dB BAL 4dB MIC LINE INPUT Input tout channels ourpu channel 8 STEREO 5 1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 7 15 8 16 BUS 1 BUS 2 AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 Metronome Mixer section AW2400 Owner s Manual Recording to a sound clip 43 Recording a sound clip 1 Connect the required instrument and or microphone input sources and set up the levels as described in Connection and Setup on page 37 2 Press the Locate section SOUND CLIP key The SOUND CLIP screen will appear where you can record and play sound clips O Ginz Heu Sona ee 00 00 O00 SOUND CLIP ESTARI METR EE CLF Gmm op op eoa ERD Gp dijo punos e o Bulpso098y o Tempo Sets the tempo of the metronome used when recording sound clips 2 Time signature Shows the time signature of the metronome 3 Metr
405. ore reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency REV CHO 0 100 Reverb and chorus balance 0 all reverb 100 all chorus FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0 100 Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 00 100 Pitch modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform E REV gt CHORUS One input two output reverb and chorus effects in series Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency REV BAL 0 100 Reverb and chorused reverb balance 0 all chorused reverb 100 all reverb FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0 100 Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0 100 Pitch modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform E REV FLANGE One input two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel Range Description REV TIME 0
406. orm you want to view 4 Move the cursor to the WAVE button and press the ENTER key The WAVE DISPLAY popup window will appear This popup window displays the waveform of the audio data recorded in the track selected in step 3 1 24 or ST L R ey eer tr ee PETE TTT tt Tt rr GT rr dr GETT SB ap EEn 5 EXIT da TRACK Indicates the currently selected track number You can also move the cursor to this field and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to switch tracks 2 Counter Displays the location of the vertical line pointer indi cating the current location in the WAVE DISPLAY popup window You can move the cursor to this field and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to move the current location forward or backward 3 SCALE By moving the cursor to this area and using the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys you can expand or shrink the waveform display along the time axis The value of this field indicates the length of time displayed in the WAVE DISPLAY popup window If you select 1SEC the distance from the left to right edge of the screen will correspond to one second Selecting SAMPLE will produce the highest magnifi cation and each horizontal pixel will correspond to one sample 4 AMP By moving the cursor to this area and using the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys you can expand or shrink the waveform display along the amplitude axis The value of this field indicate
407. ote function 206 Remotely controlling a tone generator module 207 21 Utility functions 209 Using the test tone oscillator nnnnnnenennnenennennni 209 AW2400 Preferences cccccceeccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeees 210 Initializing the internal hard dek 212 AW2400 Owner s Manual 22 Creating an audio CD 213 Creating an auto 213 Types of media that you can use with the CD RW drive 213 Writing an audio CD EE 214 Basic settings for the CD RW drve 215 Writing audio data 216 Writing Track At e TEE 217 Writing Disc At OUnce 218 Finalizing CD R RW media 220 Erasing CD RW media A 221 Playing an audio CD E 222 23 Digital Input Output amp Optional Card Settings 223 Wordclock and Cascade Settings esn0001eaan 223 Select the Wordclock Gource 223 Fine Adjustment Of Overall Song Pitch Vart poptch 226 Cascade connecting External Devices 226 Check the Status Of the Digital Input Signal 227 Plug in Card Settings cccccceccccceeeesseseesseseeeeeeeens 228 24 USB 229 What You Can Do With UG 229 WAV File Transfer USB Storage Mode 230 Switching to the USB Storage Mode 000000nn 230 Exiting the USB Storage Mode 232 Copying Exported WAV Files To the COMputer E 233 Importing Copied WAV Files From the Computer 234 Appendix 237 Mastering library Iert 291 EQ Parameter list sciocssauncacteandacacgdesdeenantinepasaouvren
408. otted frame is the currently selected tempo map event 2 LOCATE button By moving the cursor to this button and pressing the ENTER key you can move the song to the location of the tempo map event currently selected in the list 3 NEW button To create an event at the beginning of the measure fol lowing the last step move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key 4 INSERT button To insert a blank event at the step preceding the tempo map event currently selected in the list move the cur sor to this button and press the ENTER key 5 DELETE button To delete the tempo map event currently selected in the list move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key 6 STEP Indicates the step number of the tempo map event D MEASURE Indicates the location measure beat of the tempo map event METER TEMPO These fields show the time signature and tempo of each tempo map event AW2400 Owner s Manual Song management A ee 175 Creating a tempo map jugwebeuew Duoe Wee 176 2 Move the cursor to the item that you want to edit and use the DATA JOG dial to edit the value If the METER or TEMPO is move the cursor to the item and press the ENTER key before you edit the value NOTE P e The METER and TEMPO at the beginning of the song cannot ZE A be set to e You cannot change the METER value to other than for a step that
409. own and bouncing x Q O 3 ES o C O D o O D Seen 9 E LU 74 Bouncing is the action of mixing the signals recorded on multiple tracks and recording the mixed result into one to four vacant tracks This action is also called ping pong recording For example if you ve recorded individ ual instruments of a drum set on multiple tracks you can bounce these tracks down to two tracks and then switch the bounce source tracks to different virtual tracks so that they will be free to record new instruments Bouncing differs from mixdown in the following ways e The destination of the track channels is Bus 1 Bus 2 rather than the stereo bus e The recording destination will be a vacant audio track or tracks e You can t add the signals of input channels Signal flow during bouncing Effect send Internal Effects j BAL 4dB Track 7 Tacks ko i The diagram below shows the signal flow during bounc ing This diagram shows an example in which the track 1 8 signals are bounced to tracks 9 12 After bouncing you can switch the virtual tracks for tracks 1 8 and use these tracks to record other instrumental performances PHONES MONITOR OUT BAL 4dB Recorder E section STEREO OUT Track channels Effect return channels E E E E E 1 2 3 4 13 14 15 16 1 9 2 10 BUS 1 B
410. p gt on 4 Bon 4 ON p hel bd a Di D ON key out ON key lit If you press the ON key once again during playback the playback will be stopped Pressing the STOP W key will stop playback of all tracks Playback start Playback stop Kai WS ay ON key lit D ON key out STOP W key Recorded tracks can be registered in up to four groups A D and playback of those tracks can then be started and stopped as a group In this case pressing the ON key for any track in the group will start playback of the entire group Press the ON key a second time to stop playback of the group Recorded section Track 1 ZN Group A Track 2 Group A Track 3 Group A Track 1 Group A Stop Track 2 Group A Track 3 Group A S Stop bond SS lt gt AS gt Any ON key for tracks 1 3 The faders can be used to start playback instead of the ON keys the Fader Start function Playback of a track or group including the track will start from the beginning of the song when a track fader for which the Fader Start function is turned on is raised above the position Playback will stop at the end of the recorded data Play back can be stopped by returning the fader to the posi tion Playback start Playback stop Track operations and editing e ni AW2400 Owner s Manual 133 The Trigger Track Function Guipa pue suoljesodo yoe Koz 134
411. pear If Selected Channel knob l is operated while the DYN key is engaged multi ple compressor parameters are adjusted simulta neously to change the overall effect of the compressor the actual change will depend on the preset selected from the library e If a Selected Channel knob is operated while the AUTO DIS PLAY function is OFF rather than the display switching to the Comp Edit page a popup window containing the relevant parameters will appear For details about the AUTO DISPLAY function refer to AW2400 Preferences on page 210 Handy Recording Functions This section describes a number of functions that are handy for recording Using the Metronome Activating the metronome and setting the tempo and vol ume Call the TRACK screen View page by either pressing the Work Navigate section TRACK key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the TRACK key TRACK al Heu Song RE IMpuT 100 DD D DD EI TRACE UIEU 101 11 CARARE T I META 4 3 d6dB Sr a Metronome button Switches the metronome on off 2 Metronome knob Adjusts the metronome volume level The current value is shown above the knob in dB units 62 AW2400 Owner s Manual 2 Move the cursor to the metronome button and press the ENTER key The metronome will be turned on In this state the metronome will sound during recording and playback 3 The metronome will begin sounding wh
412. pied from a computer into the Transport folder into an audio track of the AW2400 For details on the parameters and operation of the IMPORT USB WAV command refer to Importing Cop ied WAV Files From the Computer gt p 234 IMPORT TRACK Imports audio data recorded in another song into an audio track of the current song For details on the parameters and operation of the IMPORT TRACK command refer to Importing audio data from another song gt p 145 EXPORT Exports the specified region of an audio track to a WAV file in the Transport folder For details on the parameters and operation of the EXPORT command refer to Copying Exported WAV Files To the Computer gt p 233 MERGE Audio playback performance can be improved by using this command to merge a number of separate regions sec tions of audio data created in separate recording passes in a specified track into one continuous region The merge command creates a continuous region from the beginning of the track to the end of the last region on the track and sections of the track that contained no regions are replaced with audio silence MERGE E Parameter list Parameter Explanation 1 24 A single audio track 1 From TR A pair of adjacent odd numbered 1832 23824 even numbered audio tracks 2 From V TR 1 8 Virtual track number Importing audio data WAV files Importing audio data WAV
413. player regarding CD RW support E The sound skips while playing an audio CD that you created e Depending on the CD R media you use there may be dif ferences in the quality of the completed CD Troubleshooting WAV File Transfer To and From a Computer E The computer doesn t recognize the AW2400 hard disk e Is the USB cable properly connected e Is your computer running the appropriate operating sys tem Windows XP Professional Home Edition SP1 or higher or Mac OS X 10 3 or higher Operation is not guaranteed with other operating systems e To use a Macintosh computer running Mac OS X 10 3 it is necessary to first initialize the AW2400 hard disk with the cluster set to 32K e Is the USB storage mode turned ON E Can t find WAV files copied from the com puter to the Transport folder e Have you copied WAV files with a different bit depth from the song Have you copied WAV files with a different sampling frequency from the song E Can t find WAV files copied from the com puter to the Audio folder e Did you change the bit depth of the WAV file when editing it with waveform editing software For 24 bit songs audio data is saved in the Audio folder in 32 bit WAV file format e Have you changed the file name e Did you copy the file s to a different folder E Can t copy files from the computer e Files larger than 4 GB cannot be copied e When connecting to a USB 2 0 connector of your com puter u
414. ple if you select preset XG 1 16 the AW2400 s faders will control the volume of parts 1 16 of your XG tone generator and ON keys 1 16 will control the on off status of parts 1 16 4 If necessary select the REMOTE screen 1 12 or 13 16 pages and set the MIDI channel assignments to the faders and ON keys as required The MIDI channel assignments on each page are described in Using the MIDI Remote function pre sets on page 204 D Operate the AW2400 faders and ON keys The messages assigned to the faders and ON keys will be transmitted via the MIDI OUT THRU connec tor and the parameters of your tone generator module will change accordingly 208 AW2400 Owner s Manual Chapter 21 Utility functions This chapter explains the AW2400 s various utility functions Using the test tone oscillator The Oscillator page of the UTILITY screen lets you send the signal of the AW2400 s built in test oscillator to the desired bus To call this page press the Work Navigate section UTIL ITY as many times as necessary or press the F1 key after pressing the UTILITY key UTILITY leegen Zoe Kg Heil 20 rr JIdeiIzgoeg A L Ho DE F m dc INPUT 1 1600 HD UU 000 i 111 11 CARARE D TTT TTT OTTO D E TTT TTT OTTO E 2 TTT TTT OTTO 2 5 TTT TTT OTTO IS 30 TTT TTT OTTO 340 45 POPP Perret reer rere eee TTT OTTO 45 ILiR 2L ab 1 2 4 1 2 3 4 ke BUER e
415. punch out 6 REC key If you hold down this key and press the PLAY P gt key while the recorder is stopped recording will begin If you hold down this key and press the PLAY P gt key during playback you will switch from playback to recording punch in AW2400 Owner s Manual H O O st lt x Ze O E O gt O O Ben 27 Parts of the AW2400 and what they do OOPEMV 9y Dupont gt 28 Rear panel YAMAHA SEN moar p r MONITOR our our ereREo OUT _ ot qmm 62020 e00 C2020 O20 O20 8 O O 6 D O 4 O tege FeQQO000s Oe INPUT eO INSERT 1 0 o0 E INSERT 1 0 A MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 XLR These are XLR 3 31 type balanced input jacks Nominal input level is from 46 dBu to 4 dBu Connector wiring is as shown below MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 TRS phone These are TRS phone type balanced input jacks Nominal input level is from 46 dBu to 4 dBu Connector wiring is as shown below INSERT I O jacks 1 2 These TRS phone jacks allow external signal processing gear to be inserted Male XLR connector 1 ground 3 cold tere 2 hot Tip hot 1 4 TRS phone plug Ce ee E Sleeve ground Ring cold into the signal received at the MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 2 Nominal input level is O dBu and the pin assignments are as follows Sleeve ground
416. put Signal 61 Handy Recording Functions ccccsssseeeesseeeeeeeeees 62 Using the Meironome 62 Switching Krut 63 Using the Undo Uer 64 7 Overdubbing 65 About overdubbing 65 Assigning the input signal to a track cccseeeeeeeees 66 Setting the mix balance and oan 67 Overdubbing ses cicinestdeatactasacddccnseceeancdceasteasaesaxddceuceeentts 68 PUIG lo UE 69 Manual ei Diaen e EE 69 Auto ei Ein Le Te De TG 70 8 Mixdown and bounce operations 73 About mixdown and boumncmg 73 Mixdown procedure ssssseeessssrnrrrtrreeresrrrrrrrrrrereee 75 Playing back the stereo Irack 78 Bounce ping pong recording procedure s 0 79 Convenient functions for mixdown bounce 82 Fader Group assignments 82 Mute Group assignments sensnnnenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 83 Using the Solo function cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 84 H Transport Locate Operation 87 The Transport Section Keys s a 87 Move To a Specified Location ccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 87 Using th TOC ALON ege eege 88 Using bn 90 Adjusting the position of a locate point or marker 91 Adjusting the position of a locate point 91 Adjusting the position of a marker 92 Erasing a locate point Or marker 93 Repeat playback of a specific region the A B Repeat function ccseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 93 Finding a location while monitoring the sound the Nudge functio
417. puter to the Transport folder to be imported into specified audio tracks 1 Switch to the USB Storage Mode gt p 230 and display the AW2400 internal hard disk on the computer screen 2 Copy the WAV files from the computer to the AW2400 Transport folder The Transport folder is located in the AW2400 2 drive 3 When the files have been copied discon nect the AW2400 from the computer and exit the USB Storage Mode gt p 232 4 Call the EDIT screen Edit page by either pressing the Work Navigate section EDIT key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the EDIT key 5 Move the cursor to the edit command field and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select IMPORT USB WAV D Press the ENTER key to confirm the selected edit command The display will appear as follows O HALE ORS O HAVE DIRI HSH Aan DSDS 20 10 Edit OF Temes Mar SZ Mark Adi S File list This shows the WAV files and folders directories in the Transport folder Move the cursor to the list and use the DATA JOG dial or the INC DEC keys to specify the WAV file that you want to import 2 FILE This indicates the name of the WAV file or folder The icons shown here have the following meaning e baal Indicates a WAV file EE eee Indicates a folder in the same level You can select this icon and press the ENTER key to move down one level E KEE You
418. qqnps8AQ NY D Hold down the Locate section SET key and press the OUT key The current location will be registered as the Out point a gt e If you want to set the In and Out points more precisely you can use the Nudge function gt p 94 which repeatedly plays a short region before or after the current location or use the WAVE DISPLAY popup window gt p 69 which lets you view the contents of the track as a waveform e The In point and Out point will be updated each time you record The location at which you last started recording will be registered as the In point and the location at which you last stopped recording will be registered as the Out point 6 Press the Locate section AUTO PUNCH key The AUTO PUNCH key will light and the Auto Punch in out function will be enabled You will auto matically locate to a point a specific distance the pre roll time ahead of the In point This point is called the pre roll point NOTE D e If the auto punch in out region is too short or too long less than approximately 100 msec or greater than one hour an error message will appear and you won t be able to specify the Out point e You can t change the In Out points if the AUTO PUNCH key is lit If you need to change the In Out points you must first defeat the Auto Punch in out function 70 amp AW2400 Owner s Manual 7 To rehearse the auto punch in out press the PLAY b gt key Wh
419. r HIGH mode EQ can be adjusted either by calling the PAN EQ screen and using the graphic knobs or by using the phys ical controllers in the Selected Channel section The EQ Att page includes the following items E EQ Control via the PAN EQ Screen ial hob EE EE a ee CO EQ ON OFF button Adjusting equalization via the PAN EQ screen aieka eTO Use the Layer section INPUT SEL SEL ATT Attenuation knob and STEREO SEL keys to select the chan Attenuates the signal immediately before the EQ stage nel for which EQ is to be controlled over a range of 96 to 12 0 dB This is used mainly to prevent the signal from clipping when you use the EQ 2 Press the Selected Channel section PAN to boost a specific frequency region EQ key so that its indicator lights Press TYPE field Selected Channel knob 2 3 or 4 and the Selects the EQ algorithm type When the TYPE I but PAN EQ screen will appear ton is on the same EQ algorithm that was used in the 3 P the Dispi ti F31 k 02R is selected The TYPE II button selects the latest ress the Display section F3 key or press EQ algorithm which provides minimum inter band the PAN EQ key as many times as neces interference TYPE II can only be selected for the sary until the EQ Att page appears track channels stereo output channels and bus master channels 4 Response curve Se2_Nel_sona ES Graphically indicates the approximate response of
420. r by pressing the F4 key after pressing the AUTOMIX key Use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select the library number to which the data is to be stored The data highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for storage Move the cursor to the STORE button and press the ENTER key The NAME EDIT popup window will appear e Pressing the F2 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the STORE button 4 As required enter a name for the selected Automix data move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key refer to page 32 for details on name entry The automix setting will be stored Recalling Automix settings Automix Library Operation Recalling stored Automix data from the library 1 Call the AUTOMIX screen Library page by either pressing the AUTOMIX key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F4 key after pressing the AUTOMIX key Use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select the library data to be recalled The data highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for recall Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key A popup window confirming the recall operation will appear e Pressing the F1 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the RECALL button 4 To actually recall the selected data move Erasing Automix settings the cursor to the OK button an
421. rame ters as a scene at the beginning of the song When the following operations are performed this scene will always be recalled at the beginning Also if you record a program change number corresponding to this scene at the beginning of a sequencer track the scene will automatically be recalled each time the sequence is played back refer to Switching AW2400 scenes from an external MIDI device on page 201 for details Connecting to External Equipment H Play back the AW2400 song from the begin ning When the AW2400 begins playback it will transmit a Start message and MIDI Clock messages to the sequencer and the sequencer will begin running in synchronization with the AW2400 Q Operate the AW2400 s mix parameters fader pan etc as required The control changes assigned to each parameter will be recorded on the sequencer The type of mix parameters that can be recorded will depend on the setting of the CONTROL CHANGE MODE field gt p 195 10 When you are finished recording stop play back of the AW2400 song 1 Set the sequencer to the playback standby mode recall the previously stored scene and start AW2400 playback from the begin ning of the song The recorded control changes will be transmitted to the AW2400 and the corresponding mix parameters will change accordingly If necessary you can use the editing functionality of your sequencer to edit the val ues and timing of the control
422. range of 50 200 Pitch Change lets you modify the pitch over a range of up or down one octave You can use the Undo function to undo the results of as many as the last fifteen editing oper ations A variety of Locate methods and auto punch in out Eight locate points start end relative zero A B in out quick locator and 99 markers can be assigned at any desired point in the song for quick access via Locate oper ations Auto punch in out and A B repeat playback func tions are also provided The AW2400 also has a metronome that follows the tempo map Sound Clip function The Sound Clip function lets you record and play back an input signal without using the recorder tracks You can use this function to make quick sketches of song or arrange ment ideas You can transfer recorded sound clip data to the recorder as required Vocal Editing with Pitch Fix A Pitch Fix function is provided to allow precise adjust ment of the pitch of a vocal track as well as the generation of chorus parts from a main vocal line This feature can also be used to change the character of a vocal sound E CD RW drive A dedicated CD RW drive is installed in the AW2400 You can produce an audio CD containing the stereo mixes of songs recorded on the hard disk Markers assigned within a song can also be used as the CD track numbers You can even use advanced techniques such as assigning more than one track number within a single song The
423. ransport MIDI OUT SLOT OUT SW3 REMOTE Fader Sel PGM CHG SW1 PROGRAM CHANGE o lt E CTRL CHG CONTROL CHANGE o c MMC MASTER SW4 MMC o c O MIDI SYNC MTC MTC MIDI SYNC CLK MIDI CLOCK ECHO ON ECHO OUT SW1 REMOTE OFF SW2 REMOTE ON Remote SW3 REMOTE ON SW4 REMOTE OFF or REMOTE ON Normal 3 AW2400 settings and operation 3 1 MIDI Setup Set basic MIDI operation 3 1 1 Tx PORT Specify the output port for MIDI communication 3 1 2 Rx PORT Specify the input port for MIDI communication 3 1 3 MIDI Tx Ch This sets the MIDI channel that will be used for transmission 3 1 4 MIDI Rx Ch This sets the MIDI channel that will be used for reception 3 1 5 PROGRAM CHANGE MODE Enable disable reception and transmission If MIDI Rx Ch is set to OMNI these messages will be received regardless of their MIDI channel If MIDI Tx Ch is set to ECHO the received messages will be echoed at the transmission port 3 1 6 CONTROL CHANGE MODE Enable disable reception and transmission If this is enabled you can specify the correspondence between control numbers and operations of the mixer section Three modes are available for correspondence with control numbers For mode 1 transmission and reception will occur without regard to the MIDI Tx Ch and MIDI Rx Ch settings For modes 2 and 3 reception will occur without regard to MIDI channel if you set MIDI Rx Ch to OMNI If MIDI Tx Ch is set
424. re in the same way with a clean dry cloth e Do not write on the disc or affix labels to it e Do not wipe the disc with chemicals or detergents e Do not bend or drop the disc AW2400 Owner s Manual Internal Hard Disk Precautions e During some hard disk operations a small amount of vibration might be felt at the control panel and you might hear some mechanical noises This is normal e Do not subject the unit to strong physical shock Excessive physical shock can damage the internal hard disk e Always turn the power off when moving the unit from one location to another Data on the internal hard disk can be lost or corrupted if the unit is moved while the power is on Copyright Notice Copyright and other intellectual property laws in various countries permit reproduction of copyrighted materi als under certain requirements The observance of applicable laws for use of this product however is your responsibility Yamaha disclaims any liability for violation of such laws in association with the use of this product Although this product is designed for original music production it can be utilized to make reproduction of copyrighted music and other sound products While certain reproduction and use of reproduced materials are permitted under applicable laws such reproduction and use without license may constitute copyright infringe ment and other violation of laws Since violation of such laws can have serious consequences you m
425. rect virtual track and then save the song 2 Call the CD screen Write page by either pressing the Work Navigate section CD key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the CD key 3 Insert a CD R RW disc in the drive move the cursor to the TRACK AT ONCE button and press the ENTER key The inserted CD RW will be automatically checked a gt e If data has already been written on the inserted CD RW disc a popup window will appear immediately after step 3 asking whether you want to erase the data If you want to erase the entire disc move the cursor to the OK button If you want to cancel the audio CD write operation move the cursor to the CANCEL button Then press the ENTER key 4 Move the cursor to the ADD button and press the ENTER key The track list will show information track number song name size of the stereo track for the song that will be written to track 1 of the CD ES e When you move the cursor to the ADD button and press the ENTER key a new song will be added following the existing songs e By using the INSERT button instead of the ADD button you can insert a new song immediately before the song that is selected in the list e You can use the DELETE button to delete the currently selected song from the track list Writing audio data 5 Move the cursor to the dotted frame in the track list and use the DATA JOG dial or the INC DEC keys to se
426. rent screen In some cases the tabs also become additional function buttons when the SHIFT key is pressed When addi tional functions are available an E mark will appear in the lower left corner of the display Accessing a screen page When you want to edit an internal setting of the AW2400 or to edit a parameter that cannot be operated by a fader or knob on the top panel you will need to access the desired screen and page Press the key or knob for the desired screen The keys and knobs of various sections listed below have their own screens and the corresponding screen will be displayed when you press a key or knob e All Keys in the Work Navigate section e All keys in the Quick Navigate section e The METER key in the Display section e The VIEW DYN AUX EFFET PAN EQ keys of the Selected Channel section e All Knobs of the Selected Channel section e All keys of the Scene Automix USB section e The REMOTE key of the Layer section e The SOUND CLIP key of the Locate section ES e Press a SELECTED CHANNEL knob after pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL DYN AUX EFFECT or PAN EQ key to access the related display screen e When you switch screens the page that was last used in that screen will be displayed 2 Use the F1 F4 keys to select different pages within a screen The F1 F4 keys correspond to the tabs as follows Sona List E S Restore S Settina amp F1 key
427. reo track exceeds the writable length of the media you can create an audio CD by adjusting the start point end point so that the region is within the allowable length gt p 88 Media written using Disc At Once will be finalized auto matically and can be played back by a CD RW drive or CD player that supports that type of media However no further data can be written to a disc that was written using Disc At Once Basic settings for the CD RW drive Basic settings for the CD RW drive Before you actually write data to a CD you will need to make basic settings for the CD RW drive 1 Call the Setting page by either pressing the 2 Move the cursor to the AUDIO WRITE Work Navigate section CD key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F3 key after pressing the CD key The CD screen Setting page will appear Bes Heu CO mPuTT Je DU EG __ KR RE ba 1 00 00 111 11 EARANN CD _ SETTING AUDIO HAITE COAH MEDIA ERASE T SPEED ix Si ETHEL PERFECTLY TYPE TEST WRENS UNDERRUN om PROTECT W VlSBs DATA WRITE SPEED x 3 TYPE ieee Wis Plas A Settins FF AUDIO WRITE SPEED Selects the speed at which audio data will be written to CD R RW media 2 AUDIO WRITE TYPE Selects the write method to be used when writing audio data to CD R RW media 3 UNDERRUN PROTECT button Enables disables the function that prevents buffer underrun an error that can occur when d
428. responding track is in record ready mode For example if input channel and track are con nected the top panel keys will be as follows 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN N Vly My Vly Vly Vly Vly Vly Vly De Ya N E N Se bh s ki a N S N P N al dech de dech NV NV NV VM VM NV NV NV LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK K PEAK SOP 3 E ef N e gt 4 SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL odd pi aaa 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 7 18 19 20 21 22 23 Tr ack channels Layer section TRACK 1 12 key lit The indication in the screen will be as follows mes T 5 ES e You can also select the record destina tion track by pressing a track channel s SEL key e The same internal connection will be S established even if you perform steps 3 E and 4 in the reverse order Lal LD A DA e The fader will automatically be set to 0 dB for input channels that are internally connected to a track e If an input channel is selected as a recording source its assignment to the stereo bus will automatically be turned off If you want to monitor the signal you re recording you ll need to raise the fader of the recording destination track channel e EQ and dynamics settings will be set to a flat state for track channels corresponding to tracks selected as record
429. ress the ENTER key to confirm the selection DATA JOG dial l a key gt i key Select tracks 5 To exit the CD Play function move the cur sor to the CD PLAY MODE button and press the ENTER key e The CD PLAY MODE button can be switched on off only while CD playback is stopped e While the CD PLAY MODE button is on the CD RW drive will be locked and it will not be possible to eject the disc Chanter 23 Digital Input Output amp Optional Card Settings This section covers settings that apply to digital I O and optional I O cards Wordclock and Cascade Settings Wordclock source selection and settings for Vari pitch and cascade connection are made via the DIO screen Setting page To call this page press the Work Navigate section DIO key as many times as necessary or press the F1 key after Select the Wordclock Source pressing the DIO key Wordclock refers to the clock signal that provides the basic timing for all digital audio signals When transfer ring digital audio signals between the AW2400 and an mme Sans ETAN external device such as a computer based DAW Digital mPUT 00 00 00 000 oCh Audio Workstation or HDR Hard Disk Recorder it is necessary to ensure that both devices are synchronized to the same wordclock signal If the wordclock used by the two devices is not perfectly synchronized the digital audio cannot be accurately transferred and severe noise will
430. result in the unit being dropped which hold the plug itself and not the cord Pulling by the cord can damage it could damage the unit and or cause personal injury Do not block the vents This device has ventilation holes at the top front rear to prevent the internal temperature from becoming too high In particular do not place the device on its side or upside down Inadequate ventilation can result in overheating possibly causing damage to the device s or even fire Do not use the device in the vicinity of a TV radio stereo equipment mobile phone or other electric devices Doing so may result in noise both in the device itself and in the TV or radio next to it e Before moving the device remove all connected cables e When setting up the device make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible If some trouble or malfunction occurs immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet e Avoid setting all equalizer controls and faders to their maximum Depending on the condition of the connected devices doing so may cause feedback and may damage the speakers e Do not expose the device to excessive dust or vibrations or extreme cold or heat such as in direct sunlight near a heater or in a car during the day to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components 1 2 G amp AW2400 Owner s Manual CroD ITT e Before connecting the devic
431. resume repeat playback regardless of the current position 5 Press the REPEAT key to cancel repeat playback The REPEAT key indicator will go out and the A B Repeat function will be cancelled If you cancel the A B Repeat function during repeat playback normal playback will continue from that point e If you perform a record operation while the A B Repeat func tion is engaged the A B Repeat function will be temporarily disabled AW2400 Owner s Manual Transport Locate Operation E 93 Finding a location while monitoring the sound the Nudge function uoleJedO 9 e907 JIOdsueL La 94 Finding a location while monitoring the sound the Nudge function Nudge is a function that repeatedly plays a short region before or after the current location By using the Nudge function you can find a precise location while listening to playback This is use ful when you need to specify a location precisely such as when specifying auto punch in out points or when editing the contents of a track Locate to the vicinity of the point you want to find 2 Press the JOG ON key while the transport is stopped The JOG ON key will light and the Nudge function will be engaged A fixed region referred to as the nudge time starting at the current location will play repeatedly 3 To move the current location forward turn the DATA JOG dial to the right To move the current location backward turn the
432. rior to the EQ stage are displayed e The PEAK HOLD button setting affects all METER pages when this button is on e Pressing the F1 key while holding the Display section SHIFT 6 PRE FADER button key has the same effect as the PEAK HOLD button Pre fader levels levels prior to the faders are displayed when this button is on 7 POST FADER button Post fader levels levels after the faders are displayed when this button is on PEAK HOLD button This button switches the level meter peak hold function on off 98 LU AW2400 Owner s Manual Chapter 11 Patching and signal flow This chapter explains patching and channel signal flow Input signal patching To record a mic or instrument connected to the AW2400 you can use either of two recording methods Direct Recording or Mixed Recording The patching method will depend on the record ing method you use E Direct Recording With this method only one input channel is assigned to each recorder track Although direct recording requires the same number of tracks as the number of input channels you use it has the advantage that you will be free to adjust the volume pan stereo position and EQ of each track after it has been recorded Input channel 15 Input channel 16 Audio track 1 Audio track 2 Audio track 3 Audio track 4 Audio track 23 Audio track 24 E Mixed Recording With this method you can send multiple input channels to Bus 1 or Bus 2 and a
433. rker uo eiado 9 e907 Odsued La 92 3 Move the cursor to the locate point value that you want to adjust and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to change the value A Change START Position popup window will ask you for confirmation when you attempt to change the Start point value Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key and then change the value NOTE D e Changing the Start point will cause locations already recorded in a track to move relative to the measure lines defined by the tempo map Please keep this in mind if you are using measure display for the metronome 4 To adjust the location of a quick locator point move the cursor to the LOCATOR button in the Quick Locator Marker filed and press the ENTER key When the LOCATOR button is on the Quick Locator Marker field will list the quick locate points that have been registered LOCATOR MARKER position mmm nannan penuaan pennnnn pununnn ponannnnan pununnnnan pannun Kritt O Bi D I BeBe Bee BATT A GH Ga 20 aaa AiG pi GZ GG e8 22 GGG Aza 6l HARKER Hd BHP 18 Dn Bde Di List Lists the quick locator points that have been regis tered The line that is enclosed by a dotted frame is selected for editing 2 Quick locator points These are the quick locator point numbers 1 9 3 Position Shows the position of each quick locator point using the counter display format
434. rsor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key import ing will be cancelled Importing audio data WAV files importing audio data from another song Here s how you can import audio data from another song saved on the AW2400 s hard disk Call the EDIT screen Edit page by either pressing the Work Navigate section EDIT key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the EDIT key 2 Move the cursor to the edit command field and use the DATA JOG dial or the INC DEC keys to select IMPORT TRACK 3 Press the ENTER key to conform your choice of edit command The screen will change as follows COMMAND IMPORT TRACK EXECUTE 4 Song List This area lists the songs that are saved on the AW 2400 s internal hard disk In this list select the song that contains the track you want to import 2 Song name 3 Song size 4 Song Bit Depth Sampling Frequency 5 Song Protect Status 6 SORT Move the cursor to this box and use the DATA JOG dial or the INC DEC keys to choose the order in which you want the songs in the list to appear e NAME Song names in alphabetical order e SIZE Song size from largest to smallest OLD The order in which the songs were saved from newest to oldest T From TR From V TR Here you can select the desired track number 1 24 ST and virtual track number 1 8 of the i
435. rtual track is selected for the stereo track of the song s you want to write 2 If you want to divide the song into CD tracks at the marker locations specified within the song check that markers have been set at the appropriate locations 3 Call the CD screen Write page by either pressing the Work Navigate section CD key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the CD key 4 Move the cursor to DISC AT ONCE and press the ENTER key The CD RW disc inserted in the drive will automati cally be checked e If data has already been written on the CD RW disc that you insert a popup window will appear immediately after step 4 asking whether you want to erase the data Move the cursor to the OK button if you want to erase the entire disc or to the CANCEL button if you want to cancel execution Then press the ENTER key D Move the cursor to the ADD button and press the ENTER key The track list will show information track number song name size of the stereo track for the song that will be written to track 1 of the CD e When you move the cursor to the ADD button and press the ENTER key a new song will be added following the existing songs e By using the INSERT button instead of the ADD button you can insert a new song immediately before the song that is selected in the list e You can use the DELETE button to delete the currently selected song from the track list 6 Move the
436. s 3 OVERWRITE field Selects the parameters to be recorded or overwritten by Automix recording The buttons correspond to the parameters as follows e CH ON button ON key operation for each channel e FADER button Fader operation for each channel e AUX EFFECT SEND ON button ee AUX and effect send operation for each channel mute on off e AUX EFFECT SEND button EN AUX and effect send level operation for each channel e EQ button EQ operation for each channel e PAN button Pan operation for each channel ES e Using the RETURN TIME field to the right of the FADER button you can specify how long it will take the faders to return to their original positions when Automix recording is stopped or punched out gt p 185 e Scene and library recall operations are always recorded regard less of the OVERWRITE field settings 4 FREE Displays the amount of free Automix memory available in kilobytes KB and as a percentage AW2400 Owner s Manual Creating a New Automix Recording A new Automix recording must be created before actual Automix recording can occur e The contents of the current Automix recording will be erased when a new Automix recording is created To save the current Automix data refer to Automix Library Operation on page 190 1 Use the channel faders pan controls EQ etc to set up the mix at the beginning of the current song and save the mix a
437. s de EER see wl mmer HE Szenen ial cons Ef Kee Input channels 1 16 Track channels 1 24 Petts fe Petes fe ek E Channel Insertion In this case an effect is inserted into a channel s signal path in order to apply the effect only to that channel The effect sound is mixed with the direct channel signal within the channel itself and then sent to the stereo bus or a recorder track Please note that an effect which has been inserted into one channel cannot be simultaneously inserted into another channel or used via the effect sends and returns Effects can be inserted on the following channels e Input channels e Track channels e Stereo output channel e Bus master channels e AUX send master channels Effects can be inserted at any of the following three points in a channel the diagram shows an input channel a Before the EQ stage pre EQ 2 Between the EQ stage and fader post EQ pre fader 3 After the fader post fader e In addition to the effects provided by the four effect processors the AW2400 provides a Pitch Fix function for correcting the pitch of vocal tracks Refer to Correcting a Vocal Track Pitch Fix on page 124 for details AW2400 Owner s Manual 115 Recalling Effect Library settings Recalling Effect Library settings The first step in using an effect is to recall a preset from the effect library that uses the required effect e The effec
438. s HL ete EFFECT SEND ei Loi 200E F P EE This page contains the following items a OSC ON button When you turn this button on the oscillator output will immediately be sent to the specified bus Use the buttons to specify the bus to which the signal will be sent SIME ikHz SINE 18kKHz e Pressing the F1 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same affect as the OSC ON button 2 LEVEL knob Adjusts the output level of the oscillator NOTE Be sure to lower the setting of the LEVEL knob before turning on the oscillator to prevent sudden high volume output 3 WAVEFORM Selects one of the following oscillator signals e 100Hz button 100 Hz sine wave s 1kHz button 1 kHz sine wave e 10kHz button 10 kHz sine wave e PINK NOISE button Pink noise e BURST NOISE button Burst noise 20 millisecond pink noise bursts as 4 sec ond intervals 4 BUS1 L R BUS2 L R buttons Sends the oscillator output to the Bus 1 L R or Bus 2 L R 5 AUX1 4 buttons Send the oscillator output to AUX buses 1 4 EFFECT1 4 buttons Send the oscillator output to effect buses 1 4 7 STEREO L R buttons Sends the oscillator output to the stereo bus Level Meter Displays the BUS 1 2 AUX 1 4 and EFFECT BUS 1 4 output levels e Sine waves and white noise have a higher actual sound pressure level than perceived by the ear and may damage your speakers if played at
439. s RE Ell Ho OG Beem EE DI m ba mu 00 00 00 000 001 01 ESRISCHIRIS SOHG LIST SIZE BIT FS im SHUTUGUN NAME FREE 35 95 GE T Eee E E Restore 2 Ta dP 16 44 1 323MB 16 44 1 Ae New Sona The_On y_One Ott 4 Song list This area lists the songs that are saved on the hard disk The line enclosed by the dotted frame in the cen ter of the list indicates the song that is selected for operations The highlighted line indicates the song that is currently loaded into the AW2400 This is called the current song NOTE e Each row of the list will display the song name data size bit depth 16 24 bit and sampling rate 44 1 48 kHz 2 LOAD button Loads the selected song 3 Move the cursor to the song list and then use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select the song The_Only_One Du Neu _ sons RE e He DS i UU amp 00 00 00 000 111 11 ESRISRIRTZSLE SOHG LIST SIZE BIT FS __ tm IHPUT 1 Tare 16 44 1 Ae New Sona 4 Move the cursor to the LOAD button in the screen and press the ENTER key A popup window like the following will appear This window asks you whether you want to save the current song CONF IRHAT I OH Save Current Song CANCEL VES 5 Move the cursor to either YES save the cur rent song or NO don t save the current song and press the ENTER key The song data will be loaded and The_Only_One will
440. s a scene The saved initial scene will serve as the starting point for the Automix recording To use a different scene as the starting point for the Automix recording recall the desired scene Refer to Scene Memory Operation on page 159 for details e When a new Automix recording is created a recall event for the last saved or recalled scene is recorded at the very begin ning of the Automix recording This initial scene can be changed later as described on page 188 2 Call the AUTOMIX screen Automix page by either pressing the AUTOMIX key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the AUTOMIX key 3 Move the cursor to the NEW button in the COMMAND field and press the ENTER key A confirmation popup window for the new Automix recording will appear CONF RAAT ION Wild Hake Hew Automis 4 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The current Automix data will be erased and a new Automix recording will be created Creation of a new Automix recording can be aborted by moving the cursor to the CANCEL button and pressing the ENTER key Recording the Automix Data Here s how to record mix operation data to the newly cre ated Automix recording 1 Move the song location to just before the point at which you want to begin recording the Automix data 2 Call the AUTOMIX screen Automix page by either pressing the AUTOMIX key as many times as
441. s been recorded as a stereo track it cannot be selected for burning to a CD AW2400 Owner s Manual Mixdown and bounce operations Ge 77 Playing back the stereo track suo1esado OCOHUTIOO pue UMOPXI o 78 Playing back the stereo track When you ve finished the mixdown you can play back the stereo track as follows Call the TRACK screen Stereo TR page by either pressing the Work Navigate section TRACK key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F3 key after pressing the TRACK key ST TR MODE ON OFF button TRACK 00 00 120579 ete oe TRACK 00 00 12 319 wu EAMAEGIE STEREO TRACE J TRACE 12343078 MUTE P LST TR MODE ST TR MODE Seege Corr Switch the ST TR MODE ON OFF button ON When this button is on the stereo track output will be sent to a point directly before the STEREO fader and can be monitored from the STEREO OUT jack the MONITOR OUT jack or the PHONE jack At this time the record ready status of all tracks will be cancelled ES e If any audio tracks are in record ready mode a popup window will ask you to confirm that you want to defeat the record ready status If you want to play back the stereo track move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key NO NOTE e The EQ and dynamics processor of the stereo output channel are disabled while the stereo track is playing back AW2400 Owner s Manual 3 Press the RTZ ja
442. s below each knob can be used to select pre fader or post fader send ES e While the AUX key is lit you can press one of the Selected Channel knobs repeatedly to switch between the display pages for the corresponding AUX screen For example press ing Selected Channel knob 1 repeatedly will switch back and forth between the AUX1 screen Input RTN page and the Track page e By pressing the F1 or F2 key while holding the Display sec tion SHIFT key you can simultaneously set all channels in the display to PRE F1 or POST F2 AW2400 Owner s Manual 4 Move the cursor to a knob and use the DATA JOG dial or the INC DEC keys to adjust the send level The range is from 9 10 dB e Knobs can also be selected via the Layer section keys INPUT SEL keys and SEL keys e Move the cursor to a knob and press the ENTER key to turn that AUX send on or off 5 To set the point from which the AUX send signal will be derived in each channel move the cursor to the appropriate PRE POST button and press the ENTER key to select either PRE pre fader the signal is sent from a point before the channel fader or POST post fader the signal is sent from a point after the channel fader 6 To adjust send levels to a different AUX bus press the corresponding Selected Channel knob to switch to the appropriate screen then adjust the send levels as described in steps 4 and 5 above E Adjusting AUX send
443. s the level range of the waveform displayed in the WAVE DISPLAY popup window If you select 0 dB the top and bottom edges of the screen will correspond to the maximum level 5 LISTEN button If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the waveform in the display area of the WAVE DISPLAY popup window will be played once During playback the vertical line pointer that indi cates the current location will move and the counter value will change accordingly Transport Locate Operation E Normal transport operation is disabled while using the LISTEN button 6 EXIT button Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to exit the WAVE DISPLAY popup window and return to the previous Track View page ES e The WAVE DISPLAY popup window cannot be displayed while the recorder is running e You can use the Mixer section SEL or STEREO SEL keys to switch the track being viewed even after displaying the WAVE DISPLAY popup window AW2400 Owner s Manual 95 Finding a location while viewing the waveform D Move the cursor to the SCALE AMP fields and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to adjust the vertical and horizontal scale of the waveform display as required 6 To specify a location within the popup win dow move the cursor to the counter and turn the DATA JOG dial Turning the dial to the right will move the pointer for ward and turning the dial to the left will move it b
444. same signal is also output from the MONITOR OUT jacks and from the PHONES jack Bus master channels 1 2 Provide level adjustment EQ and dynamics processing for the signals from bus 1 and bus 2 and sends the signals to the audio tracks AW2400 Owner s Manual AUX send master channels 1 4 Provide final level adjustment for the AUX buses as well as EQ and dynamics processing Effect send master channels 1 4 Provide final level adjustment for the effect buses as well as dynamics processing E Mixing Layers In order to efficiently handle numerous input channels the AW 2400 mixer section channels are organized in mixing layers The diagram shows an overview of the AW2400 s 6 mixing layers Zo jay 7 2 3 4 5 Li 13 Z 6 16 7 eee 24 The channels available in each of the mixing layers are as follows Mixing Layer IN 1 8 Input channels 1 8 and effect return channels 1 4 2 Mixing Layer IN 9 16 Input channels 9 16 and effect return channels 1 4 3 Mixing Layer MASTER Bus master channels 1 2 AUX send master channels 1 4 and effect send master channels 1 4 4 Mixing Layer TRACK 1 12 Track channels 1 12 5 Mixing Layer TRACK 13 24 Track channels 13 24 6 REMOTE Layer A special layer for remote control of external MIDI devices E Mix Parameters Channel pan EQ dynamics processor and other settings are known as mix parameters All mix parameters c
445. se a cable specified for USB 2 0 E An error message appears when discon necting the AW2400 from a Windows com puter e Before turning the USB storage mode OFF remove the device via the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the taskbar e Close all AW2400 windows before removing the device via the Safely Remove Hardware icon e If an error message still appears execute Safely Remove Hardware one or two more times You should then be able to remove the device without seeing an error mes sage 5 Appendix AW2400 Owner s Manual 261 Troubleshooting Pitch Fix operations E Can t hear any pitch change e Make sure that RATE is NOT set to 0 e Make sure that BYPASS is off E The voice is not recognized e When the voice is high set TYPE to FEMALE when it is low set TYPE to MALE E Pitch correction doesn t sound right e In some cases pitch correction may sound unnatural especially for parts sung with vibrato To make the pitch corrected vocal sound more natural and subtle set DETECT to a relatively short value and set RATE to a rel atively slow value Automix operations E Can t record Automix operations e Is ENABLE selected in the AUTOMIX page e Is the REC or AUTO REC button on e Is the type of data to be recorded fader EQ etc selected in the OVERWRITE field e Is the INPUT SEL SEL or STEREO SEL key of the target channel flashing Trigger Track operations E Playback
446. series can be restored into the AW2400 NOTE e Only the audio data recorded in a song can be exchanged with the other AW series workstations Mix parameters libraries and system data cannot be backed up restored in this way E Backing up an AW2400 song in a format compatible with the other AW series If you turn on the AW2816 button in the Backup page of the SONG screen the data will be saved in the AW2816 backup file format An AW2816 backup file can be restored into the other AW series version 2 0 or later for AW4416 For the pro cedure refer to Backing up songs earlier in this manual NOTE P e Backup in the AW2816 backup file format is limited to one song at a time e When you perform a backup in the AW2816 backup file format data other than the audio tracks will not be backed up All virtual tracks for tracks 1 16 are backup up Tracks 17 24 are not backed up Only the current track data for stereo track is backed up Only 44 1kHz 16 bit songs are supported e Depending on the data size some songs can t be saved as AW2816 backup files If this problem occurs use the Optimize function to reduce the data size AW2400 Owner s Manual E Restoring songs from other AW series workstations 1 Insert the CD R RW media containing songs from other AW series workstations to be restored into the AW2400 2 Call the SONG screen Restore page by either pressing the Work Navigate section SONG key as ma
447. sert a new disc and move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Writing will begin again Alternatively you can move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key to exit the write operation Creating an audio CD 2 AW2400 Owner s Manual f 219 Finalizing CD R RW media NO SOF gd opne ue Buneay 220 Finalizing CD R RW media Here s how to finalize CD R RW media created using Track At Once so that the disc can be played by a CD RW drive or a CD player e CD R RW media written by the AW2400 using Track At Once and not yet finalized can not be played by another CD RW drive or a CD player but it can be played by the AW2400 s CD Play function gt p 222 Insert the CD R RW disc that you want to finalize into the CD RW drive 2 Call the CD screen Write page by either pressing the Work Navigate section CD key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the CD key 3 Move the cursor to the TRACK AT ONCE button and press the ENTER key The track list will show the tracks that have been writ ten to that CDR RW disc Already recorded tracks will be displayed as EXIST AW2400 Owner s Manual 4 Move the cursor to the FINALIZE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the finalize operation CONF IRHAT I OH Finalize This Media D To finalize the disc move the cursor to the OK butto
448. shold as well as the level below the width For very dynamic material this program allows you to retain the dynamic range without having to be concerned with excessive output signal levels and clipping CompanderH CPH and CompanderS CPS parameters Parameter Threshold dB 54 to 0 541 points Ratio 1 0 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 0 2 5 3 0 3 5 4 0 5 0 6 0 8 0 10 20 15 points O to 120 121 points 18 to O 181 points 1 to 90 90 points 6 ms to 46 1 sec 160 points Attack ms Outgain dB Width dB Release ms e Threshold determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compander Signals above the threshold pass through unaffected Signals at and below the threshold level are attenuated by the amount specified using the Ratio parameter The trigger signal is deter mined using the KEYIN SOURCE parameter e Ratio controls the amount of companding the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level With a 2 1 ratio for example a 10 dB change in input level above the threshold results in a 5 dB change in output level The hard compander CPH has a fixed ratio of 5 1 for expansion and the soft compander CPS has a fixed ratio of 1 5 1 for expansion e Attack controls how soon the signal is companded once the compander has been triggered With a fast attack time the signal is companded almost immediately With a slow attack time the init
449. simply pressing one ON key or operating one fader ed will be displayed for tracks that are not assigned to a group and those tracks will be triggered independently e Channel pairs to be used for linked stereo operation should be assigned as paired channels beforehand gt p 58 4 To engage the Fader Start function for a track move the cursor to the FADER START button and press the ENTER key When the Fader Start function is on playback of the corresponding track or group including the track will start when the track fader is raised above the posi tion Playback can be stopped by returning the fader to the position e The Fader Start function can be turned off for all tracks by pressing the F1 key while holding the SHIFT key will be displayed for all tracks e The Trigger Track group A D settings can be copied to fader groups gt p 82 by pressing the F2 key while holding the SHIFT key This can be useful for linking fader start opera tion of multiple trigger tracks D Use the Layer section TRACK 1 12 and TRACK 13 24 keys to select the mixing layer to be operated 6 Start playback of the target track or group by pressing the appropriate ON key or operating the appropriate fader The ON keys of triggered tracks will light during playback If you press a lit ON key playback of that track or the group that includes that track will stop Pressing the STOP W
450. sound is interrupted at the bound aries of the recorded data e Use the EXPORT command to export the required section of audio data as a WAV file then use the IMPORT USB WAV command to re import the WAV file to the track E Operating the ON key or fader doesn t start playback e The channel may be turned off before the Trigger Track mode is engaged Call the CH VIEW screen and turn on the channel Be xlpueddy 262 AW2400 Owner s Manual Display message list Display message list E Messages A B POINTS NOT FOUND Repeat Playback cannot be performed because A B points are not specified AUTOMIX ABORTED Automix recording has been aborted AUTOMIX DISABLED Automix is currently disabled Please set to ENABLE AUTOMIX MEMORY FULL Not enough memory available for automix AUTOMIX RUNNING That operation cannot be performed while automix is running CANNOT DEFEAT MUTE EE be disengaged because the simultaneous playback limit will be CANNOT REDO Redo re execution of an operation is not possible CANNOT SET MARK It is not possible to specify a marker at an already specified position CANNOT UNDO Undo cancellation of an operation is not possible CD PLAY MODE NOW Since the AW2400 is in CD Play mode this operation cannot be executed CH PARAMETER INITIALIZED The mixer parameters of the channel have been initialized DIFFERENT TC FRAME TYPE MTC of a different frame type than t
451. sponding track is in record ready mode If for example you have patched input channel to track 1 the top panel keys will appear as follows AW2400 Owner s Manual Track recording E 51 Sa Q Q Oh Q O 2 Q Direct recording and Mixed recording 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN Vly Vly Vly Vly Vly Vly Vly Vly Si Ee Ze S bh Ee Ze s Ze a kb a N a N a GY de G GY de de de de VM VM NV NV VM VM VM LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC PEAK PEAK TOP 3 3 3 3 3 e Z N S gt flash Ka P SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL ae E a ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON MSOOOOCOOoOoOoOo 1 3 4 5 6 7 9 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 21 23 24 Track channels Layer section TRACK 1 12 key lit The display will appear as shown here ES e Input channels that are patched to tracks will be automatically disconnected from the stereo bus and their signal will not be out put via the STEREO OUT or MONITOR OUT jacks the signals being recorded can be monitored via the track channel being recorded l H mu fru gt Lol f ZELLE gt Ln e When an input is disconnected from a track that input is automatically re patched to the stereo bus e You can also select a track by moving the cursor to the symbol of the desired track and pressing the ENTER
452. sport section or a foot switch 1 If you want to perform punch in out using a foot switch connect a separately sold foot switch Yamaha FC5 or equivalent to the rear panel FOOT SW jack 2 Call the RECORD screen Direct page and make sure that your instrument mic is assigned to the track on which you want to punch in 3 Locate to a point earlier than where you want to punch in For details on Locate operation refer to Move To a Specified Location on page 87 You may find it convenient to register a marker at a location one or two measures earlier than the point at which you want to punch in so you can quickly return to that point For details on registering a marker gt p 90 4 Press the Transport section PLAY B key Alternatively press the foot switch The song will begin playing At this time the track playback sound of the recording destination track channel will be sent to the stereo bus so you will not be able to monitor the input signal 5 At the point where you want to begin recording hold down the PLAY B key and press the REC key or press the foot switch once again and begin playing your instrument The recording destination track will switch from play back to recording punch in D At the point where you want to stop record ing press the PLAY B key or press the foot switch The recording destination track will switch from recording back to playback punch out
453. ssign the mixed signal to one through four tracks Mixed recording requires fewer tracks but you will need to decide on the final volume pan and tone of each instrument at the time of recording you will not be able to adjust these parameters independently after recording Input channel 1 Input channel 2 Input channel 3 Input channel 4 Input channel 15 Input channel 16 Audio track 23 Audio track 24 Patching for Direct Recording This section explains how to patch the signals of input channels to tracks when vou re using the Direct Recording method Call the RECORD screen Direct page by either pressing the Quick Navigate section RECORD key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the RECORD key This page contains the following items sale DILL Gea Bei Heu Sona RECORD 1661 IHPUT 1 Te bit DIRECT ile __ DIRECT ouTy DIGITAL IN E 3 AULT CONNECTION Tor TRACE A A ZG A A b A GA b A ZG A A A GA GA ST 234 5 E 1 8 9 I tl i2 I3 4 IS IG N IB I8 20 2i gg oi eu L ook BRUTE CLEAR SAFE i SR KR iedo SS 8 Input Select Here you can select the inputs input signals that will be patched to input channels 1 8 or 9 16 You can choose from the following inputs e AD 1 8 Analog input signals from MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 e SLOT 1 8
454. switch virtual tracks and record another take Playing back the stereo track Here s how to play back the stereo track that you ve recorded 1 Call the TRACK screen Stereo TR page by either pressing the Work Navigate section TRACK key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F3 key after pressing the TRACK key 2 To play back the stereo track switch the ST TR MODE ON OFF button to ON When this button is on the output of the stereo track is sent to a point immediately before the STEREO fader and can be monitored from the STEREO OUT jacks MONITOR OUT jacks and PHONES jack At this time record ready status for all tracks will be defeated ES e If any audio tracks are in record ready mode a popup window will ask you to confirm that record ready status will be can celled e If the INPUT CH MIX MUTE button is set to MIX you ll be able to monitor the signal of the input channels even while the stereo track is playing Track operations and editing e ni NOTE e EQ and dynamics processing are not applied to the stereo track playback AW2400 Owner s Manual 131 Stereo track operations Dupa pue suoiesedo yoe ee 132 3 Press the RTZ lt key to rewind the song and press the PLAY gt key The stereo track will play back Use the STEREO fader to adjust the monitor level To return to normal playback of the audio tracks switch the ST TR MODE ON OFF button ba
455. t folder on the internal hard disk drive Once these files have been exported they can be edited using appropriate waveform editing software or imported into a DAW application for further processing or integration with other projects Call the EDIT screen Edit page by either pressing the Work Navigate section EDIT key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the EDIT key Edit commands EDIT BGS New Sons ______ p cae S 1 Scene UU UU 001 01 ESCA PUT 1 00 00 00 000 EST TRACE EDIT ON E EE I Glen Nor ze Mork Adi 2 Move the cursor to the edit command field and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select EXPORT 3 Press the ENTER key to confirm the selected edit command The display will appear as follows FU IT Beas Heu sons p ee 1 Scenes INPUTI 00 00 00 000 ON i HAVE FILE V_TR amp 1_1 UBA EHS F Teneo Nor Sat Adis WAV File Transfer USB Storage Mode a4 From TR Selects the source track for the export operation 1 24 1 amp 2 23 amp 24 ST ALL 2 From V TR Selects the source virtual track for the export operation 1 8 3 From Start Specifies the start point of the data to be exported in counter format 4 From End Specifies the end point of the data to be exported in counter format 5 File Name Displays the name of the WAV file to be exported The default name is the name of the virtual track
456. t pressing the Work Navigate section PATCH key 6 Press the Display section F2 key to dis This page is used to assign the AW2400 s various play the Track page internal signals to the output connectors The send levels from the track channels to the AUX1 bus can be adjusted via this page 3 Move the cursor to the OMNI OUT ASSIGN 1 field and use the DATA JOG dial or the 7 Set the knobs for each channel to an appro INC DEC keys to select AUX1 priate level and set the PRE POST buttons This assigns the AUX1 bus signal to OMNI OUT as required jack 1 At this point the track channel signals are being sent to the OMNI OUT jack 1 via the AUX1 bus and are OH GUT ASS IGH being fed to the external effect processor s input H Use the Quick Navigate section RECORD key to call the RECORD screen Mixdown page and set the parameters as shown in the illustration e The AUX bus signals can also be assigned to an I O card RECORD Sei Heu sons atb installed in the I O slot or the DIGITAL STEREO OUT con PUTI 1 00 00 00 000 MENT nector KEI m DIGITAL IN F 4 Referring to the diagram connect the exter nal signal processor to the AW2400 Effect Processor 12434 5 6 1 28 8 1 1 l 12 I IS I6 N IB I8 20 2i 22 ge ou c l MIC LINE MASTERING DI THER MUTE CLEAR INPUT jacks REMAIN TEE ON SAFE OMNI OUT jack 1 ee rect Mixed SS Bounce ai dour With these settings track channels 1 2
457. t of the page will depend on the EJECUTE edit command you selected dite Temro Mare Mark Adi si e 136 AW2400 Owner s Manual W Select the track s to edit After you choose an editing command the next step is to specify the track s that will be edited 3 To select the track for editing move the cur sor to the TR Track field in the left of the screen and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys TR j PU TRii GG ETETETT In the TR field you can select the following types of data e 1234 An audio track 1 amp 2 23 amp 24 A pair of adjacent odd numbered even numbered audio tracks eo EE The stereo track e ALL Audio tracks 1 24 e CLIP Sound clip 4 Select the virtual track that you want to edit If you selected an audio track 1 24 1 amp 2 23 amp 24 ST in step 3 the V TR field will appear at the right allow ing you to select the virtual track number Move the cursor to this field and select a virtual track number 1 8 mem Enns V TR field BE e For some commands you will need to specify both source and destination tracks E Specify the editing region For most commands you will need to set the Start the beginning of the edited region and End the end of the edited region parameters to specify the region that will be affected by the command 5 To specify the beginning of the region to be edited move the cursor to the desired digit of t
458. t song will be lost Use this procedure with cau tion Call the Song List page by either pressing the Work Navigate section SONG key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the SONG key The SONG screen Song List page will appear The currently selected song in the Song List will be high lighted inverted Move the cursor to a location outside the SORT box and use the DATA JOG dial to select the song to be imported The line enclosed by the dotted frame is the song you have selected as the import source Move the cursor to the MIXER IMP button and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear which allows you to select the data to be imported CONF RAHAT LOH Select tem to Import SCEHE TEMFO L BRARY CANCEL You can choose one or more of the following items e SCENE button Scene memories e TEMPO button Tempo map e LIBRARY button EQ dynamics effects and channel libraries 4 Select the button s corresponding to the items you want to import to the current song then move the cursor to the OK but ton and press the ENTER key Importing will begin When the data has been imported you will return to the screen of step 1 Managing Your Songs AW2400 Owner s Manual Song management ee 173 Editing various settings for the song Editing various settings for the song Here s how to edit various sett
459. t type for a recalled effect library preset cannot be changed For this reason even when you want to program an effect from scratch it is necessary to begin by recalling an effect library preset that includes the effect type you want to use 1 Press the Selected Channel section EFFECT key so that its indicator lights The EFFECT screen will appear 2 Press Selected Channel knob 1 4 corre sponding to the effect processor to which you want to load the effect While the EFFECT screen is showing Selected Chan nel knobs correspond to effect processors 1 4 So for example the EFFECT 1 screen will be selected if you press Selected Channel knob 1 ES e If the AUTO DISPLAY function is set to OFF gt p 211 the EFFECT screen will not appear automatically when step 1 above is performed In this case press one of the Selected Channel knobs 1 4 will cause the corresponding EFFECT screen to appear 3 Press the Display section F4 key to call the FX Lib Page You can select the effect library preset to be loaded into the effect processor selected in step 2 via this page List RECALL button Ho TITLE Fri Lib EFFECT TYPE REVERE HALL 1 THe 20UT 7 Reverb Room 3Aeverb Stage 4 Reverb Plate ES e Library numbers 1 43 contain pre programmed read only effect presets e Refer to Effect Library Operations on page 122 for details on the effect library RENAME STORE and CLEAR functions 11
460. ta Here s how to recall load settings from a scene Call the SCENE screen Library page by either pressing the SCENE key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the SCENE key 2 Turn the DATA JOG dial to scroll the list so that the scene you want to recall is enclosed in the dotted frame 3 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the Recall operation CONF IRHAT OH Recall 1 from the SCENE Library e Pressing the F1 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the RECALL button 4 To execute the recall operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The scene will be recalled e The confirmation popup window can be disabled so that it does not appear when you perform a Recall operation For details refer to AW2400 Preferences gt p 211 Storing scene data Here s how to store the current settings in a scene mem Ory NOTE e Scene 0 is a recall only scene to which new data cannot be stored e If you select and store to a scene that already contains data the previous scene data will be overwritten and lost Be careful not to overwrite scene data you want to keep Call the SCENE screen Library page by either pressing the SCENE key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the SCENE key
461. tching for direct recording 1 Lower the STEREO fader to the posi tion 2 Referring to Connection and Setup on page 37 connect your instruments and or microphones and set up the input levels 3 Call the RECORD screen Direct page by either pressing the Quick Navigate section RECORD key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the RECORD key Input channel signals can be directly patched to the recorder s tracks via the RECORD screen Direct page When this page is called the INPUT SEL keys in the upper area of the top panel will flash red Input channels Input select RECORD Ai i re B L Do Dm IHPUT 1 A 00 00 00 000 mu EES i e DIGITAL IN i MOLTI CONHECT OH Tracks Direct recording and Mixed recording 4 Check that AD1 8 appears in the input select field on the left side of the page Input channels 1 8 or 9 16 can be selected as the input source via the input select field When AD1 8 is showing the AW2400 s AD inputs MIC LINE INPUT jacks 1 8 are selected as the input source If a different input source is selected move the cursor to the input select field and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select AD1 8 5 Press the INPUT SEL key for the input channel to which your instrument micro phone is connected The corresponding INPUT SEL key will light red and the remaining INPUT SEL keys will go dark
462. te test will be performed e Only the WRITE button On EE Writing will occur immediately e Both the WRITE and TEST buttons On E First a write test will be performed and then the actual writing will be performed Depending on the media and the state of the hard disk it is possible that an error may occur while the data is being written If you are using a CD R this will make the media unusable You can turn on the TEST button to check whether an error will occur before you actu ally write the disc If an error occurs during the test halt the procedure and either reduce the write speed or set the UNDERRUN PROTECT button to ENABLE If desired set the UNDERRUN PROTECT button to ENABLE The AW2400 CD RW drive has a function to prevent buffer underrun errors that can occur if data transfer cannot keep up with the write speed Switch the UNDERRUN PROTECT button to the ENABLE setting to prevent buffer underruns e The CD RW drive factory settings can be restored from the CD screen CD Setting page by pressing the F3 key DEFAULT while holding the SHIFT key NOTE P e If the UNDERRUN PROTECT button is set to ENABLE the TEST button will automatically be turned off Also if the TEST button is turned on the UNDERRUN PROTECT button will automatically be set to DISABLE AW2400 Owner s Manual wer Creating an audio CD KO 215 Writing audio data NO SE gd opne ue Buneay 216 Writing audio dat
463. ted into the audio tracks from there Transfer to Computer via the Transport Folder lt Computer A i WAV file transfer USB AW2400 Transport folder Audio tracks stereo track e Files in the Transport folder can also be directly accessed and manipulated from applications running on the computer e Transfer to AW2400 via the Transport Folder Computer S 3 WAV file transfer USB AW2400 Transport folder Audio tracks stereo track 230 AW2400 Owner s Manual E Directly Accessing AW2400 Audio Data In this case the AW2400 and computer are connected via a USB cable and the target WAV files in specific folders on the AW2400 hard disk are directly accessed from the com puter Waveform editing software running on the computer can be used to directly edit WAV files residing on the AW 2400 hard disk and complete songs can be backed up copied to the computer hard disk Refer to Song Folder Organization on page 166 for details on how the folders are organized e Directly Accessing Audio Data Backup of Song Data etc Direct Editing of USB Audio Data USB Audio tracks stereo track AW2400 Switching to the USB Storage Mode To directly access files on the AW2400 internal hard disk first follow the procedure outlined below to switch to the USB Storage Mode T Make sure that your computer m
464. ter page will appear Indicates the output level of the stereo output channel METER 0 00 08 os B Initial E TRACK 11_1 amp 00 00 08 249 005 01 11 Move the cursor to the POST FADER button and press the ENTER key The post fader signal level will be displayed If the level meter reaches the OVER position lower the STEREO fader 12 Press the RECORD key to return to the RECORD screen Mixdown page Mixdown procedure 13 Move the cursor to the REC button and press the ENTER key to turn the button on The top panel STEREO SEL key will blink red This blinking indicates that the stereo track is in record ready mode 14 Press the RTZ a key to rewind the song Then hold down the REC key and press the PLAY P key The song will begin playing and the playback will be recorded on the stereo track 15 When you reach the end of the song move the cursor to the SAFE button in the screen and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm that you want to cancel record ready mode Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key ES e Instead of using the AW2400 s internal stereo track you can also mixdown to an external recorder connected to the STE REO OUT jacks or DIGITAL STEREO OUT connector In this case start playback on the AW2400 after you ve put your external recorder in record mode 16 Save the song If the song is not saved after it ha
465. tereo signals Channels can be set as pairs either via the MONITOR screen or by using the panel INPUT SEL or SEL keys NOTE e When channels are paired always operate only the fader of one channel Attempting to operate both faders at once can result in damage to the faders motor drive system WE Pairing Channels via the MONITOR Screen Call the MONITOR screen Pair page by either pressing the Quick Navigate section MONITOR key as many times as neces sary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the MONITOR key This page contains the following items Bei Heu Sona e Ho DA ee MONITOR INPUT 1 6 00 DU DU DU 2 38794 S65 ao Mro sys sye zys 14 2 bes op 118712 1388714 158816 TRACE OO OOSSOOO 142 shee KG MS RI MONOx2 MONOx2 MONOx2 MONOx2 MONOx2 134914 158016 178715 198826 2122 23 f24 AUS OUT 1 F 2 3 F4 MONOx2 MONOx2 co Go Fragen Grit flute Grr sole me Fair INPUT field Pairs or disengages pairing for input channels 1 16 TRACK field Pairs or disengages pairing for track channels 1 24 3 AUX OUT field Pairs or disengages pairing for AUX send channels 1 4 4 MONOx2 buttons Indicate that the adjacent channels are functioning as independent mono channels 5 STEREO buttons Indicate that the two channels are functioning as a ste reo pair AW2400 Owner s Manual 2 Move the
466. ternal Effect Return 8 CH stereo x 4 Foot switch Yamaha FC5 Track 24 CH Internal Effect Section 4 Built in Multi Effect Processors E Appendix AW2400 Owner s Manual 27 E xlpueddy Specifications E Mixer Section Input Output MIC LINE INPUT 1 8 balanced XLR amp phone Phantom Power Supply 48 3V Input Impedance 3 KQ Nominal Input Level 46 dBu to 4 dBu 56 dBu 24 dBu Minimum Input Level Maximum Input Level INSERT I O 1 2 unbalanced phone Input Impedance 10 kQ Nominal Input Level 0 dBu Maximum Input Level 20 dBu Output Impedance 600 Q Nominal Output Level 0 dBu Maximum Output Level 20 dBu STEREO OUT L R balanced phone Output Impedance 75 Q Nominal Load Impedance 600 Q Nominal Output Level 4 dBu Maximum Output Level 24 dBu MONITOR OUT L R balanced phone Output Impedance 75 Q Nominal Load Impedance 600 Q Nominal Output Level 4 dBu Maximum Output Level 24 dBu OMNI OUT 1 4 unbalanced phone Output Impedance 150 Q Nominal Load Impedance 10 kQ Nominal Output Level 0 dBu Maximum Output Level 20 dBu PHONES unbalanced TRS phone Load Impedance 8 40 Q Maximum Output Level 25 mW 8 Q load 75 mW 40 Q load DIGITAL STEREO IN OUT coaxial Mini YGDAI Cards MY8 AT MY8 TD MY8 AE MY4 AD MY8 AD MY4 DA MY16 AT MY16 TD MY16 AE MY8 AE96 MY8 AE96S MY8 AD24 MY8 AD96 MY8 DA96 MY16 mLAN Y96K 0 dBu 0 7
467. ters Effects Parameters E REVERB HALL REVERB ROOM REVERB STAGE REVERB PLATE One input two output hall room stage and plate reverb simulations all with gates Parameter REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Description Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio LO RATIO 0 1 2 4 Low frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density E R IDLY 0 0 100 0 ms Delay between early reflections and reverb E R BAL 0 100 Balance of early reflections and reverb 0 all reverb 100 all early reflections HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency GATE LVL OFF 60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in ATTACK 0 120 ms Gate opening speed HOLD 4 Gate open time DECAY 2 Gate closing speed 1 0 02 ms 2 13 s fs 44 1 kHz 0 02 ms 1 96 s fs 48 kHz 2 6 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz E EARLY REF One input two output early reflections Parameter TYPE S Hall L Hall Random Revers Plate Spring Description Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS INI DLY 0 10 0 0 500
468. the INC DEC keys to select the number of the track whose name you want to edit You can edit the name of the currently enabled virtual track for the track you selected in the TRACK field 3 Move the cursor to the RENAME button and press the ENTER key The NAME EDIT popup window will appear allow ing you to assign a name to the virtual track 4 Edit the name of the virtual track move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key For details on editing a name gt p 32 The edited name will be applied Stereo track operations About the stereo track Independently from audio tracks 1 24 the AW2400 has a stereo track that records and plays a stereo audio signal The stereo track is used mainly as a dedicated mixdown track for recording the final mix The signal of the stereo output channel is always con nected to the stereo track you will always be able to record the signal of the stereo bus simply by putting the stereo track in record ready mode You cannot record audio tracks while recording the stereo track While the stereo track is playing audio tracks 1 24 will be forcibly muted In the TRACK screen Stereo TR page you can check whether the stereo track contains data and switch the vir tual track for the stereo track To call this page press the Work Navigate section TRACK key as many times as necessary or press the F3 key after pressing the TRACK key AW2400 Owner s Manual
469. the AUX2 AUX4 buses press the in the AUX screen corresponding Selected Channel knob 2 4 in the same way If the AUX key is lit pressing one of the 1 Press the Selected Channel section AUX Selected Channel knobs will take you directly to the key so that its indicator lights corresponding AUX screen The AUX screen will appear 3 Press the Display section F1 Input RTN KE page or F2 Track page key e If the AUTO DISPLAY function is set to OFF press one of the The page displays and the items they contain are as Selected Channel knobs 1 4 after pressing the AUX key so that its indicator lights For details about the AUTO DIS PLAY function refer to AW2400 Preferences on page 210 follows AW2400 Owner s Manual 111 AUX Send Level Adjustment AUX screen Input RTN page AL 1 Ga Heu sons RE 1 Gcernepl INPUTI 1 00 00 00 000 101 11 CATAE 02 REA neut ATH CO INPUT field Adjusts the AUX send levels for input channels 1 16 The PRE POST buttons below each knob can be used to select pre fader or post fader send 2 RETURN field Adjusts the AUX send levels for effect return channels 1 4 The PRE POST buttons below each knob can be used to select pre fader or post fader send AUX screen Track page ALE eng pn meer H EE 001 0 ESSISC SIS iHPuT 1 00 00 00 000 a TRACK field Adjusts the AUX send levels for track channels 1 24 The PRE POST button
470. the D ST IN button on so that the AW2400 can synchronize to the received digital signal DIGITAL STEREO OUT connector DIGITAL STEREO IN Wordclock connector DAT recorder etc Wordclock master AW2400 Wordclock slave WORDCLOCK SOURCE D ST IN The AW2400 clock source will change accordingly and the sampling frequency of the selected clock source will appear in the Fs field E Digital Input Output amp Optional Card Settings CO AW2400 Owner s Manual 225 Wordclock and Cascade Settings NO Ei shumes peg Euondc IndjnojNdy jeubiq Fine Adjustment Of Overall Song Pitch Vari pitch When the AW2400 is set to use it s own internal clock as the wordclock source it is possible to adjust the sampling frequency over a small range to adjust the pitch and tempo of song playback Vari pitch This function can be useful to match the playback pitch of an AW2400 song to an acoustic instrument or to adjust the length of a song 1 Call the DIO screen Setting page by either pressing the Work Navigate section DIO key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the DIO key 2 Move the cursor to the WORDCLOCK SOURCE field INT button and press the ENTER key This selects the AW2400 internal clock as the word clock source 3 Move the cursor to the VARI field Vari pitch settings are made via the VARI field VART DE s i Q RRN CERS 3
471. the OK button to exe cute the command or move the cursor to the CANCEL button to cancel without exe cuting Then press the ENTER key Editing Individual Automix Events Individual Automix events can be moved erased or value edited via an Automix event list Call the AUTOMIX screen Event List page by either pressing the AUTOMIX key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F3 key after pressing the AUTOMIX key This page contains the following items arg LL sceneal WTO la Hew Sona l ler INPUT 1 00 00 00 000 PARAM FADER SELECTED CH ONLY DUPLICATE DELETE j AW2400 Owner s Manual a SELECTED CH ONLY button When this button is engaged only events in the cur rently selected channel are shown in the list 2 PARAM Selects the type of parameters to be shown in the event list 3 Event list Individual events of the parameter type selected in the PARAM field are shown in the event list The event enclosed by a dotted frame is currently selected for editing Move the cursor to the f icon to the left of the list and use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to scroll through the event list 4 DUPLICATE button Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to create a duplicate of the selected event at the same location 5 DELETE button Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to delete the selected event 2 To display only
472. the Song List will be high lighted inverted 2 Move the cursor to a location outside the SORT box and use the DATA JOG dial to select the song to be copied The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the selected song to be copied 3 Move the cursor to the COPY button and press the ENTER key A popup window will prompt you to enter new song name ES e If you have selected the current song as the song to be cop ied a popup window will ask you whether you want to save the current song Move the cursor to either the YES button if you want to save or the NO button if you don t want to save and then press the ENTER key 4 Enter a new song title For details on input ting a name gt p 32 D When the song name has been entered move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the copy operation CONF I RAHAT I OH Cora Selected Sona 6 To execute the copy move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The song you selected in step 2 will be copied and you will return to step 1 If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key the copy operation will be cancelled AW2400 Owner s Manual Song management A ee 171 Managing Your Songs juswebeuewW Duoe Vee 172 E Song Protection Songs can be protected to prevent unwanted changes to the data When a song is protected it c
473. the gain will ary iced a KE SEN gt en recover too quickly causing level pumping noticeable gain fluctuations If it is set too long the compressor may not have time to recover before the next high level signal appears and it will be compressed incorrectly A compressor provides a form of automatic level control By attenuating high levels thus effectively reducing the dynamic range the compressor makes it much easier to control signals and set appropriate fader levels Reducing the dynamic range also means that recording levels can be set higher therefore improving the signal to noise perfor mance Compressor CMP parameters Parameter Value Threshold dB 54 to 0 541 points Ratio 1 0 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 0 2 5 3 0 3 5 4 0 5 0 6 0 8 0 10 20 16 points Attack ms O to 120 121 points Outgain dB O to 18 181 points Knee hard 1 2 3 4 5 6 points Release ms 6 ms to 46 1 sec 160 points e Threshold determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compressor Signals at a level below the threshold pass through unaffected Signals at and above the threshold level are compressed by the amount specified using the Ratio parameter The trigger signal is determined using the KEYIN SOURCE parameter e Ratio controls the amount of compression the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level With a 2 1 ratio for example a 10 dB change
474. the hierarchical files and folders on the computer s hard disk The folders are organized as follows AW2400 1 Drive AW2400 2 Drive Song1 001 Song Name AWS 001 Song Name AWS Song2 002 Song Name AWS 002 Song Name AWS a u gt T i z i 0 WAV B 0 WAV IN N Audio i EN SE i 1 WAV W W eg W N D W W Render i Render a 8 E e 003 Song Name AWS a 004 Song Name AWS i 005 Song Name AWS Transport AW2400_SYS BIN a File Name2 WAV File Name1 WAV E Song1 Folder E Song2 Folder Songs are stored in either the Song1 or Song2 folder Songs are stored in either the Song1 or Song2 folder E Individual Song Folders E Transport Folder Each song is stored in a folder bearing the song s name This folder is used to store WAV files for import and export extension AWS Data is stored as 16 bit or 24 bit WAV files Song Files The following song settings are stored in a file bearing the name of the song extension AWS e Recorder section settings SONG screen TRACK screen e Mixer section settings channels effects e Library settings e REMOTE screen settings E Audio Folder The following song audio data is saved in WAV file for mat File names are automatically created in the order of recording as in O WAV 1 WAV 2 WAV etc 24 bit song data is saved as 32 bit WAV files e 24 2 stereo track audio x 8 virtual tracks e Sound clip
475. the internal hard disk You can check the remaining recordable time in the TRACK screen View page e The song may be protected e The stereo track may be in playback mode e Is the input signal routed appropriately to the recorder e Check the recording source and recording destination in the RECORD screen e Is CD DAT DIGITAL REC set to ENABLE in the UTIL ITY screen Preference page e Please read and understand the copyright warning gt p 7 before using digital input signals E Can t record on the STEREO track e It is not possible to record on the STEREO track while recording on other tracks E Noise is present in the recorded signal e The oscillator may be functioning e Does the word clock setting match for the AW2400 and the external device s e Go to the RECORD screen and check the recording source and recording destination E Can t select a record track e The number of 24 bit song tracks that can be recorded or played simultaneously is limited Something wrong with the sound E Sound is distorted e Is the GAIN knob set correctly e The connection cable from the external device may be broken e The fader of the input channel or monitor channel may be raised excessively e The stereo output channel fader may be raised excessively e The stereo output channel attenuator may be raised exces sively e The EQ or dynamics processor may have been set to pro duce an extreme gain boost e Did you r
476. the latest infor mation on plug in cards http www yamahaproaudio com Chanter 24 USB This chapter explains operation and use of the AW2400 USB interface What You Can Do With USB The AW2400 USB interface can be connected to a personal computer to allow data transfer between the AW2400 and the computer The following types of operation are possible MIDI Message Transfer Normal Mode WAV File Transfer USB Storage Mode In this type of operation the USB connector performs the Audio data recorded on the AW2400 can be transferred to functions of the three MIDI connectors usually used for the computer in the form of WAV files for storage or fur MIDI data transfer allowing efficient MIDI communica ther manipulation Conversely WAV files can be trans tion with the computer The USB port is normally in this ferred to the AW2400 from the computer mode immediately after the AW2400 power is turned on For example you might transfer a recording made on the na AW 2400 to the computer and use a computer based wave form editing program to edit the waveform Once edited e In order to use the USB connector for MIDI communication the the WAV file can be transferred back to the AW2400 MIDI port settings must be correct Refer to Basic MIDI Settings ph BAGS 194 jord laison the MIDI por ellinds where it can be processed and mixed with other audio Gen EE D data It is also possible to directly access data on the inter e Before c
477. the odd numbered virtual track in track pairs to be exported 6 EXECUTE button Executes the export operation Move the cursor to the From TR field and select the audio track that you want to export If you select ALL the current tracks 1 24 will be exported as separate monaural WAV files If you select 1 24 the single specified track will be exported as a monaural WAV file If you select 1 amp 2 23 amp 24 or ST the specified pair of tracks or the Stereo track will be exported as a ste reo WAV file Move the cursor to the From V TR From Start and From End fields and specify the virtual track number and region to be exported e If you selected ALL as the export source all the recorded tracks will be exported automatically It is not possible to spec ify the virtual track number for each AW2400 Owner s Manual 233 WAV File Transfer USB Storage Mode 6 When you have finished setting the param eters move the cursor to the EXECUTE but ton and press the ENTER key If a source other than ALL is selected the NAME EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to enter a file name If you select ALL as the source the NAME EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to enter a folder name The WAV files TRACK OI WANT TRACK 24 WAV will be stored in the new folder which will be created inside the Transport folder MAME EDIT Wo
478. the power cord connected to an AC outlet of the correct voltage e Is the POWER switch turned ON e If the power still does not turn on please contact your Yamaha dealer E LCD display is dim or dark e Use the contrast knob located at the lower right of the screen to adjust the contrast E Can t use the DATA JOG dial to control on screen parameters e The JOG ON key may be on e Some parameters cannot be operated in certain states such as while the recorder is running E No sound or sound is too faint e Are speakers or headphones connected correctly e Is your amp and other external devices turned on e Are you using connection cables with built in resistors e Does the stereo output channel meter move e Is the stereo output channel fader raised Is it turned on e The EQ gain may be set to an extremely low value e The dynamics processor may be set to an extreme thresh old or ratio Is an electric guitar connected to a MIC LINE INPUT jack directly Is the attenuator of the EQ screen or CH VIEW screen raised Check the level meter movement in the METER screen gt If you move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button and press the ENTER key in the CH VIEW screen View page that channel will be initialized to default values that allow sound to be output If DIGITAL IN is enabled in the TRACK screen and no signal is being input to the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack a message of WRONG WORD CLOCK wil
479. tianaes 238 Dynamics En 240 Gate Parameter ler 243 Compressor Parameter jet 243 Effects Parameters cccccceeeccceeeeeceeeeseeeeeeseeeeseaes 245 Troubleshooting ccccseeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesaaeeeees 258 Re due ET 263 About the CD ROM included with the AW2400 266 MIDI data format EE 272 MIDI Implementation Chart 276 Specifica 10 lt sen ee ee ae 277 DiMeEnSIOnS E 279 BVOC Ye T E E meus E T TA 280 Block digra E 284 Chapter 1 Before you start This chapter explains what you should know before you begin using the AW 2400 Before you start E Introduction E Check the included items The AW2400 package contains the following items If any are missing please contact your dealer e The AW2400 e Power cord e Owner s manual this book e CD ROM E Copyright Copying of commercially available music sequence data and or digital audio files for any purpose other than your own personal use is strictly prohibited E lrademarks Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc USA in the United States and other countries Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corpora tion USA in the United States and other countries Cubase SX and Nuendo are trademarks of Steinberg Media Technologies AG Logic is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc USA in the United States and other countries SONAR is a registered trademark of Twelve Tone Sys tems Inc ProToo
480. tion Nudge Time of each repeat played by the Nudge function The nudge time can be set from 25 to 800 ms in 1 ms millisecond steps 5 PREROLL TIME Specifies the duration of the preroll the amount of play back time before the punch in point when you use Auto Punch in from 0 to 20 seconds 6 POSTROLL TIME Specifies the duration of postroll the amount of playback time after the punch out point when you use Auto Punch out from 0 to 20 seconds 7 DIRECT OUT EXTRACT POSITION Selects the point in the input channel or track channel from which the signal will be taken when using DIRECT OUT Press the ENTER key to confirm your selection e PRE FADER the signal prior to the channel fader e POST FADER the signal after the channel fader STORE CONFIRMATION button Specifies whether the NAME EDIT popup window allowing you to assign a name will appear when you store a scene library 9 RECALL CONFIRMATION button Specifies whether a popup window will ask you for confir mation when recalling a scene or library SYNC CAUTION DIGITAL ST IN button Determines whether an error message will be displayed when a signal that is not synchronized with the word clock source appears at the DIGITAL STEREO IN connector 4D SYNC CAUTION SLOT IN button Determines whether an error message will be displayed when a signal that is not synchronized with the word clock source appears at a digital input on an I O card installe
481. tmgs 194 CAINE eegene 194 CONTROL CHANGE MODE 195 DEVICE NO Seeeeeenen eae eens eee 199 MMC ecorcecueseticoticieumecaien 198 200 ITC eea 199 200 OPP EEN 199 POR eege 194 SYNC AVERAGE aaaaaannennnnn 199 SYNC OUT eege 199 TARU E 198 MIDI Kee 202 E Appendix AW2400 Owner s Manual 281 Index Be xlpueddy MIDI Data FORMAL cesscenstccstennntcnes 272 MIDI Implementation Chart 276 MIDI IN connector ssssssseeneennnnn 29 MDT ROY creeren 21 MIDI OUT THRU connector 29 MIDI remoie 204 MIDI screen Setting 1 page 194 Setting 2 page 198 MIX BALANCE naaiaonoonnonnnnnnnnnn 121 Mix parameterg 105 MIX SOLO eege 84 Ve sissc ssntioneusiocaatnndsicaasven 73 75 MIXDOWN GOU 84 Mixed recording 0 50 102 Mixing Jovere 33 Ve 198 200 MONITOR key 21 MONITOR knob 000cceeeeees 24 MONITOR OUT acks 28 MONITOR screen Fader Grp page 82 Mute Grp page seeeeeeneeennn 83 Pair paQ seriis 58 Solo page 84 KSE 199 200 MULTI CONNECTION 100 MUTE CLEAR oaaaonnnnnaannn 100 102 M te GOUD E 83 N Nudge Tunchon 94 NUDGE PLAY MODE 210 NUDGE WISEN 210 NUM LOCK key 87 0 OE WE 199 OMNI OUT jacks 28 104 ON KEYS cee eeccerseed treet eee erceeente 23 Optimizing sicc cecetencacenoacmessnceecces 172 Optional car 13 104 223 Output signal patching 104 Overdubbing EE 65 OVERWRITE 000000000
482. to the OK button and press the ENTER key The recorded Automix data will be updated You can abort this operation and revert to the previously recorded Automix data by moving the cursor to the CANCEL button rather than the OK button and press ing the ENTER key e After confirming and updating the recorded Automix data you can still undo the operation and revert to the previously recorded Automix data by moving the cursor to the UNDO button in the COMMAND field and pressing the ENTER key Please note that the top panel UNDO key cannot be used to undo Automix recordings e The current Automix data can be stored to the Automix library or a preciously stored Automix recording can be recalled from the library Refer to Automix Library Operation on page 190 for details Automix Operation Automix Playback Punch In and Out of Automix Playing back an Automix recording Punch In Out recording is handy if you want to re record just a portion of an Automix recording The procedure will 1 Call the AUTOMIX screen Automix page by be described in this section using re recording of a track either pressing the AUTOMIX key as many channel fader move as an example times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the AUTOMIX key Locate the song to a point just before you want to begin re recording the Automix 2 Make sure that the ENABLE DISABLE but data ton is set to ENABLE If it is set to DISABLE
483. ton Deletes the Automix data that is selected in the list 6 PROTECT Applies protection to the Automix data that is selected in the list 7 FREE Displays the amount of free Automix memory available in kilobytes KB as a percentage and as a graph AW2400 Owner s Manual Changing Automix Names Here s how you can change the names of the data in the Automix library Call the AUTOMIX screen Library page by either pressing the AUTOMIX key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F4 key after pressing the AUTOMIX key 2 Use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select the Automix data to be edited The data highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for editing 3 Move the cursor to the RENAME button and press the ENTER key The NAME EDIT popup window will appear e Pressing the F4 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the RENAME button A Enter a name for the selected Automix data move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key refer to page 32 for details on name entry This confirms and enters the new name Storing Automix settings Storing the current Automix data to the Automix library e If you select and store to a library number that contains previously stored data the previous data will be overwritten Call the AUTOMIX screen Library page by either pressing the AUTOMIX key as many times as necessary o
484. tosh HD WE installing on Macintosh computer 1 Start your computer then log in as Adminis e ee trator To confirm that the Administrator account is available 6 Select a destination for the driver installation select System Preferences then Users Account then click Continue 2 Double click the USBdrv_ folder on the e this software requires 100MB included CD ROM of disk space may appear However the actual required free disk space is 2MB 3 Double click YAMAHA USB MIDI Driver vi zs mpkg fren represents the version 7 Awindow opens displaying the message Click install to perform a basic installation of number f f An nef window opens prompting the pass Dis SOWAS CUES stall word GE p If the driver has already been installed the Upgrade button is displayed instead of the Install button If the window does not prompt you to enter the pass word click the lock icon The driver is installed and message The software was successfully installed is displayed Authenticate 8 Click the Close button installer requires that you type your passphrase The driver installation is complete You can check the following locations to confirm that the driver has been installed Name e Library gt Audio gt MIDI Drivers gt YAMAHAUSBMIDIDriver plugin Password or phrase e Library gt PreferencePanes gt Bian YAMAHAUSBMIDIPatch prefPane
485. tten Call the CH VIEW screen Library page by either pressing the VIEW key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F2 key after pressing the VIEW key 2 Use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select the library number to which the settings are to be stored The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for storage 3 Move the cursor to the STORE button and press the ENTER key The NAME EDIT popup window will appear MANE EDIT Basic FRESS OK TO EXECUTE CANCEL Channel Operation e No e Pressing the F2 key while holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same effect as the STORE button 4 As required enter a name for the selected library setting move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key refer to page 32 for details on name entry The library setting will be stored AW2400 Owner s Manual f 109 Channel Library Operation Erasing Channel Library settings The procedure for erasing unwanted library settings is as follows Recalling Channel Library settings The procedure for recalling stored library settings is as follows NOTE uoneiado jeuueyD Wye 110 1 Call the CH VIEW screen Library page by either pressing the VIEW key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F2 key after pressing the VIEW key Use the DATA JOG dial or INC DEC keys to select the library setting to be recalled
486. ttened feel Ideal for hard edged songs LIMITER Limiter without EQ Ideal when you need only limiting NARROW Limiter that produces a sound like that of a small AM radio DIST Limiter that distorts the sound within the effect 2s O Q E CO lt AW2400 Owner s Manual 237 EQ Parameter list EQ Parameter list Parameter Parameter gt xe Eo D J Si x 238 Bass Drum 1 PEAKING L MID PEAKING H MID PEAKING HIGH H SHELF 3 5 dB 3 5 dB 0 0 dB 4 0 dB 100 Hz 265 Hz 1 06 kHz 5 30 kHz 1 2 10 0 9 E G Clean PEAKING L MID PEAKING H MID PEAKING H SHELF 2 0 dB 5 5 dB 0 5 dB 2 5 dB 265 Hz 400 Hz 1 32 kHz 4 50 kHz 0 18 10 6 3 Bass Drum 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF 8 0 dB 7 0 dB 6 0 dB ON 80 Hz 400 Hz 2 50 kHz 12 5 kHz 1 4 4 5 2 2 E G Crunch 1 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 4 5 dB 0 0 dB 4 0 dB 2 0 dB 140 Hz 1 00 kHz 1 90 kHz 5 60 kHz 8 4 5 0 63 9 Snare Drum 1 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 0 5 dB 0 0 dB 3 0 dB 4 5 dB 132 Hz 1 00 kHz 3 15 kHz 5 00 kHz 1 2 4 5 0 11 E G Crunch 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 5 dB 1 5 dB 2 5 dB 0 0 dB 125 Hz 450 Hz 3
487. u sons INPUT 1 _ 00 00 00 000 SONG BACKUP SIZE BIT Ee o 128 8780 No Of 101 0 EEC ee AH444 i 16 m 16 o BS Heu Sona 46SHB 16 o Bd Heu Sona 11 7HE 16 o Rp Heu Sona 154 E 24 o Tbe Dpnloa Une 253M6 16 This page contains the following items List This area lists the songs that are saved on the hard disk The symbols at the right of the list indicate whether the song has been selected or disabled O for backup 2 SORT box Changes the order of the songs displayed in the song list Operation is the same as for the Song List page gt p 170 3 ALL SET button Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to select all songs in the list for backup Pressing the F1 key whiled holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same affect as the ALL SET but ton 4 ALL CLEAR Button Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to deselect all songs so that they won t be backed up Pressing the F2 key whiled holding the Display section SHIFT key has the same affect as the ALL CLEAR button 5 AW2400 button AW2816 button Selects the backup format If the songs are to be restored on a Yamaha AW series workstation other than the AW2400 AW4416 AW2816 AW 1600 AW 16G select the AW2816 button This mode only supports 44 1kHz 16 bit songs and only one song can be backed up at a time 6 BACKUP button Executes backup of the selected song s Pressi
488. uated by the amount specified using the Ratio parameter The trigger signal is deter mined using the KEYIN SOURCE parameter e Ratio controls the amount of expansion the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level With a 1 2 ratio for example a 5 dB change in input level below the threshold results in a 10 dB change in output level For a 1 5 ratio a 2 dB change in input level below the threshold results in a 10 dB change in output level e Attack controls how soon the signal is expanded once the expander has been triggered With a fast attack time the signal is expanded almost immediately With a slow attack time the initial transient of a sound passes through unaffected e Out Gain sets the expander s output signal level e Knee sets the transition of the signal at the threshold With a hard knee the transition between unexpanded and expanded signal is immediate With the softest knee knee5 the transition starts before the signal reaches the threshold and gradually ends above the threshold e Release determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold Dynamics Parameters E Compander Output Level 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 Input Level A compander is a compressor expander a combination of signal compression and expansion The compander attenu ates the input signal above the thre
489. ulation depth E MOD FILTER Two input two output modulation filter Range Description 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed 0 100 0 00 354 38 degrees LPF HPF BPF 0 100 0 20 0 100 Parameter FREQ DEPTH PHASE TYPE OFFSET RESO LEVEL Modulation depth Left channel modulation and right channel modulation phase difference Filter type low pass high pass band pass Filter frequency offset Filter resonance Output level E DISTORTION One input two output distortion effect Range Description DST1 DST2 OVD1 OVD2 DST TYPE CRUNCH 0 100 0 100 10 to 10 0 20 Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdrive DRIVE Distortion drive MASTER TONE N GATE Master volume Tone Noise reduction E AMP SIMULATE One input two output guitar amp simulator Range Description AMP TYPE 1 Guitar amp simulation type DST1 DST2 OVD1 OVD2 CRUNCH 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 Parameter DST TYPE Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdrive DRIVE Distortion drive MASTER BASS MIDDLE TREBLE Master volume Bass tone control Middle tone control High tone control gt Kei Kei D Q x 250 CAB DEP 0 100 Speaker cabinet simulation depth EQF 100 8 00 kHz Parametric equalizer frequency EQG 12 0 to 12 0 dB Parametric equalizer gain
490. umber True voice KKKKKKKKK Velocity Note ON Note OFF Pitch Bend 1 16 21 27 33 34 41 56 Control 63 79 91 93 Change 102 117 Assignable Assignable Assignable Assignable Assignable Assignable Wi Wi Assignable l H N Prog o 0 127 o 0 Assignable Change True t kk kk kk Ak kk kk kk m ao 2 quarter frame message is transmitted quarter frame message is recognized When MTC Slave mode MMC When BCLK Sync mode MIDI remote ALL messages can be transmitted System Clock Real Time Commands ATI Sound Off Reser All Cntrls Local ON OFF All Notes OFF Active Sense gt Reset i a i gt ie O D 3 Q x Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO x No 276 AW2400 Owner s Manual Specifications Specifications E General Specifications Master Section Total 16 Bus n 7 BUS 4 CH stereo x 2 requency Response 0 1 3 dB 20 Hz 20 kHz DEE MIC LINE INPUT to STEREO OUT GAIN max STEREO 2 CH stereo x 1 SOLO 2 CH stereo x 1 Total Harmonic Distortion measured with 20 kHz LPF na E ean Less than 0 05 20 Hz to 20 kHz 4 aau Built in Hard Disk Drive MIC LINE INPUT to STEREO OUT GAIN min 40 GB 3 5 IDE Dynamic Range measured with IHF A Maximum Number of Songs 115 dB typ DA Converter STEREO OUT 100 Songs 109 dB min DA Converter STEREO OUT INPUT CH SEL all off Recor
491. urn the MULTI CONNECTION ON OFF button on For example if the MULTI CONNECTION ON OFF button is on and you select any one of input channels 1 8 as a recording source and any one of tracks 1 8 as a recording destination the following popup window will appear CONF RAHAT OH Record HFUT 1 8 to TRACK 1 8 7 Move the cursor to the YES button and press the ENTER key to execute the connection input chan nels 1 8 will be connected to tracks 1 8 Move the cursor to the NO button and press the ENTER key to connect the selected input channel and track mmm ih DIGITAL IH Semen pnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn n ene ee ee n n AW2400 Owner s Manual l Patching and signal flow 101 Input signal patching MO JeUBIS pue DUIUOIE Ries 102 Similarly if you specify input channels 9 16 as the recording source input channels 9 16 will be con nected to tracks 1 8 If you specify any one of tracks 9 16 or 17 24 as the recording destination the spec ified input channels will be connected to tracks 9 16 or 17 24 Patching for Mixed Recording This section explains patching when you re using the Mixed Recording method Call the RECORD screen Mixed page by either pressing the Quick Navigate section RECORD key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F2 key after pressing the RECORD key The RECORD screen Mixed page lets you send the signals of the input channels via two stereo
492. ut Your MIDI output device device This completes preparations for using the AW2400 s MIDI Remote function to control the Pro Tools software About the CD ROM included with the AW2400 E Appendix AW2400 Owner s Manual 271 gt Kei O D 2 x 272 MIDI data format MIDI data format 1 Functions 1 1 Scene Change The settings of the MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE specify the scene that is recalled when a Program Change message is received The settings of the MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE specify the program number that is transmitted when a scene is recalled If more than one program number has been assigned to that scene memory number the lowest numbered program number will be transmitted 1 2 MMC Control These messages allow basic recorder operations such as STOP PLAY REC LOCATE If you select the MIDI SETUP menu item MMC MASTER MMC commands will be transmitted according to the operation of the transport If you select MMC SLAVE the internal recorder will oper ate according to the received MMC commands 1 3 Effect Control Depending on the type of effect note on off messages can be used for control These settings are made for the parameters of each effect 1 4 Pitch Fix Control When the Pitch Fix mode is engaged note on off messages can be used to control pitches 1 5 MIDI Clock transmission If you set MIDI OUT to MIDI CLOCK MIDI clock messages can be transmitted during
493. ute the Delete operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The scene will be deleted Protecting a scene Applying protection to a scene so that it can t be edited or erased Call the SCENE screen Library page by either pressing the SCENE key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the SCENE key 2 Use the DATA JOG dial to scroll through the list to select the scene to be protected the selected scene should be enclosed in the dotted frame 3 Move the cursor to the PROTECT button and press the ENTER key When protection is turned on the PROTECT button will appear inverted and a lock icon will appear to the right of the scene name aa Ho Data eee A Di E RECALL Tal Ho Data SEE S I Ho Data E STORE d G Ho Data 14 1 Ho Data F CLEAR d 11 Ho Data lock icon AW2400 Owner s Manual Scene Memory N 161 Using the Recall Safe function Aowa 8U80S Va Using the Recall Safe function You can specify that specific faders or specific channels will be excluded from Recall operations when the scene is changed either manually or from an external MIDI device This function is called Recall Safe This is convenient for example if you are performing a mixdown while switching scenes but want to control specific channels manually Call the RCL Safe page by either pressing the SCENE key as m
494. uto punch in out eee AUTO SAVE button AUTOMIX oe ne eo AUTOMIX key aannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnen Automix Libram AUTOMIX screen Automix page Edit page Event List oage Library page ccccssseeceeseeees AUTOREC button AUX screen IopoutHINoage Track page E AUX send level x pu ddy 280 AW2400 Owner s Manual B Backing UD E 177 Bit deih 165 Block diagram ccccseeeeeeeeeees 284 Dounce 74 79 BURST NOISE button 209 BY E 121 C CANCEL key 27 Cad ee es 13 104 223 Cascade connection 226 CD KY E E 21 CD Play function ccc00 222 CD screen Play page gege geereg 222 Setting PAGE 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeees 215 Write page 217 CD DAT DIGITAL REC button 210 CD ST TR PLAY MODE MUTE MIX button 211 CD RW drive 12 29 ACCESS indicator ees 29 Basic settings ccccsseeeees 215 Eject hole 29 Eject SWINGIN desiciissossirssssssnicoseana 29 Ale le eens 12 Handling CD R RW media 6 Removing in an emergency 12 Writing methode 214 CH VIEW screen Library page ccccsseeeeeeeeeeees 108 View page 105 Channel Library ccccc0 108 Cluster eze eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 212 COMP Compressor 153 240 CGompander 153 241 COMPARE button 215 COMPpreSSOr oonnnnnnooaennnnenn 61 152 Compressor Parameter list 243 CGonnechon 37 Control change 194 CONTROL CHANGE MODE 195 Copyright Notic
495. ve the cursor to the NORMAL button and press the ENTER key to exit from the Trig ger Track mode and return to the normal mode A popup window asking you to confirm that you want to exit from the Trigger Track mode will appear Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key NOTE P e If you attempt to select the RECORD EDIT SOUND CLIP CD AUTOMIX or USB screen while the Trigger Track mode is engaged a confirmation popup window will appear To actually move to the selected screen move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER to switch to the normal track mode back PITCH Pitch Change Adjusts the pitch of the specified region of an audio track without affecting its length IMPORT CD AUDIO Imports audio data CD DA from CD R RW media in the CD RW drive into an audio track of the AW2400 IMPORT CD WAV Imports a WAV file from CD R RW media in the CD RW drive into an audio track of the AW2400 IMPORT USB WAV Imports a WAV file copied from a computer into the Transport folder into an audio track of the AW2400 IMPORT TRACK Imports audio data recorded in another song into an audio track of the current song EXPORT Exports the specified region of an audio track to a WAV file in the Transport folder AW2400 Owner s Manual You cannot select any of the above screens during song play Track operations and editing e ni 135 Editing tracks e Basic procedure for
496. verwritten and the data that follows the copied region will not be moved backward KS e Audio data recorded in the sound clip gt p 43 can be copied to an audio track by using the COPY command e The metronome of the sound clip is independent of the song tempo If you record into the sound clip with the intention of copy ing it to an audio track you should match the tempo ahead of time E Parameter list Parameter CU From TR 1 24 List of editing command Explanation A single audio track 1 amp 2 23824 A pair of adjacent odd num bered even numbered audio tracks ST The stereo track ALL OVER Tracks 1 24 overwrite onto the copy destination ALL INS Tracks 1 24 insert into the copy destination CLIP Sound clip contents the range is specified by CLIP From V TR 1 8 Copy source virtual track number 3 From Start Specify a point Copy source starting location 4 From End Specify a point Copy source ending location 5 Start Measure Lock 6 End Measure Lock On off indicated by lock icon Switch the measure lock func tion for From Start From End ToTR 1 24 A single audio track 1 amp 2 23824 A pair of adjacent odd num bered even numbered audio tracks ST The stereo track To V TR 1 8 Copy destination virtual track To Start Specify a point C
497. vocal track NOTE P can also be made via the USB port 1 When you want to specify a segment of a vocal track to be processed and recorded to another track it is necessary to specify the In and Out points and press the AUTO PUNCH key for the Auto Punch in out func tion For details on the Auto Punch in out function refer to Auto punch in out on page 70 2 Call the RECORD screen Bounce page by either pressing the Quick Navigate section RECORD key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F3 key after pressing the RECORD key RECORD Du Hew_s0ona p u A i eeneg inFuT 7 00 00 00 000 wu CH EESISRIae BOUNCE 12394 5 E 7 8 I0 H i2 I3 I4 IS IG N IB IS 20 2i gg gi 24 RETURN L Bounce Mixdown PITCH FIX button 124 AW2400 Owners Manual e If you will be using an external MIDI keyboard to specify the pitch for vocal pitch correction or a chorus part the MIDI OUT connector of an appropriate MIDI keyboard must be connected to the AW2400 MIDI IN connector via a standard MIDI cable In this case the MIDI screen Setting 1 page PORT RX reception parameter must be set to MIDI Keyboard connection 3 Move the cursor to the PITCH FIX button and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear which allows you to select the source edit track TRACK field Select SOURCE Track to Fitch Fix TRACK zf MANE 1 0 REC CANCEL 4 Specify the source edit track in the TRACK
498. will transmit control change 64 with a ch Use the setting file from the included CD ROM to map the AW2400 s faders ON keys transport keys to the Logic key com value of 127 Hold on and turning it off indicator out mands Track assignments must be made within Logic as appro will transmit control change 64 with a value of 0 Hold priate for your system off 2 Select the CS 10 settings as the MIDI controller type For details on the CS 10 settings ask Digidesign 204 AW2400 Owner s Manual The MIDI channels corresponding to the faders and ON keys appears as follows when the REMOTE screen 1 12 and 13 16 pages are selected E When the 1 12 page is showing Using the MIDI Remote function Fadefonjkey 7 2 3 4 s ce 7 8 o to mocme 2 3 5 6 7 e e olni e E When the 13 16 page is showing asmone 2 e s s l 7ilels w n ng e ts te SCS To call the REMOTE screen 1 12 page press the Layer section REMOTE key as many times as necessary or press the F1 key after pressing the REMOTE key BEB Heu Sons 00 00 00 000 REMOTE 1 TRANSPORT I NORMAL LOCAL REMOTE eee nee Pees Sennen Seen SOE SEES SOE SEE IC LG lnitial R 101 01 EES or ee Streit re tr tt TTT tr TEL tt Ett FADER Col Chi ween ene es Sennen ens Sree Seen See SEES SEO SEE TTT Seen Oe SS SOE SER Pertti rt rt tt tt tt To call the REMOTE scre
499. written using Track At Once to be play able by the AW2400 CD RW drive or a CD player you must perform a process known as finalizing to write track information to the disc Once you have finalized a disc no more data can be written to it Disc At Once This method writes all tracks at once As when using the Track At Once method the data from the beginning to the end of the stereo track of each song is written to the CD as one track However since writing does not stop until all data has been written there does not necessarily have to be gaps between the tracks Start End X Song A Marker off Song B Marker off Audio CD Track 1 Track 2 no gap AW2400 Owner s Manual When using Disc At Once to write a CD you can use the start point end point and markers that were assigned within the AW2400 song to divide a single continuous song into multiple tracks This is convenient for example when you have recorded a live performance as a single song and want to assign track numbers while leaving playback in continuous form Start 1 2 End YY Song A Start 1 2 End sage 4 1 Marker off 0 WO Audio CD Track 1 Track2 Track Track 4 NOTE P e Tracks shorter than four seconds cannot be written to an audio CD If you use start point end point markers to divide a song into multiple tracks make sure that each track is at least four seconds long es If the length of the ste
500. ww eiae org This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA mercury AW2400 Owner s Manual 3 A PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference A WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock short circuiting damages fire or other hazards These precautions include but are not limited to the following Power supply Power cord e Only use the voltage specified as correct for the device The required e Do not expose the device to rain use it near water or in damp or wet voltage is printed on the name plate of the device conditions or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill e Use only the included power cord into any openings e Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or e Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands radiators and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord place heavy objects on it or place it in a position where anyone could If you notice any abnormality walk on trip over or roll anything over it e f the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the device or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it immediately turn off the power switch disconnect
501. y A popup window will ask you to confirm the opera tion CONF RAHAT I OH Restore Selected Data Save Current Sona 7 Move the cursor to the OK button if you want to execute the restore operation or to the CANCEL button if you decide not to restore and press the ENTER key The current song will be saved automatically and the restore operation will begin A popup window will indicate the progress of the restore operation When the operation is finished you will return to step 3 If the backup occupied more than one CD R RW disc a message of Exchange Next Media X XX where XXX is anumber will be displayed during the restore process Exchange the CD R RW media for the media of the corresponding number Then move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key NOTE e When a song with the same name already exists the name of the restored song will automatically be changed For exam ple if 001_S0ong already exists the song name will be altered as in 0O01_Song0 O01_Song1 etc Song management ee AW2400 Owner s Manual J 179 Exchanging Song Data With Other AW series Audio Workstations jugwebeuew Duoe Wee 180 Exchanging Song Data With Other AW series Audio Workstations You can back up an AW2400 song in a format that is compatible with the other AW series AW4416 AW2816 AW1600 AW16G Conversely a song that was backed up by the other AW
502. y When you press the REC key PLAY P gt key while the AUTO PUNCH key is lit the following will occur G Only the PLAY gt key will light and playback will begin from the pre roll point 2 When you reach the auto punch in point the REC key will light and recording will begin punch in 3 When you reach the auto punch out point the REC key will go dark recording will stop and you will return to playback mode punch out 4 When you reach the post roll point you will return to the pre roll point and stop At this time the UNDO REDO key in the data entry control sec tion will light 9 To check the newly recorded content press the AUTO PUNCH key to make it go dark and then press the PLAY gt key 10 If you are satisfied with the newly recorded content save the song For the Save pro cedure gt p 57 If you decide to re do the recording you can go back to the best take using the Undo list after performing several overdubs by repeating steps 6 9 gt p 64 The following diagram shows the auto punch in out procedure Pre roll Auto punch in Auto punch out Post roll point point point point SS rehearsal AUTO PUNCH punch in punch out IO nis i actual recording Punch in out AW2400 Owner s Manual Overdubbing Eh 71 Buiqqnps8aQ Ny 72 AW2400 Owner s Manual Chapter 8 Mixdown and bounce op
503. y connected to a confirmed ground point Proper grounding will also ensure minimum hum noise and interference 4 PHANTOM 48V CH1 4 and CH5 8 switches Independent phantom power switches are provided for the XLR type MIC LINE INPUT jack groups 1 through 4 CH1 4 and 5 through 8 CH5 8 Turn phantom power to the appropriate jacks ON when using one or more phan tom powered condenser microphones CAUTION e Be sure to turn the phantom power switches off when phan tom power is not required e Make sure that no equipment other than phantom powered microphones is connected to the XLR inputs of the input group for which phantom power is turned on Applying phan tom power to devices that are not phantom powered can cause damage Balanced dynamic microphones however can usually be connected without adverse effect e To prevent speakers damage turn power amplifiers or pow ered speakers off when switching phantom power on or off It s also a good idea to turn all master faders and output vol ume controls down to minimum The noise generated when phantom power is switched on or off can damage system components and may even cause hearing damage if ampli fied to sufficiently high levels 42 MIDI IN connector 43 MIDI OUT THRU connector These connectors allow MIDI messages to be exchanged with external devices MIDI IN receives MIDI messages MIDI OUT THRU can be internally switched to function either as a MIDI O
504. y Names n n0000000000n 122 Storing Effect Library settings ee 123 Erasing Effect Library settings ceeeeeee 123 Correcting a Vocal Track Pitch Eis 124 15 Track operations and editing 127 About the AW2400 s tracks nnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 127 Audio track operatons nrn ereeeee en 128 About audio tracks nnnnnnnannnnnnnnennnnnennnnnneennnnnni 128 Viewing all audio tracks cccccecessseseeeeeeeeaeeeees 128 Muting a specific audio track 129 Switching the virtual track of an audio track 129 Editing virtual track names for an audio track 130 Stereo track operations cccccccsssseesssssessssssssseeees 130 About the stereo track 130 Recording on the stereo Irack 131 Playing back the stereo Irack 131 Switching the virtual track of the stereo track 132 Editing the name of a virtual track for the stereo track ccccseeceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 132 The Trigger Track Function cccnscccoscsessseacecescnsecseectouns 133 About Trigger Track 133 Using the Trigger Track Function ssseeaaaaaaaan 134 Seidletett ee 135 Basic procedure for track editing ceeese 136 List of editing command ciucccsvisnaintcernandisaindanvouneunancvess 138 ERA E cere ES 138 DELETE eera E 138 INSERT E 138 COPY E 139 de 140 FIN E E 141 TIME COMP Time Compression Expansion 141 PITCH Pitch CHANGE E 142 IMPORT SEENEN ee
505. y to move up one level 3 TOTAL Indicates the playback length in units of hours min utes seconds milliseconds of the WAV file This field is for display only and cannot be changed 4 TYPE Indicates whether the WAV file is monaural or stereo H The numerical value at the right indicates the bit depth of the WAV file This field is for display only and cannot be changed 5 LISTEN ENTER UP button If a WAV file is selected the LISTEN button will be displayed allowing you to hear the WAV file repeat edly If a folder is selected the ENTER button will be displayed allowing you to move into that folder If the t button is selected the UP button will be displayed allowing you to move to the next higher folder e You cannot audition WAV files whose bit depth or sample rate differs from the current song ToTR Selects the track number into which the data will be imported If the import source is a stereo WAV file you will only be able to select a pair of tracks 1 amp 2 23824 T To V TR To Start 9 EXECUTE button These are the same as for IMPORT CD AUDIO NOTE i e In the case of a Mixed Mode CD the edit command you use will depend on the data you re importing Use IMPORT CD AUDIO to import audio data CD DA or use IMPORT CD WAV to import a WAV file e You cannot import a WAV file whose bit depth or sample rate differs from the current song e When the import source is an audio CD or
506. you perform this procedure load the song to be e The counter display setting will be saved with the song data when the song is saved e The counter in the upper right of the display always shows the current location in measure beat units relative to the Start point e The measure beat display will depend on the settings in the Tempo page of the EDIT screen For details refer to Creating a tempo map gt p 175 3 To change the time code frame rate move the cursor to the 24 25 30 or 30D button and press the ENTER key You can choose one of the following frame rates to specify the minimum unit of time code 24 frames second 25 frames second 30 frames second 30 non drop frame 29 97 frames second 30 drop frame e This setting affects both the counter time code display and the MTC that the AW2400 transmits and receives If the AW2400 is sending or receiving MTC to or from an external device you must set both devices to the same frame rate NOTE e The frame rate cannot be changed while the AW2400 is run ning Creating a tempo map Creating a tempo map The tempo map contains data that changes the tempo or time signature at the beginning of the song or at any measure or beat within the song The measure beat display counter the internal metronome and the MIDI clock data generated within the AW2400 are all based on this tempo map ES next event of the same type is encountered NOTE
507. you to edit the song name MANE EDIT a2 Heu Gong PRESS OK TO EXECUTE eHieT cock Ea E UEL EE A EA Et E ES EI 3 Enter the new name Then move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The new name will be applied and the popup window will close For details on inputting a name gt p 32 AW2400 Owner s Manual Song management A ee 169 Managing Your Songs juswebeuew Duoe Wee 170 E Loading and Sorting Songs Here s how to load an existing song from the hard disk 1 Call the Song List page by either pressing the Work Navigate section SONG key as many times as necessary or by pressing the F1 key after pressing the SONG key The SONG screen Song List page will appear The currently selected song in the Song List will be high lighted inverted To change the order of the songs move the cursor to the SORT box use the DATA JOG dial to select the desired sort crite rion and then press the ENTER key RL TE Se Pt The_On1 3_0ne SORT Box Using the SORT box songs can be sorted according to the following criteria e NAME Song names in alphabetical order e OLD The order in which the songs were saved from newest to oldest es SIZE Song size from largest to smallest 3 To load a song move the cursor to a loca tion outside the SORT box and use the DATA JOG dial to select the song to be loaded The

Yamaha AW2400 Musical Instrument User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents